all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 1.65 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual LEV L10i | Users Manual | 1.15 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual LEV L10ig | Users Manual | 1.15 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual Statments | Users Manual | 205.52 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
RF Exposure 6 of 6 | RF Exposure Info | 1.54 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 354.11 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
Test Setup Photos PCE | Test Setup Photos | 387.48 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
Test Report WLAN 2.4G | Test Report | 2.73 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
Test Setup Photos SAR | Test Setup Photos | 205.85 KiB |
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual | Users Manual | 1.65 MiB |
LEX L10i Mission Critical Handheld User Guide DECEMBER 2016 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved MN002347A01-B MN002347A01-B Copyrights Copyrights The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a particular system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a particular mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. Send Feedback 3 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B Contact Us Contact Us Motorola Solution Support Center The Solution Support Center (SSC) is the primary Motorola Solutions support contact. Call:
Before any software reload. To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before removing and replacing a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) and Field Replaceable Entity (FRE) to repair the system. For... United States Calls International Calls Phone 800-221-7144 302-444-9800 North America Parts Organization For assistance in ordering replacement parts or identifying a part number, contact the Motorola Parts organization. Your first response when troubleshooting your system is to call the Motorola SSC. For... Phone Orders Phone 800-422-4210 (US and Canada Orders) For help identifying an item or part number, select choice 3 from the menu. 302-444-9842 (International Orders) Includes help for identifying an item or part number and for translation as needed. Fax Orders 800-622-6210 (US and Canada Orders) Comments Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. Provide the following information when reporting a documentation error:
The document title and part number The page number with the error A description of the error We welcome your feedback on this and other Motorola manuals. To take a short, confidential survey on Motorola Customer Documentation, go to docsurvey.motorolasolutions.com or scan the following QR code with your mobile device to access the survey. Send Feedback 5 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B Document History Document History Version Description MN002347A01-
A MN002347A01-
B Initial release of the LEX L10i Mission Critical Hand-
held User Guide. Second release of the LEX L10i Mission Critical Handheld User Guide. Date January 2016 December 2016 Send Feedback 7 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B Contents Contents Copyrights................................................................................................................... 3 Contact Us................................................................................................................... 5 Document History....................................................................................................... 7 List of Figures........................................................................................................... 15 List of Tables............................................................................................................. 19 List of Procedures.....................................................................................................21 Chapter 1: About this Guide.................................................................................... 25 1.1 Contact Us............................................................................................................................. 25 1.2 Versions.................................................................................................................................26 1.2.1 Operating System Version....................................................................................... 26 1.2.2 Software Build Number............................................................................................ 27 1.2.3 Kernel Version......................................................................................................... 27 1.3 Chapter Descriptions............................................................................................................. 27 1.4 Helpful Background Information............................................................................................ 28 1.5 Notational Conventions..........................................................................................................28 1.6 Icon Conventions................................................................................................................... 28 1.7 Regulatory Information.......................................................................................................... 29 1.8 Service Information................................................................................................................29 1.9 Documentation Set................................................................................................................ 30 Chapter 2: Getting Started ...................................................................................... 33 2.1 Features.................................................................................................................................33 2.2 Unpacking..............................................................................................................................36 2.3 Setting Up.............................................................................................................................. 36 2.3.1 Removing the Screen Protective Film......................................................................37 2.3.2 Removing the Battery Cover....................................................................................37 2.3.3 Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card........................................ 38 2.3.4 Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card............................................................... 39 2.3.5 Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards.............................................................39 2.3.6 Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards...........................................................40 2.3.7 Installing the Battery................................................................................................ 41 2.3.8 Removing the Battery.............................................................................................. 41 2.4 Charging................................................................................................................................ 42 2.4.1 Charging Temperature.............................................................................................42 2.4.2 Battery Charge Indications.......................................................................................42 2.4.3 Battery Management................................................................................................44 Send Feedback 9 MN002347A01-B Contents 2.4.3.1 Monitor Battery Usage............................................................................... 44 2.4.3.2 Low Battery Notification............................................................................. 45 2.4.3.3 Battery Optimization...................................................................................46 2.5 Powering On the LEX device for the First Time.....................................................................47 2.6 Powering Off.......................................................................................................................... 47 2.7 Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode............................................................................... 48 2.7.1 Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode............................................................... 49 2.8 Covert Mode.......................................................................................................................... 49 2.8.1 Turning On Covert Mode......................................................................................... 50 2.8.2 Turning Off Covert Mode......................................................................................... 50 2.9 LEX Series Device Lock........................................................................................................ 51 2.9.1 Selecting a Locking Option...................................................................................... 51 2.9.1.1 Specifying a Pattern................................................................................... 52 2.9.1.2 Specifying a PIN or Password....................................................................52 2.9.1.3 Setting the Timeout for Locking................................................................. 53 2.9.2 Unlocking the Device............................................................................................... 53 2.9.2.1 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern................................................54 2.9.2.2 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password................................ 54 2.9.3 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device....................................................... 54 2.10 Setting the Date and Time................................................................................................... 54 2.11 Setting the Display...............................................................................................................55 2.11.1 Setting Screen Brightness..................................................................................... 56 2.11.2 Setting Adaptive Brightness...................................................................................56 2.11.3 Setting Up Wallpapers........................................................................................... 56 2.11.4 Setting Up Sleep Mode.......................................................................................... 57 2.11.5 Opening Camera Without Unlocking the Screen................................................... 58 2.11.6 Setting Up Daydream.............................................................................................58 2.11.7 Setting Screen Rotation......................................................................................... 58 2.11.8 Setting the Font Size..............................................................................................59 2.11.9 Enabling Cast Screen............................................................................................ 60 2.11.9.1 Projecting the LEX Screen on Another Device........................................ 60 2.12 Sound and Notification Settings...........................................................................................60 2.12.1 Adjusting Sound Settings.......................................................................................61 2.12.2 Setting Up the Do Not Disturb Option.................................................................... 61 2.13 Public and Private Carrier Modes........................................................................................ 61 2.13.1 Switching Modes Using the Power Button............................................................. 62 2.13.2 Switching Modes Using the Settings App.............................................................. 63 2.14 Emergency Button............................................................................................................... 64 Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device.................................................................65 10 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Contents 3.1 Using the Touchscreen..........................................................................................................65 3.2 Using the On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................................................66 3.2.1 Android Keyboard Settings...................................................................................... 67 3.3 Motorola Solutions Home Experience................................................................................... 68 3.3.1 LEX L10i Home Screen........................................................................................... 68 3.3.1.1 Home Screen Overlay................................................................................70 3.3.2 Customizing the Home Screen................................................................................ 70 3.3.2.1 Adding Widgets.......................................................................................... 70 3.3.2.2 Moving Widgets..........................................................................................75 3.3.2.3 Removing Widgets..................................................................................... 75 3.3.2.4 Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel......................................... 76 3.4 Status Bar.............................................................................................................................. 76 3.5 Notification Icons................................................................................................................... 77 3.6 Status Icons .......................................................................................................................... 79 3.7 Managing Notifications.......................................................................................................... 80 3.8 Working with Status............................................................................................................... 81 3.9 Quick Settings........................................................................................................................81 3.10 Folders.................................................................................................................................82 3.10.1 Creating a Folder................................................................................................... 83 3.10.2 Naming Folders......................................................................................................83 3.10.3 Removing a Folder.................................................................................................84 3.11 Accessing Files from a Computer........................................................................................84 Chapter 4: Managing People Contacts................................................................... 87 4.1 Adding People....................................................................................................................... 87 4.2 Editing People........................................................................................................................87 4.3 Deleting People..................................................................................................................... 88 Chapter 5: Calling..................................................................................................... 89 5.1 Making a Call Using the Dialer.............................................................................................. 90 5.2 Making a Call Using People List Contacts.............................................................................92 5.3 Making a Call Using Call History........................................................................................... 93 5.4 Making a Conference Call..................................................................................................... 94 5.5 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset............................................................................ 97 5.6 Call Settings...........................................................................................................................97 5.7 Requesting an Emergency Alert............................................................................................ 98 Chapter 6: Radio Services......................................................................................101 6.1 Pairing the LEX Device with Bluetooth Accessory...............................................................101 6.2 Unpairing LEX L10ig from Bluetooth Accessory..................................................................103 Chapter 7: Messaging.............................................................................................107 7.1 Sending a Text Message..................................................................................................... 107 Send Feedback 11 MN002347A01-B Contents 7.2 Sending a Multimedia Message...........................................................................................108 Chapter 8: Applications..........................................................................................111 8.1 Applications......................................................................................................................... 111 8.2 Using File Browser...............................................................................................................113 8.3 Camera................................................................................................................................ 114 8.3.1 Taking Photos........................................................................................................ 115 8.3.2 Taking a Panoramic Photo.....................................................................................117 8.3.3 Recording Videos...................................................................................................118 8.3.4 Camera Settings.................................................................................................... 118 8.3.5 Video Settings........................................................................................................121 8.4 Gallery................................................................................................................................. 123 8.4.1 Working with Albums............................................................................................. 124 8.4.1.1 Sharing an Album.....................................................................................125 8.4.1.2 Getting Album Information....................................................................... 126 8.4.1.3 Deleting an Album....................................................................................126 8.4.2 Working with Photos.............................................................................................. 126 8.4.2.1 Viewing and Browsing Photos..................................................................127 8.4.2.2 Rotating a Photo...................................................................................... 128 8.4.2.3 Cropping a Photo..................................................................................... 128 8.4.2.4 Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon............................................................129 8.4.2.5 Sharing a Photo....................................................................................... 130 8.4.2.6 Deleting a Photo.......................................................................................130 8.4.3 Working with Videos.............................................................................................. 130 8.4.3.1 Watching a Video..................................................................................... 131 8.4.3.2 Sharing a Video........................................................................................131 8.4.3.3 Deleting a Video.......................................................................................132 8.4.4 Using Sound Recorder...........................................................................................132 8.4.5 Voice Dialer............................................................................................................134 8.4.5.1 Calling a Person by Name....................................................................... 135 8.4.5.2 Redialing a Previous Call......................................................................... 135 8.4.5.3 Dialing by Number....................................................................................136 8.4.5.4 Opening an Application............................................................................ 136 Chapter 9: Wireless.................................................................................................137 9.1 Wireless Wide Area Networks............................................................................................. 137 9.1.1 Sharing the Mobile Data Connection..................................................................... 137 9.1.1.1 Configuring USB Tethering...................................................................... 138 9.1.1.2 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering.............................................................. 139 9.1.1.3 Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings............................................139 9.1.2 Data Usage............................................................................................................ 141 12 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Contents 9.1.2.1 Setting Data Usage Warning....................................................................142 9.1.2.2 Setting Auto-Sync.................................................................................... 142 9.1.3 Disabling Data When Roaming..............................................................................142 9.1.4 Limiting Data Connection to a Network..................................................................143 9.1.5 Editing Access Point Names..................................................................................143 9.1.6 Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN)................................................................ 144 9.1.7 Cell Broadcasts......................................................................................................145 9.2 Wireless Local Area Networks.............................................................................................145 9.2.1 Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network....................................................... 146 9.2.2 Configuring a Wi-Fi Network.................................................................................. 147 9.2.3 Adding a Wi-Fi Network......................................................................................... 148 9.2.4 Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network..........................................................................149 9.2.5 Advanced Wi-Fi Settings........................................................................................150 9.2.6 WLAN Configuration.............................................................................................. 150 9.2.7 Modifying a Wi-Fi Network..................................................................................... 151 9.2.8 Removing a Wi-Fi Network.................................................................................... 151 9.3 Bluetooth Device..................................................................................................................152 9.3.1 Adaptive Frequency Hopping.................................................................................152 9.3.2 Bluetooth Security..................................................................................................152 9.3.3 Bluetooth Profiles...................................................................................................153 9.3.4 Bluetooth Power States......................................................................................... 154 9.3.5 Bluetooth Radio Power for Android........................................................................154 9.3.5.1 Enabling Bluetooth................................................................................... 155 9.3.5.2 Disabling Bluetooth.................................................................................. 155 9.3.6 Changing the Bluetooth Name...............................................................................155 9.3.7 Discovering Bluetooth Devices.............................................................................. 156 9.3.8 Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device............................................................... 157 Chapter 10: ADB and USB Driver Setup............................................................... 159 10.1 Required Software and Hardware..................................................................................... 159 10.2 Installing USB Driver and ADB ......................................................................................... 159 Chapter 11: Accessories........................................................................................ 165 11.1 Accessories....................................................................................................................... 165 11.2 USB Cable......................................................................................................................... 165 11.3 Desktop Cradle.................................................................................................................. 166 11.4 Vehicle Cradle................................................................................................................... 167 11.5 Holster............................................................................................................................... 167 Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting...................................................169 12.1 Maintaining the LEX Series Device................................................................................... 169 12.2 Battery Safety Guidelines.................................................................................................. 169 Send Feedback 13 MN002347A01-B Contents 12.3 Cleaning Guidelines...........................................................................................................170 12.4 Cleaning the LEX Series Device........................................................................................171 12.5 Cleaning the Interface Connector...................................................................................... 172 12.6 Cleaning the Battery Contacts........................................................................................... 172 12.7 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................. 173 12.8 Back Up or Restore Data on Your Device......................................................................... 175 12.8.1 Backing Up the LEX Series Device Manually...................................................... 175 12.8.2 Backing up Contacts with Android....................................................................... 176 12.9 Resetting the LEX Device..................................................................................................178 12.9.1 Performing Factory Data Reset........................................................................... 178 Chapter 13: Technical Specifications................................................................... 181 14 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1: Manufacturing Label................................................................................................................30 Figure 2: LEX L10i Features...................................................................................................................34 Figure 3: Removing the Screen Protective Film..................................................................................... 37 Figure 4: Removing the Battery Cover................................................................................................... 38 Figure 5: Installing the microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card.....................................................39 Figure 6: Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards............................................................................ 40 Figure 7: Installing the Battery................................................................................................................41 Figure 8: Charging the LEX L10i............................................................................................................ 42 Figure 9: Charge and Notification LED...................................................................................................43 Figure 10: Battery Screen.......................................................................................................................45 Figure 11: Low Battery Notification.........................................................................................................45 Figure 12: Quick Settings Menu Airplane Mode................................................................................ 46 Figure 13: LEX L10i Boot Screen........................................................................................................... 47 Figure 14: Selecting Power Off...............................................................................................................48 Figure 15: Power Button Menu...............................................................................................................50 Figure 16: Power Button Menu...............................................................................................................50 Figure 17: Service Switch.......................................................................................................................62 Figure 18: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup................................................................................... 63 Figure 19: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup................................................................................... 64 Figure 20: Android Keyboard Settings....................................................................................................66 Figure 21: Default Home Screen............................................................................................................ 69 Figure 22: Widgets Screen..................................................................................................................... 71 Figure 23: Example of a Widget Added to New Panel........................................................................... 72 Figure 24: Empty My Apps Widget......................................................................................................... 73 Figure 25: List of Shortcuts for My Apps Widgets.................................................................................. 73 Figure 26: My Apps Widget with Shortcuts Added................................................................................. 74 Figure 27: My Status Widget.................................................................................................................. 74 Figure 28: Status Selection.................................................................................................................... 75 Figure 29: Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel.................................................................... 76 Figure 30: Status Bar..............................................................................................................................76 Figure 31: Notification Panel.................................................................................................................. 80 Figure 32: Quick Settings Panel............................................................................................................. 82 Figure 33: Opened Unnamed Folder......................................................................................................83 Figure 34: Named Folder........................................................................................................................83 Figure 35: Notifications Screen.............................................................................................................. 85 Figure 36: MTP / PTP Selection Screen.................................................................................................85 Send Feedback 15 MN002347A01-B List of Figures Figure 37: Insert Wired Headset Plug.................................................................................................... 90 Figure 38: Dialer Screen.........................................................................................................................91 Figure 39: Call in Progress..................................................................................................................... 92 Figure 40: People List Contact............................................................................................................... 93 Figure 41: Call History Tab.....................................................................................................................94 Figure 42: Two Calls...............................................................................................................................95 Figure 43: Two Calls Connected............................................................................................................ 96 Figure 44: Merged Calls......................................................................................................................... 96 Figure 45: Emergency Alert Activation Popup........................................................................................99 Figure 46: Bluetooth Pairing Screen.....................................................................................................102 Figure 47: Bluetooth Device Screen.....................................................................................................102 Figure 48: Bluetooth Paired Devices Screen........................................................................................103 Figure 49: Bluetooth Paired Devices.................................................................................................... 104 Figure 50: Unpair Complete................................................................................................................. 104 Figure 51: New Message Screen......................................................................................................... 107 Figure 52: New Multimedia Message Screen.......................................................................................108 Figure 53: File Browser Screen............................................................................................................ 113 Figure 54: Camera Photo Screen.........................................................................................................114 Figure 55: Camera Screen................................................................................................................... 115 Figure 56: Camera Option Bar............................................................................................................. 116 Figure 57: Camera Zoom..................................................................................................................... 116 Figure 58: Panoramic Mode................................................................................................................. 117 Figure 59: Panoramic Frame................................................................................................................117 Figure 60: Video Mode......................................................................................................................... 118 Figure 61: Camera Settings..................................................................................................................119 Figure 62: First More Options Screen.................................................................................................. 120 Figure 63: Second More Options Screen............................................................................................. 120 Figure 64: Third More Options Screen................................................................................................. 121 Figure 65: Video Settings..................................................................................................................... 122 Figure 66: First More Options Video Screen........................................................................................ 122 Figure 67: Second More Options Video Screen................................................................................... 123 Figure 68: Gallery Albums............................................................................................................... 124 Figure 69: Photos/Videos Inside an Album.......................................................................................... 125 Figure 70: Photo Example.................................................................................................................... 127 Figure 71: Cropping Grid...................................................................................................................... 129 Figure 72: Video Playback Controls..................................................................................................... 131 Figure 73: Start Recording................................................................................................................... 133 Figure 74: Record Your Message.........................................................................................................133 Figure 75: Finish Recording................................................................................................................. 134 16 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B List of Figures Figure 76: Voice Dialer Window........................................................................................................... 134 Figure 77: USB Cable Connection to Host Computer.......................................................................... 138 Figure 78: Set up Wi-Fi Hotspot Dialog Box.........................................................................................140 Figure 79: Settings Screen................................................................................................................... 146 Figure 80: Wi-Fi Screen........................................................................................................................147 Figure 81: WLAN Network Security Dialog Boxes................................................................................148 Figure 82: Bluetooth Pairing................................................................................................................. 157 Figure 83: Access Computer................................................................................................................ 160 Figure 84: Select Destination............................................................................................................... 160 Figure 85: Access Device Manager......................................................................................................161 Figure 86: Select Update Drive Software............................................................................................. 161 Figure 87: Select Browse my computer for driver software..................................................................162 Figure 88: Select Install this driver software anyway............................................................................162 Figure 89: Close the Installation........................................................................................................... 163 Figure 90: USB Cable...........................................................................................................................166 Figure 91: Desktop Cradle....................................................................................................................166 Figure 92: Vehicle Cradle..................................................................................................................... 167 Figure 93: Holster................................................................................................................................. 167 Figure 94: Import/Export Contacts Popup............................................................................................ 177 Figure 95: Export Confirmation Popup................................................................................................. 177 Send Feedback 17 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B List of Tables List of Tables Table 1: LEX L10i Features....................................................................................................................34 Table 2: Charge and Notification LED Charging Indications..............................................................43 Table 3: Using the Touchscreen.............................................................................................................65 Table 4: Android Keyboard Settings.......................................................................................................67 Table 5: Notification Icons...................................................................................................................... 77 Table 6: Status Icons..............................................................................................................................79 Table 7: Applications............................................................................................................................ 111 Table 8: Camera Icons and Actions..................................................................................................... 114 Table 9: Troubleshooting the LEX Series Device.................................................................................173 Table 10: Technical Specifications....................................................................................................... 181 Table 11: General Accessories............................................................................................................ 184 Send Feedback 19 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B List of Procedures List of Procedures Removing the Battery Cover ................................................................................................................. 37 Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card ...................................................................... 38 Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card .............................................................................................39 Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards .......................................................................................... 39 Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards ........................................................................................ 40 Installing the Battery .............................................................................................................................. 41 Removing the Battery ............................................................................................................................ 41 Turning Off the Radio ............................................................................................................................ 46 Powering Off ..........................................................................................................................................47 Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode ............................................................................................... 48 Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode .............................................................................................49 Turning On Covert Mode ....................................................................................................................... 50 Turning Off Covert Mode ....................................................................................................................... 50 Selecting a Locking Option ....................................................................................................................51 Specifying a Pattern .............................................................................................................................. 52 Specifying a PIN or Password ............................................................................................................... 52 Setting the Timeout for Locking .............................................................................................................53 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern ........................................................................................... 54 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password ............................................................................54 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device .....................................................................................54 Setting the Date and Time .....................................................................................................................54 Setting Screen Brightness ..................................................................................................................... 56 Setting Adaptive Brightness .................................................................................................................. 56 Setting Up Wallpapers ...........................................................................................................................56 Setting Up Sleep Mode ..........................................................................................................................57 Opening Camera Without Unlocking the Screen ...................................................................................58 Setting Up Daydream ............................................................................................................................ 58 Setting Screen Rotation .........................................................................................................................58 Setting the Font Size ............................................................................................................................. 59 Enabling Cast Screen ............................................................................................................................60 Projecting the LEX Screen on Another Device ......................................................................................60 Adjusting Sound Settings ...................................................................................................................... 61 Setting Up the Do Not Disturb Option ....................................................................................................61 Switching Modes Using the Power Button .............................................................................................62 Switching Modes Using the Settings App ..............................................................................................63 Adding Widgets ..................................................................................................................................... 70 Send Feedback 21 MN002347A01-B List of Procedures Adding Shortcuts to the My Apps Widget .............................................................................................. 72 Changing My Status .............................................................................................................................. 74 Moving Widgets ..................................................................................................................................... 75 Removing Widgets ................................................................................................................................ 75 Creating a Folder ...................................................................................................................................83 Naming Folders ..................................................................................................................................... 83 Removing a Folder ................................................................................................................................ 84 Accessing Files from a Computer ..........................................................................................................84 Adding People ....................................................................................................................................... 87 Editing People ....................................................................................................................................... 87 Deleting People ..................................................................................................................................... 88 Making a Call Using the Dialer .............................................................................................................. 90 Making a Call Using People List Contacts .............................................................................................92 Making a Call Using Call History ........................................................................................................... 93 Making a Conference Call ..................................................................................................................... 94 Requesting an Emergency Alert ............................................................................................................98 Pairing the LEX Device with Bluetooth Accessory .............................................................................. 101 Unpairing LEX L10ig from Bluetooth Accessory ..................................................................................103 Sending a Text Message .....................................................................................................................107 Sending a Multimedia Message .......................................................................................................... 108 Taking Photos ......................................................................................................................................115 Taking a Panoramic Photo .................................................................................................................. 117 Recording Videos ................................................................................................................................ 118 Sharing an Album ................................................................................................................................ 125 Getting Album Information ...................................................................................................................126 Deleting an Album ............................................................................................................................... 126 Viewing and Browsing Photos ............................................................................................................. 127 Rotating a Photo ..................................................................................................................................128 Cropping a Photo .................................................................................................................................128 Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon ....................................................................................................... 129 Sharing a Photo ...................................................................................................................................130 Deleting a Photo .................................................................................................................................. 130 Watching a Video ................................................................................................................................ 131 Sharing a Video ................................................................................................................................... 131 Deleting a Video .................................................................................................................................. 132 Calling a Person by Name ...................................................................................................................135 Redialing a Previous Call .................................................................................................................... 135 Dialing by Number ............................................................................................................................... 136 Opening an Application ....................................................................................................................... 136 22 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B List of Procedures Configuring USB Tethering ..................................................................................................................138 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering ..........................................................................................................139 Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings ....................................................................................... 139 Configuring the Wi-Fi Hotspot ............................................................................................................. 140 Setting Data Usage Warning ............................................................................................................... 142 Setting Auto-Sync ................................................................................................................................142 Disabling Data When Roaming ........................................................................................................... 142 Limiting Data Connection to a Network ............................................................................................... 143 Editing Access Point Names ............................................................................................................... 143 Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN) .............................................................................................. 144 Cell Broadcasts ................................................................................................................................... 145 Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network .....................................................................................146 Configuring a Wi-Fi Network ................................................................................................................147 Adding a Wi-Fi Network .......................................................................................................................148 Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network ....................................................................................................... 149 Modifying a Wi-Fi Network ...................................................................................................................151 Removing a Wi-Fi Network ..................................................................................................................151 Enabling Bluetooth .............................................................................................................................. 155 Disabling Bluetooth ..............................................................................................................................155 Changing the Bluetooth Name ............................................................................................................ 155 Discovering Bluetooth Devices ............................................................................................................156 Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device .............................................................................................157 Installing USB Driver and ADB ............................................................................................................ 159 Cleaning the Interface Connector ........................................................................................................172 Cleaning the Battery Contacts .............................................................................................................172 Backing Up the LEX Series Device Manually ......................................................................................175 Backing up Contacts with Android .......................................................................................................176 Resetting the LEX Device ....................................................................................................................178 Performing Factory Data Reset ........................................................................................................... 178 Send Feedback 23 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B About this Guide Chapter 1 About this Guide This guide provides information about using the LEX series Mission Critical Handheld and accessories. NOTICE: Screens and menu options may be changed or customized by your agency to show different information. Related Links Contact Us on page 25 Versions on page 26 Chapter Descriptions on page 27 Helpful Background Information on page 28 Notational Conventions on page 28 Icon Conventions on page 28 Regulatory Information on page 29 Service Information on page 29 Documentation Set on page 30 1.1 Contact Us The Solution Support Center (SSC) is the primary Motorola Solutions support contact. Motorola Solution Support Center Call the SSC:
Before any software reload. To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before removing and replacing a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) and Field Replaceable Entity (FRE) to repair the system. For... United States Calls International Calls Phone 800-221-7144 302-444-9800 North America Parts Organization For assistance in ordering replacement parts or identifying a part number, contact the Motorola Parts organization. Your first response when troubleshooting your system is to call the Motorola SSC. For... Phone Orders Send Feedback Phone 800-422-4210 (US and Canada Orders) For help identifying an item or part number, select choice 3 from the menu. 302-444-9842 (International Orders) Table continued 25 MN002347A01-B Chapter 1: About this Guide For... Phone Includes help for identifying an item or part number and for translation as needed. Fax Orders 800-622-6210 (US and Canada Orders) Comments Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. Provide the following information when reporting a documentation error:
The document title and part number The page number with the error A description of the error We welcome your feedback on this and other Motorola manuals. To take a short, confidential survey on Motorola Customer Documentation, go to docsurvey.motorolasolutions.com or scan the following QR code with your mobile device to access the survey. Return to Process About this Guide on page 25 1.2 Versions This guide covers various software configurations and references are made to operating system or software versions discussed in the following three subsections. Return to Process About this Guide on page 25 Related Links Operating System Version on page 26 Software Build Number on page 27 Kernel Version on page 27 1.2.1 Operating System Version The Operating System for the LEX L10i is the Android Operating System. To determine the Operating System version, from the Home screen touch Android Version. The last line provides the Android version information. For example: 4.4.4. About phone 26 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 1: About this Guide Return to Process Versions on page 26 1.2.2 Software Build Number This topic has information on how to find the software build number of your LEX L10i. To determine the software build number, from the Home screen touch Build Number. About phone Return to Process Versions on page 26 1.2.3 Kernel Version The Kernel version can be found in the Settings application. To determine the kernel version, from the Home screen, touch version. About phone Kernel Return to Process Versions on page 26 1.3 Chapter Descriptions This guide provides information on the features listed in the chapter descriptions below:
About this Guide on page 25 Chapter 1, presents contacts and general information related to this product. Getting Started on page 33 Chapter 2, explains getting the LEX series device up and running for the first time. Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 Chapter 3, is a reference to operating the LEX L10i. Calling on page 89 Chapter 4, is a reference to making and receiving calls. Radio Services on page 101 Chapter 5, is a reference to connecting the LEX L10i to a Land Mobile Radio for communicating on LTE and P25 systems. Messaging on page 107 Chapter 6, is a reference to sending text and multimedia messages. Applications on page 111 Chapter 7, explains using basic applications installed on the LEX series device such as Camera, People, and File Browser. Wireless on page 137 Chapter 8, explains configuring the LEX series device to operate on a personal, local, and wide area wireless network. ADB and USB Driver Setup on page 159 Chapter 9, is a reference to setting up the Android Debug Bridge (ADB) and USB driver for your Windows PC. Accessories on page 165 Chapter 10, is a reference to available accessories and how to use them with the LEX L10i. Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 Chapter 11, is a reference to cleaning and storing the LEX L10i, and troubleshooting solutions for potential problems. Send Feedback 27 MN002347A01-B Chapter 1: About this Guide Technical Specifications on page 181 Chapter 12, provides technical specifications for the LEX L10i. Return to Process About this Guide on page 25 1.4 Helpful Background Information Motorola Solutions offers various courses designed to assist in learning about the system. For information, go to http://www.motorolasolutions.com/training to view the current course offerings and technology paths. Return to Process About this Guide on page 25 Icons on a screen 1.5 Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document:
Italics are used to highlight the following:
Chapters and sections in this and related documents Bold text is used to highlight the following:
Dialog box, window, and screen names Drop-down list and list box names Check box and radio button names Key names on a keypad Button names on a screen Bullets () indicate:
Action items Lists of alternatives Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists. Return to Process About this Guide on page 25 1.6 Icon Conventions The documentation set is designed to give the reader more visual clues. The following graphic icons are used throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are described below. WARNING: The word WARNING with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, could result in death or serious injury, or serious product damage. 28 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 1: About this Guide CAUTION: The word CAUTION with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, may result in minor or moderate injury, or serious product damage. NOTICE: NOTICE contains information more important than the surrounding text, such as exceptions or preconditions. They also refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader how to complete an action (when it is not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the reader where something is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a note. Return to Process About this Guide on page 25 1.7 Regulatory Information BEFORE USING THIS device, READ the Product Regulatory, Safety & RF Exposure Guide (PN MN001458A01-A) included with this package. Return to Process About this Guide on page 25 1.8 Service Information If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center for your region. Contact information is available at: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/support. You can also call 1-800-323-9949 for support and select option 6 for PS LTE infrastructure and devices. When contacting support, have the following information available:
Serial number of the unit (found on manufacturing label) Model number or product name (found on manufacturing label) Software type and version number Send Feedback 29 MN002347A01-B Chapter 1: About this Guide Figure 1: Manufacturing Label Motorola Solutions responds to calls by e-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements. If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions. Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. Remove the CRYPTR card or microSD card and SIM card before shipping. If you purchased your product from a Motorola Solutions business partner, contact that business partner for support. Return to Process About this Guide on page 25 1.9 Documentation Set The documentation set for the LEX series device provides information for specific user needs. Unless otherwise specified, Motorola Solutions documents listed here are available from Motorola Online at https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. If you are new to Motorola Online, follow the on-screen instructions to sign up for an account. To access Public Safety LTE infrastructure and device manuals, select Resource Center Product Information Manuals Network Infrastructure. Customers outside of the Americas can contact Motorola Solutions for documentation listed here. The documentation set includes:
PN MN001458A01-B describes how to get the device up and running. describes how to use the device. describes how to safely use the device. 30 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 1: About this Guide provides technical instructions on how to activate, provision, and configure the device. For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. Return to Process About this Guide on page 25 Send Feedback 31 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B Getting Started Chapter 2 Getting Started Use the information in this chapter to help you get started using the LEX L10i. Related Links Features on page 33 Unpacking on page 36 Setting Up on page 36 Charging on page 42 Powering On the LEX device for the First Time on page 47 Powering Off on page 47 Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode on page 48 Covert Mode on page 49 LEX Series Device Lock on page 51 Setting the Date and Time on page 54 Setting the Display on page 55 Sound and Notification Settings on page 60 Public and Private Carrier Modes on page 61 Emergency Button on page 64 2.1 Features The LEX L10i features are shown in the following figure and summarized in the following table. Send Feedback 33 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Figure 2: LEX L10i Features Table 1: LEX L10i Features Item Charge/Notification LED Display/Screen External Speakers 34 Function Solid Blue: New notification (New Voice mail, New Text messages, Missed Calls, Android App Notifications, and so on) Off: Battery is not charging. Solid Red: Battery is charging. Blinking Amber: Waiting to charge. Solid Green: Fully Charged. Tap screen displays all information to operate the device. Recent Apps key Press to switch to, stop or manage applications currently running on the background of the device. Home key Displays the Home screen with a single tap. Back key Displays the previous screen. Closes the keyboard if the on-screen keyboard is open. Use for communications in handset mode. Pro-
vides audio output for video and voice playback in speakerphone mode. Menu key At any screen or application, press to see available options. Table continued Send Feedback Item 3.5 mm Headset Port Volume Up/Down Buttons PTT Button Power Button Front Camera Earpiece External Charging Contacts Battery Cover Removal Slot microUSB Port Rear Camera and Flash MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Function Connects to headsets (3.5 mm plug). NOTICE: Do not use 2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapters Increase and decrease audio volume. Push-to-Talk (PTT) button enables Push-to-Talk services over a broadband network and can al-
so be interconnected to Project 25 Land Mobile Radio (LMR) networks. The PTT application of-
fers calls, alerts, group calls, Talk Group calls, and Talk Group monitoring and scanning. For PTT button and application operations, see Push-To-Talk for LEX L10ig manual. IMPORTANT: The PTT is an optional feature that requires installation of software and system connection fol-
lowing the LEX L10i shipping. To veri-
fy if the PTT feature is enabled on the device, contact your technical sup-
port. Press and hold to turn on the device. Press to turn the screen on or off. Press and hold to se-
lect one of these options:
Power On/Off Turn On/Off. Airplane mode Disables all wireless con-
nections. Service switch Switches between public and Private carrier modes. Covert mode In covert mode, all sounds, and visual indications are turned off. See Covert Mode on page 49. Vibrate mode Sets to vibrate only. Speaker on Routes the earpiece sound to the speaker. Used to capture live video for video calls. Provides audio in handset mode. Provides power to the device from cradles. Assists in battery cover removal to provide ac-
cess to the battery, SIM, CRYPTR, and mi-
croSD card holders. Provides USB client and host communications. Takes photos and video, and provides flash illu-
mination for the camera. Send Feedback 35 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 2.2 Unpacking Carefully remove all protective material from the LEX series device and save the shipping container for later storage and shipping. Verify that the following were received:
LEX L10i Battery Cover 2280 mAh Lithium-ion battery Charger USB Cable Regulatory Guide Quick Start Guide Inspect the equipment for damage. If any equipment is missing or damaged, contact the Motorola Solutions Support Center immediately. Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 2.3 Setting Up The initial setup of the LEX L10i requires that the battery and any cards be installed. NOTICE: The device may be delivered to you with battery, SIM card, microSD card and/or CRYPTR cards already installed, activated, and ready for use. In this case, ignore steps 2 through 6 of the following section if they were already performed. Before using for the first time, perform the following:
1 Remove the screen protection film from the screen, see Removing the Screen Protective Film on page 37. 2 Install the public and/or Private SIM cards, see Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards on page 39. 3 Install the microSD or CRYPTR card (optional), see Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card on page 38. 4 Install the battery, see Installing the Battery on page 41. 5 Install the battery cover. 6 Charge the device, see Charging on page 42. Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 Related Links Removing the Screen Protective Film on page 37 Removing the Battery Cover on page 37 36 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card on page 38 Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card on page 39 Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards on page 39 Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards on page 40 Installing the Battery on page 41 Removing the Battery on page 41 2.3.1 Removing the Screen Protective Film The device is provided with a screen protective film that protects the device during shipping. To enable proper operation, the screen protector must be removed before use. Figure 3: Removing the Screen Protective Film Return to Process Setting Up on page 36 2.3.2 Removing the Battery Cover This procedure explains how to remove the battery cover. Procedure:
1 Hold the device firmly as shown. 2 Using the battery cover removal slot, gently lift the battery cover up and away. Send Feedback 37 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Figure 4: Removing the Battery Cover Return to Process Setting Up on page 36 2.3.3 Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card The LEX L10i card holder can support either a microSD card or a CRYPTR micro encryption card. The microSD card is a removable flash memory used for storing media on the device. The device can support microSD cards with up to 64GB memory space. The CRYPTR micro encryption card is used for voice encryption in features such as data and phone over Virtual Private Network (VPN) and Push-
to-Talk (PTT) communication. The CRYPTR micro provides FIPS 140-2 Level 3 storage for credentials/keys for Data At Rest (DAR) encryption and MVPN. The slot of the card is located under the battery When and where to use:
NOTICE: For powering up devices with CRYPTR micro cards, device technicians should follow instructions in LEX L10i Service Provisioning Guide. NOTICE: The LEX L10i may be delivered to you with battery, SIM card, and microSD or CRYPTR card already installed, activated, and ready for use. In case a CRYPTR is pre-
installed in the device, you must change the CRYPTR password provided by your technical support. This is not a password to access the device but a password to protect Motorola Solutions secure applications. The CRYPTR password is required whenever the device is restarted. Procedure:
1 Slide the card into the card holder slot with contacts facing down. 2 Push the card into the slot until it is fully seated and locked into place. 38 Send Feedback Figure 5: Installing the microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Return to Process Setting Up on page 36 2.3.4 Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card This procedure explains how to remove a microSD or CRYPTR micro encryption card. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for three seconds. 2 Touch Power Off. 3 Touch OK. 4 Lift the battery cover. 5 Push the Card Holder lock down to release the card. 6 Remove the card from the holder. 7 Replace the battery cover. Return to Process Setting Up on page 36 2.3.5 Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards Public and private phone services require a Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) card. Prerequisites: The SIM card can contain the following information:
Mobile phone service provider account details. Contact information, which can be moved to the People application on the LEX L10i. Any additional subscribed services. Information regarding service access and preferences. NOTICE: The LEX L10i requires activated SIM cards. Obtain activated SIM cards from your organization administrator. Send Feedback 39 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started CAUTION:
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution. For proper ESD precautions to avoid damaging the SIM card. Proper ESD precautions include, but not limited to, working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the user is properly grounded. When and where to use: Use this procedure to install a SIM card:
Procedure:
1 If the battery is in place, remove the battery as described in Removing the Battery on page 41. 2 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder with the contacts facing down. Note the card notch position. 3 Push that the SIM card into the holder until it is fully seated and flat. You should hear a click when the SIM card in fully in place. Figure 6: Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards Return to Process Setting Up on page 36 2.3.6 Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards When and where to use: Use this procedure to remove the public or private SIM cards. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for three seconds. 2 Tap Power Off. 3 Tap OK. 4 Lift the battery cover. 5 Slide the battery latch to Unlock position. 6 Lift the battery out of the device. 7 Push the SIM card to release it from the holder. 8 Remove the SIM card. 9 Place the battery back into the device. 10 Snap the battery cover back into place. 40 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Return to Process Setting Up on page 36 2.3.7 Installing the Battery When and where to use: Perform this procedure to install a battery. Procedure:
1 Remove the battery from the packaging. 2 Insert the battery into the battery compartment with the battery contacts facing the bottom of the device. Figure 7: Installing the Battery 3 Press the top of battery into place. 4 Place the battery cover into place. 5 Ensure that all battery cover snaps are fully engaged. Return to Process Setting Up on page 36 2.3.8 Removing the Battery When and where to use: Perform this procedure to remove the battery. Procedure:
1 Slide a finger nail (preferably a thumb nail) into the Battery Cover removal slot and gently pull the Battery Cover away from the device. 2 Remove the Battery Cover. 3 Slide the Battery Lock up and hold it. 4 With the tip of your finger, lift up the battery from the side closest to the top side of the device. Return to Process Setting Up on page 36 Send Feedback 41 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started 2.4 Charging Before using for the first time, charge the battery using the provided USB Charger and USB Cable or connect the USB Cable to the USB port of a personal computer. An unused battery fully charges in less than six hours. The battery can also be charged by one of the optional charging cradles. Figure 8: Charging the LEX L10i NOTICE: Keep the USB cover closed when USB not in use. NOTICE: For detailed description, installation and operation of the accessories, refer the quick start guides provided with each accessory. Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 Related Links Charging Temperature on page 42 Battery Charge Indications on page 42 Battery Management on page 44 2.4.1 Charging Temperature Charge batteries in temperatures from 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). Note that charging is intelligently controlled by the device. To accomplish this, for small periods of time, the device alternately enables and disables battery charging to keep the battery at acceptable temperatures. The device LED indicates when charging is disabled due to abnormal temperatures by fast blinking amber (once every 2 seconds). Return to Process Charging on page 42 2.4.2 Battery Charge Indications The Charge and Notification LED at the top, front of the LEX L10i. 42 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Battery charging and power level are indicated by a battery icon on the status bar. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove from any power source (cradle or USB cable connection). Figure 9: Charge and Notification LED Table 2: Charge and Notification LED Charging Indications Status Off Indications Battery is not charging. Could indicate that:
Device is not inserted correctly in the cradle Device is not connected to a USB cable Charger or cradle is not powered Slowly blinking red (once every 2 seconds) Battery power is low (less than 5% power left). Solid red Charging. Fast blinking red (once every 0.5 second) Charging error:
Temperature is too low or too high Charging has gone on too long without com-
pletion (typical charge is four hours) Slowly blinking green (once every 2 seconds) Battery is greater than 90% charged. Solid green Device is charged. Slowly blinking blue (once every 4 seconds) A new notification has been received. Alternately blinking blue (1 second) and red (3 seconds) Device is charging and a new notification is re-
ceived. Alternately blinking blue (1 second) and green
(3 seconds) Device is charged and a new notification is re-
ceived. Slowly blinking blue and red (every other sec-
ond) Battery power is low (less than 5% power left) and a new notification is received. Alternately blinking blue (1 second) and fast blinking red (every 0.5 seconds for 3 seconds) A new notification is received during a charging error. Slowly blinking amber (once every 2 seconds) Device is waiting to charge. When the battery power falls below a predetermined level the icon indicates the status and a battery dialog box appears indicating the status of the battery. The message displays until the you tap Dismiss. To monitor battery usage, from the Home screen, touch Battery. Send Feedback 43 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Return to Process Charging on page 42 2.4.3 Battery Management This topic explains how to check the status of your battery and what you can do to make your battery last longer. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove from any AC power source (cradle or cable). To check the charge status of the main battery, tap Battery status indicates that the battery is discharging and Battery level lists the battery charge (as a percentage of fully charged). About phone Status. Return to Process Charging on page 42 Related Links Monitor Battery Usage on page 44 Low Battery Notification on page 45 Battery Optimization on page 46 2.4.3.1 Monitor Battery Usage The Battery screen lists which applications consume the most battery power. Also use it to turn off applications that were downloaded if they are consuming too much power. To monitor battery usage, tap Battery. 44 Send Feedback Figure 10: Battery Screen MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started The Battery screen lists the applications using the battery. The discharge graph at the top of the screen shows the rate of the battery discharge since last charged (short periods of time when connected to a charger are shown as thin green lines at the bottom of the chart), and how long it has been running on battery power. Tap an application in the Battery screen to display details about its power consumption. Different applications display different information. Some applications include buttons that open screens with settings to adjust power use. Return to Process Battery Management on page 44 2.4.3.2 Low Battery Notification When the battery charge level drops below 15%, the device displays a notice to connect to power. The user should charge the battery using one of the charging accessories. Figure 11: Low Battery Notification Send Feedback 45 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started When the battery charge drops below 5%, the device displays a notice to connect the device to power. The user must charge the battery using one of the charging accessories. When the battery charge drops below 1%, the device turns off. Charge using one of the charging accessories to retain data. Return to Process Battery Management on page 44 2.4.3.3 Battery Optimization Observe the following battery saving tips:
Leave inside a cradle connected to AC power at all times when not in use. Turn off Bluetooth if not needed. Turn off Wi-Fi if not needed. Change screen time-out to as short as possible. Charge when not in use. Set the screen to Suspend (Sleep) after a short period of non-use. Reduce screen brightness. Minimize use of applications that keep the device from suspending, for example, music or video applications. Return to Process Battery Management on page 44 Related Links Turning Off the Radio on page 46 2.4.3.3.1 Turning Off the Radio When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn off the device. Procedure:
1 Press the Power button until the Quick Settings menu appears. Figure 12: Quick Settings Menu Airplane Mode 46 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started 2 Tap Airplane mode. Alternately, open the Notification panel and tap Airplane Mode. The airplane icon appears in the Status bar indicating that all the radios are off. Return to Process Battery Optimization on page 46 2.5 Powering On the LEX device for the First Time Press the Power button to turn on the LEX L10i. The device boot screen displays as the LEX L10i boots. NOTICE: For powering up devices with CRYPTR micro cards, device technicians should follow instructions in LEX L10i Service Provisioning Guide. Figure 13: LEX L10i Boot Screen Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 2.6 Powering Off When and where to use: Use this procedure to power off the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button until the Power Button menu appears. Send Feedback 47 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Figure 14: Selecting Power Off 2 Tap Power off and then OK. Your phone will shut down is displayed on the screen. Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 2.7 Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode Suspend mode (also known as sleep mode) is a low-power mode of operation that helps reduce electrical power consumption by shutting down parts of the device that are not in use. The device goes into Suspend mode when the Power button is pressed or after a time out period of inactivity. When and where to use: Use this procedure to enter and exit Suspend mode:
Procedure:
1 To enter Suspend mode, press and release the Power button. The screen turns off. NOTICE: In Suspend mode, the following items continue to operate:
Power button PTT Button (if set to be used) Notification LEDs Wireless communication. 2 To exit Suspend mode, press and release the Power button. Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 Related Links Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode on page 49 48 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started 2.7.1 Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode When and where to use: Use this procedure to set the period of inactivity before suspend mode occurs. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap:
2 Select the inactivity duration before Suspend mode becomes active. Display Sleep. 3 Tap
. Return to Process Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode on page 48 2.8 Covert Mode In the Covert Mode, the device goes dark and quiet. All visible and audible alerts and notifications are shut down. This feature makes the LEX L10i effectively unnoticeable even in a silent and dark environment. In Covert Mode, the following sounds, visual indications, and keys are disabled:
Display brightness Touchscreen Keylight LED indications Vibration Speaker audio NOTICE: In Covert Mode, sound is routed to a Bluetooth headset, if connected or sound is routed to a wired earpiece, if connected. Alternatively, sound is routed to the earpiece. Tone indications NOTICE: In Covert Mode, the following features remain active:
- Power button
- PTT button
- Volume button
- Four front panel keys
- Camera button
- Audio or tone indications are available using a wired headset (through headset port) or a Bluetooth headset Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 Related Links Turning On Covert Mode on page 50 Turning Off Covert Mode on page 50 Send Feedback 49 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started 2.8.1 Turning On Covert Mode When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn on Covert Mode. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The following Power Button menu displays:
Figure 15: Power Button Menu 2 Tap Covert mode. The screen goes blank. Return to Process Covert Mode on page 49 2.8.2 Turning Off Covert Mode When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn off Covert Mode. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The following Power Button menu displays:
Figure 16: Power Button Menu 2 Tap Covert mode. 50 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started The Home screen appears. Return to Process Covert Mode on page 49 2.9 LEX Series Device Lock The lock screen automatically displays after predefined time out to prevent unauthorized people from using the device. The device does not lock at the same time as it is suspended. The device can also be locked manually by the user to disable unwanted key presses or screen tap or to keep data secured. To manually lock the device, press and release the Power button. When the device is locked and cellular network signal is available, phone calls, notification of new messages, missed calls and upcoming appointments still can be received. The device locks after a specified time. Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 Related Links Selecting a Locking Option on page 51 Unlocking the Device on page 53 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device on page 54 2.9.1 Selecting a Locking Option When and where to use: Security dictates a specific level of locking for the LEX L10i. Use this procedure to select a locking option. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security. 4 Tap Screen lock. The following options are displayed:
None. Swipe User slides the lock to unlock the device. Pattern User must replicate a specified pattern to unlock the device. PIN User must enter a pin to unlock the device. Password User must enter a specified password to unlock the device. 5 Select an option. If None or Swipe is selected, the Security screen is re-displayed. If Pattern, PIN, or Password is selected, a face, pattern, pin, or password must be specified. Then, the Security screen is re-
displayed. The device is set to lock. Send Feedback 51 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Postrequisites: Specify a pattern as described in Specifying a Pattern on page 52. Specify a pin, or password as described in Specifying a PIN or Password on page 52. Then, specify a timeout value as described in Setting the Timeout for Locking on page 53. Return to Process LEX Series Device Lock on page 51 Related Links Specifying a Pattern on page 52 Specifying a PIN or Password on page 52 Setting the Timeout for Locking on page 53 2.9.1.1 Specifying a Pattern Prerequisites: The Pattern option must be selected for Screen lock. When and where to use: Use this procedure to specify a pattern to unlock your device:
Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security lock. 4 Select Pattern. 5 Using a finger, draw a pattern to unlock your device. 6 Tap Continue. 7 Draw the same pattern again. 8 Tap Confirm. The Security screen is re-displayed. A pattern must be entered to unlock the device. Return to Process Selecting a Locking Option on page 51 2.9.1.2 Specifying a PIN or Password Prerequisites: The PIN or Password option has been selected for Screen lock. When and where to use: Use this procedure to specify a PIN or password to unlock your LEX L10i:
Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security lock. 4 Select PIN or Password. 52 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started 5 Enter a pin or password. 6 Tap Continue. 7 Enter the pin or password again. 8 Tap OK. The Security screen is re-displayed. A pin or password must be entered to unlock the device. Return to Process Selecting a Locking Option on page 51 2.9.1.3 Setting the Timeout for Locking Prerequisites: Screen lock must be set to Pattern, PIN, or Password. When and where to use: Use this procedure to set the timeout value to lock the LEX L10i:
Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security. 4 Tap Automatically lock. A list of timeout values is displayed. 5 Select a timeout value from the list. 6 The Security screen is re-displayed. Return to Process Selecting a Locking Option on page 51 2.9.2 Unlocking the Device When the LEX L10i is not used for a period of time and the user tries to access the device, the Lock screen displays. Depending on which Screen lock option is active, the user does one of the following:
Nothing Slide the slider to the unlock position Enter a pattern, pin, or password. Return to Process LEX Series Device Lock on page 51 Related Links Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern on page 54 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password on page 54 Send Feedback 53 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started 2.9.2.1 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a Pattern When and where to use: Use this procedure to unlock the LEX L10i with a pattern:
Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 Using a finger, draw the specified pattern on the screen. Once the correct pattern is drawn, the device unlocks. Return to Process Unlocking the Device on page 53 2.9.2.2 Unlocking the LEX Device Using a PIN or Password When and where to use: Use this procedure to unlock the LEX L10i with a PIN or password. Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 In the text field, enter your pin or password. 3 Tap Done. The device unlocks and the Home screen is shown. Return to Process Unlocking the Device on page 53 2.9.3 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX Device You can make an emergency call even when the LEX L10i is locked and you do not remember the PIN. When and where to use: Use this procedure to make an emergency call when the device is locked and you do not remember the PIN:
Procedure:
1 Tap EMERGENCY CALL at the bottom of the lock screen. The Emergency Dialer screen displays. 2 Enter the emergency number. 3 Tap
. Return to Process LEX Series Device Lock on page 51 2.10 Setting the Date and Time When the LEX L10i is connected to cellular network, date and time are automatically synchronized. 54 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started When and where to use: Perform this procedure to manually set the date and time:
Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Date & time. 4 Tap Automatic date & time to disable automatic date and time synchronization. 5 Tap Automatic time zone to disable automatic time zone synchronization. 6 Tap Set date. 7 Slide your finger up and down to select the month, date and year. 8 Tap Done. 9 Tap Set time. 10 Slide your finger up and down to select the hour, minutes and part of the day. 11 Tap Done. 12 Tap Select time zone. 13 Tap to select a time zone from the list. 14 Tap
. Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 2.11 Setting the Display The following LEX L10i display features can be customized:
Brightness level Set the brightness of the display. Adaptive brightness Optimize brightness level for available light. Wallpaper Choose a background type on the Home and lock screens. Three options are available: Gallery, Live Wallpapers, and Wallpapers. Sleep Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the displays backlight. Press power button twice for camera Quickly open camera without unlocking your screen. Daydream Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is docked inside a cradle or charging. Font size Change the font size for display text. When device is rotated Rotate the contents of the screen. Cast Enable the device to project the screen to a TV or other device. Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 Related Links Setting Screen Brightness on page 56 Setting Adaptive Brightness on page 56 Send Feedback 55 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Setting Up Wallpapers on page 56 Setting Up Sleep Mode on page 57 Opening Camera Without Unlocking the Screen on page 58 Setting Up Daydream on page 58 Setting Screen Rotation on page 58 Setting the Font Size on page 59 Enabling Cast Screen on page 60 2.11.1 Setting Screen Brightness Use this task to set the screen brightness. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Brightness level. 5 Set the brightness level by sliding to the left or to the right. Return to Process Setting the Display on page 55 2.11.2 Setting Adaptive Brightness Optimize brightness level for available light. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Adaptive brightness. Return to Process Setting the Display on page 55 2.11.3 Setting Up Wallpapers When and where to use:
Wallpaper is the background on the Home and lock screens. You can change and set the image on the device. Choose between traditional or live (animated) types. Traditional wallpaper can be any image, 56 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started such as a picture you have taken and stored in the Gallery app or an image provided by the manufacturer for wallpaper use. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Wallpaper and choose a wallpaper type. These options are available:
If Then For a still image from the Gallery app, For animated or interactive wallpaper, For a preinstalled image, Tap Gallery, browse the albums, select an image, and tap Select wallpaper. Tap Live Wallpapers, select a wallpaper to preview, and tap Set wallpaper. Tap Wallpaper, browse the scroll-bar and select an im-
age, and tap Set wallpaper. Return to Process Setting the Display on page 55 2.11.4 Setting Up Sleep Mode Use this procedure to set up sleep mode (screen time-out). Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Sleep. 5 Select one of the sleep values:
15 seconds 30 seconds (default) 1 minutes 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes Return to Process Setting the Display on page 55 Send Feedback 57 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started 2.11.5 Opening Camera Without Unlocking the Screen Quickly open camera without unlocking your screen by pressing the power button twice. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Press power button twice for camera. Return to Process Setting the Display on page 55 2.11.6 Setting Up Daydream When and where to use: The Daydream application behaves as a screensaver when the LEX L10i is docked inside a cradle and/or in sleep mode. Use this procedure to set up a screensaver. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Daydream. 5 Select from Clock, Colors, Photo Frame or Photo Table. 6 Tap to configure the item selected in the previous step. 7 Tap
, tap WHEN TO DAYDREAM and select when you would like the feature to be active
(While docked, while charging or either). 8 Tap START NOW to preview and confirm your selection. 9 Tap
. Return to Process Setting the Display on page 55 2.11.7 Setting Screen Rotation Screen rotation enables the LEX L10i to automatically determine the orientation of the screen to portrait or landscape. 58 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started When and where to use: Use this procedure when you want to set your screen to automatically rotate:
Procedure:
1 NOTICE: Some applications may not support screen rotation. Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap When device is rotated and select one of the following:
Select Rotate the contents of the screen so that the screen rotates. Select Stay in portrait view so that the screen does not rotate. 5 Tap
. Return to Process Setting the Display on page 55 2.11.8 Setting the Font Size When and where to use: Use this procedure to change the font size. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Font size. 5 Select one of the font size values:
Small Normal (default) Large Huge 6 Press
. Return to Process Setting the Display on page 55 Send Feedback 59 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started 2.11.9 Enabling Cast Screen When and where to use: Use this procedure to enable the LEX L10i to project the screen to a TV or other device. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Cast screen. 5 Tap . 6 Select Enable wireless display. Return to Process Setting the Display on page 55 Related Links Projecting the LEX Screen on Another Device on page 60 2.11.9.1 Projecting the LEX Screen on Another Device Prerequisites: The Cast screen must be enabled. When and where to use: Use this procedure to project the device screen on another device. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Cast screen. 5 Select the device to show your device screen on. Your device should now display on the other device. 6 To stop projecting your device screen, swipe down from the Status bar and tap Disconnect under Cast screen. Return to Process Enabling Cast Screen on page 60 2.12 Sound and Notification Settings Sound and notification settings allow the user to configure default media, alarm, and ring volume levels and ringtones. The user can adjust notification settings. 60 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 Related Links Adjusting Sound Settings on page 61 Setting Up the Do Not Disturb Option on page 61 2.12.1 Adjusting Sound Settings Sound settings allow user to adjust media, alarm, and ring volume. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Sound & notification. 4 Adjust the slidebars for media, alarm, and ring volume. 5 If you want your device to vibrate for calls, adjust the slidebar for Also vibrate for calls. Return to Process Sound and Notification Settings on page 60 2.12.2 Setting Up the Do Not Disturb Option The Do not disturb setting allows the user to mute alarms, reminders, events, messages, and calls. The user can set a schedule so that Do not disturb is turned on and off automatically. The user can set exceptions on chosen elements. Procedure:
1 Tap 2 Set exceptions by doing the following:
Sound & notification Priority only allows. a If you want to unmute Reminders, adjust the Reminders slidebar. b If you want to unmute Events, adjust the Events slidebar. c If you want to set exception on Messages, select Messages and choose from the list of available options. d If you want to set exception on Calls, tap Calls and choose from the list of available options. e If you want to repeat callers, adjust the Repeat callers slidebar. Return to Process Sound and Notification Settings on page 60 2.13 Public and Private Carrier Modes The device operates on both public and private carriers. Send Feedback 61 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started The user can manually switch modes to operate on the Private Mode LTE network or the Public Carrier Mode. The LEX L10i Mission Critical LTE Handheld operates in:
4G LTE Bands: 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 20, 26, 28 NOTICE: Band 2 is only supported in North America. 3G/UMTS Bands: 1, 2, 4, 5, 8 Quad Band GSM: 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 1900 MHz 802.11 a/b/g/n Wi-Fi and Miracast Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 Related Links Switching Modes Using the Power Button on page 62 Switching Modes Using the Settings App on page 63 2.13.1 Switching Modes Using the Power Button When the LEX L10i is equipped with Private and Public SIM cards, the Power button can be used to switch modes. Prerequisites: The device is equipped with Private and Public enabled SIM cards. When and where to use: Use this procedure to switch modes using the power button. NOTICE: You may need to switch between private and public network modes when you want to use capabilities provided by one network that are not provided by the other. For example, if the phone is in private mode, switch to public mode before you can dial numbers that are not included in the private network. NOTICE: When switching between private and public network modes, the device undergoes modem reset by default. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button until a menu appears. Figure 17: Service Switch The current carrier mode is indicated under the Service switch option. 62 Send Feedback 2 Tap Service switch. A confirmation popup is displayed. Figure 18: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started 3 Tap Switch. Return to Process Public and Private Carrier Modes on page 61 2.13.2 Switching Modes Using the Settings App When the LEX L10i is equipped with Private and Public SIM cards, the Settings application can be used to switch modes. Prerequisites: The device is equipped with Private and Public enabled SIM cards. When and where to use: Use this procedure to switch modes using the setting applications. NOTICE: You may need to switch between private and public network modes when you want to use capabilities provided by one network that are not provided by the other. For example, if the phone is in private mode, switch to public mode before you can dial numbers that are not included in the private network. NOTICE: When switching between private and public network modes, the device undergoes modem reset by default. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Tap Select network. 6 Select Public or Private. A confirmation popup is displayed. Send Feedback 63 MN002347A01-B Chapter 2: Getting Started Figure 19: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup 7 Tap Switch. Return to Process Public and Private Carrier Modes on page 61 2.14 Emergency Button The LEX L10i includes an Emergency Button which aids responders during emergencies. This feature helps reduce response times in an emergency situation. The device must be pre-configured based on the responders specific requirements before it is given to a user. Once the device is configured to use the Emergency Button, users can access the actions by swiping the Home screen icon up to access the Home screen overlay. The Emergency Button supports the following actions:
Initiate a phone call The Emergency Button can be pre-configured to initiate an E911 call or to initiate a call to a customized phone number. Send an SMS notification (with/without GPS) The Emergency Button can be pre-configured to send an SMS notification to customized numbers. Location coordinates (if available) of LTE handset and information about paired (if paired) Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is also sent as part of the text message. Initiate a phone call and send an SMS notification (with/without GPS) The Emergency Button can be pre-configured to perform both of the above actions. NOTICE: You are required to have a voice and text plan to initiate calls and send SMS notifications. Return to Process Getting Started on page 33 64 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Using the LEX Series Device Chapter 3 Using the LEX Series Device This chapter explains the indicators, buttons, status icons, and controls on the device and provides basic instructions for using the device. Related Links Using the Touchscreen on page 65 Using the On-Screen Keyboard on page 66 Motorola Solutions Home Experience on page 68 Status Bar on page 76 Notification Icons on page 77 Status Icons on page 79 Managing Notifications on page 80 Working with Status on page 81 Quick Settings on page 81 Folders on page 82 Accessing Files from a Computer on page 84 3.1 Using the Touchscreen The multi-tap sensitive screen is used to operate the LEX L10i. Table 3: Using the Touchscreen Action Tap Tap and Hold Drag Swipe Send Feedback Result Tap to:
select items on the screen type letters and symbols using the on-screen keyboard press on-screen buttons Tap and hold:
an item on the Home screen to move it to a new location or to the trash an item in Apps to create a shortcut on the Home screen an empty area on the Home screen until the menu appears Tap and hold an item for a moment and then move finger on the screen until reaching the new position. Move finger up and down or left and right on the screen to:
Table continued 65 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Action Result unlock the screen view additional Home screens view additional application icons in the Launcher window view more information on an applications screen Double-tap Pinch Tap twice on a web page, map, or other screen to zoom in and out. In some applications, zoom in and out by plac-
ing two fingers on the screen and pinching them together (to zoom out) or spreading them apart
(to zoom in). Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 3.2 Using the On-Screen Keyboard The on-screen keyboard is used to enter text in a text field. To configure the keyboard settings, tap and hold select Android Keyboard Settings. Figure 20: Android Keyboard Settings
(comma key) > slide your finger up to and then A description of the settings can be found in Android Keyboard Settings on page 67. 66 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Editing Text Edit entered text and use menu commands to cut, copy, and paste text within or across applications. Some applications do not support editing some or all of the text they display; others may offer their own way to select text. Entering Numbers, Symbols and Special Characters To enter numbers and symbols:
Without switching to the Numbers or Symbols keyboard, tap and hold one of the top-row keys until a menu appears then select a number. Keys with alternate characters display an ellipsis ( ... ) below the character. Tap the Shift key to enter one capital letter. Tap and hold the Shift key until it changes state (Shift key is underlined) to enter two or more capital letters. Tap Shift key again to return to the lowercase keyboard. Tap to switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard. key on the numbers and symbols keyboard to view additional symbols. Tap the To enter special characters, tap and hold a number or symbol key to open a menu of additional symbols. A larger version of the key displays briefly over the keyboard. Keys with alternate characters display an ellipsis ( ... ) below the character. Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 Related Links Android Keyboard Settings on page 67 3.2.1 Android Keyboard Settings The Android Keyboard Settings may be personalized to meet your preferences. Table 4: Android Keyboard Settings Setting GENERAL Input Languages Auto-capitalization Vibrate on keypress Sound on keypress Popup on keypress Voice input key TEXT CORRECTION Send Feedback Description Selects the language used in the keyboard. Automatically capitalize the first letter after a pe-
riod. Vibrates the device when a key is pressed. Makes a sound on the device when a key is pressed. Pops up a duplicate of the key pressed. Allows you to speak the name of the key to in-
put a key. Table continued 67 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Setting Personal Dictionary Add-on dictionaries Block offensive words Auto-correction Show correction suggestions OTHER OPTIONS Next word suggestions Advanced settings Return to Process Using the On-Screen Keyboard on page 66 Description Uses your personal dictionary when correcting words. Allows you to add additional dictionaries to cor-
rect words. Blocks offensive words from being suggested to correct words. Sets the level of auto-correction to: Off, Mod-
est, Aggressive, or Very aggressive. Displays a list of corrections so that you can se-
lect make a selection. Anticipates the next word that you want to type based on the last word typed. The Advanced settings should only be set by experts. 3.3 Motorola Solutions Home Experience The Motorola Solutions Home Experience (MHx) is a user interface available for the LEX L10i. Specifically, MHx provides a unique experience for customizing the Home screen. Download Motorola Solutions Home Experience (MHx) from the Google Play Store. Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 Related Links LEX L10i Home Screen on page 68 Customizing the Home Screen on page 70 3.3.1 LEX L10i Home Screen The Home screen displays after the device turns on and unlocks. 68 Send Feedback Figure 21: Default Home Screen MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device The Home screen is completely customizable depending on the specifications for your agency. Each organization may have a different Home screen. The Radio Manager (RM) Tool, described in the LEX L10i Service Provisioning Guide, can be used to stage the Home screen on your devices. NOTICE: When CRYPTR Card is used, the device requires setting a password after initial boot and entering this password whenever the device restarts. This is not a password to access the device but a password to protect Motorola Solutions secure applications. After suspend mode or screen time-out, the screen displays with the lock slider. Slide direction towards the outside of the screen to unlock the screen. in any NOTICE: If you have changed the Screen lock option, depending on the selected option, you will have to enter a pattern, pin, or password to unlock the device. The Home screen consists of the following items:
Core Applications Widget Provides shortcuts such as:
- Phone Dialer
- Contacts
- Application Launcher
- Camera
- Search Feature
- Other shortcuts determined by your agency Calendar Widget email Widget Messaging Widget Search Widget My Apps Widget Send Feedback 69 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Other Widgets determined by your agency Home Screen Overlay Provides quick access to core functions. The Home screen provides four screens for placement of widgets and shortcuts. Swipe the screen left or right to view the additional screens. Return to Process Motorola Solutions Home Experience on page 68 Related Links Home Screen Overlay on page 70 3.3.1.1 Home Screen Overlay The Home screen overlay provides quick access to core functions (Emergency Button). Swipe the Home screen up from the icon to access the Home screen overlay. Return to Process LEX L10i Home Screen on page 68 3.3.2 Customizing the Home Screen The Home screen contains panels that can be accessed by swiping the page to the left or right. Panels provide more space for adding widgets to the Home screen and can be customized by the user. This section describes how to:
Add Widgets Move Widgets Remove Widgets Configure Home screen settings Return to Process Motorola Solutions Home Experience on page 68 Related Links Adding Widgets on page 70 Moving Widgets on page 75 Removing Widgets on page 75 Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel on page 76 3.3.2.1 Adding Widgets Widgets are applications that run on your Home screen. When and where to use: Use this procedure to add one or more widgets to your Home screen. Procedure:
1 Swipe the Home screen left or right to locate the panel that you want to add a widget to. 70 Send Feedback 2 Touch and hold a gray area of the panel until you see the following icons near the bottom of the screen:
MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device 3 Tap the Widgets icon to reveal the widgets. Figure 22: Widgets Screen NOTICE: To identify Motorola Solutions Widgets, their names are preceded by MHx. 4 The Widgets screen contains multiple panels. Swipe the Widgets screen left or right to locate the widget that you want to add. 5 Touch and hold the widget; then, slide the widget down the screen and place it in the current panel. If there is not enough room in the panel or you want to place the widget in a new panel, slide the widget to the right of the screen until a blank panel appears. Then, place the widget in the new panel. Send Feedback 71 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Figure 23: Example of a Widget Added to New Panel NOTICE: Some widgets are re-sizable as soon as you place it in a panel. Press and hold the widget. If the re-size tool displays (four dots, one on each side of the widget), you can re-size the widget by dragging the dots on the re-size tool. Return to Process Customizing the Home Screen on page 70 Related Links Adding Shortcuts to the My Apps Widget on page 72 Changing My Status on page 74 3.3.2.1.1 Adding Shortcuts to the My Apps Widget The My Apps widget is a special MHx widget where you can add shortcuts for quick access. Prerequisites: Before adding shortcuts, the My Apps widget must be added to the Home screen. When and where to use: An empty My Apps needs shortcuts to be functional. Use this procedure to add shortcuts to the My Apps widget. Procedure:
1 Add My Apps widget as described in Adding Widgets on page 70. An empty My Apps widget displays. 72 Send Feedback Figure 24: Empty My Apps Widget MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device 2 Tap the My Apps widget to add shortcuts to it. A screen with a list of shortcuts is displayed. Figure 25: List of Shortcuts for My Apps Widgets Send Feedback 73 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device 3 Select each shortcut that you want to add to the My Apps widget. You may add up to five shortcuts. 4 Tap Done. Shortcuts are added to the My Apps widget. Figure 26: My Apps Widget with Shortcuts Added Return to Process Adding Widgets on page 70 3.3.2.1.2 Changing My Status When and where to use: Perform this procedure to set the status of the LEX L10i user to either Available or Busy. No matter what the status is set to, calls are still received. This status is shown to other users. NOTICE: The My Status widget must be added before it is visible in the Home screen. The My Status widget is used in conjunction with the UNS System from Motorola Solutions or when you have WAVE 7000. One of these systems must be active before My Status will work properly. Procedure:
1 Tap the My Status dropdown menu. Figure 27: My Status Widget 74 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device The My Status options menu is displayed. Figure 28: Status Selection 2 Tap one of the status states. Status is immediately set to the selected state. Return to Process Adding Widgets on page 70 3.3.2.2 Moving Widgets When and where to use: Use this procedure to move (relocate) widgets on the Home screen. Procedure:
1 Navigate to the Home screen panel where the widget is located. 2 Touch and hold the widget; then, slide the widget to a new location. If you want to move the widget to another panel, slide the widget left or right to that panel; then slide the widget to a location in the panel. Return to Process Customizing the Home Screen on page 70 3.3.2.3 Removing Widgets When and where to use: Use this procedure to remove or clear space on your Home screen. Procedure:
1 Slide the Home screen panel until you locate the panel that holds the widget that you want to remove. 2 Touch and hold the widget while sliding it down to the bottom of the panel. X Remove appears near the bottom of the screen. 3 Slide the widget to X Remove until the widget turns red and your finger is directly above X Remove; then, release the widget. The widget is removed from the panel. NOTICE: The widget is only removed from the panel. It is not deleted from the LEX L10i. Return to Process Customizing the Home Screen on page 70 Send Feedback 75 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device 3.3.2.4 Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel This topic shows you an example of a customized Home screen panel. Figure 29: Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel The above figure shows a customized Home screen panel with the following widgets:
My Status Two Direct dial widgets Calendar My Apps Return to Process Customizing the Home Screen on page 70 3.4 Status Bar The Status bar displays the time, notification icons (left side) and status icons (right side). Figure 30: Status Bar 76 Send Feedback If there are more notifications than can fit in the Status bar, it is indicated that more notifications exist. Open the Notifications panel to view all notifications and status. MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 3.5 Notification Icons Notification icons alert you when a notification has been received. Table 5: Notification Icons Icon Description Indicates that more notifications are available for viewing. Indicates that data is syncing. Indicates an incoming email. Converged Services notification. This icon has four parts: location services (top left), radio services (top right), priority manager (bottom left), and presence service (bottom right). Converged Services error notification. The tri-
angle with the exclamation point inside indi-
cates an error. If an error is observed, the user can swipe down from the icon to reveal the er-
ror. An example is:
Indicates location reporting service is enabled. Indicates the device is searching location data. Indicates an error or a warning that requires user action in the location application. Indicates an error or a warning that requires user action in the presence application. CRYPTR feature error. Indicates an upcoming event. Indicates an open Wi-Fi network is available. Radio Services application is on. Indicates a song is playing. Send Feedback Table continued 77 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Icon Description Indicates a problem with sign-in or sync has oc-
curred. Indicates the device is uploading data. Indicates the microSD card is almost full. Indicates the device is downloading data when animated and download is complete when stat-
ic. Indicates the device is connected via USB ca-
ble. Indicates the device is connected to or discon-
nected from virtual private network (VPN). Preparing SD card. Indicates no SIM is installed. Indicates the USB debugging is enabled on the LEX L10i. Indicates the device has received a text mes-
sage. Indicates a missed call. Indicates tethering is active for Bluetooth or USB. Also used to indicate a Wi-Fi hotspot is active. Screenshot captured. Indicates that Wi-Fi hotspot is active. My Status indicates device is available. My Status indicates device is busy. Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 78 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device 3.6 Status Icons Status icons give you status information on actions occurring on your LEX L10i. Table 6: Status Icons Icon Send Feedback Description Indicates that GPS is in use. Indicates the device is searching location data. Indicates the Alarm is active. Indicates all sounds except media and alarms are silenced and vibrate mode is active. Indicates the ringer is silenced. Microphone is muted during a call. Indicates the battery is fully charged. Indicates the battery charge is low. Indicates the battery charge is critical. Indicates the battery is charging. Indicates the Airplane Mode is active. All radios are turned off. Indicates Bluetooth is on. Set to operate on Private network. Connected to a Wi-Fi network. No Wi-Fi signal. Mobile network signal strength. No mobile network signal. Connected to a 4G network. Connected to a 3G network. Roaming from a network. Table continued 79 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Icon Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 Description No SIM card installed. 3.7 Managing Notifications Notification icons report the arrival of new messages, calendar events, alarms, and ongoing events. When a notification occurs, an icon appears in the Status bar with a brief description. See Notification Icons on page 77 for a list of possible notification icons and their description. Open the Notifications panel to view a list of all the notifications. To open the Notification panel drag the Status bar down from the top of the screen. Figure 31: Notification Panel To respond to a notification, open the Notifications panel and then tap a notification. The Notifications panel closes and the subsequent activity is dependent on the notification. To clear all notifications, open the Notifications panel and tap removed. Ongoing notifications remain in the list. All event-based notifications are NOTICE: Some notifications cannot be cleared and will remain to inform you of running applications To close the Notifications panel, drag the bottom of the Notifications panel to the top of the screen or tap
. 80 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 3.8 Working with Status LEX L10i users work with status in two ways: setting their own status (Available or Busy) and viewing the status of their contacts. The status displayed for Contacts shows the following:
The presence status currently detected by a call system or network (offline or online status) The availability status currently selected by the contact (Available or Busy) My Status Set the value of My Status to Available or Busy. This status is shown in the Contacts and Session Log screens of other users. The Available status:
The Busy status indicates that the user is busy but the is still able to send and receive calls. Is the default sign-on state Indicates the user is willing to send and receive calls Status of Contacts The status of contacts is shown in all of the Contacts screens, and People list. The status of a contact can be:
Offline Available Busy If the contact is not connected to and registered with a system server, the status shown is Offline. If the contact is connected to and registered with the system server, the My Status value (Available or Busy) of the contact is shown. When the Contacts are synchronized with the People list, the Contacts are added to the regular device contacts. Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 3.9 Quick Settings The Quick Settings panel provides easy access to some frequently used settings. You can use one of two methods:
With two fingers, drag the Status Bar panel down to display the Quick Settings panel. Drag the Status Bar down from the top of the screen. The Quick Settings icon displays in the top right corner. Tap to display the Quick Settings panel. Send Feedback 81 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Figure 32: Quick Settings Panel Display the owners contact image. Tap to open the owners contact information. Brightness Opens the Brightness setting dialog box to set the screen brightness. Settings Opens the Settings screen. Wi-Fi Displays the current Wi-Fi connection. Tap to open the Wi-Fi settings screen. Service Displays the current cellular service used; public or Private. Battery Status Displays the current battery charge level. Tap to open the Battery screen. Airplane Mode Displays the Airplane mode status. Tap to toggle Airplane mode on and off. Turn on Airplane mode to turn off all the radios. Bluetooth Displays the current state of the Bluetooth radio. Tap to open the Bluetooth settings screen. Location Displays the current state. To close the Quick Settings panel, drag the bottom of the Quick Settings panel to the top of the screen or tap
. Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 3.10 Folders Use Folders to organize similar applications together. Tap the folder to open and display items in the folder. Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 82 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Related Links Creating a Folder on page 83 Naming Folders on page 83 Removing a Folder on page 84 3.10.1 Creating a Folder When and where to use: Use a procedure to create a folder on the Home screen. NOTICE: There must be a minimum of two app icons to create a folder. Procedure:
1 Go to the desired Home screen. 2 Tap and hold on one application icon. 3 Drag the icon and stack on top of another icon. 4 Lift and release. Return to Process Folders on page 82 3.10.2 Naming Folders When and where to use: Use this procedure to name folders. You can give folders a name after they are created. Procedure:
1 Tap the folder. Figure 33: Opened Unnamed Folder 2 Tap the title area and enter a folder name using the keyboard. 3 Tap Done. 4 Tap anywhere on the Home screen to close the folder. The folder name appears under the folder. Figure 34: Named Folder Send Feedback 83 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device Return to Process Folders on page 82 3.10.3 Removing a Folder When and where to use: When a folder is no longer needed, you can remove it. Use this procedure to remove a folder. Procedure:
1 Tap and hold the folder until it enlarges and the device vibrates. 2 Drag the folder to X Remove until the folder turns red; then release. The folder is removed from the screen. Return to Process Folders on page 82 3.11 Accessing Files from a Computer When and where to use: Use this procedure to allow access to files from your computer using MTP
(media device) or using PTP (camera software). Procedure:
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable. If one of the following messages is displayed in the notification area (top of screen): Connected as a media device or Connected as a camera, you already have access to the files on your device. 2 Swipe down from the Status Bar. 84 Send Feedback Figure 35: Notifications Screen MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device 3 Tap the notification that has a Touch for other USB options subtitle (in this case Connected as a media device). Figure 36: MTP / PTP Selection Screen Send Feedback 85 MN002347A01-B Chapter 3: Using the LEX Series Device 4 Select Media device (MTP) to access media files from a Windows computer or Camera (PTP) to access photos / files on a computer that does not support MTP. 5 Tap to return to the previous screen. Return to Process Using the LEX Series Device on page 65 86 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Managing People Contacts Chapter 4 Managing People Contacts Use the People application to manage contacts. From a Home or Apps screen, tap screen: Search, Groups, All contacts, and Favorites. Tap the tabs to change how to view the contacts. Swipe up or down to scroll through the lists. The People application, displays four tabs at the top of the Related Links Adding People on page 87 Editing People on page 87 Deleting People on page 88 4.1 Adding People When and where to use: Use this procedure to add contacts. Procedure:
1 In the People application, tap 2 If there are more than one account with contacts, tap the one to use. 3 Type the contacts name and other information. Tap a field to start typing, and swipe down to
. view all categories. 4 Adding more than one entry for a category requires an additional step. For example:
To add a work address after typing a personal address, tap Add new for that field. To open a menu with preset labels, such as Home or Work for an email address, tap the label to the right of the item of contact information. To create your own label, tap Custom in the menu. 5 Tap Done. Return to Process Managing People Contacts on page 87 4.2 Editing People When and where to use: Use this procedure to edit contact information. Procedure:
1 In the People application, tap 2 Tap a name to edit. tab. 3 Tap . 4 Tap Edit. Send Feedback 87 MN002347A01-B Chapter 4: Managing People Contacts 5 Edit the contact information. 6 Tap Done. Return to Process Managing People Contacts on page 87 4.3 Deleting People When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete contacts. Procedure:
1 In the People application, tap 2 Tap a name to delete. tab. 3 Tap . 4 Tap Delete. 5 Tap OK to confirm. Return to Process Managing People Contacts on page 87 88 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Calling Chapter 5 Calling Make a phone call from the Phone application, the People application, or other applications or widgets that display contact information. Push-To-Talk (PTT) Calling The handheld must be provisioned for PTT services on a Motorola Solutions PTT server. To make PTT calls and how to receive PTT calls on the LEX 10i, see Push-To-Talk for LEX L10ig manual. Emergency Calling The service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers that you can call under any circumstances, even when the phone is locked, a SIM card is not inserted, or the phone is not activated. However, the SIM card must be installed to enable preset emergency numbers stored on it. Emergency numbers vary by country. The device must be switched to public mode to use the emergency numbers for your country on the public SIM. The pre-programmed emergency numbers may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. For additional information, contact your organizations technical support. IMPORTANT: The numbers you can call depend on whether the device is in private mode or public mode. For example, if the device is in private mode, you must switch to public mode before you can call numbers that are not included in the private network. To switch modes, see Switching Modes Using the Power Button on page 62 and Switching Modes Using the Settings App on page 63. NOTICE: If your device is licensed for these options, see LEX L10i Service Provisioning Guide to set up other emergency alert methods. Audio Modes The device offers three audio modes for use during phone calls:
Handset Mode: Switches audio to the receiver at the top front of the device, so the user can use the device as a handset and is the default mode. Speaker Mode: Use the device as if on speaker phone. Headset Mode: Connect a Bluetooth or wired headset to automatically switch audio to the headset. Using a Bluetooth Headset Use a Bluetooth headset for audio communication when using an audio-enabled application. See Bluetooth Device on page 150 for information on connecting a Bluetooth headset to the device. Set the volume appropriately before putting on the headset. When a Bluetooth headset is connected, the speakerphone is muted. Using a Wired Headset Use a wired headset (with 3.5 mm plug) for audio communication when using an audio-enabled application. Set the volume appropriately before putting on the headset. When a wired headset is connected, the speakerphone is muted. Lift the headset cover and insert the headset plug. Send Feedback 89 MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling To end a call using the wired headset, press and hold the headset button until the call ends. Figure 37: Insert Wired Headset Plug NOTICE: The headset cover must be properly seated after removing the headset plug. Adjusting Audio Volume Use the Volume buttons to adjust the volume of the ringer when not in a call and the audio volume when in a call. NOTICE: Adjust the conversation phone volume during a call. Adjusting the volume while not in a call affects the ring and notification sound levels. Related Links Making a Call Using the Dialer on page 90 Making a Call Using People List Contacts on page 92 Making a Call Using Call History on page 93 Making a Conference Call on page 94 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset on page 97 Call Settings on page 97 Requesting an Emergency Alert on page 98 5.1 Making a Call Using the Dialer When and where to use: Use this procedure to make a call using the dialer tab to dial phone numbers. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 90 Send Feedback Figure 38: Dialer Screen MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling 2 Tap the 3 Tap the keys to enter the phone number. tab above the dialer. 4 Tap below the dialer to initiate the call. Send Feedback 91 MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling Figure 39: Call in Progress If... You want to display the dialer. You want to turn on the speakerphone. You want to mute the call. Then... Tap
. Tap Tap
. You want to add another person to the call. Tap
. 5 Tap to end the call. Return to Process Calling on page 89 5.2 Making a Call Using People List Contacts When and where to use: Use this procedure to make a call using people list contacts to initiate a call. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the 3 From the people list contacts, tap a phone contact or a PTT contact for making a One-to-One tab. Private or Alert Call (see Push-To-Talk User Guide For LEX L10i). 92 Send Feedback Figure 40: People List Contact MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling 4 Tap the phone number next to the contact to initiate the call. 5 Tap to end the call. Return to Process Calling on page 89 5.3 Making a Call Using Call History When and where to use: Use this procedure to make a call using call history. Call History is a list of all the calls placed, received, or missed. It provides a convenient way to redial a number, return a call, or add a number to Contacts. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the tab. Send Feedback 93 MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling Figure 41: Call History Tab 3 Tap 4 Tap next to the contact to initiate the call. to end the call. Example:
Arrow icons beside a call indicate the type of call. Multiple arrows indicate multiple calls:
Missed incoming call Received incoming call Outgoing call Return to Process Calling on page 89 5.4 Making a Conference Call When and where to use: Conference calling is available if you have two or more people you wish to have a conversation with at the same time. Use this procedure to create a conference phone session with multiple people. NOTICE: Conference calling may not be supported by your service provider. Check with your technical support for conference calling availability. The total number of conference call participants may be limited by your service provider. For the maximum number of participants in a conference call, contact technical support. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 94 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling 2 Tap the 3 Tap the keys to enter the phone number. tab above the dialer. 4 Tap below the dialer to initiate the call. 5 When the call connects, tap
. The first call is placed on hold. 6 Tap the keys to enter the second phone number. 7 Tap 8 When the call connects, the first call is placed on hold and the second call is active. below the dialer to initiate the call. Figure 42: Two Calls The screen quickly changes to:
Send Feedback 95 MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling Figure 43: Two Calls Connected 9 Tap to create a conference call with three people. Figure 44: Merged Calls 10 Tap to add another call. The conference is placed on hold. 96 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling 11 Tap the keys to enter the second phone number. 12 Tap 13 Tap below the dialer to initiate the call. to add the third call to the conference. 14 Tap to rotate between the individual calls. Calls are rotated starting with the first call. This allows you to speak privately to one party. Tap to rotate to the next party. When the rotation is complete, you are placed back into conference mode and all calls are active. Return to Process Calling on page 89 5.5 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset When you receive a phone call, the Incoming Call screen opens, displaying the caller ID and any additional information about the caller that is in the People application. NOTICE: To connect a Bluetooth headset to the LEX L10i, see Pairing the LEX Device with Bluetooth Accessory on page 101. When a call arrives, tap the Call button on the Bluetooth headset to answer the call. To silence the ringer before answering the call, press the volume down button on the side of device. To end the call press the Call button on the Bluetooth headset. All incoming calls are recorded in the Phone application call Logs tab. If you miss a call, you will receive a notification. Return to Process Calling on page 89 5.6 Call Settings Use the Call Settings to modify options related to the phone call feature. NOTICE: Not all options are available for all configurations. Ringtone & Vibrate
- Phone Ringtone Tap to select a ringtone to sound when an incoming call is received.
- Vibrate When Ringing Check to make the device vibrate when a call is received. Other Call Settings
- Ringtone Settings When using a Bluetooth headset, select the path that the ring is heard. Options: Bluetooth or Speaker and Bluetooth (default). NOTICE: Bluetooth headset connection is required to set this option.
- Voicemail Tap to configure voicemail settings:
+ Service Set the service provider or other provider for voicemail service.
+ Setup Tap to update the phone number used to access voicemail. Send Feedback 97 MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling
+ Sound Tap to select a sound when a voicemail is received.
+ Vibrate Tap to vibrate when a voicemail is received.
- Dial pad touch tones Check to play a sound when a phone key is touched.
- Quick Responses - Tap to edit quick responses to use instead of answering a call.
- Fixed Dialing Numbers Use Fixed Dialing to restrict the phone to dial only the phone number(s) or area code(s) specified in a Fixed Dialing list.
- TTY mode Tap to set the TTY setting. Use an optional teletypewriter (TTY) device with the LEX L10i to send and receive calls. Plug the TTY device into the device headset jack and set the device to operate in one of the TTY modes. NOTICE: Use a TSB-121 compliant cable (provided by the TTY manufacturer) to connect the TTY device to the LEX L10i. Set the device volume to a middle level setting for proper operation. If you experience a high number of incorrect characters, adjust the volume as needed to minimize the error rate. For optimal performance, the device should be at least 30 cm (12 inches) from the TTY device. Placing the device too close to the TTY device may cause high error rates.
+ TTY Off (default) TTY is off.
+ TTY Full Transmit and receive TTY characters.
+ TTY HCO Transmit TTY characters but receive by listening to earpiece.
+ TTY VCO Receive TTY characters but transmit by speaking into microphone.
- DTMF tones Set the length of the DTMF tones. Available options are: Normal or Long.
- CDMA Call Settings:
+ Voice privacy Enable enhanced privacy mode. Return to Process Calling on page 89 5.7 Requesting an Emergency Alert This emergency alert procedure is used to indicate a critical situation. When and where to use: Use this procedure to trigger an emergency alert on the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Swipe up from the 2 Tap Activate Emergency. icon. A popup displays giving you 2 seconds to cancel the emergency alert. The emergency number programmed in the device is dialed. See LEX L10ig Service Provisioning Guide or configuration details. 98 Send Feedback Figure 45: Emergency Alert Activation Popup MN002347A01-B Chapter 5: Calling Return to Process Calling on page 89 Send Feedback 99 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B Radio Services Chapter 6 Radio Services Radio Services for LEX L10i The Radio Services is a free application available on the device and enables a LEX L10i to connect with a Motorola Operations Critical Wireless (OCW) Push-to-talk Pod (NNTN8127) and Bluetooth-
enabled device (accessory) through a wireless Bluetooth connection. Bluetooth-equipped devices can communicate without wires, using frequency-hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) radio frequency (RF) to transmit and receive data in the 2.4 GHz Industry Scientific and Medical (ISM) band (802.15.1). Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth enabled device. Related Links Pairing the LEX Device with Bluetooth Accessory on page 101 Unpairing LEX L10ig from Bluetooth Accessory on page 103 6.1 Pairing the LEX Device with Bluetooth Accessory Prerequisites: Confirm Bluetooth is enabled on the LEX L10i device and Bluetooth-enabled device
(accessory). To enable/disable Bluetooth on the device, see Enabling Bluetooth on page 155 or Disabling Bluetooth on page 155. Once pairing is established, the range of connection is no more than 10 meters (32.8 feet) line-of-sight. This is an unobstructed path between the location of the device and the location of the Radio (or other paired accessory). When and where to use: Use this procedure to pair a LEX L10i with a Bluetooth-enabled device
(accessory) through a wireless Bluetooth connection. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 In the Secure Pairing window, tap Pair. Send Feedback 101 MN002347A01-B Chapter 6: Radio Services Figure 46: Bluetooth Pairing Screen 4 From the Bluetooth screen, in the AVAILABLE DEVICES section, tap an unconnected Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory). Figure 47: Bluetooth Device Screen 5 In the PAIRED DEVICES section, the Bluetooth-enabled device is connected. 102 Send Feedback Figure 48: Bluetooth Paired Devices Screen MN002347A01-B Chapter 6: Radio Services NOTICE: Your Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) user manual. Return to Process Radio Services on page 101 6.2 Unpairing LEX L10ig from Bluetooth Accessory Prerequisites: The LEX L10i is unpaired with Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory). When and where to use: Use this procedure to unpair the LEX L10i from a Bluetooth-enabled device
(accessory). Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 From the Settings screen, tap Bluetooth. 4 From the Bluetooth screen, tap next to the device name. Send Feedback 103 MN002347A01-B Chapter 6: Radio Services Figure 49: Bluetooth Paired Devices 5 Tap Unpair. Figure 50: Unpair Complete 104 Send Feedback Return to Process Radio Services on page 101 MN002347A01-B Chapter 6: Radio Services Send Feedback 105 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B Messaging Chapter 7 Messaging Use Messaging to send and receive SMS and MMS messages. From Home or All Apps screen, tap
. Related Links Sending a Text Message on page 107 Sending a Multimedia Message on page 108 7.1 Sending a Text Message When and where to use: Use this procedure to send text messages. Procedure:
1 In the main Messaging screen, tap The New Message screen displays. Figure 51: New Message Screen
. 2 In the To field, enter a name or a mobile phone number. 3 In the Type message field, enter the text message. Send Feedback 107 MN002347A01-B Chapter 7: Messaging Messages are limited to 160 characters. When the limit is approached, a counter displays, above the Send control, showing how many characters are left. If the limit is reached and the user keeps typing, a new message is created, which is joined with its predecessors when received. If the user presses the Back button while composing a message, it is saved as a draft in the Messaging screen. Tap the conversation to resume composing it. 4 Tap to send the message. Return to Process Messaging on page 107 7.2 Sending a Multimedia Message When and where to use: Use this procedure to send multimedia messages. NOTICE: Multimedia messaging is only supported when the device is in Public network mode. Procedure:
1 In the main Messaging screen, tap
. The New Multimedia Message screen displays. Figure 52: New Multimedia Message Screen 2 In the To field, enter a name or a mobile phone number. 3 Tap to attach the media file of your choice:
Pictures Select a picture to attach. 108 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 7: Messaging Capture picture Camera opens to take a picture and attach it. Videos Select a video to attach. Capture video Camcorder opens to record a video and attach it to the message. Audio Choose a sound file to attach. Record audio Sound Recorder opens to record a spoken message and attach it to the message. Slideshow Opens a screen to assemble text, photos, videos, and recordings into a slideshow of up to 10 slides to attach to the message. 4 Tap to send the message. Return to Process Messaging on page 107 Send Feedback 109 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B Applications Chapter 8 Applications This chapter describes the applications installed on the LEX L10i. Normally, you access the applications through the Home screen overlay by clicking the the Home screen up from the icon to reveal the icon. icon. Swipe NOTICE: Runtime Permissions: User can now directly manage application permissions at runtime. Related Links Applications on page 111 Using File Browser on page 113 Camera on page 114 Gallery on page 123 8.1 Applications The Apps screen displays icons for all installed applications. Table 7: Applications Icon Description AOSP Browser Use to access the Internet or agency intranet. Calculator Provides the basic and scientific arithmetic functions. Camera / Video Recorder Take photos or record videos. For more information, see Cam-
era on page 114. Clock / Alarms Use to set an alarm, stop-
watch, or timer. Downloads Lists all downloads files. Email Use to send and receive email. File Browser - Use to view and manage files. Gallery Use to view photos stored on the mi-
croSD card. For more information, see Gallery on page 123 for more information. Table continued Send Feedback 111 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Icon Description Messaging Send SMS and MMS messages. See Messaging on page 107 for more informa-
tion. Motorola Device Management Enables staging and management of the device for initial use by initiating the deployment of settings, firmware, and software from a server. For more information, see the LEX L10i Service Provi-
sioning Guide. Motorola TechDocs Use to view device on-
device documentation. MVPN Enables the Motorola Solutions Mo-
bile VPN (MVPN). People Use to manage contact information. Phone Use to make phone calls. See Calling on page 89 for more information. Protection Log 2-Step Verification, youll protect your account with both your password and your phone. Push-To-Talk Enables Push-to-Talk serv-
ices over a broadband network and intercon-
nected to Project 25 Land Mobile Radio (LMR) networks to enable PTT interoperability be-
tween broadband and P25 radio users (availa-
ble only if PTT application is installed and acti-
vated on the LEX 10ig). Radio Services Use to pair Operations Criti-
cal Wireless Push-to-Talk (PTT) Pod. Radio Management Link Client Enables connecting the device to a remote host comput-
er for staging, firmware installation, application installation, and application removal by techni-
cal support. See the Radio Management Online Help for more information on the RM Tool. Redwall Logging - Displays security violations that have been logged on this device. Settings Use to configure the device. Software Licensing Licensing for software installed on the device. Return to Process Applications on page 111 112 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications 8.2 Using File Browser Use the File Browser application to view and manage files on the device. To open File Browser, tap Figure 53: File Browser Screen
. The address bar indicates the current folder path. Tap the current folder path to manually enter a path and folder name. Tap Tap Tap to select multiple files/folder. to view the internal storage root folder. to view the microSD card root folder. to view the previous folder or to exit the application. Information View detailed information about the file or folder. Tap Tap and hold an item to perform an operation on that item. Select one of the options from the File Operations menu:
Move Move the file or folder to a new location. Copy Copy the select file. Delete Delete the selected file. Rename Rename the select file. Open as Open the selected file as a specific file type. Share Share the file with other devices. Tap to open additional functionality:
Tap the key New Folder to create a new folder in the current folder. Tap the key Search to search for a file or folder. Tap the key Sort to sort the list by name, by type, by size or by date. Tap the key Refresh to re-display the contents of the current folder. Send Feedback 113 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Tap the key List View to change the folder view from tile to list format Tap the key Change Size to change the size of the icons: Large, Normal or Small. Tap the key About File Browser to view the application version information. Return to Process Applications on page 111 8.3 Camera This section provides information for taking photos and recording videos using the integrated digital cameras. NOTICE: If a microSD card is installed, the device saves photos and videos on the microSD card. If a microSD card is not installed, the LEX L10i saves photos and videos on the internal storage. Figure 54: Camera Photo Screen Table 8: Camera Icons and Actions Call Out 1 2 114 Icon Camera Options Shutter Action Tap to select Camera, Video, or Panorama mode. Tap to take a photo, a panor-
amic photo, or to record a vid-
eo. Table continued Send Feedback Call Out 3 Icon Photo Settings Action Tap to select camera settings. MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Return to Process Applications on page 111 Related Links Taking Photos on page 115 Taking a Panoramic Photo on page 117 Recording Videos on page 118 Camera Settings on page 118 Video Settings on page 121 8.3.1 Taking Photos When and where to use: Use this procedure to take photos. NOTICE: For camera settings, see Camera Settings on page 118. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. The Camera screen is displayed. Figure 55: Camera Screen Send Feedback 115 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications 2 If necessary, tap to open the Camera Option bar and select Camera icon. Figure 56: Camera Option Bar for settings. 3 Tap 4 Frame the subject on screen. 5 To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. The zoom controls appear on the screen. Figure 57: Camera Zoom 6 Tap
. The camera brings the image into focus. When the image is in focus, the focus indicators (top and bottom of screen) turn green and the camera takes a photo. Return to Process Camera on page 114 116 Send Feedback 8.3.2 Taking a Panoramic Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to create a single wide image by panning slowly across a scene. MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the Camera Options bar and tap
. Figure 58: Panoramic Mode 3 Frame one side of the scene to capture. Figure 59: Panoramic Frame 4 Tap and slowly start panning across the area to capture. A small white square appears inside the button the shot is in progress. If panning too quickly, the message Too fast displays. 5 Tap to end the shot. The panorama is displayed and a progress indicator displays while it saves the image. Send Feedback 117 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Return to Process Camera on page 114 8.3.3 Recording Videos When and where to use: Use this procedure to record videos. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the Camera Options bar and tap
. Figure 60: Video Mode 3 To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. NOTICE: Video zoom works the same as camera zoom. 4 Point the camera and frame the scene. 5 Tap to start recording. The device starts recording the video. The video time remaining appears in the top left of the screen. 6 Tap to end recording. Return to Process Camera on page 114 8.3.4 Camera Settings When you are in Photo mode, photo settings are displayed on the screen. Tap to display the photo settings options. 118 Send Feedback Figure 61: Camera Settings MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications The available photo settings are (from left icon to right icon):
Turn High Dynamic Range (HDR) on or off. Three screens of More Options. Settings for each option depend on the selected option. Click these icons to display more options. Some options require selecting a setting from a menu. Set these options accordingly. NOTICE: These options are similar to the camera options seen on most cameras. Set accordingly.
- First More Options Screen. Send Feedback 119 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Figure 62: First More Options Screen
- Second More Options Screen. Figure 63: Second More Options Screen
- Third More Options Screen. 120 Send Feedback Figure 64: Third More Options Screen MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Switch from front to rear camera or from rear to front camera. Return to Process Camera on page 114 8.3.5 Video Settings When in Video mode, video settings are displayed on screen. Tap options. to display the video settings Send Feedback 121 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Figure 65: Video Settings The available video settings are (from left icon to right icon):
Two screens of More Options. Settings for each option depend on the selected option. You can select an item from a menu or you select an option by clicking it. NOTICE: These options are similar to the video options seen on most cameras. Set the video options accordingly.
- First More Options Screen. Figure 66: First More Options Video Screen
- Second More Options Screen. 122 Send Feedback Figure 67: Second More Options Video Screen MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Switch from front to rear video or from rear to front video. Return to Process Camera on page 114 8.4 Gallery The Gallery is used to manage your photos and videos. NOTICE: The device supports the following image formats: JPEG, GIF, PNG, and BMP. Use the Gallery to:
View photos Play videos Perform basic editing of photos Set photos as wallpaper Set photos as a contact photo Share photos and videos To open the Gallery application, tap The Gallery presents all photos and videos stored on the microSD card and internal memory. Send Feedback 123 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Figure 68: Gallery Albums Tap an album to open it and view its contents. The photos and videos in the album are displayed in chronological order. Tap a photo or video in an album to view it. Tap icon (top left corner) to return to the main Gallery screen. Tap to return to the main Gallery screen. Return to Process Applications on page 111 Related Links Working with Albums on page 124 Working with Photos on page 126 Working with Videos on page 130 Using Sound Recorder on page 132 Voice Dialer on page 134 8.4.1 Working with Albums Albums are groups of images and videos in folders. Tap an album to open it. The photos and videos are listed in a chronologically ordered grid. The name of the album displays at the top of the screen. 124 Send Feedback Figure 69: Photos/Videos Inside an Album MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Swipe left or right to scroll images across the screen. Return to Process Gallery on page 123 Related Links Sharing an Album on page 125 Getting Album Information on page 126 Deleting an Album on page 126 8.4.1.1 Sharing an Album When and where to use: Use this procedure to share an album in your Gallery. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap and hold an album until it highlights. 4 Tap other albums as required. 5 Tap
. Share applications are displayed. 6 Select the application that you want to use. 7 Follow the instructions within the selected application. Send Feedback 125 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Return to Process Working with Albums on page 124 8.4.1.2 Getting Album Information When and where to use: Use this procedure to view information about an album. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap and hold an album until it highlights. 4 Tap . 5 Tap Details. Return to Process Working with Albums on page 124 8.4.1.3 Deleting an Album When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete an album that you no longer need. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap and hold an album until it highlights. 4 Tap . 5 Tap Delete. 6 Tap OK to delete the album. Return to Process Working with Albums on page 124 8.4.2 Working with Photos Use Gallery to view photos on the microSD card and edit and share photos. Return to Process Gallery on page 123 Related Links Viewing and Browsing Photos on page 127 Rotating a Photo on page 128 Cropping a Photo on page 128 126 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon on page 129 Sharing a Photo on page 130 Deleting a Photo on page 130 8.4.2.1 Viewing and Browsing Photos When and where to use: Use this procedure to view or browse photos that you have taken. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a photo. Figure 70: Photo Example 5 Swipe left or right to view the next or previous photo in the album. 6 Turn the LEX L10i to view the photo in upright (portrait) or sideways (landscape) orientation. The photo is displayed (but not saved) in the new orientation. 7 Tap the photo to view the controls. 8 Double-tap the screen to zoom in or pinch two fingers together or spread them apart to zoom in or out. 9 Drag the photo to view parts that are not in view. Return to Process Working with Photos on page 126 Send Feedback 127 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications 8.4.2.2 Rotating a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to rotate a photo. Procedure:
1 Tap a photo to view the controls. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap
. 4 Tap
. The photo rotates 90 clockwise. Each tap rotates the photo another 90. The photo is automatically saved with the new orientation. Return to Process Working with Photos on page 126 8.4.2.3 Cropping a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to crop a photo. Procedure:
1 In the Gallery, tap a photo to view the controls. 2 Tap 3 Tap 4 Tap
. The cropping grid displays. 128 Send Feedback Figure 71: Cropping Grid MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications 5 Adjust the endpoints to select the portion of the photo to crop. 6 Tap CROP to save a copy of the cropped photo. The original version is retained. Return to Process Working with Photos on page 126 8.4.2.4 Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon When and where to use: Use this procedure to set a photo as a contact icon. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap the photo to open it. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Set picture as. 7 Select a contact. 8 Crop the photo accordingly as described in Cropping a Photo on page 128. 9 Tap SAVE. Send Feedback 129 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Return to Process Working with Photos on page 126 8.4.2.5 Sharing a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to share a photo. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a photo to open it. 5 Tap 6 Tap the application to use for sharing the selected photo (for example Bluetooth). Return to Process Working with Photos on page 126 8.4.2.6 Deleting a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete a photo. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a photo to open it. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Delete. 7 Tap OK to delete the photo. Return to Process Working with Photos on page 126 8.4.3 Working with Videos Use the Gallery to view videos on the microSD card and share videos. Return to Process Gallery on page 123 130 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Related Links Watching a Video on page 131 Sharing a Video on page 131 Deleting a Video on page 132 8.4.3.1 Watching a Video When and where to use: Use this procedure to watch a video. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a video. 5 Tap
. The video begins to play. 6 Tap the screen to view the playback controls. Figure 72: Video Playback Controls 7 Tap the Pause control. 8 Tap to return to the previous screen or to return to the Home screen. Return to Process Working with Videos on page 130 8.4.3.2 Sharing a Video When and where to use: Use this procedure to share a video. Procedure:
1 Tap
. Send Feedback 131 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a video to open it. 5 Tap
. The Share menu appears. 6 Tap the application to use to share the selected video. The selected application opens with the video attached to a new message. Return to Process Working with Videos on page 130 8.4.3.3 Deleting a Video When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete a video. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a video to open it. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Delete. 7 Tap OK. Return to Process Working with Videos on page 130 8.4.4 Using Sound Recorder Use Sound Recorder to record audio messages. Recordings are saved on the microSD card (if installed) or the Internal Storage and available in the Music application playlist titled My Recordings. The recording process is done in four stages. 1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap to start a recording. 132 Send Feedback Figure 73: Start Recording MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications 4 Record your message. Figure 74: Record Your Message 5 Tap 6 Tap Done to save the recording. to stop recording. Send Feedback 133 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications Figure 75: Finish Recording Return to Process Gallery on page 123 8.4.5 Voice Dialer Voice Dialer is a speech dialog system that provides natural human interface for users to communicate seamlessly with the device. Users can make phone calls, look up contact information, launch programs or check calendars. 1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. The following window displays. Figure 76: Voice Dialer Window 3 Say one of the following commands:
Call 134 Send Feedback Dial Redial Open Return to Process Gallery on page 123 Related Links Calling a Person by Name on page 135 Redialing a Previous Call on page 135 Dialing by Number on page 136 Opening an Application on page 136 8.4.5.1 Calling a Person by Name When and where to use: Use this procedure to call a person by name. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say the name of the person that you want to call (for example, John Doe). 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap Call John Doe. The call is initiated. Return to Process Voice Dialer on page 134 8.4.5.2 Redialing a Previous Call When and where to use: Use this procedure to redial a previous call. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say Redial. 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap Redial. The call is initiated. Return to Process Voice Dialer on page 134 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications 135 MN002347A01-B Chapter 8: Applications 8.4.5.3 Dialing by Number When and where to use: Use this procedure to dial a number using the phone number. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Say Dial<[phone number]>. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap the number that displays. The call is initiated. Return to Process Voice Dialer on page 134 8.4.5.4 Opening an Application When and where to use: Use this procedure to open an application. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Say Open<[application name]>. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap the application name. The application opens. Return to Process Voice Dialer on page 134 136 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Wireless Chapter 9 Wireless This section provides information on the wireless features of the LEX L10i. Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Bluetooth Related Links Wireless Wide Area Networks on page 137 Wireless Local Area Networks on page 145 Bluetooth Device on page 152 9.1 Wireless Wide Area Networks Use Wireless Wide Area Networks (WWANs) to access data over a cellular network. This section provides information on:
Setting the preferred network Public / Private Sharing a data connection Enabling / Disabling data roaming Monitoring data usage Limiting connections to 2G, 3G, 4G networks Editing Access Point Names (APNs) Adding Virtual Private Network VPN Cellular broadcasts Return to Process Wireless on page 137 Related Links Sharing the Mobile Data Connection on page 137 Data Usage on page 141 Disabling Data When Roaming on page 142 Limiting Data Connection to a Network on page 143 Editing Access Point Names on page 143 Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN) on page 144 Cell Broadcasts on page 145 9.1.1 Sharing the Mobile Data Connection The Tethering & portable hotspot settings allow you to share your data connection. You can share theLEX L10i mobile data connection with a single computer via USB tethering or Bluetooth tethering. Send Feedback 137 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless You can also share the data connection with up to eight devices at once, by turning it into a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. While the device is sharing its data connection, an icon appears at the top of the screen and a corresponding message appears in the notification list. Return to Process Wireless Wide Area Networks on page 137 Related Links Configuring USB Tethering on page 138 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering on page 139 Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings on page 139 9.1.1.1 Configuring USB Tethering Use this procedure to share a data connection with a host computer. NOTICE: USB tethering is not supported on computers running Mac OS. If your computer is running Windows 7 or a recent version of Linux (such as Ubuntu), follow these instructions without any special preparation. If running a version of Windows that precedes Windows 7, or some other operating system, you may need to prepare the computer to establish a network connection via USB. NOTICE: After connecting to a computer using USB tethering, the computer disconnects from the network connection, for a short time, and does not have access to the Internet (the LEX L10i becomes the primary network adapter). Procedure:
1 Connect the LEX L10i to a host computer with the USB cable. Figure 77: USB Cable Connection to Host Computer A USB icon device appears briefly at the top of the screen. appears at the top of the screen, and the notification Connected as a media 2 Tap
. 3 Tap 4 Tap More ... 138 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 5 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 6 Check USB tethering. The host computer is now sharing the LEX L10i data connection. Postrequisites: To stop sharing the data connection, uncheck USB tethering or disconnect the USB cable. NOTICE: The USB cover needs to be fully seated after use. Return to Process Sharing the Mobile Data Connection on page 137 9.1.1.2 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering Prerequisites: Configure the host computer to obtain its network connection using Bluetooth. For more information, see the host computers documentation. When and where to use: Use this procedure to tether Bluetooth to share the data connection with a host computer. Procedure:
1 Pair the LEX L10i with the host computer. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap 4 Tap More ... 5 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 6 Check Bluetooth tethering. The host computer is now sharing the LEX L10i data connection. Postrequisites: To stop sharing the data connection, uncheck Bluetooth tethering . Return to Process Sharing the Mobile Data Connection on page 137 9.1.1.3 Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings Prerequisites: Configure the Wi-Fi Hotspot settings. When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn your LEX L10i into a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. Send Feedback 139 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 5 Select Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. After a moment, the LEX L10i starts broadcasting its Wi-Fi network name (SSID), so you can connect to it with up to eight computers or other devices. Postrequisites: To stop sharing the data connection, uncheck Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Return to Process Sharing the Mobile Data Connection on page 137 Related Links Configuring the Wi-Fi Hotspot on page 140 9.1.1.3.1 Configuring the Wi-Fi Hotspot When and where to use: Use this procedure is used to configure a Wi-Fi hotspot. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 5 Tap Set up Wi-Fi hotspot. The Set up Wi-Fi hotspot screen displays. Figure 78: Set up Wi-Fi Hotspot Dialog Box 140 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 6 In the Network SSID text field, edit the network name. 7 Tap the Security option and select a security method from the drop-down list. Open WPA2 PSK. 8 In the Password text field, enter a password. NOTICE: If Open is selected in the Security option, a password is not required. 9 Tap Save. Return to Process Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings on page 139 9.1.2 Data Usage Data usage refers to the amount of data uploaded or downloaded by the LEX L10i during a given period. Depending on the wireless plan, you may be charged additional fees when your data usage exceeds your plan's limit. To monitor your data usage, go to Data usage. CAUTION: The usage displayed on the data usage settings screen is measured by your device. Your carrier's data usage accounting may differ. Usage in excess of your carrier plan's data limits can result in steep overage charges. The feature described here can help you track your usage, but is not guaranteed to prevent additional charges. Identify mobile hotspots and restrict background downloads that may result in extra charges. Data usage settings allow you to:
Set the data usage level at which you' will receive a warning. Set a data usage limit. View or restrict data usage by app. By default, when you open the data usage settings screen you see the settings for mobile data: that is, the data network or networks provided by your carrier. Just below the on-off switch, note the data usage cycle. Tap it to choose a different cycle. This date range is the period of time for which the graph displays data usage. The vertical white lines on the graph show a period of time within the data usage cycle. This range determines the usage amount displayed just below the graph. Drag lines to change the period. Return to Process Wireless Wide Area Networks on page 137 Related Links Setting Data Usage Warning on page 142 Setting Auto-Sync on page 142 Send Feedback 141 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 9.1.2.1 Setting Data Usage Warning When and where to use: Use this procedure to set data usage warning. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Data usage. 4 Check Set mobile data limit. 5 Drag the red line up/down to the level where you want to limit. 6 Drag the orange line up/down to the level where you want to receive a warning. When your data usage reaches this level, you' will receive a notification. Return to Process Data Usage on page 141 9.1.2.2 Setting Auto-Sync You can also conserve data usage by syncing your apps manually, only when you need the data, rather than relying on auto-sync. When and where to use: Use this procedure to set Auto-Sync. Procedure:
To turn auto-sync off or on, tap Auto-sync data. Return to Process Data Usage on page 141 9.1.3 Disabling Data When Roaming When and where to use: Use this procedure to prevent the LEX L10i from transmitting data over other carriers mobile networks when leaving an area that is covered by the carriers networks. This is useful for controlling expenses if the service plan does not include data roaming. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Un-check Data roaming. 6 Tap
. 142 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless Return to Process Wireless Wide Area Networks on page 137 9.1.4 Limiting Data Connection to a Network You can limit the device Private or Public services or extend the battery life by limiting the data connections to Global networks, LTE networks, or CDMA networks. NOTICE: This feature is only available on some networks. Check with service provider. When and where to use: Use this procedure to limit data connection to a network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Tap Network Mode. 6 Select Global mode, LTE only, or CDMA only . 7 Tap
. Return to Process Wireless Wide Area Networks on page 137 9.1.5 Editing Access Point Names When and where to use: When network information needs to change, the user can edit the APN information. If a new SIM card is added that does not have the required APN configured, to configure see Switching Modes Using the Power Button on page 62. NOTICE: Many service provider Access Point Name (APN) data are pre-configured in the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Tap Access Point Names. 6 Tap . 7 When finished, tap . 8 Tap Save. 9 Tap the radio button next to the new APN name to start using it. Send Feedback 143 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 10 Tap
. Return to Process Wireless Wide Area Networks on page 137 9.1.6 Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN) A virtual private network (VPN) extends a private network across a public network. VPN enables the LEX L10i to communicate data across a public network while benefiting from the functionality and security of the private network. When connected by VPN, the LEX L10i establishes a virtual point-to-
point connection through a dedicated virtual tunneling protocols or data encryption. The LEX L10i enables connection to Basic VPN to communicate through any VPN and to Motorola Solutions Mobile VPN (MVPN) to communicate through Motorola Solutions mobile VPN. This section describes adding a basic VPN. Motorola Mobile VPN is added and configured by your technical support and requires license certification for use. When and where to use: Use this procedure to add a virtual private network to the LEX L10i (not including the Motorola Mobile VPN). Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap VPN. 5 Tap Basic VPN . 6 Tap + to add VPN profile. 7 Enter and check:
Name Type Server Address If required, check PPP encryption (MPPE). If required, check Show advanced options to enter:
DNS servers DNS search domains Forwarding routs on the status bar and the Choose Certification screen 8 Tap Save. Connection to VPN is indicated by is displayed. 9 Check My Keychain and tap Allow. 10 Tap
. Return to Process Wireless Wide Area Networks on page 137 144 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 9.1.7 Cell Broadcasts Cell Broadcasts allows emergency alert messages to be broadcast simultaneously from a service provider to multiple users in within a designated geographical area. Broadcasts are often used for weather updates, regional events, traffic conditions and other services. When and where to use: Use this procedure to enable emergency alert messages by cell broadcasts on the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap Cell broadcasts. 5 Check the emergency alert types you want to receive. 6 Tap
. Return to Process Wireless Wide Area Networks on page 137 9.2 Wireless Local Area Networks Wireless local area networks (WLANs) allow the LEX L10i to communicate wirelessly inside a building. Before using the LEX L10i on a WLAN, the facility must be set up with the required hardware to run the WLAN (sometimes known as infrastructure). The infrastructure and the LEX L10i must both be properly configured to enable this communication. See the documentation provided with the infrastructure (access points (APs), access ports, switches, Radius servers) for instructions on how to set up the infrastructure. Once the infrastructure is set up to enforce the chosen WLAN security scheme, use the Wireless &
networks settings to configure the LEX L10i to match the security scheme. The device supports the following WLAN security options:
Open Wireless Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)/WPA2 Personal (PSK) Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
- Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) with Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 (MSCHAPv2) and Generic Token Card (GTC) authentication.
- EAP-Transport Layer Security (TLS)
- EAP-TTLS - with Password Authentication Protocol (PAP), MSCHAP and MSCHAPv2 authentication The Status bar displays icons that indicate Wi-Fi network availability and Wi-Fi status. NOTICE: Turn off Wi-Fi when not using it, to extend the life of the battery. Send Feedback 145 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless Return to Process Wireless on page 137 Related Links Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network on page 146 Configuring a Wi-Fi Network on page 147 Adding a Wi-Fi Network on page 148 Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network on page 149 Advanced Wi-Fi Settings on page 150 WLAN Configuration on page 150 Modifying a Wi-Fi Network on page 151 Removing a Wi-Fi Network on page 151 9.2.1 Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to scan for and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. Figure 79: Settings Screen 3 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the ON position. 4 Tap Wi-Fi. The device searches for WLANs in the area and lists them. 146 Send Feedback Figure 80: Wi-Fi Screen MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 5 Scroll through the list and select the desired WLAN network. 6 For open networks, tap profile once or press and hold and then select Connect to network or for secure networks enter the required password or other credentials then tap Connect. See technical support for more information. The LEX L10i obtains a network address and other required information from the network using the dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) protocol. 7 In the Wi-Fi setting field, Connected displays indicating that the device is connected to the WLAN. Return to Process Wireless Local Area Networks on page 145 9.2.2 Configuring a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to configure a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the switch to the ON position. The LEX L10i searches for WLANs in the area and lists them on the screen. 5 Scroll through the list and select the desired WLAN network. Send Feedback 147 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 6 Tap the desired network. If the network security is Open, the device automatically connects to the network. For all other network security a dialog box appears. Figure 81: WLAN Network Security Dialog Boxes NOTICE: By default, the network Proxy is set to None and the IP settings is set to DHCP. 7 If the network security is WEP or WPA/WPA2 PSK, enter the required password and then tap Connect. 8 If the network security is 802.1x EAP, enter the information below and then tap Connect:
Tap the EAP method drop-down list and select PEAP, TLS, or TTLS. Tap the Phase 2 authentication drop-down list and select an authentication method. If required, tap CA certificate and select a Certification Authority (CA) certificate. Note:
Certificates are installed using the Security settings. If required, tap User certificate and select a user certificate. Note: User certificates are installed using the Location & security settings. If required, in the Identity text box, enter the username credentials. If desired, in the Anonymous identity text box, enter an anonymous identity username. If required, in the Password text box, enter the password. 9 Tap
. Return to Process Wireless Local Area Networks on page 145 9.2.3 Adding a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: You can add a Wi-Fi Network that is currently out of range or indiscoverable. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 148 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the On position. 5 Tap +. 6 Enter network SSID and select Security. 7 Tap Save. The device connects to the wireless network. 8 Tap
. Return to Process Wireless Local Area Networks on page 145 9.2.4 Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to manually add a Wi-Fi network if the network does not broadcast its name (SSID) or to add a Wi-Fi network when out of range. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the ON position. 5 Tap + in the bottom right corner of the screen. By default, the network Proxy is set to None and the IP settings is set to DHCP. 6 In the Network SSID text box, enter the name of the Wi-Fi network. 7 In the Security drop-down list, select the type of security. Options included are:
None WEP WPA/WPA2 PSK 802.1x EAP 8 If the network security is None, tap Save. 9 If the network security is WEP or WPA/WPA2 PSK, enter the required password and then tap Save. 10 If the network security is 802.1x EAP enter the information below and then tap Save:
Tap EAP method drop-down list and select PEAP, TLS, or TTLS. Tap Phase 2 authentication drop-down list and select an authentication method. Tap CA certificate and select a Certification Authority (CA) certificate. NOTICE: Certificates are installed using the Security settings. Send Feedback 149 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless Tap User certificate and select a user certificate. NOTICE: User certificates are installed using the Security settings. Tap Identity to enter the username credentials. Tap Anonymous to enter an anonymous identity username. Tap Password to enter password. 11 Tap
. Return to Process Wireless Local Area Networks on page 145 9.2.5 Advanced Wi-Fi Settings Use the Advanced settings to configure additional Wi-Fi settings. NOTICE: Advanced Wi-Fi settings are for the device not for a specific wireless network. From the Wi-Fi screen, tap Advanced to view the advanced settings. Network notification When enabled, notifies the user when an open network is available. Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep Opens a menu to set whether and when the Wi-Fi radio turns off.
- Always The radio stays on when the device enters suspend mode.
- Only when plugged in The radio stays on while the device is connected to external power.
- Never (increases data usage) The radio turns off when the device enters suspend mode
(default). Wi-Fi optimization Minimize the battery usage when Wi-Fi is on. Avoid poor Connection Connects to the internet only if connection is good. MAC address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the device when connecting to Wi-Fi networks. IP address Displays the IP address of the device when connecting to Wi-Fi networks. Return to Process Wireless Local Area Networks on page 145 9.2.6 WLAN Configuration Use the WLAN Configuration settings to configure additional WLAN settings. From the Wi-Fi screen, tap Advanced to view the settings. The following two settings are used to configure WLAN:
Wi-Fi frequency band
- Auto (2.4GHz and 5GHz) Use both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (default).
- 5GHz Only Use only the 5 GHz band.
- 2.4GHz Only Use only the 2.4 GHz band. Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep 150 Send Feedback
- Always Wi-Fi is always enabled even in sleep mold.
- Only when plugged in Wi-Fi is enabled only when the device is plugged in. If the device is not plugged in, the device will not enter the sleep mold.
- Never (increases data usage) Wi-Fi is never disabled. MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless Return to Process Wireless Local Area Networks on page 145 9.2.7 Modifying a Wi-Fi Network The user can change settings and passwords for a network in the Wi-Fi list. When and where to use: Use this procedure to modify a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the ON position. 5 Tap and hold on a network name and then tap Modify network. 6 Modify the network settings and then tap Save. 7 Tap
. Return to Process Wireless Local Area Networks on page 145 9.2.8 Removing a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to remove a Wi-Fi network from your list of Wi-Fi networks. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 In the Wi-Fi networks list, tap and hold the name of the network. 5 In the menu, tap Forget network. 6 Tap
. Return to Process Wireless Local Area Networks on page 145 Send Feedback 151 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 9.3 Bluetooth Device The LEX L10i supports Motorola Operations Critical Wireless (OCW) Push-to-talk Pod (NNTN8127) and Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) through a wireless Bluetooth connection. Return to Process Wireless on page 137 Related Links Adaptive Frequency Hopping on page 152 Bluetooth Security on page 152 Bluetooth Profiles on page 153 Bluetooth Power States on page 154 Bluetooth Radio Power for Android on page 154 Changing the Bluetooth Name on page 155 Discovering Bluetooth Devices on page 156 Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device on page 157 9.3.1 Adaptive Frequency Hopping Adaptive Frequency Hopping (AFH) is a method of avoiding fixed frequency interferers, and can be used with Bluetooth voice. All devices in the piconet (Bluetooth network) must be AFH-capable in order for AFH to work. There is no AFH when connecting and discovering devices. Avoid making Bluetooth connections and discoveries during critical 802.11b communications. AFH for Bluetooth consists of four main sections:
Channel Classification - A method of detecting an interference on a channel-by-channel basis, or pre-defined channel mask. Link Management - Coordinates and distributes the AFH information to the rest of the Bluetooth network. Hop Sequence Modification - Avoids interference by selectively reducing the number of hopping channels. Channel Maintenance - A method for periodically re-evaluating the channels. The Bluetooth radio in this device operates as a Class 2 device power class. The maximum output power is 2.5 mW and the expected range is 10 meters (32.8 ft.). A definition of ranges based on power class is difficult to obtain due to power and device differences, and whether one measures open space or closed office space. NOTICE: It is not recommended to perform Bluetooth wireless technology inquiry when high rate 802.11b operation is required. Return to Process Bluetooth Device on page 152 9.3.2 Bluetooth Security The current Bluetooth specification defines security at the link level. Application-level security is not specified. This allows application developers to define security mechanisms tailored to their specific need. Link-level security occurs between devices, not users, while application-level security can be 152 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless implemented on a per-user basis. The Bluetooth specification defines security algorithms and procedures required to authenticate devices, and if needed, encrypt the data flowing on the link between the devices. Device authentication is a mandatory feature of Bluetooth while link encryption is optional. Pairing of Bluetooth devices is accomplished by creating an initialization key used to authenticate the devices and create a link key for them. Entering a common personal identification number (PIN) in the devices being paired generates the initialization key. The PIN is never sent over the air. By default, the Bluetooth stack responds with no key when a key is requested (it is up to user to respond to the key request event). Authentication of Bluetooth devices is based-upon a challenge-response transaction. Bluetooth allows for a PIN or passkey used to create other 128-bit keys used for security and encryption. The encryption key is derived from the link key used to authenticate the pairing devices. Also worthy of note is the limited range and fast frequency hopping of the Bluetooth radios that makes long distance eavesdropping difficult. Recommendations are:
Perform pairing in a secure environment Keep PIN codes private and do not store the PIN codes in the device Implement application-level security Return to Process Bluetooth Device on page 152 9.3.3 Bluetooth Profiles The LEX L10i supports the following Bluetooth services:
Generic Access Profile (GAP) Use for device discovery and authentication. Service Discovery Protocol (SDAP) Handles the search for known and specific services and general services. Serial Port Profile (SPP) Sets up a virtual serial port and connects two Bluetooth enabled devices. For example, connecting the device to a printer. Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Allows Bluetooth keyboards, pointing devices, gaming devices and remote monitoring devices to connect to the device. Object Push Profile (OPP) Allows the device to push and pull objects to and from a push server. Dial-up Networking (DUN) Allows the device to access the Internet and other dial-up services using a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. Hands-Free Profile (HFP) Allows a hands-free device, such as a Bluetooth headset, to place and receive calls on the device. Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Allows the device to stream stereo-quality audio to a wireless headset or wireless stereo speakers. Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Allows the device to control televisions, hi-fi equipment, etc. General Object Exchange Profile (GOEP) Provides a basis for other data profiles. Based on OBEX and sometimes referred to as such. Handsfree Profile (HFP) Allow car hands-free kits to communicate with mobile phones in the car. Personal Area Network (PAN) Allow the use of Bluetooth Network Encapsulation Protocol on Layer 3 protocols for transport over a Bluetooth link. General Audio/Video Distribution Profile (GAVDP) Provides the basis for A2DP, and VDP. Send Feedback 153 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP) Allows exchange of Phone Book Objects between a car kit and a mobile phone to allow the car kit to display the name of the incoming caller; allow the car kit to download the phone book so the user can initiate a call from the car display. Message Access Profile (MAP) allows exchange of messages between devices. Headset Profile (HSP) Provides support for the popular Bluetooth headsets to be used with mobile phones with ability to ring, answer a call, hang up and adjust the volume. File Transfer Profile (FTP) Provides the capability to browse, manipulate and transfer files and folders in a file system of another system. Proximity profile (PXP) Enables proximity monitoring between two devices. Heart Rate Profile (HRP) Enables transmission and reception of medical device data. Health Thermometer profile (HTP) Enables transmission and reception of medical device data. Return to Process Bluetooth Device on page 152 9.3.4 Bluetooth Power States The Bluetooth radio is off by default. The following modes are available:
Suspend When the device goes into suspend mode, the Bluetooth radio stays on. Airplane Mode When the device is placed in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio turns off. When Airplane Mode is disabled, the Bluetooth radio returns to the prior state. When in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio can be turned back on if desired. Return to Process Bluetooth Device on page 152 9.3.5 Bluetooth Radio Power for Android Turn off the Bluetooth radio to save power or if entering an area with radio restrictions (e.g., an airplane). When the radio is off, other Bluetooth devices cannot see or connect to the device. Turn on the Bluetooth radio to exchange information with other Bluetooth devices (within range). Communicate only with Bluetooth radios in close proximity. NOTICE: To achieve the best battery life, turn off radios when not in use. Return to Process Bluetooth Device on page 152 Related Links Enabling Bluetooth on page 155 Disabling Bluetooth on page 155 154 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 9.3.5.1 Enabling Bluetooth When and where to use: Use this procedure to enable Bluetooth. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Slide the Bluetooth switch to the ON position. also appears in the Status bar. 4 Tap
. Return to Process Bluetooth Radio Power for Android on page 154 9.3.5.2 Disabling Bluetooth Use this procedure to disable Bluetooth. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Slide the Bluetooth switch to the OFF position. 4 Tap
. Return to Process Bluetooth Radio Power for Android on page 154 9.3.6 Changing the Bluetooth Name By default, the LEX L10i has a generic Bluetooth name that is visible to other devices when connected. When and where to use: Use this procedure to change the Bluetooth name. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. Bluetooth. 3 Tap 4 If Bluetooth is not on, slide the switch to the ON position. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Rename Phone. 7 Enter a name and tap Rename. 8 Tap
. Send Feedback 155 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless Return to Process Bluetooth Device on page 152 9.3.7 Discovering Bluetooth Devices The LEX L10i can receive information from discovered devices without pairing. However, once paired, the device and a paired device exchange information automatically when the Bluetooth radio is on. To find Bluetooth devices in the area:
Prerequisites: Ensure that Bluetooth is enabled on both devices. Ensure that the Bluetooth device to discover is in discoverable mode. Ensure that the two devices are within 10 meters (32.8 feet) of one another. When and where to use: Use this procedure to discover Bluetooth devices. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Bluetooth. 4 Tap SEARCH FOR DEVICES. The LEX L10i begins searching for discoverable Bluetooth devices in the area and displays them under AVAILABLE DEVICES. 5 Scroll through the list and tap a device. The Bluetooth pairing request dialog box displays. NOTICE: When pairing with Low Energy (LE) Bluetooth Devices, such as consumer grade accessories, the pairing request prompt will only display if the device is configured for secure Bluetooth. This prompt will always display when pairing with Mission Critical Wireless Bluetooth (non-LTE) accessories, such as Remote Speaker Microphones
(RSM). 156 Send Feedback Figure 82: Bluetooth Pairing MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless 6 Tap Pair on both devices. The Bluetooth device is added to the Bluetooth devices list and a trusted (paired) connection is established. Return to Process Bluetooth Device on page 152 9.3.8 Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device Some Bluetooth devices have multiple profiles for different connections. When and where to use: Use this procedure to select a profile on the Bluetooth device that connects to the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Bluetooth. 4 In the AVAILABLE DEVICES list, tap 5 Under PROFILES, select a profile to use. next to the device name. 6 Tap
. Send Feedback 157 MN002347A01-B Chapter 9: Wireless Return to Process Bluetooth Device on page 152 158 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B ADB and USB Driver Setup Chapter 10 ADB and USB Driver Setup This chapter describes how to set up the Android Debug Bridge (ADB) and USB driver for your Windows PC. The ADB and USB driver are required to perform Fastboot OS updates and to capture debug logs using ADB. They are also used to push files onto a device and for APK installation. Related Links Required Software and Hardware on page 159 Installing USB Driver and ADB on page 159 10.1 Required Software and Hardware In order to install the ADB and USB driver, certain software and hardware requirements must be met. Hardware (one of the following)
- Windows PC running Window 8
- Windows PC running Window 7 32/64 bits
- Windows PC running Windows XP SP3 with Micro-B USB Cable Software
(contains ADB and USB drivers)
-
- Android SDK (adb utility) installation procedure available at the following link: https://
developer.android.com/sdk/installing/index.html?pkg=tools Return to Process ADB and USB Driver Setup on page 159 10.2 Installing USB Driver and ADB Prerequisites: Ensure all old USB drivers are removed before beginning this procedure. When and where to use: Use this procedure to install the USB driver and ADB. Procedure:
1 Insert the provided ADB USB Driver CD into a CD or DVD drive. 2 Click the Start button and select Computer. Send Feedback 159 MN002347A01-B Chapter 10: ADB and USB Driver Setup Figure 83: Access Computer 3 Open the CD drive and copy to your desktop. 4 Extract the file copied on your desktop to C:\Program Files (x86) or any other location in your OS installation drive where you prefer to keep the driver, and then select OK. Figure 84: Select Destination 5 Enable USB debugging in your device by:
a On the , navigate to Settings About Phone and click the build number seven times to enable developer options. 160 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 10: ADB and USB Driver Setup b Tap to return to Settings; then, tap Developer options and click the checkbox for USB Debugging. c Click OK when prompted to allow USB debugging. 6 Configure the driver in the Device Manager. a On your computer, click the Start button and search for Device Manager and open it. Figure 85: Access Device Manager b Find Android under Other devices right-click and select Update Driver Software. Figure 86: Select Update Drive Software c Select Browse my computer for driver software. Send Feedback 161 MN002347A01-B Chapter 10: ADB and USB Driver Setup Figure 87: Select Browse my computer for driver software d Click Browse and select the folder where the driver was extracted (that is, or the custom path chosen by you at the time of extracting the file. e Click OK and then click Next. f If prompted, select Install this driver software anyway. Figure 88: Select Install this driver software anyway g Click Close to complete the installation. 162 Send Feedback Figure 89: Close the Installation MN002347A01-B Chapter 10: ADB and USB Driver Setup The driver is now installed. 7 Set up the ADB USB profile on your PC as follow-up with these steps:
a After driver installation, make sure there is a .android folder in your user profile directory. b If you have installed and run ADB for the device before, run adb kill- server before you can use the ADB. c To see if ADB installs successfully, run adb devices from the command line. Return to Process ADB and USB Driver Setup on page 159 Send Feedback 163 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B Accessories Chapter 11 Accessories This chapter provides information for using the accessories associated with the LEX series device. Related Links Accessories on page 165 USB Cable on page 165 Desktop Cradle on page 166 Vehicle Cradle on page 167 Holster on page 167 11.1 Accessories This section lists the LEX L10i accessories along with specifications. General Accessories:
Replaceable Standard Battery Li-Ion 2340 mAh 3.7V Replaceable High-capacity Battery Pack Li-Ion 4680 mAh 3.7V Handheld Standard Battery Door Handheld Extended Battery Door LEX L10i Auto Charge (Vehicle Power Adapter) Power Supply Carry Accessory Glove LEX L10i Rubber Sleeve Desktop Cradle Vehicle Cradle USB Cable Holster Return to Process Accessories on page 165 11.2 USB Cable A USB cable is necessary to connect your LEX L10i to a charger. The USB cable:
Connects the device to a USB charger to charge the LEX L10i. Provides USB communication with a host computer. When the LEX L10i is connected to a host computer, the device appears as a removable disk on the host computer. Send Feedback 165 MN002347A01-B Chapter 11: Accessories Figure 90: USB Cable Return to Process Accessories on page 165 11.3 Desktop Cradle A desktop cradle provides an alternative method to charge your . The desktop cradle:
Provides power for charging and operating the device. Enables connecting a mouse to the device. Figure 91: Desktop Cradle Charging the To charge the device, insert the units by placing the bottom of the device, at a slight forward angle, into the cradle. The LED shows the status of the battery charging. See Battery Charge LED Status for charging status indications. The 2280 mAh battery charges in approximately four hours. Charge the device in temperatures from 0C to +45C (32F to 113F) ). Note that charging is intelligently controlled by the device. To accomplish this, for small periods of time, the alternately enables and disables battery charging to keep the battery at acceptable temperatures. The device indicates when charging is disabled due to abnormal temperatures via its notification LED. Return to Process Accessories on page 165 166 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 11: Accessories 11.4 Vehicle Cradle Install the vehicle mount on the surface of the vehicle that is reasonably flat and free of dirt and oil. Clean the mounting surface with a glass cleaner and a clean cotton cloth. Install the vehicle mount on the windshield or other flat car surface. CAUTION: Some states prohibit the mounting of any electronic device in any location on the vehicle dashboard. Be sure to check with local laws acceptable mounting areas before installing the auto mounting kit. Figure 92: Vehicle Cradle Return to Process Accessories on page 165 11.5 Holster Use the holster to securely carry the LEX L10i when working. The holster is threaded through a belt and stores the device when not in use or when using a headset. Figure 93: Holster Insert the device into the holster with the screen facing in or out. Send Feedback 167 MN002347A01-B Chapter 11: Accessories Return to Process Accessories on page 165 168 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Maintenance and Troubleshooting Chapter 12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing the device, and provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during device operation. Related Links Maintaining the LEX Series Device on page 169 Battery Safety Guidelines on page 169 Cleaning Guidelines on page 170 Cleaning the LEX Series Device on page 171 Cleaning the Interface Connector on page 172 Cleaning the Battery Contacts on page 172 Troubleshooting on page 173 Back Up or Restore Data on Your Device on page 175 Resetting the LEX Device on page 178 12.1 Maintaining the LEX Series Device For trouble-free service, observe the following tips when using the LEX L10i:
Do not scratch or use a pen or a pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the screen. The touch-sensitive screen is made of polycarbonate. Do not to drop or subject the device to strong impact. Protect from extreme temperatures. Do not leave device on the dashboard of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from heat sources. Do not store in any location that is dusty, damp, or wet. Use a soft lens cloth to clean the device. If the surface of the screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol. Periodically replace the rechargeable battery to ensure maximum battery life and product performance. Battery life depends on individual usage patterns. Return to Process Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 12.2 Battery Safety Guidelines Adhere to the following guidelines for battery safety:
The area where the units are charged should be clear of debris and combustible materials or chemicals. Follow battery usage, storage, and charging guidelines found in this guide. To charge the battery, the battery and charger temperatures must be between +32 F and +113 F Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard.
(0 C and +45 C) Send Feedback 169 MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Use of an incompatible battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If you have any questions about the compatibility of a battery or a charger, contact Motorola Solution support. If charging through a USB port, the device shall only be connected to products that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the USB-IF compliance program. To enable authentication of an approved battery, as required by IEEE1725 clause 10.2.1, all batteries will carry a Motorola hologram. Do not fit any battery without checking it has the Motorola authentication hologram. Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture, or shred. Severe impact from dropping any battery-operated device on a hard surface could cause the battery to overheat. Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids, or expose to fire, explosion, or other hazard. Do not leave or store the equipment in or near areas that might get very hot, such as in a parked vehicle or near a radiator or other heat source. Do not place battery into a microwave oven or dryer. Battery usage by children should be supervised. Follow local regulations to properly dispose of used rechargeable batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in fire. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area with large amounts of water and seek medical advice. If you suspect damage to your equipment or battery, contact Motorola Solutions support to arrange for inspection. Return to Process Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 12.3 Cleaning Guidelines This section includes cleaning guidelines for the LEX L10i. WARNING: Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, unplug the device and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines. Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, unplug the device and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines. CAUTION:
Always wear eye protection. Read the warning labels on compressed air and alcohol products before use. If you have to use any other solution for medical reasons, contact Motorola Solutions for more information. Approved Cleanser Active Ingredients 100% of the active ingredients in any cleaner must consist of one or a combination of the following:
isopropyl alcohol, or mild dish soap. 170 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Cleaning Instructions Do not apply liquids directly to the device. Dampen a soft cloth or use pre-moistened wipes. Do not wrap the device in the cloth or wipe, but gently wipe the unit Harmful Ingredients Many vinyl gloves contain phthalate additives, which are often not recommended for medical use and are known to be harmful to the housing of the device. The device should not be handled while wearing vinyl gloves containing phthalates, or before hands are washed to remove contaminant residue after gloves are removed. If products containing the harmful ingredients are used before handling the device, such as hand sanitizers containing ethanolamine, hands must be completely dry before handling the device to prevent damage to the plastics. Cleaning Materials Required Alcohol wipes Lens tissue Cotton-tipped applicators Can of compressed air with a tube Isopropyl alcohol Cleaning Frequency The cleaning frequency is up to your discretion due to the varied environments in which the mobile devices are used. They may be cleaned as frequently as required, but it is advisable to clean the camera window periodically when used in dirty environments to ensure optimum performance. Return to Process Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 12.4 Cleaning the LEX Series Device This section includes instructions on how the LEX L10i should be cleaned. Housing Using the alcohol wipes, wipe the housing including buttons. Display The display can be wiped down with the alcohol wipes, but care should be taken not to allow any pooling of liquid around the edges of the display. Immediately dry the display with a soft, non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking. Camera Window Wipe the camera window periodically with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses. Return to Process Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 Send Feedback 171 MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 12.5 Cleaning the Interface Connector When and where to use: Use this procedure To clean the contacts of the interface connector on LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Power off the device. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator along the contacts of the interface connector. Slowly move the applicator back-and-forth from one side of the connector to the other. 4 If grease and other dirt can be found on other areas of the cradle, remove using a lint-free cloth and alcohol. 5 Allow few minutes (depending on ambient temperature and humidity) for the alcohol to air dry before powering on the device. Return to Process Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 12.6 Cleaning the Battery Contacts When and where to use: Perform this procedure to clean the battery connectors. Procedure:
1 Remove the main battery from device. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Gently, rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the contacts. Do not leave any cotton residue on the contacts. 4 Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the contacts area. 5 Use a dry cotton-tipped applicator and repeat steps 4 and 5 at least three times. CAUTION: Do not point nozzle at yourself and others. Ensure that the nozzle or tube is away from your face. 6 Spray compressed air on the connector area by pointing the tube/nozzle about inch away from the surface. 7 Inspect the area for any grease or dirt, repeat if required. Return to Process Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 172 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 12.7 Troubleshooting This section lists common problems and solutions to fix the problems. Table 9: Troubleshooting the LEX Series Device Problem Cause Solution After pressing the Power button, does not turn on. After pressing the Power button, the device does not turn on but a charge battery icon Appears. After connecting the device to a Ca-
ble, a battery charging icon Ap-
pears. When charging, the LED slowly blinks red. Battery is completely discharged. Battery not installed properly. Power button not held down long enough. Device not responding. Battery charge level is very low. Battery is de-
pleted but is charging. Re-charge or replace the battery. Install the battery properly. See Installing the Battery. Press the Power button until the Motorola Solutions splash screen is displayed. Reset the device. Re-charge or replace the battery. Press and hold the Power button to turn on. The device is at an ex-
tremely low-
power state. Charge the device for a few minutes. The LED changes to flashing green then press the Power button to turn on the device. If LED continuously blinks red, check power con-
nections. Disconnect and reconnect connections. Battery did not charge. Battery failed. Replace battery. If the device still does not operate, per-
form a hardware reset. Device was removed from power while battery was charg-
ing. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Device re-
moved from USB cable or Insert device in cradle or attach Charge Cable. The 2280 mAh battery fully charges in approximately four hours. Battery does not charge if ambient temperature is below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Reattach the communication cable and re-transmit. Table continued 173 During data com-
munication with a host computer, no Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Problem Cause Solution data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. During data com-
munication over Wi-
Fi, no data trans-
mitted, or transmit-
ted data was in-
complete. During data com-
munication over Bluetooth, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. During data com-
munication over Public / Private, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. No sound. Device turns off. disconnected from host computer during com-
munication. Incorrect ca-
ble configura-
tion. Wi-Fi radio is not on. You moved out of range of an access point. Bluetooth ra-
dio is not on. You moved out of range of another Bluetooth de-
vice. You are in an area of poor cellular serv-
ice. VPN is not set up cor-
rectly. SIM card not installed properly. See technical support. Turn on the Wi-Fi radio. Move closer to an access point. Turn on the Bluetooth radio. Move without 10 m (32.8 ft.) of the other device. Move into an area that has better service. See technical support for VPN setup information. Remove and re-install the SIM cards. Data plan not activated. Contact your service provider and ensure that your data plan is enabled. Volume set-
ting is low or turned off. Device is in-
active. Battery is de-
pleted. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Adjust the volume. The display turns off after a period of inactivity. Set this pe-
riod to 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 5, 10, or 30 minutes. Recharge or replace the battery. Move device to an area where the ambient temperature is between 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Table continued 174 Send Feedback Problem Cause Solution MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting A message ap-
pears stating not enough storage memory. Device cannot find any Bluetooth devi-
ces nearby. Too many applications installed on the device. Too far from other Blue-
tooth devi-
ces. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) near-
by are not turned on. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) are not in discov-
erable mode. Remove user-installed applications on the device to recov-
er memory. Select Select the unused programs and tap Uninstall. Apps Downloaded. Move closer to the other Bluetooth device(s), within a range of 10 meters (32.8 feet). Turn on the Bluetooth device(s) to find. Set the Bluetooth device(s) to discoverable mode. If nee-
ded, refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device (acces-
sory) user manual.. Return to Process Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 12.8 Back Up or Restore Data on Your Device Back up data on LEX L10i manually or by exporting VC files, or restore data on your device by managing android settings. Return to Process Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 Related Links Backing Up the LEX Series Device Manually on page 175 Backing up Contacts with Android on page 176 12.8.1 Backing Up the LEX Series Device Manually Backing up the LEX L10i must be done manually. Prerequisites: A USB cable to connect the device to a computer. When and where to use: Use this procedure anytime a backup is necessary. Procedure:
1 Connect the device to a computer using the supplied USB cable. The first time you connect to a computer the following message is displayed:
Installing Device Driver Software After the driver software is installed, the following message is displayed:
Your device is ready to use Send Feedback 175 MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 2 Click the Start button and then select Computer. 3 Select the LEX L10i Portable Device. 4 Select Internal storage. 5 Navigate to the files that you want to back up. 6 Copy the files/folders to a secure location on your computer. Return to Process Back Up or Restore Data on Your Device on page 175 12.8.2 Backing up Contacts with Android To back up contacts, the contacts must be exported to a VCF file which must be copied to a secure location. Prerequisites: Contacts must exist in the contact list. When and where to use: Use this procedure to periodically back up your contacts. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap
. 4 Tap . 5 Select Import/export. 176 Send Feedback Figure 94: Import/Export Contacts Popup MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 6 Select Export to storage. Figure 95: Export Confirmation Popup Send Feedback 177 MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 7 Tap OK to export the contacts. The VCF file is saved to the location indicated. 8 Follow the procedure under Backing Up the LEX Series Device Manually on page 175 to complete the contacts backup. Return to Process Back Up or Restore Data on Your Device on page 175 12.9 Resetting the LEX Device Use this procedure to reset the LEX L10i. When and where to use: If the device does not operate properly, perform the following procedure. Procedure:
1 Power off and on the device and verify if the problem is gone. The device restarts. If the problem remains, perform Step 2. CAUTION: To avoid erasing important data from your device, do not press any of the buttons during power up. 2 Remove the battery, reinsert it, and verify if the problem is gone. The device restarts. If the problem remains, perform factory data reset. Return to Process Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 169 Related Links Performing Factory Data Reset on page 178 12.9.1 Performing Factory Data Reset A factory data reset is a software restore of the LEX L10i to its original manufacturer settings. Before resetting the device, back up your data. Factory data reset erases all your personal data from the LEX L10i memory and microSD card including: configuration, contents, accounts, installed applications, user settings, music, photos, videos, installed licenses, pre-loaded application updates, DM bootstrapping data, integrated and pre-loaded application configuration, post-loaded applications and user passwords. After reset is performed, re-enter your backed up information. When and where to use: Use this procedure to perform factory data reset:
CAUTION: Factory data reset is performed only by technical support as a last resort when the LEX L10i fails to operate. Before performing factory data reset, remove the SIM and microSD cards from the device. Performing factory data reset with a microSD or SIM cards installed may cause data corruption or loss. 178 Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 12: Maintenance and Troubleshooting NOTICE: Factory data reset configures the LEX L10i to public communication only. To return to combined Public and Private configuration, see your technical support. The last updated firmware and the initial version of pre-loaded applications are preserved through a reset to factory defaults. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Backup & reset. 4 Tap Factory data reset. The device powers off, powers on, then the system recovery screen appears. Return to Process Resetting the LEX Device on page 178 Send Feedback 179 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-B Technical Specifications Chapter 13 Technical Specifications The following table summarizes the LEX series operating, environment, and technical hardware specifications. Table 10: Technical Specifications Item Specification Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) 5.62 x 2.85 x 0.547 in 143 x 72.6 x 15 mm Weight Durability Display 195 g (6.88 Oz) including standard battery Continues to run after multiple drops to concrete from a height of 48 inches (121 cm) Drop tested using MIL-STD-810G Method 516.6, Procedure IV IP67 (1 meter water immersion for 30 minutes) 4.7 720p HD (720 x 1280) Capacitive touch screen Operating Temperature 14F to 131F (-10C to +55C)
-22F to 149F (-30C to +65C) 2.3 GHz Quad Core Processor Qualcomm MSM8974AA 4.7 720p HD (720X1280) Capacitive, touch screen 2 GB RAM 16 GB eMMC Expandable to 64GB with microSD card Rear 8MP Camera Auto Focus High-Output LED Flash Digital Zoom Front 2MP Camera Proximity Sensor Ambient Light Sensor Accelerometer Sensor Storage Temperature Hardware Processor Display Memory Camera Sensors Send Feedback Table continued 181 MN002347A01-B Chapter 13: Technical Specifications Item Ports Battery Software Operating System User Interface Messaging Web 4G/LTE Release Specification Barometer Sensor E-Compass USB 2.0 High-Speed 3.5 mm Audio Jack (stereo) Accessory/Charging Port Standard - 2340 mAH, Li Ion High Capacity - 4680 mAh, Li Ion AndroidMarshmallow 6.0 Public Safety Experience (PSX) Software SMS/MMS Email (Corporate Sync, POP3, IMAP, Push Email) Standard AOSP Browser 3GPP Release 9 Band Class 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 20, 26, 28 Output Power Bandwidth 3G Standards Bands 2G Standards Frequencies Wi-Fi Operating Band Standards Personal Area Networks Bluetooth 182 NOTICE: Band 2 is only supported in North America. 23 dBm +/- 2 dB (UE power class 3) Up to 20 MHz Broadband data throughput depends on network conditions HSPA +/-UMTS 1,2,4,5,8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 1900 MHz 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz 802.11 a/b/g/n BT Core 4.1 BR/EDR Secure Connections BT Core 4.2 LE Secure Connections Profiles:
HSP AG Table continued Send Feedback Item Specification MN002347A01-B Chapter 13: Technical Specifications SPP FTP AVRCP DUN GW OPP Client/Server GAVDP Acceptor/Initiator/Source PAN NAP/PANU HID Host A2DP HFP AG PBAP PSE MAP MSE HTP Client FMP Client PXP Client HRP Client HOGP Client Custom API:
BT-MPP API Collaborative Mode Configuration file (SC only mode, LE mandatory pairing) HCI Pass Through API MCW API (SCO management) PTT API Standalone GPS Assisted GPS (aGPS) Supports OMA-DM (Open Mobile Alliance Device Management) H.263, H.264, MPEG-4 SP, VP8, JPEG (.jpg), GIF (.gif), PNG (.png), BMP (.bmp), WebP (.webp) Formats supported for playback, streaming and recording GPS Location Services Device Management Remote Management and Configuration Video and Imaging Supported Formats Supported File Types 3GPP (.3gp), MPEG-4 (.mp4), WebM (.webm), (.mkv) Video Recording Quality 1080p HD up to 30 frames per second (fps) NOTICE: Video and images are time stamped for evidence documentation. Audio Supported Formats MP3, WAVE, AAC, AMR-NB, AMR-WB, FLAC, MIDI, Vorbis Supported File Types MP3 (.mp3), WAVE (.wav), 3GPP (.3gp), MPEG-4 (.mp4, m4a), ATDS raw AAC (.aac), Send Feedback Table continued 183 MN002347A01-B Chapter 13: Technical Specifications Item Specification Output MPEG-TS (.ts) FLAC (.flac), MIDI (.mid, .xmf, .mxmf), RTTTL/RTX (.rtttl, rtx), OTA (.ota), iMelody (imy), Ogg (.ogg), Matroska
(.mkv) Dual 1 Watt Front-Facing Speakers, 106 dB Sound Pressure Level (SPL) 3.5 mm audio jack (stereo) Bluetooth (A2DP stereo) Input Quick Access Leather Holster Triple Noise and Echo Cancelling Microphones Dimensions (H x W x D) 5.7 x 3.5 x 2.0 in
(145 x 90 x 50 mm) Specifications subject to change. Table 11: General Accessories Item Desktop Cradle Impact-Rated Vehicle Cradle Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Environmental Specification 6.0 x 5.0 x 3.5 in (152 x 128 x 89 mm) 6.1 x 3.0 x 2.2 in (155 x 76 x 56 mm) 12.8 Oz (363 g) 4.8 Oz (135 g) Operating Temperature 32F to 113F (0C to +45C)
-4F to 131F (-20C to +55C) Storage Temperature Humidity Durability Salt Fog Vibration Drop Shock (Functional) Shock (Crash Hazard) ESD Solar Radiation Liquid Resistance Safety Regulatory 184
-40 F to 158F (-40C to 70C) 95% at 113F (45C) for 8 hours (non-condensing)
-40 F to 185F (-40C to
+85C) 95% at 131F (55C) for 8 hours (non-condensing) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes, MIL-STD-810G, 75G im-
pact Yes Yes Yes Table continued Send Feedback MN002347A01-B Chapter 13: Technical Specifications Desktop Cradle US: UL60950 Impact-Rated Vehicle Cradle US: UL60950 FCC part 15, Subpart B, Class B28a FCC part 15, Subpart B, Class B28b ANSI/UL-94 and ASTM Stand-
ards ANSI/UL-94 and ASTM Stand-
ards External power supply input 100- 240VAC output 5.0VDC 1.2A 12V-24V, 5.0VDC, 1.2A 5.0 VDC, 1.2A 5.0VDC 5.0 VDC, 1.2A 5.0VDC With device insertion With device insertion Item Electrical Safety EMI/RFI ANSI C63.4 2009 Flammability Electrical Power Supply Power Input DC Output Power On Optional Accessories Vehicle Ram Mount Kit Specifications subject to change. Send Feedback 185 This page intentionally left blank.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual LEV L10i | Users Manual | 1.15 MiB |
LEX L10i Mission Critical Handheld User Guide JANUARY 2016 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved MN002347A01-A MN002347A01-A Copyrights Copyrights The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a particular system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a particular mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. Send Feedback 3 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A Contact Us Contact Us Motorola Solution Support Center The Solution Support Center (SSC) is the primary Motorola Solutions support contact. Call:
Before any software reload. To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before removing and replacing a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) and Field Replaceable Entity (FRE) to repair the system. For... United States Calls International Calls Phone 800-221-7144 302-444-9800 North America Parts Organization For assistance in ordering replacement parts or identifying a part number, contact the Motorola Parts organization. Your first response when troubleshooting your system is to call the Motorola SSC. For... Phone Orders Fax Orders Phone 800-422-4210 (US and Canada Orders) For help identifying an item or part number, select choice 3 from the menu. 302-444-9842 (International Orders) Includes help for identifying an item or part number and for translation as needed. 800-622-6210 (US and Canada Orders) Comments Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. Provide the following information when reporting a documentation error:
The document title and part number The page number with the error A description of the error We welcome your feedback on this and other Motorola manuals. To take a short, confidential survey on Motorola Customer Documentation, go to docsurvey.motorolasolutions.com or scan the following QR code with your mobile device to access the survey. Send Feedback 5 MN002347A01-A Contact Us Latest Manual Versions You can verify the latest version of this manual at https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. 6 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Document History Document History Version MN002347A01-
A Description Initial release of the LEX L10i Mission Critical Handheld User Guide. Date January 2016 Send Feedback 7 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A Contents Contents Copyrights................................................................................................................... 3 Contact Us................................................................................................................... 5 Document History....................................................................................................... 7 List of Figures............................................................................................................15 List of Tables............................................................................................................. 19 List of Procedures.....................................................................................................21 Chapter 1: About this Guide.....................................................................................25 Contact Us................................................................................................................................... 25 Versions.......................................................................................................................................26 Operating System Version................................................................................................ 26 Software Build Number..................................................................................................... 26 Kernel Version.................................................................................................................. 26 Chapter Descriptions................................................................................................................... 26 Helpful Background Information.................................................................................................. 27 Notational Conventions................................................................................................................27 Icon Conventions......................................................................................................................... 27 Regulatory Information................................................................................................................ 28 Service Information......................................................................................................................28 Documentation Set...................................................................................................................... 29 Chapter 2: Getting Started .......................................................................................31 Features.......................................................................................................................................31 Unpacking....................................................................................................................................33 Setting Up the LEX L10i.............................................................................................................. 33 Removing the Screen Protective Film...............................................................................34 Removing the Battery Cover.............................................................................................34 Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card................................................. 35 Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card........................................................................ 35 Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards......................................................................36 Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards....................................................................36 Installing the Battery......................................................................................................... 37 Removing the Battery....................................................................................................... 37 Charging the LEX L10i.................................................................................................................37 Charging Temperature......................................................................................................38 Battery Charge Indications................................................................................................38 Battery Management.........................................................................................................39 Send Feedback 9 MN002347A01-A Contents Monitor Battery Usage........................................................................................... 40 Low Battery Notification......................................................................................... 41 Battery Optimization...............................................................................................41 Powering On the LEX L10i for the First Time.............................................................................. 43 Powering Off the LEX L10i.......................................................................................................... 43 Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode..................................................................................... 44 Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode........................................................................ 44 Covert Mode................................................................................................................................ 44 Turning On Covert Mode.................................................................................................. 45 Turning Off Covert Mode.................................................................................................. 45 Locking the LEX L10i...................................................................................................................46 Selecting a Locking Option............................................................................................... 46 Specifying a Pattern............................................................................................... 47 Specifying a PIN or Password................................................................................47 Setting the Timeout for Locking the LEX L10i........................................................47 Unlocking the LEX L10i.....................................................................................................48 Unlocking the LEX L10i Using a Pattern................................................................ 48 Unlocking the LEX L10i Using a PIN or Password.................................................48 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX L10i.................................................................... 49 Setting the Date and Time........................................................................................................... 49 Setting the Display.......................................................................................................................49 Setting Screen Brightness................................................................................................ 50 Setting Screen Rotation.................................................................................................... 50 Setting Up Sleep Mode..................................................................................................... 50 Setting Up Daydream........................................................................................................51 Setting the Font Size.........................................................................................................51 Enabling Cast Screen....................................................................................................... 52 Projecting the LEX L10i Screen on Another Device...............................................52 General Sound Setting................................................................................................................ 52 Public and Private Carrier Modes................................................................................................ 54 Switching Modes Using the Power Button........................................................................ 54 Switching Modes Using the Settings App......................................................................... 55 LEX L10i Emergency Button........................................................................................................56 Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i.................................................................................57 Using the Touchscreen................................................................................................................57 Using the On-Screen Keyboard...................................................................................................58 Android Keyboard Settings............................................................................................... 59 Motorola Solutions Home Experience (MHx)...............................................................................60 LEX L10i Home Screen.................................................................................................... 60 10 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Contents Home Screen Overlay............................................................................................61 Customizing the Home Screen......................................................................................... 61 Adding Widgets...................................................................................................... 61 Moving Widgets......................................................................................................67 Removing Widgets................................................................................................. 67 Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel..................................................... 68 Status Bar....................................................................................................................................68 Notification Icons......................................................................................................................... 69 LEX L10i Status Icons................................................................................................................. 70 Managing Notifications................................................................................................................ 71 Working with Status..................................................................................................................... 72 Quick Settings..............................................................................................................................73 Applications................................................................................................................................. 74 Folders.........................................................................................................................................76 Creating a Folder.............................................................................................................. 76 Naming Folders.................................................................................................................76 Removing a Folder............................................................................................................76 Accessing Files from a Computer................................................................................................77 Chapter 4: Calling......................................................................................................79 Making a Call Using the Dialer.................................................................................................... 80 Making a Call Using People List Contacts...................................................................................82 Making a Call Using Call History................................................................................................. 83 Making a Conference Call........................................................................................................... 84 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset.................................................................................. 87 Call Settings.................................................................................................................................87 Requesting an Emergency Alert..................................................................................................88 Chapter 5: Radio Services........................................................................................91 Pairing LEX L10i with Bluetooth Accessory.................................................................................91 Unpairing LEX L10i from Bluetooth Accessory............................................................................93 Chapter 6: Messaging...............................................................................................95 Sending a Text Message............................................................................................................. 95 Sending a Multimedia Message...................................................................................................96 Chapter 7: Applications............................................................................................99 Using File Browser.......................................................................................................................99 Managing People Contacts........................................................................................................100 Adding People.................................................................................................................100 Editing People.................................................................................................................100 Deleting People...............................................................................................................101 Camera......................................................................................................................................101 Send Feedback 11 MN002347A01-A Contents Taking Photos................................................................................................................. 102 Taking a Panoramic Photo..............................................................................................104 Recording Videos............................................................................................................105 Camera Settings............................................................................................................. 106 Video Settings.................................................................................................................108 Gallery....................................................................................................................................... 109 Working with Albums...................................................................................................... 110 Sharing an Album.................................................................................................111 Getting Album Information................................................................................... 111 Deleting an Album................................................................................................112 Working with Photos....................................................................................................... 112 Viewing and Browsing Photos..............................................................................112 Rotating a Photo.................................................................................................. 113 Cropping a Photo................................................................................................. 114 Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon........................................................................114 Sharing a Photo................................................................................................... 115 Deleting a Photo...................................................................................................115 Working with Videos....................................................................................................... 115 Watching a Video................................................................................................. 115 Sharing a Video....................................................................................................116 Deleting a Video...................................................................................................116 Using Sound Recorder.............................................................................................................. 117 Voice Dialer............................................................................................................................... 119 Calling a Person by Name.............................................................................................. 119 Redialing a Previous Call................................................................................................119 Dialing by Number.......................................................................................................... 120 Opening an Application...................................................................................................120 Chapter 8: Wireless.................................................................................................121 Wireless Wide Area Networks................................................................................................... 121 Sharing the Mobile Data Connection.............................................................................. 121 Configuring USB Tethering.................................................................................. 121 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering.......................................................................... 122 Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings........................................................123 Data Usage.....................................................................................................................124 Setting Data Usage Warning................................................................................125 Setting Auto-Sync................................................................................................ 125 Disabling Data When Roaming.......................................................................................125 Limiting Data Connection to a Network...........................................................................126 Editing the Access Point Name.......................................................................................126 12 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Contents Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN)......................................................................... 126 Cell Broadcasts...............................................................................................................127 Wireless Local Area Networks...................................................................................................128 Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network................................................................ 128 Configuring a Wi-Fi Network........................................................................................... 130 Adding a Wi-Fi Network.................................................................................................. 131 Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network...................................................................................131 Advanced Wi-Fi Settings.................................................................................................132 WLAN Configuration....................................................................................................... 133 Modifying a Wi-Fi Network.............................................................................................. 133 Removing a Wi-Fi Network............................................................................................. 133 Bluetooth Device........................................................................................................................134 Adaptive Frequency Hopping..........................................................................................134 Bluetooth Security...........................................................................................................134 Bluetooth Profiles............................................................................................................135 Bluetooth Power States.................................................................................................. 135 Bluetooth Radio Power for Android.................................................................................136 Enabling Bluetooth............................................................................................... 136 Disabling Bluetooth.............................................................................................. 136 Changing the Bluetooth Name........................................................................................136 Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device........................................................................ 137 Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup................................................................. 139 Required Software and Hardware............................................................................................. 139 Installing USB Driver and ADB.................................................................................................. 139 Chapter 10: Accessories........................................................................................ 145 Accessories............................................................................................................................... 145 USB Cable.................................................................................................................................145 Desktop Cradle.......................................................................................................................... 146 Vehicle Cradle........................................................................................................................... 146 Holster....................................................................................................................................... 147 Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting...................................................149 Maintaining the LEX L10i...........................................................................................................149 Battery Safety Guidelines.......................................................................................................... 149 Cleaning Guidelines...................................................................................................................150 Cleaning the LEX L10i...............................................................................................................151 Cleaning the Interface Connector.............................................................................................. 151 Cleaning the Battery Contacts................................................................................................... 151 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................152 Backing Up the LEX L10i...........................................................................................................154 Send Feedback 13 MN002347A01-A Contents Backing up Contacts....................................................................................................... 155 Resetting the LEX L10i..............................................................................................................157 Performing Factory Data Reset...................................................................................... 157 Chapter 12: Technical Specifications................................................................... 159 14 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1: Manufacturing Label................................................................................................................28 Figure 2: LEX L10i Features...................................................................................................................31 Figure 3: Removing the Screen Protective Film..................................................................................... 34 Figure 4: Removing the Battery Cover................................................................................................... 34 Figure 5: Installing the microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card.....................................................35 Figure 6: Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards............................................................................ 36 Figure 7: Installing the Battery................................................................................................................37 Figure 8: Charging the LEX L10i............................................................................................................ 38 Figure 9: Charge and Notification LED...................................................................................................38 Figure 10: Battery Screen.......................................................................................................................40 Figure 11: Low Battery Notification.........................................................................................................41 Figure 12: Battery Depleted Screen....................................................................................................... 41 Figure 13: Quick Settings Menu Airplane Mode................................................................................ 42 Figure 14: LEX L10i Boot Screen...........................................................................................................43 Figure 15: Selecting Power Off...............................................................................................................43 Figure 16: Power Button Menu...............................................................................................................45 Figure 17: Power Button Menu...............................................................................................................46 Figure 18: Sound Screen........................................................................................................................53 Figure 19: Volume Button.......................................................................................................................53 Figure 20: Service Switch.......................................................................................................................55 Figure 21: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup................................................................................... 55 Figure 22: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup................................................................................... 56 Figure 23: Android Keyboard Settings....................................................................................................58 Figure 24: Default Home Screen............................................................................................................ 60 Figure 25: Widgets Screen.....................................................................................................................62 Figure 26: Example of a Widget Added to New Panel........................................................................... 63 Figure 27: Empty My Apps Widget......................................................................................................... 64 Figure 28: List of Shortcuts for My Apps Widgets.................................................................................. 65 Figure 29: My Apps Widget with Shortcuts Added................................................................................. 66 Figure 30: My Status Widget.................................................................................................................. 66 Figure 31: Status Selection.................................................................................................................... 66 Figure 32: Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel.................................................................... 68 Figure 33: Status Bar..............................................................................................................................68 Figure 34: Notification Panel.................................................................................................................. 72 Figure 35: Quick Settings Panel.............................................................................................................73 Figure 36: Opened Unnamed Folder......................................................................................................76 Send Feedback 15 MN002347A01-A List of Figures Figure 37: Named Folder........................................................................................................................76 Figure 38: Notifications Screen.............................................................................................................. 77 Figure 39: MTP / PTP Selection Screen.................................................................................................78 Figure 40: Insert Wired Headset Plug.................................................................................................... 80 Figure 41: Dialer Screen.........................................................................................................................81 Figure 42: Call in Progress..................................................................................................................... 82 Figure 43: People List Contact............................................................................................................... 83 Figure 44: Call History Tab.....................................................................................................................84 Figure 45: Two Calls...............................................................................................................................85 Figure 46: Two Calls Connected............................................................................................................ 86 Figure 47: Merged Calls......................................................................................................................... 86 Figure 48: Emergency Alert Activation Popup........................................................................................89 Figure 49: Bluetooth Pairing Screen.......................................................................................................92 Figure 50: Bluetooth Device Screen.......................................................................................................92 Figure 51: Bluetooth Paired Devices Screen..........................................................................................93 Figure 52: Bluetooth Paired Devices......................................................................................................94 Figure 53: Unpair Complete................................................................................................................... 94 Figure 54: New Message Screen........................................................................................................... 95 Figure 55: New Multimedia Message Screen.........................................................................................96 Figure 56: File Browser Screen.............................................................................................................. 99 Figure 57: Camera Photo Screen.........................................................................................................102 Figure 58: Camera Screen................................................................................................................... 103 Figure 59: Camera Option Bar............................................................................................................. 103 Figure 60: Camera Zoom..................................................................................................................... 104 Figure 61: Panoramic Mode................................................................................................................. 104 Figure 62: Panoramic Frame................................................................................................................105 Figure 63: Video Mode......................................................................................................................... 105 Figure 64: Camera Settings..................................................................................................................106 Figure 65: First More Options Screen.................................................................................................. 107 Figure 66: Second More Options Screen............................................................................................. 107 Figure 67: Third More Options Screen................................................................................................. 108 Figure 68: Video Settings..................................................................................................................... 108 Figure 69: First More Options Video Screen........................................................................................ 109 Figure 70: Second More Options Video Screen................................................................................... 109 Figure 71: Gallery Albums............................................................................................................... 110 Figure 72: Photos/Videos Inside an Album.......................................................................................... 111 Figure 73: Photo Example....................................................................................................................113 Figure 74: Cropping Grid......................................................................................................................114 Figure 75: Video Playback Controls..................................................................................................... 116 16 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A List of Figures Figure 76: Start Recording................................................................................................................... 117 Figure 77: Record Your Message.........................................................................................................118 Figure 78: Finish Recording................................................................................................................. 118 Figure 79: Voice Dialer Window........................................................................................................... 119 Figure 80: USB Cable Connection to Host Computer.......................................................................... 122 Figure 81: Set up Wi-Fi Hotspot Dialog Box.........................................................................................124 Figure 82: Settings Screen...................................................................................................................129 Figure 83: Wi-Fi Screen........................................................................................................................129 Figure 84: WLAN Network Security Dialog Boxes................................................................................130 Figure 85: Access Computer................................................................................................................ 139 Figure 86: Access CD...........................................................................................................................140 Figure 87: Select Destination............................................................................................................... 140 Figure 88: Access Device Manager......................................................................................................141 Figure 89: Select Update Drive Software............................................................................................. 141 Figure 90: Select Browse my computer for driver software..................................................................142 Figure 91: Select Installation Folder..................................................................................................... 142 Figure 92: Select Install this driver software anyway............................................................................143 Figure 93: Close the Installation...........................................................................................................143 Figure 94: USB Cable...........................................................................................................................145 Figure 95: Desktop Cradle....................................................................................................................146 Figure 96: Vehicle Cradle.....................................................................................................................146 Figure 97: Holster.................................................................................................................................147 Figure 98: Contacts Menu.................................................................................................................... 155 Figure 99: Import/Export Contacts Popup............................................................................................ 156 Figure 100: Export Confirmation Popup............................................................................................... 156 Send Feedback 17 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A List of Tables List of Tables Table 1: LEX L10i Features....................................................................................................................31 Table 2: Charge and Notification LED Charging Indications..............................................................38 Table 3: Using the Touchscreen.............................................................................................................57 Table 4: Android Keyboard Settings.......................................................................................................59 Table 5: Notification Icons...................................................................................................................... 69 Table 6: Status Icons..............................................................................................................................70 Table 7: Applications.............................................................................................................................. 74 Table 8: Camera Icons and Actions..................................................................................................... 102 Table 9: Troubleshooting the LEX L10i................................................................................................ 152 Table 10: Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................159 Table 11: General Accessories............................................................................................................ 161 Send Feedback 19 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A List of Procedures List of Procedures Removing the Battery Cover ................................................................................................................. 34 Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card ...................................................................... 35 Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card .............................................................................................35 Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards .......................................................................................... 36 Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards ........................................................................................ 36 Installing the Battery ..............................................................................................................................37 Removing the Battery ............................................................................................................................37 Turning Off the Radio ............................................................................................................................ 42 Powering Off the LEX L10i .................................................................................................................... 43 Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode ............................................................................................... 44 Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode .............................................................................................44 Turning On Covert Mode .......................................................................................................................45 Turning Off Covert Mode ....................................................................................................................... 45 Selecting a Locking Option ....................................................................................................................46 Specifying a Pattern .............................................................................................................................. 47 Specifying a PIN or Password ............................................................................................................... 47 Setting the Timeout for Locking the LEX L10i ....................................................................................... 47 Unlocking the LEX L10i Using a Pattern ............................................................................................... 48 Unlocking the LEX L10i Using a PIN or Password ................................................................................48 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX L10i ......................................................................................... 49 Setting the Date and Time .....................................................................................................................49 Setting Screen Brightness .....................................................................................................................50 Setting Screen Rotation .........................................................................................................................50 Setting Up Sleep Mode ..........................................................................................................................50 Setting Up Daydream ............................................................................................................................ 51 Setting the Font Size ............................................................................................................................. 51 Enabling Cast Screen ............................................................................................................................52 Projecting the LEX L10i Screen on Another Device ..............................................................................52 Switching Modes Using the Power Button .............................................................................................54 Switching Modes Using the Settings App ..............................................................................................55 Adding Widgets ..................................................................................................................................... 61 Adding Shortcuts to the My Apps Widget .............................................................................................. 63 Changing My Status .............................................................................................................................. 66 Moving Widgets .....................................................................................................................................67 Removing Widgets ................................................................................................................................ 67 Creating a Folder ...................................................................................................................................76 Send Feedback 21 MN002347A01-A List of Procedures Naming Folders ..................................................................................................................................... 76 Removing a Folder ................................................................................................................................ 76 Accessing Files from a Computer ..........................................................................................................77 Making a Call Using the Dialer .............................................................................................................. 80 Making a Call Using People List Contacts .............................................................................................82 Making a Call Using Call History ........................................................................................................... 83 Making a Conference Call ..................................................................................................................... 84 Requesting an Emergency Alert ............................................................................................................88 Pairing LEX L10i with Bluetooth Accessory ...........................................................................................91 Unpairing LEX L10i from Bluetooth Accessory ......................................................................................93 Sending a Text Message .......................................................................................................................95 Sending a Multimedia Message ............................................................................................................ 96 Adding People ..................................................................................................................................... 100 Editing People ..................................................................................................................................... 100 Deleting People ................................................................................................................................... 101 Taking Photos ......................................................................................................................................102 Taking a Panoramic Photo .................................................................................................................. 104 Recording Videos ................................................................................................................................ 105 Sharing an Album ................................................................................................................................111 Getting Album Information ...................................................................................................................111 Deleting an Album ............................................................................................................................... 112 Viewing and Browsing Photos .............................................................................................................112 Rotating a Photo ..................................................................................................................................113 Cropping a Photo .................................................................................................................................114 Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon .......................................................................................................114 Sharing a Photo ...................................................................................................................................115 Deleting a Photo ..................................................................................................................................115 Watching a Video ................................................................................................................................ 115 Sharing a Video ...................................................................................................................................116 Deleting a Video .................................................................................................................................. 116 Calling a Person by Name ...................................................................................................................119 Redialing a Previous Call .................................................................................................................... 119 Dialing by Number ...............................................................................................................................120 Opening an Application ....................................................................................................................... 120 Configuring USB Tethering ..................................................................................................................121 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering ..........................................................................................................122 Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings ....................................................................................... 123 Configuring the Wi-Fi Hotspot ............................................................................................................. 123 Setting Data Usage Warning ...............................................................................................................125 22 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A List of Procedures Setting Auto-Sync ................................................................................................................................125 Disabling Data When Roaming ........................................................................................................... 125 Limiting Data Connection to a Network ............................................................................................... 126 Editing the Access Point Name ........................................................................................................... 126 Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN) .............................................................................................. 126 Cell Broadcasts ................................................................................................................................... 127 Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network .....................................................................................128 Configuring a Wi-Fi Network ................................................................................................................130 Adding a Wi-Fi Network .......................................................................................................................131 Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network ....................................................................................................... 131 Modifying a Wi-Fi Network ...................................................................................................................133 Removing a Wi-Fi Network ..................................................................................................................133 Enabling Bluetooth .............................................................................................................................. 136 Disabling Bluetooth ..............................................................................................................................136 Changing the Bluetooth Name ............................................................................................................ 136 Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device .............................................................................................137 Installing USB Driver and ADB ............................................................................................................ 139 Cleaning the Interface Connector ........................................................................................................151 Cleaning the Battery Contacts .............................................................................................................151 Backing Up the LEX L10i .....................................................................................................................154 Backing up Contacts ............................................................................................................................155 Resetting the LEX L10i ........................................................................................................................157 Performing Factory Data Reset ........................................................................................................... 157 Send Feedback 23 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A About this Guide Chapter 1 About this Guide This guide provides information about using the LEX L10i Mission Critical Handheld and accessories. NOTICE: Screens and menu options may be changed or customized by your agency to show different information. Contact Us The Solution Support Center (SSC) is the primary Motorola Solutions support contact. Motorola Solution Support Center Call the SSC:
Before any software reload. To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before removing and replacing a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) and Field Replaceable Entity (FRE) to repair the system. For... United States Calls International Calls Phone 800-221-7144 302-444-9800 North America Parts Organization For assistance in ordering replacement parts or identifying a part number, contact the Motorola Parts organization. Your first response when troubleshooting your system is to call the Motorola SSC. For... Phone Orders Fax Orders Phone 800-422-4210 (US and Canada Orders) For help identifying an item or part number, select choice 3 from the menu. 302-444-9842 (International Orders) Includes help for identifying an item or part number and for translation as needed. 800-622-6210 (US and Canada Orders) Comments Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. Provide the following information when reporting a documentation error:
The document title and part number The page number with the error A description of the error Send Feedback 25 MN002347A01-A Chapter 1: About this Guide We welcome your feedback on this and other Motorola manuals. To take a short, confidential survey on Motorola Customer Documentation, go to docsurvey.motorolasolutions.com or scan the following QR code with your mobile device to access the survey. Versions This guide covers various software configurations and references are made to operating system or software versions discussed in the following three subsections. Operating System Version The Operating System for the LEX L10i is the Android Operating System. To determine the Operating System version, from the Home screen touch Android Version. The last line provides the Android version information. For example: 4.4.4. About phone Software Build Number This topic has information on how to find the software build number of your LEX L10i. To determine the software build number, from the Home screen touch Build Number. About phone Kernel Version The Kernel version can be found in the Settings application. To determine the kernel version, from the Home screen, touch version. About phone Kernel Chapter Descriptions This guide provides information on the features listed in the chapter descriptions below:
About this Guide on page 25 Chapter 1, presents contacts and general information related to this product. Getting Started on page 31 Chapter 2, explains getting the LEX L10i up and running for the first time. Using the LEX L10i on page 57 Chapter 3, is a reference to operating the LEX L10i. Calling on page 79 Chapter 4, is a reference to making and receiving calls. Radio Services on page 91 Chapter 5, is a reference to connecting the LEX L10i to a Land Mobile Radio for communicating on LTE and P25 systems. Messaging on page 95 Chapter 6, is a reference to sending text and multimedia messages. Applications on page 99 Chapter 7, explains using basic applications installed on the LEX L10i such as Camera, People, and File Browser. 26 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 1: About this Guide Wireless on page 121 Chapter 8, explains configuring the LEX L10i to operate on a personal, local, and wide area wireless network. ADB and USB Driver Setup on page 139 Chapter 9, is a reference to setting up the Android Debug Bridge (ADB) and USB driver for your Windows PC. Accessories on page 145 Chapter 10, is a reference to available accessories and how to use them with the LEX L10i. Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 149 Chapter 11, is a reference to cleaning and storing the LEX L10i, and troubleshooting solutions for potential problems. Technical Specifications on page 159 Chapter 12, provides technical specifications for the LEX L10i. Helpful Background Information Motorola Solutions offers various courses designed to assist in learning about the system. For information, go to http://www.motorolasolutions.com/training to view the current course offerings and technology paths. Icons on a screen Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document:
Italics are used to highlight the following:
Chapters and sections in this and related documents Bold text is used to highlight the following:
Dialog box, window, and screen names Drop-down list and list box names Check box and radio button names Key names on a keypad Button names on a screen Bullets () indicate:
Action items Lists of alternatives Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists. Icon Conventions The documentation set is designed to give the reader more visual clues. The following graphic icons are used throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are described below. WARNING: The word WARNING with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, could result in death or serious injury, or serious product damage. CAUTION: The word CAUTION with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, may result in minor or moderate injury, or serious product damage. Send Feedback 27 MN002347A01-A Chapter 1: About this Guide NOTICE: NOTICE contains information more important than the surrounding text, such as exceptions or preconditions. They also refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader how to complete an action (when it is not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the reader where something is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a note. Regulatory Information BEFORE USING THIS device, READ the Product Regulatory, Safety & RF Exposure Guide (PN MN001458A01-A) included with this package. Service Information If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center for your region. Contact information is available at: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/support. You can also call 1-800-323-9949 for support and select option 6 for PS LTE infrastructure and devices. When contacting support, have the following information available:
Serial number of the unit (found on manufacturing label) Model number or product name (found on manufacturing label) Software type and version number Figure 1: Manufacturing Label Motorola Solutions responds to calls by e-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements. If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions. Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not 28 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 1: About this Guide used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. Remove the CRYPTR card or microSD card and SIM card before shipping. If you purchased your product from a Motorola Solutions business partner, contact that business partner for support. Documentation Set The documentation set for the LEX L10i provides information for specific user needs. Unless otherwise specified, Motorola Solutions documents listed here are available from Motorola Online at https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. If you are new to Motorola Online, follow the on-screen instructions to sign up for an account. To access Public Safety LTE infrastructure and device manuals, select Resource Center Product Information Manuals Network Infrastructure. The documentation set for the LEX L10i includes:
LEX L10i Quick Start Guide PN MN002346A01-A describes how to get the LEX L10i up and running. LEX L10i Mission Critical Handheld User Guide (this guide) MN002347A01-A describes how to use the LEX L10i. LEX L10i Regulatory and Safety Guide PN MN002351A01-A describes how to safely use the LEX L10i. LEX L10i Service Provisioning Guide PN MN002352A01-A provides technical instructions on how to activate, provision, and configure the LEX L10i. For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. Send Feedback 29 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A Getting Started Chapter 2 Getting Started Use the information in this chapter to help you get started using the LEX L10i. Features The LEX L10i features are shown in the following figure and summarized in the following table. Figure 2: LEX L10i Features Table 1: LEX L10i Features Item Charge/Notification LED Display/Screen Send Feedback Function Solid Blue: New notification (New Voice mail, New Text messages, Missed Calls, Android App Notifications, and so on) Off: Battery is not charging. Solid Red: Battery is charging. Blinking Amber: Waiting to charge. Solid Green: Fully Charged. Tap screen displays all information to operate the device. Recent Apps key Press to switch to, stop or manage applications currently running on the background of the device. Table continued 31 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Item External Speakers 3.5 mm Headset Port Volume Up/Down Buttons PTT Button Power Button Front Camera 32 Function Home key Displays the Home screen with a single tap. Back key Displays the previous screen. Closes the keyboard if the on-screen keyboard is open. Use for communications in handset mode. Pro-
vides audio output for video and voice playback in speakerphone mode. Menu key At any screen or application, press to see available options. Connects to headsets (3.5 mm plug). NOTICE: Do not use 2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapters Increase and decrease audio volume. Push-to-Talk (PTT) button enables Push-to-Talk services over a broadband network and can al-
so be interconnected to Project 25 Land Mobile Radio (LMR) networks. The PTT application of-
fers calls, alerts, group calls, Talk Group calls, and Talk Group monitoring and scanning. For PTT button and application operations, see Push-To-Talk for LEX L10i manual. IMPORTANT: The PTT is an optional feature that requires installation of software and system connection fol-
lowing the LEX L10i shipping. To veri-
fy if the PTT feature is enabled on the device, contact your technical sup-
port. Press and hold to turn on the device. Press to turn the screen on or off. Press and hold to se-
lect one of these options:
Power On/Off Turn On/Off. Airplane mode Disables all wireless con-
nections. Service switch Switches between public and Private carrier modes. Covert mode In covert mode, all sounds, and visual indications are turned off. See Covert Mode on page 44. Vibrate mode Sets to vibrate only. Speaker on Routes the earpiece sound to the speaker. Used to capture live video for video calls. Table continued Send Feedback Item Earpiece External Charging Contacts Battery Cover Removal Slot microUSB Port Rear Camera and Flash MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Function Provides audio in handset mode. Provides power to the device from cradles. Assists in battery cover removal to provide ac-
cess to the battery, SIM, CRYPTR, and mi-
croSD card holders. Provides USB client and host communications. Takes photos and video, and provides flash illu-
mination for the camera. Unpacking Carefully remove all protective material from the LEX L10i and save the shipping container for later storage and shipping. Verify that the following were received:
LEX L10i Battery Cover 2280 mAh Lithium-ion battery Charger USB Cable Regulatory Guide Quick Start Guide Inspect the equipment for damage. If any equipment is missing or damaged, contact the Motorola Solutions Support Center immediately. Setting Up the LEX L10i The initial setup of the LEX L10i requires that the battery and any cards be installed. NOTICE: The device may be delivered to you with battery, SIM card, microSD card and/or CRYPTR cards already installed, activated, and ready for use. In this case, ignore steps 2 through 6 of the following section if they were already performed. Before using the LEX L10i for the first time, perform the following:
1 Remove the screen protection film from the LEX L10i screen. (See Removing the Screen Protective Film on page 34). 2 Install the public and/or Private SIM cards. (See Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards on page 36). 3 Install the microSD or CRYPTR card (optional). (See Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card on page 35). 4 Install the battery. (See Installing the Battery on page 37). 5 Install the battery cover. 6 Charge the LEX L10i. (See Charging the LEX L10i on page 37). Send Feedback 33 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Removing the Screen Protective Film The LEX L10i is provided with a screen protective film that protects the device during shipping. To enable proper operation of the LEX L10i, the screen protector must be removed before use. Figure 3: Removing the Screen Protective Film Removing the Battery Cover This procedure explains how to remove the battery cover. Procedure:
1 Hold the LEX L10i firmly as shown. 2 Using the battery cover removal slot, gently lift the battery cover up and away from the LEX L10i. Figure 4: Removing the Battery Cover 34 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card The LEX L10i card holder can support either a microSD card or a CRYPTR micro encryption card. The microSD card is a removable flash memory used for storing media on the LEX L10i. The LEX L10i can support microSD cards with up to 64GB memory space. The CRYPTR micro encryption card is used for voice encryption in features such as data and phone over Virtual Private Network (VPN) and Push-
to-Talk (PTT) communication. The CRYPTR micro provides FIPS 140-2 Level 3 storage for credentials/keys for Data At Rest (DAR) encryption and MVPN. The slot of the card is located under the LEX L10i battery When and where to use:
NOTICE: The LEX L10i may be delivered to you with battery, SIM card, and microSD or CRYPTR card already installed, activated, and ready for use. In case a CRYPTR is pre-
installed in the LEX L10i, you must change the CRYPTR password provided by your technical support. This is not a password to access the device but a password to protect Motorola Solutions secure applications. The CRYPTR password is required whenever the LEX L10i is restarted. Procedure:
1 Slide the card into the card holder slot with contacts facing down. 2 Push the card into the slot until it is fully seated and locked into place. Figure 5: Installing the microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card This procedure explains how to remove a microSD or CRYPTR micro encryption card. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for three seconds. 2 Touch Power Off. 3 Touch OK. 4 Lift the battery cover. 5 Push the Card Holder lock down to release the card. 6 Remove the card from the holder. 7 Replace the battery cover. Send Feedback 35 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards Public and private phone services require a Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) card. Prerequisites: The SIM card can contain the following information:
Mobile phone service provider account details. Contact information, which can be moved to the People application on the LEX L10i. Any additional subscribed services. Information regarding service access and preferences. NOTICE: The LEX L10i requires activated SIM cards. Obtain activated SIM cards from your organization administrator. CAUTION:
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution. For proper ESD precautions to avoid damaging the SIM card. Proper ESD precautions include, but not limited to, working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the user is properly grounded. When and where to use: Use this procedure to install a SIM card:
Procedure:
1 If the battery is in place, remove the battery as described in Removing the Battery on page 37. 2 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder with the contacts facing down. Note the card notch position. 3 Push that the SIM card into the holder until it is fully seated and flat. You should hear a click when the SIM card in fully in place. Figure 6: Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards When and where to use: Use this procedure to remove the public or private SIM cards. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for three seconds. 2 Tap Power Off. 3 Tap OK. 4 Lift the battery cover. 36 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started 5 Slide the battery latch to Unlock position. 6 Lift the battery out of the LEX L10i. 7 Push the SIM card to release it from the holder. 8 Remove the SIM card. 9 Place the battery back into the LEX L10i. 10 Snap the battery cover back into place. Installing the Battery When and where to use: Perform this procedure to install a battery. Procedure:
1 Remove the battery from the packaging. 2 Insert the battery into the battery compartment with the battery contacts facing the bottom of the LEX L10i. Figure 7: Installing the Battery 3 Press the top of battery into place. 4 Place the battery cover into place. 5 Ensure that all battery cover snaps are fully engaged. Removing the Battery When and where to use: Perform this procedure to remove the battery. Procedure:
1 Slide a finger nail (preferably a thumb nail) into the Battery Cover removal slot and gently pull the Battery Cover away from the LEX L10i 2 Remove the Battery Cover. 3 Slide the Battery Lock up and hold it. 4 With the tip of your finger, lift up the battery from the side closest to the top side of the LEX L10i. Charging the LEX L10i Before using the LEX L10i for the first time, charge the battery using the provided USB Charger and USB Cable or connect the USB Cable to the USB port of a personal computer. An unused battery fully charges in less than six hours. The LEX L10i battery can also be charged by one of the optional charging cradles. Send Feedback 37 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Figure 8: Charging the LEX L10i NOTICE: Keep the USB cover closed when USB not in use. NOTICE: For detailed description, installation and operation of the LEX L10i accessories, refer the quick start guides provided with each accessory. Charging Temperature Charge batteries in temperatures from 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). Note that charging is intelligently controlled by the LEX L10i. To accomplish this, for small periods of time, the LEX L10i alternately enables and disables battery charging to keep the battery at acceptable temperatures. The LEX L10i LED indicates when charging is disabled due to abnormal temperatures by fast blinking amber (once every 2 seconds). Battery Charge Indications The Charge and Notification LED is located at the top, front of the LEX L10i. Battery charging and power level are also indicated by a battery icon on the status bar. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove the LEX L10i from any power source (cradle or USB cable connection). Figure 9: Charge and Notification LED Table 2: Charge and Notification LED Charging Indications Status Off Indications Battery is not charging. Could indicate that:
38 Table continued Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Status Indications Slowly blinking red (once every 2 seconds) Solid red Fast blinking red (once every 0.5 second) Slowly blinking green (once every 2 seconds) Solid green Slowly blinking blue (once every 4 seconds) Alternately blinking blue (1 second) and red (3 seconds) Alternately blinking blue (1 second) and green
(3 seconds) Slowly blinking blue and red (every other sec-
ond) Alternately blinking blue (1 second) and fast blinking red (every 0.5 seconds for 3 seconds) Slowly blinking amber (once every 2 seconds) Device is not inserted correctly in the cradle Device is not connected to a USB cable Charger or cradle is not powered Battery power is extremely low (less than 10%
power left). LEX L10i is charging. Charging error:
Temperature is too low or too high Charging has gone on too long without com-
pletion (typical charge is four hours) Battery is greater than 90% charged. Device is completely charged. A new notification has been received. Device is charging and a new notification is re-
ceived. Device is completely charged and a new notifi-
cation is received. Battery power is extremely low (less than 10%
power left) and a new notification is received. A new notification is received during a charging error. Device is waiting to charge. When the battery power falls below a predetermined level the icon indicates the status and a battery dialog box appears indicating the status of the battery. The message displays until the user taps Dismiss. To monitor battery usage, from the Home screen, touch Battery. Battery Management This topic explains how to check the status of your battery and what you can do to make your battery last longer. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove the LEX L10i from any AC power source (cradle or cable). To check the charge status of the main battery, tap Battery status indicates that the battery is discharging and Battery level lists the battery charge (as a percentage of fully charged). About phone Status. Send Feedback 39 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Monitor Battery Usage The Battery screen lists which applications consume the most battery power. Also use it to turn off applications that were downloaded if they are consuming too much power. To monitor battery usage, tap Figure 10: Battery Screen Battery. The Battery screen lists the applications using the battery. The discharge graph at the top of the screen shows the rate of the battery discharge since last charged (short periods of time when connected to a charger are shown as thin green lines at the bottom of the chart), and how long it has been running on battery power. Tap an application in the Battery screen to display details about its power consumption. Different applications display different information. Some applications include buttons that open screens with settings to adjust power use. 40 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Low Battery Notification When the battery charge level drops below 20%, the LEX L10i displays a notice to connect the LEX L10i to power. The user should charge the battery using one of the charging accessories. Figure 11: Low Battery Notification When the battery charge drops below 10%, the LEX L10i displays a notice to connect the LEX L10i to power. The user must charge the battery using one of the charging accessories. When the battery charge drops below 4%, the LEX L10i turns off. Anytime the user then tries to power on the LEX L10i, the following screen appears. Figure 12: Battery Depleted Screen The user must charge the LEX L10i using one of the charging accessories to retain data. Battery Optimization Observe the following battery saving tips:
Leave the LEX L10i inside a cradle connected to AC power at all times when not in use. Turn off Bluetooth if not needed. Turn off Wi-Fi if not needed. Change screen time-out to as short as possible. Send Feedback 41 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Charge the LEX L10i when not in use. Set the screen to Suspend (Sleep) after a short period of non-use. Reduce screen brightness. Minimize use of applications that keep the LEX L10i from suspending, for example, music or video applications. Turning Off the Radio When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn off the LEX L10i radios. Procedure:
1 Press the Power button until the Quick Settings menu appears. Figure 13: Quick Settings Menu Airplane Mode 2 Tap Airplane mode. Alternately, open the Notification panel and tap Airplane Mode. The airplane icon appears in the Status bar indicating that all the radios are off. 42 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Powering On the LEX L10i for the First Time Press the Power button to turn on the LEX L10i. The device boot screen displays as the LEX L10i boots. Figure 14: LEX L10i Boot Screen Powering Off the LEX L10i When and where to use: Use this procedure to power off the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button until the Power Button menu appears. Figure 15: Selecting Power Off 2 Tap Power off and then OK. Your phone will shut down is displayed on the screen. Send Feedback 43 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode Suspend mode (also known as sleep mode) is a low-power mode of operation that helps reduce electrical power consumption by shutting down parts of the LEX L10i that are not in use. The LEX L10i goes into Suspend mode when the Power button is pressed or after a time out period of inactivity. When and where to use: Use this procedure to enter and exit Suspend mode:
Procedure:
1 To enter Suspend mode, press and release the Power button. The LEX L10i screen turns off. NOTICE: In Suspend mode, the following items continue to operate:
Power button PTT Button (if set to be used) Notification LEDs Wireless communication. 2 To exit Suspend mode, press and release the Power button. Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode When and where to use: Use this procedure to set the period of inactivity before suspend mode occurs. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap:
2 Select the inactivity duration before Suspend mode becomes active. Display Sleep. 3 Tap
. Covert Mode In the Covert Mode, the LEX L10i goes dark and quiet. All visible and audible LEX L10i alerts and notifications are shut down. This feature makes the LEX L10i effectively unnoticeable even in a silent and dark environment. In Covert Mode, the following sounds, visual indications, and keys of the LEX L10i are disabled:
Display brightness Touchscreen Keylight LED indications Vibration Speaker audio NOTICE: In Covert Mode, sound is routed to a Bluetooth headset, if connected or sound is routed to a wired earpiece, if connected. Alternatively, sound is routed to the LEX L10i earpiece. Tone indications 44 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started NOTICE: In Covert Mode, the following features remain active:
- Power button
- PTT button
- Volume button
- Four front panel keys
- Camera button
- Audio or tone indications are available using a wired headset (through headset port) or a Bluetooth headset Turning On Covert Mode When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn on Covert Mode. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The following Power Button menu displays:
Figure 16: Power Button Menu 2 Tap Covert mode. The LEX L10i screen goes blank. Turning Off Covert Mode When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn off Covert Mode. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The following Power Button menu displays:
Send Feedback 45 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Figure 17: Power Button Menu 2 Tap Covert mode. The Home screen appears. Locking the LEX L10i The lock screen automatically displays after predefined time out to prevent unauthorized people from using the device. The device does not lock at the same time as it is suspended. The device can also be locked manually by the user to disable unwanted key presses or screen tap or to keep data secured. To manually lock the device, press and release the Power button. When the device is locked and cellular network signal is available, phone calls, notification of new messages, missed calls and upcoming appointments still can be received. The device locks after a specified time. Selecting a Locking Option When and where to use: Security dictates a specific level of locking for the LEX L10i. Use this procedure to select a locking option. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security. 4 Tap Screen lock. The following options are displayed:
None. Slide User slides the lock to unlock the device. Pattern User must replicate a specified pattern to unlock the device. PIN User must enter a pin to unlock the device. Password User must enter a specified password to unlock the device. 5 Select an option. If None or Slide is selected, the Security screen is re-displayed. If Pattern, PIN, or Password is selected, a pattern, pin or password must be specified. Then, the Security screen is re-
displayed. The LEX L10i is now set to lock. 46 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Postrequisites: Specify a pattern as described in Specifying a Pattern on page 47 Specify a pin, or password as described in Specifying a PIN or Password on page 47. Then, specify a timeout value as described in Setting the Timeout for Locking the LEX L10i on page 47. Specifying a Pattern Prerequisites: The Pattern option must be selected for Screen lock. When and where to use: Use this procedure to specify a pattern to unlock your LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security lock. 4 Select Pattern. 5 Using a finger, draw a pattern to unlock your LEX L10i 6 Tap Continue. 7 Draw the same pattern again. 8 Tap Confirm. The Security screen is re-displayed. A pattern must be entered to unlock the LEX L10i. Specifying a PIN or Password Prerequisites: The PIN or Password option has been selected for Screen lock. When and where to use: Use this procedure to specify a PIN or password to unlock your LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security lock. 4 Select PIN or Password. 5 Enter a pin or password. 6 Tap Continue. 7 Enter the pin or password again. 8 Tap OK. The Security screen is re-displayed. A pin or password must be entered to unlock the LEX L10i. Setting the Timeout for Locking the LEX L10i Prerequisites: Screen lock must be set to Pattern, PIN, or Password. Send Feedback 47 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started When and where to use: Use this procedure to set the timeout value to lock the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security. 4 Tap Automatically lock. A list of timeout values is displayed. 5 Select a timeout value from the list. 6 The Security screen is re-displayed. Unlocking the LEX L10i When the LEX L10i is not used for a period of time and the user tries to access the device, the Lock screen displays. Depending on which Screen lock option is active, the user does one of the following:
Nothing Slide the slider to the unlock position Enter a pattern, pin, or password. Unlocking the LEX L10i Using a Pattern When and where to use: Use this procedure to unlock the LEX L10i with a pattern. Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 Using a finger, draw the specified pattern on the screen. Once the correct pattern is drawn, the device unlocks. Unlocking the LEX L10i Using a PIN or Password When and where to use: Use this procedure to unlock the LEX L10i with a PIN or password. Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 In the text field, enter your pin or password. 3 Tap Done. The device unlocks and the Home screen is shown. 48 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX L10i You can make an emergency call even when the LEX L10i is locked and you do not remember the PIN. When and where to use: Use this procedure to make an emergency call when the device is locked and you do not remember the PIN:
Procedure:
1 Tap EMERGENCY CALL at the bottom of the lock screen. The Emergency Dialer screen displays. 2 Enter the emergency number. 3 Tap
. Setting the Date and Time When the LEX L10i is connected to cellular network, date and time are automatically synchronized. When and where to use: Perform this procedure to manually set the date and time:
Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Date & time. 4 Tap Automatic date & time to disable automatic date and time synchronization. 5 Tap Automatic time zone to disable automatic time zone synchronization. 6 Tap Set date. 7 Slide your finger up and down to select the month, date and year. 8 Tap Done. 9 Tap Set time. 10 Slide your finger up and down to select the hour, minutes and part of the day. 11 Tap Done. 12 Tap Select time zone. 13 Tap to select a time zone from the list. 14 Tap
. Setting the Display The following LEX L10i display features can be customized:
Brightness Set the brightness of the display. Auto-rotate Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned. Sleep Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the displays backlight. Daydream Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is docked inside a cradle or charging. Send Feedback 49 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Font size Change the font size for display text. Cast screen Enable the device to project the screen to a TV or other device. Setting Screen Brightness When and where to use: Use this procedure to set the screen brightness. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Brightness. 5 Tap Automatic brightness to set the device to automatically adjust the brightness using the built-in light sensor. Use the slider to set a brightness level. 6 Tap
. Setting Screen Rotation Screen rotation enables the LEX L10i to automatically determine the orientation of the screen to portrait or landscape. When and where to use: Use this procedure when you want to set your screen to automatically rotate:
Procedure:
1 NOTICE: Some applications may not support screen rotation. Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Check Auto-rotate screen to automatically switch orientation when the LEX L10i is rotated. NOTICE: The Home screen does not rotate. 5 Tap
. Setting Up Sleep Mode Use this procedure to set up sleep mode (screen time-out). Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Sleep. 50 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started 5 Select one of the sleep values:
15 seconds 30 seconds (default) 1 minutes 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes 6 Tap
. Setting Up Daydream When and where to use: The Daydream application behaves as a screensaver when the LEX L10i is docked inside a cradle and/or in sleep mode. Use this procedure to set up a screensaver. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Daydream. 5 Select from Clock, Colors, Photo Frame or Photo Table. to configure the item selected in the previous step. 6 Tap 7 Tap WHEN TO DAYDREAM and select when you would like the feature to be active (While docked, while charging or either). 8 Tap START NOW to preview and confirm your selection. 9 Tap
. Setting the Font Size When and where to use: Use this procedure to change the font size. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Font size. 5 Select one of the font size values:
Small Normal (default) Large Huge Send Feedback 51 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started 6 Press
. Enabling Cast Screen When and where to use: Use this procedure to enable the LEX L10i to project the its screen to a TV or other device. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Cast screen. 5 Tap . 6 Select Enable wireless display. Projecting the LEX L10i Screen on Another Device Prerequisites: The Cast screen must be enabled. When and where to use: Use this procedure to project the LEX L10i screen on another device. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Cast screen. 5 Select the device to show your device screen on. Your device should now display on the other device. 6 To stop projecting your device screen, swipe down from the Status bar and tap Disconnect under Cast screen. General Sound Setting Use the Sounds settings to configure media and alarm volumes. On the Home screen, tap Sound. Alternately, open the Notification panel and tap Settings Sound. 52 Send Feedback Figure 18: Sound Screen MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Volumes Use to change the volume of media, ringtones, notifications, and alarms. Call Ringtone and Vibrate
- Phone ringtone Tap to select a ringtone to sound when an incoming call is received.
- Vibrate when ringing Check to make the device vibrate when a call is received. NOTICE: Setting volume can also be done by pressing the Volume button, up and down, during a call, or while playing music or a video. When not on a call, pressing the Volume button all the way down to set the device to vibrate. During an in-coming call, pressing the Volume button up and down changes the ringtone volume. Figure 19: Volume Button System
- Default notification sound Tap to select a sound to play for all system notifications.
- Dial pad tap tones Check to play a sound when a device key is touched.
- Touch sounds Check to play a sound when making screen selections. Send Feedback 53 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started
- Screen lock sounds Check to play a sound when locking and unlocking the screen.
- Vibrate on tap Check to have the device vibrate when touching soft keys and on certain screen interactions.
- Emergency tone Select and check Alert to play a tone or Vibrate when an emergency notification is received. Select Off to disable emergency notification. Public and Private Carrier Modes The LEX L10i operates on both public and private carriers. Private Mode LTE B14 Public Mode LTE B4 and B13 CDMA EVDO Rev. A (Band 0, Band 1) 3G, 1X The user can manually switch modes to operate on the Private Mode LTE network or the Public Carrier Mode. The LEX 10i Mission Critical LTE Handheld operates in:
4G LTE Bands: 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 20, 26, 28 3G/UMTS Bands: 1, 2, 4, 5, 8 Quad Band GSM: 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 1900 MHz 802.11 a/b/g/n Wi-Fi and Miracast Switching Modes Using the Power Button When the LEX L10i is equipped with Private and Public SIM cards, the Power button can be used to switch modes. Prerequisites: The LEX L10i is equipped with Private and Public enabled SIM cards. When and where to use: Use this procedure to switch modes using the power button. NOTICE: You may need to switch between private and public network modes when you want to use capabilities provided by one network that are not provided by the other. For example, if the phone is in private mode, switch to public mode before you can dial numbers that are not included in the private network. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button until a menu appears. 54 Send Feedback Figure 20: Service Switch MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started The current carrier mode is indicated under the Service switch option. 2 Tap Service switch. A confirmation popup is displayed. Figure 21: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup 3 Tap Switch. Switching Modes Using the Settings App When the LEX L10i is equipped with Private and Public SIM cards, the Settings application can be used to switch modes. Prerequisites: The LEX L10i is equipped with Private and Public enabled SIM cards. When and where to use: Use this procedure to switch modes using the setting applications. NOTICE: You may need to switch between private and public network modes when you want to use capabilities provided by one network that are not provided by the other. For example, if the phone is in private mode, switch to public mode before you can dial numbers that are not included in the private network. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Tap Select network. 6 Select Public or Private. A confirmation popup is displayed. Send Feedback 55 MN002347A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Figure 22: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup 7 Tap Switch. LEX L10i Emergency Button The LEX L10i includes an Emergency Button which aids responders during emergencies. This feature helps reduce response times in an emergency situation. The device must be pre-configured based on the responders specific requirements before it is given to a user. Once the device is configured to use the Emergency Button, users can access the actions by swiping the Home screen icon up to access the Home screen overlay. The Emergency Button supports the following actions:
Initiate a phone call The Emergency Button can be pre-configured to initiate an E911 call or to initiate a call to a customized phone number. Send an SMS notification (with/without GPS) The Emergency Button can be pre-configured to send an SMS notification to customized numbers. Location coordinates (if available) of LTE handset and information about paired (if paired) Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is also sent as part of the text message. Initiate a phone call and send an SMS notification (with/without GPS) The Emergency Button can be pre-configured to perform both of the above actions. NOTICE: You are required to have a voice and text plan to initiate calls and send SMS notifications. 56 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Using the LEX L10i Chapter 3 Using the LEX L10i This chapter explains the indicators, buttons, status icons, and controls on the LEX L10i. This chapter also provides basic instructions for using the device. Using the Touchscreen The multi-tap sensitive screen is used to operate the LEX L10i. Table 3: Using the Touchscreen Action Tap Tap and Hold Drag Swipe Double-tap Pinch Result Tap to:
select items on the screen type letters and symbols using the on-screen keyboard press on-screen buttons Tap and hold:
an item on the Home screen to move it to a new location or to the trash an item in Apps to create a shortcut on the Home screen an empty area on the Home screen until the menu appears Tap and hold an item for a moment and then move finger on the screen until reaching the new position. Move finger up and down or left and right on the screen to:
unlock the screen view additional Home screens view additional application icons in the Launcher window view more information on an applications screen Tap twice on a web page, map, or other screen to zoom in and out. In some applications, zoom in and out by plac-
ing two fingers on the screen and pinching them together (to zoom out) or spreading them apart
(to zoom in). Send Feedback 57 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Using the On-Screen Keyboard The on-screen keyboard is used to enter text in a text field. To configure the keyboard settings, tap and hold select Android Keyboard Settings. Figure 23: Android Keyboard Settings
(comma key) > slide your finger up to and then A description of the settings can be found in Android Keyboard Settings on page 59. Editing Text Edit entered text and use menu commands to cut, copy, and paste text within or across applications. Some applications do not support editing some or all of the text they display; others may offer their own way to select text. Entering Numbers, Symbols and Special Characters To enter numbers and symbols:
Without switching to the Numbers or Symbols keyboard, tap and hold one of the top-row keys until a menu appears then select a number. Keys with alternate characters display an ellipsis ( ... ) below the character. Tap the Shift key to enter one capital letter. Tap and hold the Shift key until it changes state (Shift key is underlined) to enter two or more capital letters. Tap Shift key again to return to the lowercase keyboard. Tap to switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard. key on the numbers and symbols keyboard to view additional symbols. Tap the To enter special characters, tap and hold a number or symbol key to open a menu of additional symbols. 58 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i A larger version of the key displays briefly over the keyboard. Keys with alternate characters display an ellipsis ( ... ) below the character. Android Keyboard Settings The Android Keyboard Settings may be personalized to meet your preferences. Table 4: Android Keyboard Settings Setting GENERAL Input Languages Auto-capitalization Vibrate on keypress Sound on keypress Popup on keypress Voice input key TEXT CORRECTION Personal Dictionary Add-on dictionaries Block offensive words Auto-correction Show correction suggestions OTHER OPTIONS Next word suggestions Advanced settings Description Selects the language used in the keyboard. Automatically capitalize the first letter after a pe-
riod. Vibrates the device when a key is pressed. Makes a sound on the device when a key is pressed. Pops up a duplicate of the key pressed. Allows you to speak the name of the key to in-
put a key. Uses your personal dictionary when correcting words. Allows you to add additional dictionaries to cor-
rect words. Blocks offensive words from being suggested to correct words. Sets the level of auto-correction to: Off, Mod-
est, Aggressive, or Very aggressive. Displays a list of corrections so that you can se-
lect make a selection. Anticipates the next word that you want to type based on the last word typed. The Advanced settings should only be set by experts. Send Feedback 59 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Motorola Solutions Home Experience (MHx) The Motorola Solutions Home Experience (MHx) is the engine that drives the user interface of the LEX L10i. Specifically, MHx provides a unique experience for customizing the LEX L10i Home screen. LEX L10i Home Screen The Home screen displays after the LEX L10i turns on and unlocks. Figure 24: Default Home Screen The Home screen is completely customizable depending on the specifications for your agency. Each organization may have a different Home screen. The Radio Manager (RM) Tool, described in the LEX L10i Service Provisioning Guide, can be used to stage the Home screen on your devices. NOTICE: When CRYPTR Card is used, the device requires setting a password after initial boot and entering this password whenever the device restarts. This is not a password to access the device but a password to protect Motorola Solutions secure applications. After suspend mode or screen time-out, the screen displays with the lock slider. Slide direction towards the outside of the screen to unlock the screen. in any NOTICE: If you have changed the Screen lock option, depending on the selected option, you will have to enter a pattern, pin, or password to unlock the LEX L10i. The Home screen consists of the following items:
Core Applications Widget Provides shortcuts such as:
- Phone Dialer
- Contacts
- Application Launcher
- Camera
- Search Feature 60 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i
- Other shortcuts determined by your agency Calendar Widget email Widget Messaging Widget Search Widget My Apps Widget Other Widgets determined by your agency Home Screen Overlay Provides quick access to core functions. The Home screen provides four screens for placement of widgets and shortcuts. Swipe the screen left or right to view the additional screens. Home Screen Overlay The Home screen overlay provides quick access to core functions (Emergency Button). Swipe the Home screen up from the icon to access the Home screen overlay. Customizing the Home Screen The Home screen contains panels that can be accessed by swiping the page to the left or right. Panels provide more space for adding widgets to the Home screen and can be customized by the user. This section describes how to:
Add Widgets Move Widgets Remove Widgets Configure Home screen settings Adding Widgets Widgets are applications that run on your Home screen. When and where to use: Use this procedure to add one or more widgets to your Home screen. Procedure:
1 Swipe the Home screen left or right to locate the panel that you want to add a widget to. 2 Touch and hold a gray area of the panel until you see the following icons near the bottom of the screen:
3 Tap the Widgets icon to reveal the widgets. Send Feedback 61 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Figure 25: Widgets Screen NOTICE: To identify Motorola Solutions Widgets, their names are preceded by MHx. 4 The Widgets screen contains multiple panels. Swipe the Widgets screen left or right to locate the widget that you want to add. 5 Touch and hold the widget; then, slide the widget down the screen and place it in the current panel. If there is not enough room in the panel or you want to place the widget in a new panel, slide the widget to the right of the screen until a blank panel appears. Then, place the widget in the new panel. 62 Send Feedback Figure 26: Example of a Widget Added to New Panel MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i NOTICE: Some widgets are re-sizable as soon as you place it in a panel. Press and hold the widget. If the re-size tool displays (four dots, one on each side of the widget), you can re-size the widget by dragging the dots on the re-size tool. Adding Shortcuts to the My Apps Widget The My Apps widget is a special MHx widget where you can add shortcuts for quick access. Prerequisites: Before adding shortcuts, the My Apps widget must be added to the Home screen. When and where to use: An empty My Apps needs shortcuts to be functional. Use this procedure to add shortcuts to the My Apps widget. Procedure:
1 Add My Apps widget as described inAdding Widgets on page 61. An empty My Apps widget displays. Send Feedback 63 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Figure 27: Empty My Apps Widget 2 Tap the My Apps widget to add shortcuts to it. A screen with a list of shortcuts is displayed. 64 Send Feedback Figure 28: List of Shortcuts for My Apps Widgets MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i 3 Select each shortcut that you want to add to the My Apps widget. You may add up to five shortcuts. 4 Tap Done. Shortcuts are added to the My Apps widget. Send Feedback 65 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Figure 29: My Apps Widget with Shortcuts Added Changing My Status When and where to use: Perform this procedure to set the status of the LEX L10i user to either Available or Busy. No matter what the status is set to, calls are still received. This status is shown to other users. NOTICE: The My Status widget must be added before it is visible in the Home screen. The My Status widget is used in conjunction with the UNS System from Motorola Solutions or when you have WAVE 7000. One of these systems must be active before My Status will work properly. Procedure:
1 Tap the My Status dropdown menu. Figure 30: My Status Widget The My Status options menu is displayed. Figure 31: Status Selection 66 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i 2 Tap one of the status states. Status is immediately set to the selected state. Moving Widgets When and where to use: Use this procedure to move (relocate) widgets on the Home screen. Procedure:
1 Navigate to the Home screen panel where the widget is located. 2 Touch and hold the widget; then, slide the widget to a new location. If you want to move the widget to another panel, slide the widget left or right to that panel; then slide the widget to a location in the panel. Removing Widgets When and where to use: Use this procedure to remove or clear space on your Home screen. Procedure:
1 Slide the Home screen panel until you locate the panel that holds the widget that you want to remove. 2 Touch and hold the widget while sliding it down to the bottom of the panel. X Remove appears near the bottom of the screen. 3 Slide the widget to X Remove until the widget turns red and your finger is directly above X Remove; then, release the widget. The widget is removed from the panel. NOTICE: The widget is only removed from the panel. It is not deleted from the LEX L10i. Send Feedback 67 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel This topic shows you an example of a customized Home screen panel. Figure 32: Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel The above figure shows a customized Home screen panel with the following widgets:
My Status Two Direct dial widgets Calendar My Apps Status Bar The Status bar displays the time, notification icons (left side) and status icons (right side). Figure 33: Status Bar If there are more notifications than can fit in the Status bar, it is indicated that more notifications exist. Open the Notifications panel to view all notifications and status. 68 Send Feedback Notification Icons Notification icons alert you when a notification has been received. MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Table 5: Notification Icons Icon Send Feedback Description Indicates that more notifications are available for viewing. Indicates that data is syncing. Indicates an incoming email. Converged Services notification. This icon has four parts: location services (top left), radio services (top right), priority manager (bottom left), and presence service (bottom right). Converged Services error notification. The tri-
angle with the exclamation point inside indi-
cates an error. If an error is observed, the user can swipe down from the icon to reveal the er-
ror. An example is:
Indicates location reporting service is enabled. Indicates the device is searching location data. Indicates an error or a warning that requires user action in the location application. Indicates an error or a warning that requires user action in the presence application. CRYPTR feature error. Indicates an upcoming event. Indicates an open Wi-Fi network is available. Radio Services application is on. Indicates a song is playing. Indicates a problem with sign-in or sync has oc-
curred. Indicates the device is uploading data. Table continued 69 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Icon Description Indicates the microSD card is almost full. Indicates the device is downloading data when animated and download is complete when stat-
ic. Indicates the device is connected via USB ca-
ble. Indicates the device is connected to or discon-
nected from virtual private network (VPN). Preparing SD card. Indicates no SIM is installed. Indicates the USB debugging is enabled on the LEX L10i. Indicates the device has received a text mes-
sage. Indicates a missed call. Indicates tethering is active for Bluetooth or USB. Also used to indicate a Wi-Fi hotspot is active. Screenshot captured. Indicates that Wi-Fi hotspot is active. My Status indicates device is available. My Status indicates device is busy. LEX L10i Status Icons Status icons give you status information on actions occurring on your LEX L10i. Table 6: Status Icons Icon 70 Description Indicates that GPS is in use. Indicates the device is searching location data. Indicates the Alarm is active. Table continued Send Feedback Icon MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Description Indicates all sounds except media and alarms are silenced and vibrate mode is active. Indicates the ringer is silenced. Microphone is muted during a call. Indicates the battery is fully charged. Indicates the battery is partially drained. Indicates the battery charge is low. Indicates the battery charge is very low. Indicates the battery charge is low. Indicates the battery is charging. Indicates the Airplane Mode is active. All ra-
dios are turned off. Indicates Bluetooth is on. Set to operate on Private network. Connected to a Wi-Fi network. No Wi-Fi signal. Mobile network signal strength. No mobile network signal. Connected to a 4G network. Connected to a 3G network. Roaming from a network. No SIM card installed. Managing Notifications Notification icons report the arrival of new messages, calendar events, alarms, and ongoing events. When a notification occurs, an icon appears in the Status bar with a brief description. See Notification Icons on page 69 for a list of possible notification icons and their description. Open the Notifications panel to view a list of all the notifications. Send Feedback 71 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i To open the Notification panel drag the Status bar down from the top of the screen. Figure 34: Notification Panel To respond to a notification, open the Notifications panel and then tap a notification. The Notifications panel closes and the subsequent activity is dependent on the notification. To clear all notifications, open the Notifications panel and tap removed. Ongoing notifications remain in the list. All event-based notifications are NOTICE: Some notifications cannot be cleared and will remain to inform you of running applications To close the Notifications panel, drag the bottom of the Notifications panel to the top of the screen or tap
. Working with Status LEX L10i users work with status in two ways: setting their own status (Available or Busy) and viewing the status of their contacts. The status displayed for Contacts shows the following:
The presence status currently detected by a call system or network (offline or online status) The availability status currently selected by the contact (Available or Busy) My Status The LEX L10i user sets the value of My Status to Available or Busy. This status is shown in the Contacts and Session Log screens of other LEX L10i users. The Available status:
Is the default sign-on state Indicates the LEX L10i user is willing to send and receive calls 72 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i The Busy status indicates that the LEX L10i user is busy but the LEX L10i is still able to send and receive calls. Status of Contacts The status of LEX L10i contacts is shown in all of the Contacts screens, and People list. The status of a contact can be:
Offline Available Busy If the contact is not connected to and registered with a system server, the status shown is Offline. If the contact is connected to and registered with the system server, the My Status value (Available or Busy) of the contact is shown. When the Contacts are synchronized with the People list, the Contacts are added to the regular device contacts. Quick Settings The Quick Settings panel provides easy access to some frequently used settings. You can use one of two methods:
With two fingers, drag the Status Bar panel down to display the Quick Settings panel. Drag the Status Bar down from the top of the screen. The Quick Settings icon displays in the top right corner. Tap to display the Quick Settings panel. Figure 35: Quick Settings Panel Display the owners contact image. Tap to open the owners contact information. Brightness Opens the Brightness setting dialog box to set the screen brightness. Send Feedback 73 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Settings Opens the Settings screen. Wi-Fi Displays the current Wi-Fi connection. Tap to open the Wi-Fi settings screen. Service Displays the current cellular service used; public or Private. Battery Status Displays the current battery charge level. Tap to open the Battery screen. Airplane Mode Displays the Airplane mode status. Tap to toggle Airplane mode on and off. Turn on Airplane mode to turn off all the radios. Bluetooth Displays the current state of the Bluetooth radio. Tap to open the Bluetooth settings screen. Location Displays the current state. To close the Quick Settings panel, drag the bottom of the Quick Settings panel to the top of the screen or tap
. Applications The Apps screen displays icons for all installed applications. Table 7: Applications Icon 74 Description AOSP Browser Use to access the Internet or agency intranet. Calculator Provides the basic and scientific arithmetic functions. Calendar Use to manage events and ap-
pointments. Allows synchronization with Google account calendar. Camera / Video Recorder Take photos or record videos. For more information, see Cam-
era on page 101. Clock / Alarms Use to set an alarm, stop-
watch, or timer. Dialer Use to make phone calls. See Calling on page 79 for more information. Downloads lists all downloads files. Email Use to send and receive email. File Browser Use to view and manage files on the LEX L10i. Gallery Use to view photos stored on the mi-
croSD card. For more information, see Gallery on page 109 for more information. Messaging - Send SMS and MMS messages. See Messaging on page 95 for more informa-
tion. Table continued Send Feedback Icon MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Description Motorola Device Management Enables staging and management of the device for initial use by initiating the deployment of settings, firmware, and software from a server. For more information, see the LEX 10i Service Provision-
ing Guide. Motorola TechDocs Use to view device on-
device documentation. MVPN Enables the Motorola Solutions Mo-
bile VPN (MVPN). Movie Studio Use to combine existing vid-
eos. Music Access music stored on the device. My Status Use to view the current availabili-
ty of the user and device to other agency users and system. People Use to manage contact information. Push-To-Talk Enables Push-to-Talk serv-
ices over a broadband network and intercon-
nected to Project 25 Land Mobile Radio (LMR) networks to enable PTT interoperability be-
tween broadband and P25 radio users (availa-
ble only if PTT application is installed and acti-
vated on the LEX 10i). Radio Services Use to pair Operations Criti-
cal Wireless Push-to-Talk (PTT) Pod. Radio Management Link Client Enables connecting the device to a remote host comput-
er for staging, firmware installation, application installation, and application removal by techni-
cal support. See the Radio Management Online Help for more information on the RM Tool. Search Searches the device for an App or feature, Also searches the Web using Google Search. Settings Use to configure the device. Software Licensing Licensing for software installed on the device. Sound Recorder Use to record audio. Voice Dialer Use to place calls by speaking. Send Feedback 75 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Folders Use Folders to organize similar applications together. Tap the folder to open and display items in the folder. Creating a Folder When and where to use: Use a procedure to create a folder on the Home screen. NOTICE: There must be a minimum of two app icons to create a folder. Procedure:
1 Go to the desired Home screen. 2 Tap and hold on one application icon. 3 Drag the icon and stack on top of another icon. 4 Lift and release. Naming Folders When and where to use: Use this procedure to name folders. You can give folders a name after they are created. Procedure:
1 Tap the folder. Figure 36: Opened Unnamed Folder 2 Tap the title area and enter a folder name using the keyboard. 3 Tap Done. 4 Tap anywhere on the Home screen to close the folder. The folder name appears under the folder. Figure 37: Named Folder Removing a Folder When and where to use: When a folder is no longer needed, you can remove it. Use this procedure to remove a folder. Procedure:
1 Tap and hold the folder until it enlarges and the device vibrates. 76 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i 2 Drag the folder to X Remove until the folder turns red; then release. The folder is removed from the screen. Accessing Files from a Computer When and where to use: Use this procedure to allow access to files from your computer using MTP
(media device) or using PTP (camera software). Procedure:
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable. If one of the following messages is displayed in the notification area (top of screen): Connected as a media device or Connected as a camera, you already have access to the files on your device. 2 Swipe down from the Status Bar. Figure 38: Notifications Screen 3 Tap the notification that has a Touch for other USB options subtitle (in this case Connected as a media device). Send Feedback 77 MN002347A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10i Figure 39: MTP / PTP Selection Screen 4 Select Media device (MTP) to access media files from a Windows computer or Camera (PTP) to access photos / files on a computer that does not support MTP. 5 Tap to return to the previous screen. 78 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Calling Chapter 4 Calling Make a phone call from the Phone application, the People application, or other applications or widgets that display contact information. Push-To-Talk (PTT) Calling The handheld must be provisioned for PTT services on a Motorola Solutions PTT server. To make PTT calls and how to receive PTT calls on the LEX 10i, see Push-To-Talk for LEX L10i manual. Emergency Calling The service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers that you can call under any circumstances, even when the phone is locked, a SIM card is not inserted, or the phone is not activated. However, the SIM card must be installed in the LEX L10i to enable preset emergency numbers stored on it. Emergency numbers vary by country. The device must be switched to public mode to use the emergency numbers for your country on the public SIM. The LEX L10i pre-programmed emergency numbers may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. For additional information, contact your organizations technical support. IMPORTANT: The numbers you can call depend on whether the device is in private mode or public mode. For example, if the device is in private mode, you must switch to public mode before you can call numbers that are not included in the private network. To switch modes, see Switching Modes Using the Power Button on page 54 and Switching Modes Using the Settings App on page 55. NOTICE: If your device is licensed for these options, see LEX L10i Service Provisioning Guide to set up other emergency alert methods. Audio Modes The device offers three audio modes for use during phone calls:
Handset Mode: Switches audio to the receiver at the top front of the device, so the user can use the device as a handset and is the default mode. Speaker Mode: Use the device as if on speaker phone. Headset Mode: Connect a Bluetooth or wired headset to automatically switch audio to the headset. Using a Bluetooth Headset Use a Bluetooth headset for audio communication when using an audio-enabled application. See Pairing LEX L10i with Bluetooth Accessory on page 91 for information on connecting a Bluetooth headset to the device. Set the volume appropriately before putting on the headset. When a Bluetooth headset is connected, the speakerphone is muted. Using a Wired Headset Use a wired headset (with 3.5 mm plug) for audio communication when using an audio-enabled application. Set the volume appropriately before putting on the headset. When a wired headset is connected, the speakerphone is muted. Send Feedback 79 MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Lift the headset cover and insert the headset plug. To end a call using the wired headset, press and hold the headset button until the call ends. Figure 40: Insert Wired Headset Plug NOTICE: The headset cover must be properly seated after removing the headset plug. Adjusting Audio Volume Use the Volume buttons to adjust the volume of the ringer when not in a call and the audio volume when in a call. NOTICE: Adjust the conversation phone volume during a call. Adjusting the volume while not in a call affects the ring and notification sound levels. Making a Call Using the Dialer When and where to use: Use this procedure to make a call using the dialer tab to dial phone numbers. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 80 Send Feedback Figure 41: Dialer Screen MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling 2 Tap the 3 Tap the keys to enter the phone number. tab above the dialer. 4 Tap below the dialer to initiate the call. Send Feedback 81 MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Figure 42: Call in Progress If... You want to display the dialer. You want to turn on the speakerphone. You want to mute the call. Then... Tap Tap Tap
. You want to add another person to the call. Tap
. 5 Tap to end the call. Making a Call Using People List Contacts When and where to use: Use this procedure to make a call using people list contacts to initiate a call. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the 3 From the people list contacts, tap a phone contact or a PTT contact for making a One-to-One tab. Private or Alert Call (see Push-To-Talk User Guide For LEX 10i). 82 Send Feedback Figure 43: People List Contact MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling 4 Tap the phone number next to the contact to initiate the call. 5 Tap to end the call. Making a Call Using Call History When and where to use: Use this procedure to make a call using call history. Call History is a list of all the calls placed, received, or missed. It provides a convenient way to redial a number, return a call, or add a number to Contacts. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the tab. Send Feedback 83 MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Figure 44: Call History Tab 3 Tap 4 Tap next to the contact to initiate the call. to end the call. Example:
Arrow icons beside a call indicate the type of call. Multiple arrows indicate multiple calls:
Missed incoming call Received incoming call Outgoing call Making a Conference Call When and where to use: Conference calling is available if you have two or more people you wish to have a conversation with at the same time. Use this procedure to create a conference phone session with multiple people. NOTICE: Conference calling may not be supported by your service provider. Check with your technical support for conference calling availability. The total number of conference call participants may be limited by your service provider. For the maximum number of participants in a conference call, contact technical support. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 Tap the 3 Tap the keys to enter the phone number. tab above the dialer. 84 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling 4 Tap below the dialer to initiate the call. 5 When the call connects, tap
. The first call is placed on hold. 6 Tap the keys to enter the second phone number. 7 Tap 8 When the call connects, the first call is placed on hold and the second call is active. below the dialer to initiate the call. Figure 45: Two Calls The screen quickly changes to:
Send Feedback 85 MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Figure 46: Two Calls Connected 9 Tap to create a conference call with three people. Figure 47: Merged Calls 10 Tap to add another call. The conference is placed on hold. 86 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling 11 Tap the keys to enter the second phone number. 12 Tap 13 Tap 14 Tap below the dialer to initiate the call. to add the third call to the conference. to rotate between the individual calls. Calls are rotated starting with the first call. This allows you to speak privately to one party. Tap to rotate to the next party. When the rotation is complete, you are placed back into conference mode and all calls are active. Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset When you receive a phone call, the Incoming Call screen opens, displaying the caller ID and any additional information about the caller that is in the People application. NOTICE: To connect a Bluetooth headset to the LEX L10i, see Pairing LEX L10i with Bluetooth Accessory on page 91. When a call arrives, tap the Call button on the Bluetooth headset to answer the call. To silence the ringer before answering the call, press the volume down button on the side of LEX L10i. To end the call press the Call button on the Bluetooth headset. All incoming calls are recorded in the Phone application call Logs tab. If you miss a call, you will receive a notification. Call Settings Use the Call Settings to modify options related to the phone call feature. NOTICE: Not all options are available for all configurations. Ringtone & Vibrate
- Phone Ringtone Tap to select a ringtone to sound when an incoming call is received.
- Vibrate When Ringing Check to make the device vibrate when a call is received. Other Call Settings
- Ringtone Settings When using a Bluetooth headset, select the path that the ring is heard. Options: Bluetooth or Speaker and Bluetooth (default). NOTICE: Bluetooth headset connection is required to set this option.
- Voicemail Tap to configure voicemail settings
+ Service Set the service provider or other provider for voicemail service.
+ Setup Tap to update the phone number used to access voicemail.
+ Sound Tap to select a sound when a voicemail is received.
+ Vibrate Tap to vibrate when a voicemail is received.
- Dial pad touch tones Check to play a sound when a phone key is touched.
- Quick Responses - Tap to edit quick responses to use instead of answering a call. Send Feedback 87 MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling
- Fixed Dialing Numbers Use Fixed Dialing to restrict the phone to dial only the phone number(s) or area code(s) specified in a Fixed Dialing list.
- TTY mode Tap to set the TTY setting. Use an optional teletypewriter (TTY) device with the LEX L10i to send and receive calls. Plug the TTY device into the LEX L10i headset jack and set the device to operate in one of the TTY modes. NOTICE: Use a TSB-121 compliant cable (provided by the TTY manufacturer) to connect the TTY device to the LEX L10i. Set the device volume to a middle level setting for proper operation. If you experience a high number of incorrect characters, adjust the volume as needed to minimize the error rate. For optimal performance, the LEX L10i should be at least 30 cm (12 inches) from the TTY device. Placing the device too close to the TTY device may cause high error rates.
+ TTY Off (default) TTY is off.
+ TTY Full Transmit and receive TTY characters.
+ TTY HCO Transmit TTY characters but receive by listening to earpiece.
+ TTY VCO Receive TTY characters but transmit by speaking into microphone.
- DTMF tones Set the length of the DTMF tones. Available options are: Normal or Long.
- CDMA Call Settings:
+ Voice privacy Enable enhanced privacy mode. Requesting an Emergency Alert This emergency alert procedure is used to indicate a critical situation. When and where to use: Use this procedure to trigger an emergency alert on the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Swipe up from the icon. 2 Tap Activate Emergency. A popup displays giving you 2 seconds to cancel the emergency alert. The emergency number programmed in the LEX L10i device is dialed. See LEX L10i Service Provisioning Guide or configuration details. 88 Send Feedback Figure 48: Emergency Alert Activation Popup MN002347A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Send Feedback 89 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A Radio Services Chapter 5 Radio Services Radio Services for LEX 10i The Radio Services is a free application available on the device and enables a LEX L10i to connect with a Motorola Operations Critical Wireless (OCW) Push-to-talk Pod (NNTN8127) and Bluetooth-
enabled device (accessory) through a wireless Bluetooth connection. Bluetooth-equipped devices can communicate without wires, using frequency-hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) radio frequency (RF) to transmit and receive data in the 2.4 GHz Industry Scientific and Medical (ISM) band (802.15.1). Bluetooth wireless technology is specifically designed for shortrange (10 meters (32.8 feet) communication and low power consumption. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth enabled device. Pairing LEX L10i with Bluetooth Accessory Prerequisites: Confirm Bluetooth is enabled on the LEX L10i device and Bluetooth-enabled device
(accessory). To enable/disable Bluetooth on the LEX L10i, see Enabling Bluetooth on page 136 or Disabling Bluetooth on page 136. Once pairing is established, the range of connection is no more than 10 meters (32.8 feet) line-of-sight. This is an unobstructed path between the location of the LEX L10 and the location of the Radio (or other paired accessory). When and where to use: Use this procedure to pair a LEX L10i with a Bluetooth-enabled device
(accessory) through a wireless Bluetooth connection. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 In the Secure Pairing window, tap Pair. Send Feedback 91 MN002347A01-A Chapter 5: Radio Services Figure 49: Bluetooth Pairing Screen 4 From the Bluetooth screen, in the AVAILABLE DEVICES section, tap an unconnected Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory). Figure 50: Bluetooth Device Screen 5 In the PAIRED DEVICES section, the Bluetooth-enabled device is connected. 92 Send Feedback Figure 51: Bluetooth Paired Devices Screen MN002347A01-A Chapter 5: Radio Services NOTICE: Your Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) user manual. Unpairing LEX L10i from Bluetooth Accessory Prerequisites: The LEX L10i is unpaired with Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory). When and where to use: Use this procedure to unpair the LEX L10i from a Bluetooth-enabled device
(accessory). Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 From the Settings screen, tap Bluetooth. 4 From the Bluetooth screen, tap next to the device name. Send Feedback 93 MN002347A01-A Chapter 5: Radio Services Figure 52: Bluetooth Paired Devices 5 Tap Unpair. Figure 53: Unpair Complete 94 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Messaging Chapter 6 Messaging Use Messaging to send and receive SMS and MMS messages. From Home or All Apps screen, tap
. Sending a Text Message When and where to use: Use this procedure to send text messages. Procedure:
1 In the main Messaging screen, tap The New Message screen displays. Figure 54: New Message Screen
. 2 In the To field, enter a name or a mobile phone number. 3 In the Type message field, enter the text message. Messages are limited to 160 characters. When the limit is approached, a counter displays, above the Send control, showing how many characters are left. If the limit is reached and the user keeps typing, a new message is created, which is joined with its predecessors when received. If the user presses the Back button while composing a message, it is saved as a draft in the Messaging screen. Tap the conversation to resume composing it. Send Feedback 95 MN002347A01-A Chapter 6: Messaging 4 Tap to send the message. Sending a Multimedia Message When and where to use: Use this procedure to send multimedia messages. NOTICE: Multimedia messaging is only supported when the LEX L10i is in Public network mode. Procedure:
1 In the main Messaging screen, tap
. The New Multimedia Message screen displays. Figure 55: New Multimedia Message Screen 2 In the To field, enter a name or a mobile phone number. 3 Tap to attach the media file of your choice:
Pictures Select a picture to attach. Capture picture Camera opens to take a picture and attach it. Videos Select a video to attach. Capture video Camcorder opens to record a video and attach it to the message. Audio Choose a sound file to attach. Record audio Sound Recorder opens to record a spoken message and attach it to the message. Slideshow Opens a screen to assemble text, photos, videos, and recordings into a slideshow of up to 10 slides to attach to the message. 96 Send Feedback 4 Tap to send the message. MN002347A01-A Chapter 6: Messaging Send Feedback 97 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A Applications Chapter 7 Applications This chapter describes the applications installed on the LEX L10i. Normally, you access the applications through the Home screen overlay by clicking the the Home screen up from the icon to reveal the icon. icon. Swipe Using File Browser Use the File Browser application to view and manage files on the device. To open File Browser, tap Figure 56: File Browser Screen
. The address bar indicates the current folder path. Tap the current folder path to manually enter a path and folder name. Tap Tap Tap to select multiple files/folder. to view the internal storage root folder. to view the microSD card root folder. to view the previous folder or to exit the application. Information View detailed information about the file or folder. Tap Tap and hold an item to perform an operation on that item. Select one of the options from the File Operations menu:
Move Move the file or folder to a new location. Copy Copy the select file. Delete Delete the selected file. Rename Rename the select file. Open as Open the selected file as a specific file type. Send Feedback 99 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Share Share the file with other devices. Tap to open additional functionality:
Tap the key New Folder to create a new folder in the current folder. Tap the key Search to search for a file or folder. Tap the key Sort to sort the list by name, by type, by size or by date. Tap the key Refresh to re-display the contents of the current folder. Tap the key List View to change the folder view from tile to list format Tap the key Change Size to change the size of the icons: Large, Normal or Small. Tap the key About File Browser to view the application version information. Managing People Contacts Use the People application to manage contacts. From a Home or Apps screen, tap screen: Search, Groups, All contacts, and Favorites. Tap the tabs to change how to view the contacts. Swipe up or down to scroll through the lists. The People application, displays four tabs at the top of the Adding People When and where to use: Use this procedure to add contacts. Procedure:
1 In the People application, tap 2 If there are more than one account with contacts, tap the one to use. 3 Type the contacts name and other information. Tap a field to start typing, and swipe down to
. view all categories. 4 Adding more than one entry for a category requires an additional step. For example:
To add a work address after typing a personal address, tap Add new for that field. To open a menu with preset labels, such as Home or Work for an email address, tap the label to the right of the item of contact information. To create your own label, tap Custom in the menu. 5 Tap Done. Editing People When and where to use: Use this procedure to edit contact information. Procedure:
1 In the People application, tap 2 Tap a name to edit. tab. 3 Tap . 4 Tap Edit. 100 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 5 Edit the contact information. 6 Tap Done. Deleting People When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete contacts. Procedure:
1 In the People application, tap 2 Tap a name to delete. tab. 3 Tap . 4 Tap Delete. 5 Tap OK to confirm. Camera This section provides information for taking photos and recording videos using the integrated digital cameras. NOTICE: If a microSD card is installed, the LEX L10i saves photos and videos on the microSD card. If a microSD card is not installed, the LEX L10i saves photos and videos on the internal storage. Send Feedback 101 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Figure 57: Camera Photo Screen Table 8: Camera Icons and Actions Call Out 1 Icon Camera Options 2 3 Shutter Photo Settings Action Tap to select Camera, Video, or Panorama mode. Tap to take a photo, a panor-
amic photo, or to record a vid-
eo. Tap to select camera settings. Taking Photos When and where to use: Use this procedure to take photos. NOTICE: For camera settings, see Camera Settings on page 106. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. The Camera screen is displayed. 102 Send Feedback Figure 58: Camera Screen MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 2 If necessary, tap to open the Camera Option bar and select Camera icon. Figure 59: Camera Option Bar for settings. 3 Tap 4 Frame the subject on screen. 5 To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. The zoom controls appear on the screen. Send Feedback 103 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Figure 60: Camera Zoom 6 Tap
. The camera brings the image into focus. When the image is in focus, the focus indicators (top and bottom of screen) turn green and the camera takes a photo. Taking a Panoramic Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to create a single wide image by panning slowly across a scene. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the Camera Options bar and tap
. Figure 61: Panoramic Mode 3 Frame one side of the scene to capture. 104 Send Feedback Figure 62: Panoramic Frame MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 4 Tap and slowly start panning across the area to capture. A small white square appears inside the button the shot is in progress. If panning too quickly, the message Too fast displays. 5 Tap to end the shot. The panorama is displayed and a progress indicator displays while it saves the image. Recording Videos When and where to use: Use this procedure to record videos. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the Camera Options bar and tap
. Figure 63: Video Mode 3 To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. Send Feedback 105 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications NOTICE: Video zoom works the same as camera zoom. 4 Point the camera and frame the scene. 5 Tap to start recording. The device starts recording the video. The video time remaining appears in the top left of the screen. 6 Tap to end recording. Camera Settings When you are in Photo mode, photo settings are displayed on the screen. to display the photo settings options. Tap Figure 64: Camera Settings The available photo settings are (from left icon to right icon):
Turn High Dynamic Range (HDR) on or off. Three screens of More Options. Settings for each option depend on the selected option. Click these icons to display more options. Some options require selecting a setting from a menu. Set these options accordingly. NOTICE: These options are similar to the camera options seen on most cameras. Set accordingly.
- First More Options Screen. 106 Send Feedback Figure 65: First More Options Screen MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications
- Second More Options Screen. Figure 66: Second More Options Screen
- Third More Options Screen. Send Feedback 107 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Figure 67: Third More Options Screen Switch from front to rear camera or from rear to front camera. Video Settings When in Video mode, video settings are displayed on screen. Tap options. Figure 68: Video Settings to display the video settings 108 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications The available video settings are (from left icon to right icon):
Two screens of More Options. Settings for each option depend on the selected option. You can select an item from a menu or you select an option by clicking it. NOTICE: These options are similar to the video options seen on most cameras. Set the video options accordingly.
- First More Options Screen. Figure 69: First More Options Video Screen
- Second More Options Screen. Figure 70: Second More Options Video Screen Switch from front to rear video or from rear to front video. Gallery The Gallery is used to manage your photos and videos. NOTICE: The device supports the following image formats: JPEG, GIF, PNG, and BMP. Use the Gallery to:
View photos Play videos Send Feedback 109 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Perform basic editing of photos Set photos as wallpaper Set photos as a contact photo Share photos and videos To open the Gallery application, tap The Gallery presents all photos and videos stored on the microSD card and internal memory. Figure 71: Gallery Albums
. Tap an album to open it and view its contents. The photos and videos in the album are displayed in chronological order. Tap a photo or video in an album to view it. Tap icon (top left corner) to return to the main Gallery screen. Tap to return to the main Gallery screen. Working with Albums Albums are groups of images and videos in folders. Tap an album to open it. The photos and videos are listed in a chronologically ordered grid. The name of the album displays at the top of the screen. 110 Send Feedback Figure 72: Photos/Videos Inside an Album MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Swipe left or right to scroll images across the screen. Sharing an Album When and where to use: Use this procedure to share an album in your Gallery. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap and hold an album until it highlights. 4 Tap other albums as required. 5 Tap
. Share applications are displayed. 6 Select the application that you want to use. 7 Follow the instructions within the selected application. Getting Album Information When and where to use: Use this procedure to view information about an album. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. Send Feedback 111 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 3 Tap and hold an album until it highlights. 4 Tap . 5 Tap Details. Deleting an Album When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete an album that you no longer need. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap and hold an album until it highlights. 4 Tap . 5 Tap Delete. 6 Tap OK to delete the album. Working with Photos Use Gallery to view photos on the microSD card and edit and share photos. Viewing and Browsing Photos When and where to use: Use this procedure to view or browse photos that you have taken. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a photo. 112 Send Feedback Figure 73: Photo Example MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 5 Swipe left or right to view the next or previous photo in the album. 6 Turn the LEX L10i to view the photo in upright (portrait) or sideways (landscape) orientation. The photo is displayed (but not saved) in the new orientation. 7 Tap the photo to view the controls. 8 Double-tap the screen to zoom in or pinch two fingers together or spread them apart to zoom in or out. 9 Drag the photo to view parts that are not in view. Rotating a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to rotate a photo. Procedure:
1 Tap a photo to view the controls. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap
. 4 Tap
. The photo rotates 90 clockwise. Each tap rotates the photo another 90. The photo is automatically saved with the new orientation. Send Feedback 113 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Cropping a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to crop a photo. Procedure:
1 In the Gallery, tap a photo to view the controls. 2 Tap 3 Tap 4 Tap
.
). The cropping grid displays. Figure 74: Cropping Grid 5 Adjust the endpoints to select the portion of the photo to crop. 6 Tap CROP to save a copy of the cropped photo. The original version is retained. Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon When and where to use: Use this procedure to set a photo as a contact icon. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 114 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 4 Tap the photo to open it. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Set picture as. 7 Select a contact. 8 Crop the photo accordingly as described in Cropping a Photo on page 114. 9 Tap SAVE. Sharing a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to share a photo. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a photo to open it. 5 Tap 6 Tap the application to use for sharing the selected photo (for example Bluetooth). Deleting a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete a photo. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a photo to open it. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Delete. 7 Tap OK to delete the photo. Working with Videos Use the Gallery to view videos on the microSD card and share videos. Watching a Video When and where to use: Use this procedure to watch a video. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. Send Feedback 115 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a video. 5 Tap
. The video begins to play. 6 Tap the screen to view the playback controls. Figure 75: Video Playback Controls 7 Tap the Pause control. 8 Tap to return to the previous screen or to return to the Home screen. Sharing a Video When and where to use: Use this procedure to share a video. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a video to open it. 5 Tap
. The Share menu appears. 6 Tap the application to use to share the selected video. The selected application opens with the video attached to a new message. Deleting a Video When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete a video. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 116 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a video to open it. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Delete. 7 Tap OK. Using Sound Recorder Use Sound Recorder to record audio messages. Recordings are saved on the microSD card (if installed) or the Internal Storage and available in the Music application playlist titled My Recordings. The recording process is done in four stages. 1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap to start a recording. Figure 76: Start Recording 4 Record your message. Send Feedback 117 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Figure 77: Record Your Message 5 Tap 6 Tap Done to save the recording. to stop recording. Figure 78: Finish Recording 118 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Voice Dialer Voice Dialer is a speech dialog system that provides natural human interface for users to communicate seamlessly with the device. Users can make phone calls, look up contact information, launch programs or check calendars. 1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. The following window displays. Figure 79: Voice Dialer Window 3 Say one of the following commands:
Call Dial Redial Open Calling a Person by Name When and where to use: Use this procedure to call a person by name. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say the name of the person that you want to call (for example, John Doe). 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap Call John Doe. The call is initiated. Redialing a Previous Call When and where to use: Use this procedure to redial a previous call. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. Send Feedback 119 MN002347A01-A Chapter 7: Applications or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say Redial. 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap Redial. The call is initiated. Dialing by Number When and where to use: Use this procedure to dial a number using the phone number. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say Dial<[phone number]>. 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap the number that displays. The call is initiated. Opening an Application When and where to use: Use this procedure to open an application. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say Open<[application name]>. 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap the application name. The application opens. 120 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Wireless Chapter 8 Wireless This section provides information on the wireless features of the LEX L10i. Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Bluetooth Wireless Wide Area Networks Use Wireless Wide Area Networks (WWANs) to access data over a cellular network. This section provides information on:
Setting the preferred network Public / Private Sharing a data connection Enabling / Disabling data roaming Monitoring data usage Limiting connections to 2G, 3G, 4G networks Editing Access Point Names (APNs) Adding Virtual Private Network VPN Cellular broadcasts Sharing the Mobile Data Connection The Tethering & portable hotspot settings allow you to share your data connection. You can share the LEX L10i mobile data connection with a single computer via USB tethering or Bluetooth tethering. You can also share the data connection with up to eight devices at once, by turning it into a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. While the LEX L10i is sharing its data connection, an icon appears at the top of the screen and a corresponding message appears in the notification list. Configuring USB Tethering Use this procedure to share a data connection with a host computer. NOTICE: USB tethering is not supported on computers running Mac OS. If your computer is running Windows 7 or a recent version of Linux (such as Ubuntu), follow these instructions without any special preparation. If running a version of Windows that precedes Windows 7, or some other operating system, you may need to prepare the computer to establish a network connection via USB. NOTICE: After connecting the LEX L10i to a computer using USB tethering, the computer disconnects from the network connection, for a short time, and does not have access to the Internet (the LEX L10i becomes the primary network adapter). Procedure:
1 Connect the LEX L10i to a host computer with the USB cable. Send Feedback 121 MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Figure 80: USB Cable Connection to Host Computer A USB icon device appears briefly at the top of the screen. appears at the top of the screen, and the notification Connected as a media 2 Tap
. 3 Tap 4 Tap More ... 5 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 6 Check USB tethering. The host computer is now sharing the LEX L10i data connection. Postrequisites: To stop sharing the data connection, uncheck USB tethering or disconnect the USB cable. NOTICE: The USB cover needs to be fully seated after use. Configuring Bluetooth Tethering Prerequisites: Configure the host computer to obtain its network connection using Bluetooth. For more information, see the host computers documentation. When and where to use: Use this procedure to tether Bluetooth to share the data connection with a host computer. Procedure:
1 Pair the LEX L10i with the host computer. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap 4 Tap More ... 5 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 122 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 6 Check Bluetooth tethering. The host computer is now sharing the LEX L10i data connection. Postrequisites: To stop sharing the data connection, uncheck Bluetooth tethering . Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings Prerequisites: Configure the Wi-Fi Hotspot settings. When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn your LEX L10i into a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 5 Select Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. After a moment, the LEX L10i starts broadcasting its Wi-Fi network name (SSID), so you can connect to it with up to eight computers or other devices. Postrequisites: To stop sharing the data connection, uncheck Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Configuring the Wi-Fi Hotspot When and where to use: Use this procedure is used to configure a Wi-Fi hotspot. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 5 Tap Set up Wi-Fi hotspot. The Set up Wi-Fi hotspot screen displays. Send Feedback 123 MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Figure 81: Set up Wi-Fi Hotspot Dialog Box 6 In the Network SSID text field, edit the network name. 7 Tap the Security option and select a security method from the drop-down list. Open WPA2 PSK. 8 In the Password text field, enter a password. NOTICE: If Open is selected in the Security option, a password is not required. 9 Tap Save. Data Usage Data usage refers to the amount of data uploaded or downloaded by the LEX L10i during a given period. Depending on the wireless plan, you may be charged additional fees when your data usage exceeds your plan's limit. To monitor your data usage, go to Data usage. CAUTION: The usage displayed on the data usage settings screen is measured by your device. Your carrier's data usage accounting may differ. Usage in excess of your carrier plan's data limits can result in steep overage charges. The feature described here can help you track your usage, but is not guaranteed to prevent additional charges. Data usage settings allow you to:
Set the data usage level at which you' will receive a warning. Set a data usage limit. View or restrict data usage by app. 124 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Identify mobile hotspots and restrict background downloads that may result in extra charges. By default, when you open the data usage settings screen you see the settings for mobile data: that is, the data network or networks provided by your carrier. Just below the on-off switch, note the data usage cycle. Tap it to choose a different cycle. This date range is the period of time for which the graph displays data usage. The vertical white lines on the graph show a period of time within the data usage cycle. This range determines the usage amount displayed just below the graph. Drag lines to change the period. Setting Data Usage Warning When and where to use: Use this procedure to set data usage warning. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Data usage. 4 Check Set mobile data limit. 5 Drag the red line up/down to the level where you want to limit. 6 Drag the orange line up/down to the level where you want to receive a warning. When your data usage reaches this level, you' will receive a notification. Setting Auto-Sync You can also conserve data usage by syncing your apps manually, only when you need the data, rather than relying on auto-sync. When and where to use: Use this procedure to set Auto-Sync. Procedure:
To turn auto-sync off or on, tap Auto-sync data. Disabling Data When Roaming When and where to use: Use this procedure to prevent the LEX L10i from transmitting data over other carriers mobile networks when leaving an area that is covered by the carriers networks. This is useful for controlling expenses if the service plan does not include data roaming. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Un-check Data roaming. 6 Tap
. Send Feedback 125 MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Limiting Data Connection to a Network You can limit the device Private or Public services or extend the battery life by limiting the data connections to Global networks, LTE networks, or CDMA networks. NOTICE: This feature is only available on some networks. Check with service provider. When and where to use: Use this procedure to limit data connection to a network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Tap Network Mode. 6 Select Global mode, LTE only, or CDMA only . 7 Tap
. Editing the Access Point Name When and where to use: When network information needs to change, the user can edit the APN information. NOTICE: Many service provider Access Point Name (APN) data are pre-configured in the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Tap Access Point Names. 6 Tap . 7 When finished, tap . 8 Tap Save. 9 Tap the radio button next to the new APN name to start using it. 10 Tap
. Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN) A virtual private network (VPN) extends a private network across a public network. VPN enables the LEX L10i to communicate data across a public network while benefiting from the functionality and security of the private network. When connected by VPN, the LEX L10i establishes a virtual point-to-
point connection through a dedicated virtual tunneling protocols or data encryption. TheLEX L10i enables connection to Basic VPN to communicate through any VPN and to Motorola Solutions Mobile 126 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless VPN (MVPN) to communicate through Motorola Solutions mobile VPN. This section describes adding a basic VPN. Motorola Mobile VPN is added and configured by your technical support and requires license certification for use. When and where to use: Use this procedure to add a virtual private network to the LEX L10i (not including the Motorola Mobile VPN). Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap VPN. 5 Tap Basic VPN . 6 Tap + to add VPN profile. 7 Enter and check:
Name Type Server Address If required, check PPP encryption (MPPE). If required, check Show advanced options to enter:
DNS servers DNS search domains Forwarding routs 8 Tap Save. Connection to VPN is indicated by is displayed. 9 Check My Keychain and tap Allow. 10 Tap
. on the status bar and the Choose Certification screen Cell Broadcasts Cell Broadcasts allows emergency alert messages to be broadcast simultaneously from a service provider to multiple users in within a designated geographical area. Broadcasts are often used for weather updates, regional events, traffic conditions and other services. When and where to use: Use this procedure to enable emergency alert messages by cell broadcasts on the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap Cell broadcasts. Send Feedback 127 MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 5 Check the emergency alert types you want to receive. 6 Tap
. Wireless Local Area Networks Wireless local area networks (WLANs) allow the LEX L10i to communicate wirelessly inside a building. Before using the LEX L10i on a WLAN, the facility must be set up with the required hardware to run the WLAN (sometimes known as infrastructure). The infrastructure and the LEX L10i must both be properly configured to enable this communication. See the documentation provided with the infrastructure (access points (APs), access ports, switches, Radius servers) for instructions on how to set up the infrastructure. Once the infrastructure is set up to enforce the chosen WLAN security scheme, use the Wireless &
networks settings to configure the LEX L10i to match the security scheme. The LEX L10i supports the following WLAN security options:
Open Wireless Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)/WPA2 Personal (PSK) Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
- Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) with Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 (MSCHAPv2) and Generic Token Card (GTC) authentication.
- EAP-Transport Layer Security (TLS)
- EAP-TTLS - with Password Authentication Protocol (PAP), MSCHAP and MSCHAPv2 authentication The Status bar displays icons that indicate Wi-Fi network availability and Wi-Fi status. NOTICE: Turn off Wi-Fi when not using it, to extend the life of the battery. Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to scan for and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 128 Send Feedback Figure 82: Settings Screen MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 3 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the ON position. 4 Tap Wi-Fi. The LEX L10i searches for WLANs in the area and lists them. Figure 83: Wi-Fi Screen 5 Scroll through the list and select the desired WLAN network. Send Feedback 129 MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 6 For open networks, tap profile once or press and hold and then select Connect to network or for secure networks enter the required password or other credentials then tap Connect. See technical support for more information. The LEX L10i obtains a network address and other required information from the network using the dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) protocol. 7 In the Wi-Fi setting field, Connected displays indicating that the LEX L10i LEX L10i is connected to the WLAN. Configuring a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to configure a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the switch to the ON position. The LEX L10i searches for WLANs in the area and lists them on the screen. 5 Scroll through the list and select the desired WLAN network. 6 Tap the desired network. If the network security is Open, the LEX L10i automatically connects to the network. For all other network security a dialog box appears. Figure 84: WLAN Network Security Dialog Boxes NOTICE: By default, the network Proxy is set to None and the IP settings is set to DHCP. 7 If the network security is WEP or WPA/WPA2 PSK, enter the required password and then tap Connect. 8 If the network security is 802.1x EAP, enter the information below and then tap Connect:
130 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Tap the EAP method drop-down list and select PEAP, TLS, or TTLS. Tap the Phase 2 authentication drop-down list and select an authentication method. If required, tap CA certificate and select a Certification Authority (CA) certificate. Note:
Certificates are installed using the Security settings. If required, tap User certificate and select a user certificate. Note: User certificates are installed using the Location & security settings. If required, in the Identity text box, enter the username credentials. If desired, in the Anonymous identity text box, enter an anonymous identity username. If required, in the Password text box, enter the password. 9 Tap
. Adding a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: You can add a Wi-Fi Network that is currently out of range or indiscoverable. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the On position. 5 Tap +. 6 Enter network SSID and select Security. 7 Tap Save. The LEX L10i connects to the wireless network. 8 Tap
. Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to manually add a Wi-Fi network if the network does not broadcast its name (SSID) or to add a Wi-Fi network when out of range. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the ON position. 5 Tap + in the bottom right corner of the screen. By default, the network Proxy is set to None and the IP settings is set to DHCP. 6 In the Network SSID text box, enter the name of the Wi-Fi network. 7 In the Security drop-down list, select the type of security. Options included are:
Send Feedback 131 MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless None WEP WPA/WPA2 PSK 802.1x EAP 8 If the network security is None, tap Save. 9 If the network security is WEP or WPA/WPA2 PSK, enter the required password and then tap Save. 10 If the network security is 802.1x EAP enter the information below and then tap Save:
Tap EAP method drop-down list and select PEAP, TLS, or TTLS. Tap Phase 2 authentication drop-down list and select an authentication method. Tap CA certificate and select a Certification Authority (CA) certificate. NOTICE: Certificates are installed using the Security settings. Tap User certificate and select a user certificate. NOTICE: User certificates are installed using the Security settings. Tap Identity to enter the username credentials. Tap Anonymous to enter an anonymous identity username. Tap Password to enter password. 11 Tap
. Advanced Wi-Fi Settings Use the Advanced settings to configure additional Wi-Fi settings. NOTICE: Advanced Wi-Fi settings are for the device not for a specific wireless network. From the Wi-Fi screen, tap Advanced to view the advanced settings. Network notification When enabled, notifies the user when an open network is available. Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep Opens a menu to set whether and when the Wi-Fi radio turns off.
- Always The radio stays on when the device enters suspend mode.
- Only when plugged in The radio stays on while the device is connected to external power.
- Never (increases data usage) The radio turns off when the device enters suspend mode
(default). Wi-Fi optimization Minimize the battery usage when Wi-Fi is on. Avoid poor Connection Connects to the internet only if connection is good. MAC address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the device when connecting to Wi-Fi networks. IP address Displays the IP address of the device when connecting to Wi-Fi networks. 132 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless WLAN Configuration Use the WLAN Configuration settings to configure additional WLAN settings. From the Wi-Fi screen, tap Advanced to view the settings. The following two settings are used to configure WLAN:
Wi-Fi frequency band
- Auto (2.4GHz and 5GHz) Use both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (default).
- 5GHz Only Use only the 5 GHz band.
- 2.4GHz Only Use only the 2.4 GHz band. Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep
- Always Wi-Fi is always enabled even in sleep mold.
- Only when plugged in Wi-Fi is enabled only when the device is plugged in. If the device is not plugged in, the device will not enter the sleep mold.
- Never (increases data usage) Wi-Fi is never disabled. Modifying a Wi-Fi Network The user can change settings and passwords for a network in the Wi-Fi list. When and where to use: Use this procedure to modify a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the ON position. 5 Tap and hold on a network name and then tap Modify network. 6 Modify the network settings and then tap Save. 7 Tap
. Removing a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to remove a Wi-Fi network from your list of Wi-Fi networks. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 In the Wi-Fi networks list, tap and hold the name of the network. 5 In the menu, tap Forget network. 6 Tap
. Send Feedback 133 MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Bluetooth Device The LEX L10i supports Motorola Operations Critical Wireless (OCW) Push-to-talk Pod (NNTN8127) and Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) through a wireless Bluetooth connection. Adaptive Frequency Hopping Adaptive Frequency Hopping (AFH) is a method of avoiding fixed frequency interferers, and can be used with Bluetooth voice. All devices in the piconet (Bluetooth network) must be AFH-capable in order for AFH to work. There is no AFH when connecting and discovering devices. Avoid making Bluetooth connections and discoveries during critical 802.11b communications. AFH for Bluetooth consists of four main sections:
Channel Classification - A method of detecting an interference on a channel-by-channel basis, or pre-defined channel mask. Link Management - Coordinates and distributes the AFH information to the rest of the Bluetooth network. Hop Sequence Modification - Avoids interference by selectively reducing the number of hopping channels. Channel Maintenance - A method for periodically re-evaluating the channels. The Bluetooth radio in this device operates as a Class 2 device power class. The maximum output power is 2.5 mW and the expected range is 10 meters (32.8 ft.). A definition of ranges based on power class is difficult to obtain due to power and device differences, and whether one measures open space or closed office space. NOTICE: It is not recommended to perform Bluetooth wireless technology inquiry when high rate 802.11b operation is required. Bluetooth Security The current Bluetooth specification defines security at the link level. Application-level security is not specified. This allows application developers to define security mechanisms tailored to their specific need. Link-level security occurs between devices, not users, while application-level security can be implemented on a per-user basis. The Bluetooth specification defines security algorithms and procedures required to authenticate devices, and if needed, encrypt the data flowing on the link between the devices. Device authentication is a mandatory feature of Bluetooth while link encryption is optional. Pairing of Bluetooth devices is accomplished by creating an initialization key used to authenticate the devices and create a link key for them. Entering a common personal identification number (PIN) in the devices being paired generates the initialization key. The PIN is never sent over the air. By default, the Bluetooth stack responds with no key when a key is requested (it is up to user to respond to the key request event). Authentication of Bluetooth devices is based-upon a challenge-response transaction. Bluetooth allows for a PIN or passkey used to create other 128-bit keys used for security and encryption. The encryption key is derived from the link key used to authenticate the pairing devices. Also worthy of note is the limited range and fast frequency hopping of the Bluetooth radios that makes long distance eavesdropping difficult. Recommendations are:
Perform pairing in a secure environment Keep PIN codes private and do not store the PIN codes in the device Implement application-level security 134 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Bluetooth Profiles The LEX L10i supports the following Bluetooth services:
Generic Access Profile (GAP) Use for device discovery and authentication. Service Discovery Protocol (SDAP) Handles the search for known and specific services and general services. Serial Port Profile (SPP) Sets up a virtual serial port and connects two Bluetooth enabled devices. For example, connecting the LEX L10i to a printer. Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Allows Bluetooth keyboards, pointing devices, gaming devices and remote monitoring devices to connect to the LEX L10i. Object Push Profile (OPP) Allows the LEX L10i to push and pull objects to and from a push server. Dial-up Networking (DUN) Allows the LEX L10i to access the Internet and other dial-up services using a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. Hands-Free Profile (HFP) Allows a hands-free device, such as a Bluetooth headset, to place and receive calls on the LEX L10i. Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Allows the LEX L10i to stream stereo-quality audio to a wireless headset or wireless stereo speakers. Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Allows the LEX L10i to control televisions, hi-fi equipment, etc. General Object Exchange Profile (GOEP) Provides a basis for other data profiles. Based on OBEX and sometimes referred to as such. Handsfree Profile (HFP) Allow car hands-free kits to communicate with mobile phones in the car. Personal Area Network (PAN) Allow the use of Bluetooth Network Encapsulation Protocol on Layer 3 protocols for transport over a Bluetooth link. General Audio/Video Distribution Profile (GAVDP) Provides the basis for A2DP, and VDP. Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP) Allows exchange of Phone Book Objects between a car kit and a mobile phone to allow the car kit to display the name of the incoming caller; allow the car kit to download the phone book so the user can initiate a call from the car display. Message Access Profile (MAP) allows exchange of messages between devices. Handset Profile (HSP) Provides support for the popular Bluetooth headsets to be used with mobile phones with ability to ring, answer a call, hang up and adjust the volume. File Transfer Profile (FTP) Provides the capability to browse, manipulate and transfer files and folders in a file system of another system. Proximity profile (PXP) Enables proximity monitoring between two devices. Heart Rate Profile (HRP) Enables transmission and reception of medical device data. Health Thermometer profile (HTP) Enables transmission and reception of medical device data. Bluetooth Power States The Bluetooth radio is off by default. The following modes are available:
Suspend When the LEX L10i goes into suspend mode, the Bluetooth radio stays on. Airplane Mode When the LEX L10i is placed in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio turns off. When Airplane Mode is disabled, the Bluetooth radio returns to the prior state. When in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio can be turned back on if desired. Send Feedback 135 MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Bluetooth Radio Power for Android Turn off the Bluetooth radio to save power or if entering an area with radio restrictions (e.g., an airplane). When the radio is off, other Bluetooth devices cannot see or connect to the device. Turn on the Bluetooth radio to exchange information with other Bluetooth devices (within range). Communicate only with Bluetooth radios in close proximity. NOTICE: To achieve the best battery life, turn off radios when not in use. Enabling Bluetooth When and where to use: Use this procedure to enable Bluetooth. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Slide the Bluetooth switch to the ON position. also appears in the Status bar. 4 Tap
. Disabling Bluetooth Use this procedure to disable Bluetooth. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Slide the Bluetooth switch to the OFF position. 4 Tap
. Changing the Bluetooth Name By default, the LEX L10i has a generic Bluetooth name that is visible to other devices when connected. When and where to use: Use this procedure to change the Bluetooth name. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. Bluetooth. 3 Tap 4 If Bluetooth is not on, slide the switch to the ON position. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Rename Phone. 7 Enter a name and tap Rename. 136 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 8 Tap
. Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device Some Bluetooth devices have multiple profiles for different connections. When and where to use: Use this procedure to select a profile on the Bluetooth device that connects to the LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Bluetooth. 4 In the AVAILABLE DEVICES list, tap 5 Under PROFILES, select a profile to use. next to the device name. 6 Tap
. Send Feedback 137 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A ADB and USB Driver Setup Chapter 9 ADB and USB Driver Setup This chapter describes how to set up the Android Debug Bridge (ADB) and USB driver for your Windows PC. The ADB and USB driver are required to perform Fastboot OS updates and to capture debug logs using ADB. They are also used to push files onto a device and for APK installation. Required Software and Hardware In order to install the ADB and USB driver, certain software and hardware requirements must be met. Hardware (one of the following)
- Windows PC running Window 8
- Windows PC running Window 7 32/64 bits
- Windows PC running Windows XP SP3 with Micro-B USB Cable Software
- LEX_L10.zip (contains ADB and USB drivers)
- Android SDK (adb utility) installation procedure available at the following link: https://
developer.android.com/sdk/installing/index.html?pkg=tools Installing USB Driver and ADB Prerequisites: Ensure all old USB drivers are removed before beginning this procedure. When and where to use: Use this procedure to install the USB driver and ADB. Procedure:
1 Insert the provided LEX L10i ADB USB Driver CD into a CD or DVD drive. 2 Click the Start button and select Computer. Figure 85: Access Computer Send Feedback 139 MN002347A01-A Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup 3 Open the CD drive and copy LEX_L10.zipto your desktop. Figure 86: Access CD 4 Extract the LEX_L10.zip file copied on your desktop to C:\Program Files (x86) or any other location in your OS installation drive where you prefer to keep the driver, and then select OK. Figure 87: Select Destination 5 Enable USB debugging in your device by:
a On the LEX L10i, navigate to Settings About Phone and click the build number seven times to enable developer options. 140 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup b Tap to return to Settings; then, tap Developer options and click the checkbox for USB Debugging. c Click OK when prompted to allow USB debugging. 6 Configure the driver in the Device Manager. a On your computer, click the Start button and search for Device Manager and open it. Figure 88: Access Device Manager b Find Android under Other devices right-click and select Update Driver Software. Figure 89: Select Update Drive Software c Select Browse my computer for driver software. Send Feedback 141 MN002347A01-A Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup Figure 90: Select Browse my computer for driver software d Click Browse and select the folder where the driver was extracted (that is, C:\Program Files
(x86)\Lex L10_ADB_USB_Driver or the custom path chosen by you at the time of extracting the LEX_L10.zip file. e Click OK and then click Next. Figure 91: Select Installation Folder 142 Send Feedback f If prompted, select Install this driver software anyway. Figure 92: Select Install this driver software anyway MN002347A01-A Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup g Click Close to complete the installation. Figure 93: Close the Installation The driver is now installed. 7 Set up the ADB USB profile on your PC as follow-up with these steps:
a After driver installation, make sure there is a .android folder in your user profile directory. b If you have installed and run ADB for the device before, run adb kill- server before you can use the ADB. c To see if ADB installs successfully, run adb devices from the command line. Send Feedback 143 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A Accessories Chapter 10 Accessories This chapter provides information for using the accessories associated with the LEX L10i. Accessories This section lists the LEX L10i accessories along with specifications. LEX 10i General Accessories:
Replaceable Standard Battery Li Ion 2340 mAh 3.7V Replaceable High-capacity Battery Pack Li Ion 4680 mAh 3.7V Handheld Standard Battery Door Handheld Extended Battery Door LEX L10i Auto Charge (Vehicle Power Adapter) Power Supply Carry Accessory Glove LEX L10i Rubber Sleeve Desktop Cradle Vehicle Cradle USB Cable Holster USB Cable A USB cable is necessary to connect your LEX L10i to a charger. The USB cable:
Connects the LEX L10i to a USB charger to charge the LEX L10i. Provides USB communication with a host computer. When the LEX L10i is connected to a host computer, the LEX L10i appears as a removable disk on the host computer. Figure 94: USB Cable Send Feedback 145 MN002347A01-A Chapter 10: Accessories Desktop Cradle A desktop cradle provides an alternative method to charge your LEX L10i. The desktop cradle:
Provides power for charging and operating the LEX L10i Enables connecting a mouse to the LEX L10i Figure 95: Desktop Cradle Charging the LEX L10i To charge the LEX L10i, insert the LEX L10i units by placing the bottom of the LEX L10i, at a slight forward angle, into the cradle. The LED of the LEX L10i, shows the status of the battery charging. See Battery Charge LED Status for charging status indications. The 2280 mAh battery charges in approximately four hours. Charge the LEX L10i units in temperatures from 0C to +45C (32F to 113F) ). Note that charging is intelligently controlled by the LEX L10i. To accomplish this, for small periods of time, the LEX L10i alternately enables and disables battery charging to keep the battery at acceptable temperatures. The LEX L10i indicates when charging is disabled due to abnormal temperatures via its notification LED. Vehicle Cradle Install the vehicle mount on the surface of the vehicle that is reasonably flat and free of dirt and oil. Clean the mounting surface with a glass cleaner and a clean cotton cloth. Install the vehicle mount on the windshield or other flat car surface. CAUTION: Some states prohibit the mounting of any electronic device in any location on the vehicle dashboard. Be sure to check with local laws acceptable mounting areas before installing the auto mounting kit. Figure 96: Vehicle Cradle 146 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 10: Accessories Holster Use the holster to securely carry the LEX L10i when working. The holster is threaded through a belt and stores the LEX L10i when not in use or when using a headset. Figure 97: Holster Insert the LEX L10i into the holster with the screen facing in or out. Send Feedback 147 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A Maintenance and Troubleshooting Chapter 11 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing the LEX L10i. It also provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during LEX L10i operation. Maintaining the LEX L10i For trouble-free service, observe the following tips when using the LEX L10i:
Do not scratch or use a pen or a pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the screen. The touch-sensitive screen is made of polycarbonate. Do not to drop or subject the device to strong impact. Protect from extreme temperatures. Do not leave device on the dashboard of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from heat sources. Do not store in any location that is dusty, damp, or wet. Use a soft lens cloth to clean the device. If the surface of the screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol. Periodically replace the rechargeable battery to ensure maximum battery life and product performance. Battery life depends on individual usage patterns. Battery Safety Guidelines Adhere to the following guidelines for battery safety:
The area where the units are charged should be clear of debris and combustible materials or chemicals. Follow battery usage, storage, and charging guidelines found in this guide. To charge the battery, the battery and charger temperatures must be between +32 F and +113 F Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard.
(0 C and +45 C) Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Use of an incompatible battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If you have any questions about the compatibility of a battery or a charger, contact Motorola Solution support. If charging through a USB port, the device shall only be connected to products that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the USB-IF compliance program. To enable authentication of an approved battery, as required by IEEE1725 clause 10.2.1, all batteries will carry a Motorola hologram. Do not fit any battery without checking it has the Motorola authentication hologram. Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture, or shred. Severe impact from dropping any battery-operated device on a hard surface could cause the battery to overheat. Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids, or expose to fire, explosion, or other hazard. Do not leave or store the equipment in or near areas that might get very hot, such as in a parked vehicle or near a radiator or other heat source. Do not place battery into a microwave oven or dryer. Send Feedback 149 MN002347A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Battery usage by children should be supervised. Follow local regulations to properly dispose of used rechargeable batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in fire. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area with large amounts of water and seek medical advice. If you suspect damage to your equipment or battery, contact Motorola Solutions support to arrange for inspection. Cleaning Guidelines This section includes cleaning guidelines for the LEX L10i. WARNING: Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, unplug the device and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines. Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, unplug the device and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines. CAUTION:
Always wear eye protection. Read the warning labels on compressed air and alcohol products before use. If you have to use any other solution for medical reasons, contact Motorola Solutions for more information. Approved Cleanser Active Ingredients 100% of the active ingredients in any cleaner must consist of one or a combination of the following:
isopropyl alcohol, or mild dish soap. Cleaning Instructions Do not apply liquids directly to the device. Dampen a soft cloth or use pre-moistened wipes. Do not wrap the device in the cloth or wipe, but gently wipe the unit Harmful Ingredients Many vinyl gloves contain phthalate additives, which are often not recommended for medical use and are known to be harmful to the housing of the device. The device should not be handled while wearing vinyl gloves containing phthalates, or before hands are washed to remove contaminant residue after gloves are removed. If products containing the harmful ingredients are used before handling the device, such as hand sanitizers containing ethanolamine, hands must be completely dry before handling the device to prevent damage to the plastics. Cleaning Materials Required Alcohol wipes Lens tissue Cotton-tipped applicators Can of compressed air with a tube Isopropyl alcohol 150 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Cleaning Frequency The cleaning frequency is up to your discretion due to the varied environments in which the mobile devices are used. They may be cleaned as frequently as required, but it is advisable to clean the camera window periodically when used in dirty environments to ensure optimum performance. Cleaning the LEX L10i This section includes instructions on how the LEX L10i should be cleaned. Housing Using the alcohol wipes, wipe the housing including buttons. Display The display can be wiped down with the alcohol wipes, but care should be taken not to allow any pooling of liquid around the edges of the display. Immediately dry the display with a soft, non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking. Camera Window Wipe the camera window periodically with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses. Cleaning the Interface Connector When and where to use: Use this procedure To clean the contacts of the interface connector on LEX L10i. Procedure:
1 Power off the LEX L10i. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator along the contacts of the interface connector. Slowly move the applicator back-and-forth from one side of the connector to the other. 4 If grease and other dirt can be found on other areas of the cradle, remove using a lint-free cloth and alcohol. 5 Allow few minutes (depending on ambient temperature and humidity) for the alcohol to air dry before powering on the LEX L10i. Cleaning the Battery Contacts When and where to use: Perform this procedure to clean the battery connectors. Procedure:
1 Remove the main battery from LEX L10i. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Gently, rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the contacts. Do not leave any cotton residue on the contacts. 4 Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the contacts area. Send Feedback 151 MN002347A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 5 Use a dry cotton-tipped applicator and repeat steps 4 and 5 at least three times. CAUTION: Do not point nozzle at yourself and others. Ensure that the nozzle or tube is away from your face. 6 Spray compressed air on the connector area by pointing the tube/nozzle about inch away from the surface. 7 Inspect the area for any grease or dirt, repeat if required. Troubleshooting This section lists common problems and solutions to fix the problems. Table 9: Troubleshooting the LEX L10i Problem After pressing the Power button, does not turn on. Cause Battery is completely discharged. Battery not installed properly. Power button not held down long enough. Device not responding. Battery charge level is very low. Solution Re-charge or replace the battery. Install the battery properly. See Installing the Battery. Press the Power button until the Motorola Solutions splash screen is displayed. Reset the device. Re-charge or replace the battery. Battery is de-
pleted but is charging. The device is at an ex-
tremely low-
power state. Battery failed. Device was removed from power while battery Press and hold the Power button to turn on. Charge the device for a few minutes. The LED changes to flashing green then press the Power button to turn on the LEX L10i. If LED continuously blinks red, check power connections. Disconnect and reconnect connections. Replace battery. If the device still does not operate, per-
form a hardware reset. Insert device in cradle or attach Charge Cable. The 2280 mAh battery fully charges in approximately four hours. Table continued Send Feedback After pressing the Power button, the device does not turn on but a charge battery icon Appears. After connecting the device to a Ca-
ble, a battery charging icon Ap-
pears. When charging, the LED slowly blinks red. Battery did not charge. 152 Cause was charg-
ing. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Device re-
moved from USB cable or disconnected from host computer during com-
munication. Incorrect ca-
ble configura-
tion. Wi-Fi radio is not on. You moved out of range of an access point. Bluetooth ra-
dio is not on. You moved out of range of another Bluetooth de-
vice. You are in an area of poor cellular serv-
ice. VPN is not set up cor-
rectly. SIM card not installed properly. Data plan not activated. Volume set-
ting is low or turned off. Device is in-
active. Problem During data com-
munication with a host computer, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. During data com-
munication over Wi-
Fi, no data trans-
mitted, or transmit-
ted data was in-
complete. During data com-
munication over Bluetooth, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. During data com-
munication over Public / Private, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. No sound. Device turns off. Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Solution Battery does not charge if ambient temperature is below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Reattach the communication cable and re-transmit. See technical support. Turn on the Wi-Fi radio. Move closer to an access point. Turn on the Bluetooth radio. Move without 10 m (32.8 ft.) of the other device. Move into an area that has better service. See technical support for VPN setup information. Remove and re-install the SIM cards. Contact your service provider and ensure that your data plan is enabled. Adjust the volume. The display turns off after a period of inactivity. Set this pe-
riod to 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 5, 10, or 30 minutes. Table continued 153 MN002347A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Problem A message ap-
pears stating not enough storage memory. Device cannot find any Bluetooth devi-
ces nearby. Cause Battery is de-
pleted. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Too many applications installed on the device. Too far from other Blue-
tooth devi-
ces. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) near-
by are not turned on. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) are not in discov-
erable mode. Solution Recharge or replace the battery. Move device to an area where the ambient temperature is between 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Remove user-installed applications on the device to recov-
er memory. Select Select the unused programs and tap Uninstall. Move closer to the other Bluetooth device(s), within a range of 10 meters (32.8 feet). Apps Downloaded. Turn on the Bluetooth device(s) to find. Set the Bluetooth device(s) to discoverable mode. If need-
ed, refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device (accesso-
ry) user manual.. Backing Up the LEX L10i Backing up the LEX L10i must be done manually. Prerequisites: A USB cable to connect the LEX L10i to a computer. When and where to use: Use this procedure anytime a backup of the LEX L10i is necessary. Procedure:
1 Connect the LEX L10i to a computer using the supplied USB cable. The first time you connect to a computer the following message is displayed:
Installing Device Driver Software After the driver software is installed, the following message is displayed:
Your device is ready to use 2 Click the Start button and then select Computer. 3 Select the LEX L10i Portable Device. 4 Select Internal storage. 5 Navigate to the files that you want to back up. 6 Copy the files/folders to a secure location on your computer. 154 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing up Contacts To back up contacts, the contacts must be exported to a VCF file which must be copied to a secure location. Prerequisites: Contacts must exist in the contact list. When and where to use: Use this procedure to periodically back up your contacts. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap . Figure 98: Contacts Menu 3 Select Import/export. Send Feedback 155 MN002347A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Figure 99: Import/Export Contacts Popup 4 Select Export to storage. Figure 100: Export Confirmation Popup 156 Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 5 Tap OK to export the contacts. The VCF file is saved to the location indicated. 6 Follow the procedure under Backing Up the LEX L10i on page 154 to complete the contacts backup. Resetting the LEX L10i Use this procedure to reset the LEX L10i. When and where to use: If the LEX L10i does not operate properly, perform the following procedure. Procedure:
1 Power off and on the LEX L10i and verify if the problem is gone. The LEX L10i restarts. If the problem remains, perform Step 2. CAUTION: To avoid erasing important data from your LEX L10i, do not press any of the LEX L10i buttons during power up. 2 Remove the battery, reinsert it, and verify if the problem is gone. The LEX L10i restarts. If the problem remains, perform factory data reset. Performing Factory Data Reset A factory data reset is a software restore of the LEX L10i to its original manufacturer settings. Before resetting the LEX L10i, back up your data. Factory data reset erases all your personal data from the LEX L10i memory and microSD card including: configuration, contents, accounts, installed applications, user settings, music, photos, videos, installed licenses, pre-loaded application updates, DM bootstrapping data, integrated and pre-loaded application configuration, post-loaded applications and user passwords. After reset is performed, re-enter your backed up information. When and where to use: Use this procedure to perform factory data reset:
CAUTION: Factory data reset is performed only by technical support as a last resort when the LEX L10i fails to operate. Before performing factory data reset, remove the SIM and microSD cards from the LEX L10i. Performing factory data reset with a microSD or SIM cards installed may cause data corruption or loss. NOTICE: Factory data reset configures the LEX L10i to public communication only. To return to combined Public and Private configuration, see your technical support. The last updated firmware and the initial version of pre-loaded applications are preserved through a reset to factory defaults. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Backup & reset. 4 Tap Factory data reset. The LEX L10i powers off, powers on, then the system recovery screen appears. Send Feedback 157 This page intentionally left blank. MN002347A01-A Technical Specifications Chapter 12 Technical Specifications The following table summarizes the LEX L10i operating, environment, and technical hardware specifications. Table 10: Technical Specifications Item Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) Specification 5.62 x 2.85 x 0.547 in 143 x 72.6 x 15 mm Weight Durability Display Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Hardware Processor Display Memory Camera Sensors Send Feedback 195 g (6.88 Oz) including standard battery Continues to run after multiple drops to concrete from a height of 48 inches (121 cm) Drop tested using MIL-STD-810G Method 516.6, Procedure IV IP67 (1 meter water immersion for 30 minutes) 4.7 720p HD (720 x 1280) Capacitive touch screen 14F to 131F (-10C to +55C)
-22F to 149F (-30C to +65C) 2.3 GHz Quad Core Processor Qualcomm MSM8974AA 4.7 720p HD (720X1280) Capacitive, touch screen 2 GB RAM 16 GB eMMC Expandable to 64GB with microSD card Rear 8MP Camera Auto Focus High-Output LED Flash Digital Zoom Front 2MP Camera Proximity Sensor Ambient Light Sensor Accelerometer Sensor Table continued 159 MN002347A01-A Chapter 12: Technical Specifications Item Ports Battery Software Operating System User Interface Messaging Web 4G/LTE Release Band Class Output Power Bandwidth 3G Standards Bands 2G Standards Frequencies Wi-Fi Operating Band Standards Personal Area Networks Bluetooth GPS 160 Specification Barometer Sensor E-Compass USB 2.0 High-Speed 3.5 mm Audio Jack (stereo) Accessory/Charging Port Standard - 2340 mAH, Li Ion High Capacity - 4680 mAh, Li Ion Android KitKat 4.4.4 Public Safety Experience (PSX) Software SMS/MMS Email (Corporate Sync, POP3, IMAP, Push Email) Standard AOSP Browser 3GPP Release 9 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 20, 26, 28 23 dBm +/- 2 dB (UE power class 3) Up to 20 MHz Broadband data throughput depends on network conditions HSPA +/-UMTS 1,2,4,5,8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 1900 MHz 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz 802.11 a/b/g/n Bluetooth 4.0 Low Energy (LE) + Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) Mission Critical Wireless Bluetooth Max throughput 2.1 Mbps A2DP Stereo Profile Table continued Send Feedback MN002347A01-A Chapter 12: Technical Specifications Item Location Services Specification Standalone GPS Assisted GPS (aGPS) Device Management Remote Management and Configuration Video and Imaging Supported Formats Supports OMA-DM (Open Mobile Alliance Device Management) H.263, H.264, MPEG-4 SP, VP8, JPEG (.jpg), GIF (.gif), PNG (.png), BMP (.bmp), WebP (.webp) Formats supported for playback, streaming and recording Supported File Types Video Recording Quality 3GPP (.3gp), MPEG-4 (.mp4), WebM (.webm), (.mkv) 1080p HD up to 30 frames per second (fps) NOTICE: Video and images are time stamped for evidence documentation. Audio Supported Formats Supported File Types Output MP3, WAVE, AAC, AMR-NB, AMR-WB, FLAC, MIDI, Vorbis MP3 (.mp3), WAVE (.wav), 3GPP (.3gp), MPEG-4 (.mp4, m4a), ATDS raw AAC (.aac), MPEG-TS (.ts) FLAC (.flac), MIDI (.mid, .xmf, .mxmf), RTTTL/RTX (.rtttl, rtx), OTA (.ota), iMelody (imy), Ogg (.ogg), Matroska
(.mkv) Dual 1 Watt Front-Facing Speakers, 106 dB Sound Pressure Level (SPL) 3.5 mm audio jack (stereo) Bluetooth (A2DP stereo) Triple Noise and Echo Cancelling Microphones Input Quick Access Leather Holster Dimensions (H x W x D) 5.7 x 3.5 x 2.0 in
(145 x 90 x 50 mm) Specifications subject to change. Table 11: General Accessories Item Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) Send Feedback Desktop Cradle Impact-Rated Vehicle Cradle 6.0 x 5.0 x 3.5 in (152 x 128 x 89 mm) 6.1 x 3.0 x 2.2 in (155 x 76 x 56 mm) Table continued 161 MN002347A01-A Chapter 12: Technical Specifications Item Weight Environmental Specification Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Durability Salt Fog Vibration Drop Shock (Functional) Shock (Crash Hazard) ESD Solar Radiation Liquid Resistance Safety Regulatory Electrical Safety EMI/RFI ANSI C63.4 2009 Flammability Electrical Power Supply Power Input DC Output Power On Optional Accessories Vehicle Ram Mount Kit Specifications subject to change. Desktop Cradle 12.8 Oz (363 g) Impact-Rated Vehicle Cradle 4.8 Oz (135 g) 32F to 113F (0C to +45C)
-40 F to 158F (-40C to 70C) 95% at 113F (45C) for 8 hours (non-condensing)
-4F to 131F (-20C to +55C)
-40 F to 185F (-40C to
+85C) 95% at 131F (55C) for 8 hours (non-condensing) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes US: UL60950 FCC part 15, Subpart B, Class B28a FCC part 15, Subpart B, Class B28b ANSI/UL-94 and ASTM Stand-
ards External power supply input 100- 240VAC output 5.0VDC 1.2A 5.0 VDC, 1.2A 5.0VDC With device insertion Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes, MIL-STD-810G, 75G im-
pact Yes Yes Yes US: UL60950 ANSI/UL-94 and ASTM Stand-
ards 12V-24V, 5.0VDC, 1.2A 5.0 VDC, 1.2A 5.0VDC With device insertion 162 Send Feedback
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual LEV L10ig | Users Manual | 1.15 MiB |
LEX L10ig Mission Critical Handheld User Guide MARCH 2016 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved MN002859A01-A MN002859A01-A Copyrights Copyrights The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a particular system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a particular mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. Send Feedback 3 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A Contact Us Contact Us Motorola Solution Support Center The Solution Support Center (SSC) is the primary Motorola Solutions support contact. Call:
Before any software reload. To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before removing and replacing a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) and Field Replaceable Entity (FRE) to repair the system. For... United States Calls International Calls Phone 800-221-7144 302-444-9800 North America Parts Organization For assistance in ordering replacement parts or identifying a part number, contact the Motorola Parts organization. Your first response when troubleshooting your system is to call the Motorola SSC. For... Phone Orders Fax Orders Phone 800-422-4210 (US and Canada Orders) For help identifying an item or part number, select choice 3 from the menu. 302-444-9842 (International Orders) Includes help for identifying an item or part number and for translation as needed. 800-622-6210 (US and Canada Orders) Comments Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. Provide the following information when reporting a documentation error:
The document title and part number The page number with the error A description of the error We welcome your feedback on this and other Motorola manuals. To take a short, confidential survey on Motorola Customer Documentation, go to docsurvey.motorolasolutions.com or scan the following QR code with your mobile device to access the survey. Send Feedback 5 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A Document History Document History Version MN002859A01-
A Description Initial release of the LEX L10ig Mission Critical Handheld Service Provisioning Guide. Date March 2016 Send Feedback 7 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A Contents Contents Copyrights................................................................................................................... 3 Contact Us................................................................................................................... 5 Document History....................................................................................................... 7 List of Figures............................................................................................................15 List of Tables............................................................................................................. 19 List of Processes...................................................................................................... 21 List of Procedures.....................................................................................................23 Chapter 1: About this Guide.....................................................................................27 Contact Us................................................................................................................................... 27 Versions.......................................................................................................................................28 Operating System Version................................................................................................ 28 Software Build Number..................................................................................................... 28 Kernel Version.................................................................................................................. 28 Chapter Descriptions................................................................................................................... 28 Helpful Background Information.................................................................................................. 29 Notational Conventions................................................................................................................29 Icon Conventions......................................................................................................................... 29 Regulatory Information................................................................................................................ 30 Service Information......................................................................................................................30 Documentation Set...................................................................................................................... 31 Chapter 2: Getting Started .......................................................................................33 Features.......................................................................................................................................33 Unpacking....................................................................................................................................35 Setting Up the LEX L10ig............................................................................................................ 35 Removing the Screen Protective Film...............................................................................36 Removing the Battery Cover.............................................................................................36 Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card................................................. 37 Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card........................................................................ 37 Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards......................................................................38 Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards....................................................................38 Installing the Battery......................................................................................................... 39 Removing the Battery....................................................................................................... 39 Charging the LEX L10ig...............................................................................................................40 Charging Temperature......................................................................................................40 Battery Charge Indications................................................................................................40 Send Feedback 9 MN002859A01-A Contents Battery Management.........................................................................................................42 Monitor Battery Usage........................................................................................... 42 Low Battery Notification......................................................................................... 43 Battery Optimization...............................................................................................43 Powering On the LEX L10ig for the First Time............................................................................ 45 Powering Off the LEX L10ig........................................................................................................ 45 Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode..................................................................................... 46 Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode........................................................................ 46 Covert Mode................................................................................................................................ 46 Turning On Covert Mode.................................................................................................. 47 Turning Off Covert Mode.................................................................................................. 47 Locking the LEX L10ig.................................................................................................................48 Selecting a Locking Option............................................................................................... 48 Specifying a Pattern............................................................................................... 49 Specifying a PIN or Password................................................................................49 Setting the Timeout for Locking the LEX L10ig......................................................49 Unlocking the LEX L10ig...................................................................................................50 Unlocking the LEX L10ig Using a Pattern.............................................................. 50 Unlocking the LEX L10ig Using a PIN or Password...............................................50 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX L10ig.................................................................. 51 Setting the Date and Time........................................................................................................... 51 Setting the Display.......................................................................................................................51 Setting Screen Brightness................................................................................................ 52 Setting Screen Rotation.................................................................................................... 52 Setting Up Sleep Mode..................................................................................................... 52 Setting Up Daydream........................................................................................................53 Setting the Font Size.........................................................................................................53 Enabling Cast Screen....................................................................................................... 54 Projecting the LEX L10ig Screen on Another Device.............................................54 General Sound Setting................................................................................................................ 54 Public and Private Carrier Modes................................................................................................ 56 Switching Modes Using the Power Button........................................................................ 56 Switching Modes Using the Settings App......................................................................... 57 LEX L10ig Emergency Button......................................................................................................58 Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig...............................................................................59 Using the Touchscreen................................................................................................................59 Using the On-Screen Keyboard...................................................................................................60 Android Keyboard Settings............................................................................................... 61 Motorola Solutions Home Experience (MHx)...............................................................................62 10 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Contents LEX L10ig Home Screen.................................................................................................. 62 Home Screen Overlay............................................................................................63 Customizing the Home Screen......................................................................................... 63 Adding Widgets...................................................................................................... 63 Moving Widgets......................................................................................................69 Removing Widgets................................................................................................. 69 Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel..................................................... 70 Status Bar....................................................................................................................................70 Notification Icons......................................................................................................................... 71 LEX L10ig Status Icons............................................................................................................... 72 Managing Notifications................................................................................................................ 73 Working with Status..................................................................................................................... 74 Quick Settings..............................................................................................................................75 Applications................................................................................................................................. 76 Folders.........................................................................................................................................78 Creating a Folder.............................................................................................................. 78 Naming Folders.................................................................................................................78 Removing a Folder............................................................................................................78 Accessing Files from a Computer................................................................................................79 Chapter 4: Calling......................................................................................................81 Making a Call Using the Dialer.................................................................................................... 82 Making a Call Using People List Contacts...................................................................................84 Making a Call Using Call History................................................................................................. 85 Making a Conference Call........................................................................................................... 86 Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset.................................................................................. 89 Call Settings.................................................................................................................................89 Requesting an Emergency Alert..................................................................................................90 Chapter 5: Radio Services........................................................................................93 Pairing LEX L10ig with Bluetooth Accessory...............................................................................93 Unpairing LEX L10ig from Bluetooth Accessory..........................................................................95 Chapter 6: Messaging...............................................................................................97 Sending a Text Message............................................................................................................. 97 Sending a Multimedia Message...................................................................................................98 Chapter 7: Applications..........................................................................................101 Using File Browser.....................................................................................................................101 Managing People Contacts........................................................................................................102 Adding People.................................................................................................................102 Editing People.................................................................................................................102 Deleting People...............................................................................................................103 Send Feedback 11 MN002859A01-A Contents Camera......................................................................................................................................103 Taking Photos................................................................................................................. 104 Taking a Panoramic Photo..............................................................................................106 Recording Videos............................................................................................................107 Camera Settings............................................................................................................. 108 Video Settings.................................................................................................................110 Gallery....................................................................................................................................... 111 Working with Albums...................................................................................................... 112 Sharing an Album.................................................................................................113 Getting Album Information................................................................................... 113 Deleting an Album................................................................................................114 Working with Photos....................................................................................................... 114 Viewing and Browsing Photos..............................................................................114 Rotating a Photo.................................................................................................. 115 Cropping a Photo................................................................................................. 116 Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon........................................................................116 Sharing a Photo................................................................................................... 117 Deleting a Photo...................................................................................................117 Working with Videos....................................................................................................... 117 Watching a Video................................................................................................. 117 Sharing a Video....................................................................................................118 Deleting a Video...................................................................................................118 Using Sound Recorder.............................................................................................................. 119 Voice Dialer............................................................................................................................... 121 Calling a Person by Name.............................................................................................. 121 Redialing a Previous Call................................................................................................121 Dialing by Number.......................................................................................................... 122 Opening an Application...................................................................................................122 Chapter 8: Wireless.................................................................................................123 Wireless Wide Area Networks................................................................................................... 123 Sharing the Mobile Data Connection.............................................................................. 123 Configuring USB Tethering.................................................................................. 123 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering.......................................................................... 124 Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings........................................................125 Data Usage.....................................................................................................................126 Setting Data Usage Warning................................................................................127 Setting Auto-Sync................................................................................................ 127 Disabling Data When Roaming.......................................................................................127 Limiting Data Connection to a Network...........................................................................128 12 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Contents Editing the Access Point Name.......................................................................................128 Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN)......................................................................... 128 Cell Broadcasts...............................................................................................................129 Wireless Local Area Networks...................................................................................................130 Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network................................................................ 130 Configuring a Wi-Fi Network........................................................................................... 132 Adding a Wi-Fi Network.................................................................................................. 133 Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network...................................................................................133 Advanced Wi-Fi Settings.................................................................................................134 WLAN Configuration....................................................................................................... 135 Modifying a Wi-Fi Network.............................................................................................. 135 Removing a Wi-Fi Network............................................................................................. 135 Bluetooth Device........................................................................................................................136 Adaptive Frequency Hopping..........................................................................................136 Bluetooth Security...........................................................................................................136 Bluetooth Profiles............................................................................................................137 Bluetooth Power States.................................................................................................. 137 Bluetooth Radio Power for Android.................................................................................138 Enabling Bluetooth............................................................................................... 138 Disabling Bluetooth.............................................................................................. 138 Changing the Bluetooth Name........................................................................................138 Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device........................................................................ 139 Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup................................................................. 141 Required Software and Hardware............................................................................................. 141 Installing USB Driver and ADB.................................................................................................. 141 Chapter 10: Accessories........................................................................................ 147 Accessories............................................................................................................................... 147 USB Cable.................................................................................................................................147 Desktop Cradle.......................................................................................................................... 148 Vehicle Cradle........................................................................................................................... 148 Holster....................................................................................................................................... 149 Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting...................................................151 Maintaining the LEX L10ig.........................................................................................................151 Battery Safety Guidelines.......................................................................................................... 151 Cleaning Guidelines...................................................................................................................152 Cleaning the LEX L10ig.............................................................................................................153 Cleaning the Interface Connector.............................................................................................. 153 Cleaning the Battery Contacts................................................................................................... 153 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................154 Send Feedback 13 MN002859A01-A Contents Backing Up the LEX L10ig.........................................................................................................156 Backing up Contacts....................................................................................................... 157 Resetting the LEX L10ig............................................................................................................159 Performing Factory Data Reset...................................................................................... 159 Chapter 12: Technical Specifications................................................................... 161 14 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1: Manufacturing Label................................................................................................................30 Figure 2: LEX L10ig Features.................................................................................................................33 Figure 3: Removing the Screen Protective Film..................................................................................... 36 Figure 4: Removing the Battery Cover................................................................................................... 36 Figure 5: Installing the microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card.....................................................37 Figure 6: Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards............................................................................ 38 Figure 7: Installing the Battery................................................................................................................39 Figure 8: Charging the LEX L10ig.......................................................................................................... 40 Figure 9: Charge and Notification LED...................................................................................................41 Figure 10: Battery Screen.......................................................................................................................42 Figure 11: Low Battery Notification.........................................................................................................43 Figure 12: Battery Depleted Screen....................................................................................................... 43 Figure 13: Quick Settings Menu Airplane Mode................................................................................ 44 Figure 14: LEX L10ig Boot Screen.........................................................................................................45 Figure 15: Selecting Power Off...............................................................................................................45 Figure 16: Power Button Menu...............................................................................................................47 Figure 17: Power Button Menu...............................................................................................................48 Figure 18: Sound Screen........................................................................................................................55 Figure 19: Volume Button.......................................................................................................................55 Figure 20: Service Switch.......................................................................................................................57 Figure 21: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup................................................................................... 57 Figure 22: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup................................................................................... 58 Figure 23: Android Keyboard Settings....................................................................................................60 Figure 24: Default Home Screen............................................................................................................ 62 Figure 25: Widgets Screen.....................................................................................................................64 Figure 26: Example of a Widget Added to New Panel........................................................................... 65 Figure 27: Empty My Apps Widget......................................................................................................... 66 Figure 28: List of Shortcuts for My Apps Widgets.................................................................................. 67 Figure 29: My Apps Widget with Shortcuts Added................................................................................. 68 Figure 30: My Status Widget.................................................................................................................. 68 Figure 31: Status Selection.................................................................................................................... 68 Figure 32: Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel.................................................................... 70 Figure 33: Status Bar..............................................................................................................................70 Figure 34: Notification Panel.................................................................................................................. 74 Figure 35: Quick Settings Panel.............................................................................................................75 Figure 36: Opened Unnamed Folder......................................................................................................78 Send Feedback 15 MN002859A01-A List of Figures Figure 37: Named Folder........................................................................................................................78 Figure 38: Notifications Screen.............................................................................................................. 79 Figure 39: MTP / PTP Selection Screen.................................................................................................80 Figure 40: Insert Wired Headset Plug.................................................................................................... 82 Figure 41: Dialer Screen.........................................................................................................................83 Figure 42: Call in Progress..................................................................................................................... 84 Figure 43: People List Contact............................................................................................................... 85 Figure 44: Call History Tab.....................................................................................................................86 Figure 45: Two Calls...............................................................................................................................87 Figure 46: Two Calls Connected............................................................................................................ 88 Figure 47: Merged Calls......................................................................................................................... 88 Figure 48: Emergency Alert Activation Popup........................................................................................91 Figure 49: Bluetooth Pairing Screen.......................................................................................................94 Figure 50: Bluetooth Device Screen.......................................................................................................94 Figure 51: Bluetooth Paired Devices Screen..........................................................................................95 Figure 52: Bluetooth Paired Devices......................................................................................................96 Figure 53: Unpair Complete................................................................................................................... 96 Figure 54: New Message Screen........................................................................................................... 97 Figure 55: New Multimedia Message Screen.........................................................................................98 Figure 56: File Browser Screen............................................................................................................ 101 Figure 57: Camera Photo Screen.........................................................................................................104 Figure 58: Camera Screen................................................................................................................... 105 Figure 59: Camera Option Bar............................................................................................................. 105 Figure 60: Camera Zoom..................................................................................................................... 106 Figure 61: Panoramic Mode................................................................................................................. 106 Figure 62: Panoramic Frame................................................................................................................107 Figure 63: Video Mode......................................................................................................................... 107 Figure 64: Camera Settings..................................................................................................................108 Figure 65: First More Options Screen.................................................................................................. 109 Figure 66: Second More Options Screen............................................................................................. 109 Figure 67: Third More Options Screen................................................................................................. 110 Figure 68: Video Settings..................................................................................................................... 110 Figure 69: First More Options Video Screen........................................................................................ 111 Figure 70: Second More Options Video Screen................................................................................... 111 Figure 71: Gallery Albums............................................................................................................... 112 Figure 72: Photos/Videos Inside an Album.......................................................................................... 113 Figure 73: Photo Example....................................................................................................................115 Figure 74: Cropping Grid......................................................................................................................116 Figure 75: Video Playback Controls..................................................................................................... 118 16 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A List of Figures Figure 76: Start Recording................................................................................................................... 119 Figure 77: Record Your Message.........................................................................................................120 Figure 78: Finish Recording................................................................................................................. 120 Figure 79: Voice Dialer Window........................................................................................................... 121 Figure 80: USB Cable Connection to Host Computer.......................................................................... 124 Figure 81: Set up Wi-Fi Hotspot Dialog Box.........................................................................................126 Figure 82: Settings Screen...................................................................................................................131 Figure 83: Wi-Fi Screen........................................................................................................................131 Figure 84: WLAN Network Security Dialog Boxes................................................................................132 Figure 85: Access Computer................................................................................................................ 141 Figure 86: Access CD...........................................................................................................................142 Figure 87: Select Destination............................................................................................................... 142 Figure 88: Access Device Manager......................................................................................................143 Figure 89: Select Update Drive Software............................................................................................. 143 Figure 90: Select Browse my computer for driver software..................................................................144 Figure 91: Select Installation Folder..................................................................................................... 144 Figure 92: Select Install this driver software anyway............................................................................145 Figure 93: Close the Installation...........................................................................................................145 Figure 94: USB Cable...........................................................................................................................147 Figure 95: Desktop Cradle....................................................................................................................148 Figure 96: Vehicle Cradle.....................................................................................................................148 Figure 97: Holster.................................................................................................................................149 Figure 98: Contacts Menu.................................................................................................................... 157 Figure 99: Import/Export Contacts Popup............................................................................................ 158 Figure 100: Export Confirmation Popup............................................................................................... 158 Send Feedback 17 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A List of Tables List of Tables Table 1: LEX L10ig Features..................................................................................................................33 Table 2: Charge and Notification LED Charging Indications..............................................................41 Table 3: Using the Touchscreen.............................................................................................................59 Table 4: Android Keyboard Settings.......................................................................................................61 Table 5: Notification Icons...................................................................................................................... 71 Table 6: Status Icons..............................................................................................................................72 Table 7: Applications.............................................................................................................................. 76 Table 8: Camera Icons and Actions..................................................................................................... 104 Table 9: Troubleshooting the LEX L10ig.............................................................................................. 154 Table 10: Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................161 Table 11: General Accessories............................................................................................................ 163 Send Feedback 19 This page intentionally left blank. List of Processes MN002859A01-A List of Processes Send Feedback 21 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A List of Procedures List of Procedures Removing the Battery Cover ................................................................................................................. 36 Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card ...................................................................... 37 Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card .............................................................................................37 Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards .......................................................................................... 38 Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards ........................................................................................ 38 Installing the Battery ..............................................................................................................................39 Removing the Battery ............................................................................................................................39 Turning Off the Radio ............................................................................................................................ 44 Powering Off the LEX L10ig .................................................................................................................. 45 Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode ............................................................................................... 46 Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode .............................................................................................46 Turning On Covert Mode .......................................................................................................................47 Turning Off Covert Mode ....................................................................................................................... 47 Selecting a Locking Option ....................................................................................................................48 Specifying a Pattern .............................................................................................................................. 49 Specifying a PIN or Password ............................................................................................................... 49 Setting the Timeout for Locking the LEX L10ig ..................................................................................... 49 Unlocking the LEX L10ig Using a Pattern ............................................................................................. 50 Unlocking the LEX L10ig Using a PIN or Password .............................................................................. 50 Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX L10ig ....................................................................................... 51 Setting the Date and Time .....................................................................................................................51 Setting Screen Brightness .....................................................................................................................52 Setting Screen Rotation .........................................................................................................................52 Setting Up Sleep Mode ..........................................................................................................................52 Setting Up Daydream ............................................................................................................................ 53 Setting the Font Size ............................................................................................................................. 53 Enabling Cast Screen ............................................................................................................................54 Projecting the LEX L10ig Screen on Another Device ............................................................................ 54 Switching Modes Using the Power Button .............................................................................................56 Switching Modes Using the Settings App ..............................................................................................57 Adding Widgets ..................................................................................................................................... 63 Adding Shortcuts to the My Apps Widget .............................................................................................. 65 Changing My Status .............................................................................................................................. 68 Moving Widgets .....................................................................................................................................69 Removing Widgets ................................................................................................................................ 69 Creating a Folder ...................................................................................................................................78 Send Feedback 23 MN002859A01-A List of Procedures Naming Folders ..................................................................................................................................... 78 Removing a Folder ................................................................................................................................ 78 Accessing Files from a Computer ..........................................................................................................79 Making a Call Using the Dialer .............................................................................................................. 82 Making a Call Using People List Contacts .............................................................................................84 Making a Call Using Call History ........................................................................................................... 85 Making a Conference Call ..................................................................................................................... 86 Requesting an Emergency Alert ............................................................................................................90 Pairing LEX L10ig with Bluetooth Accessory .........................................................................................93 Unpairing LEX L10ig from Bluetooth Accessory ....................................................................................95 Sending a Text Message .......................................................................................................................97 Sending a Multimedia Message ............................................................................................................ 98 Adding People ..................................................................................................................................... 102 Editing People ..................................................................................................................................... 102 Deleting People ................................................................................................................................... 103 Taking Photos ......................................................................................................................................104 Taking a Panoramic Photo .................................................................................................................. 106 Recording Videos ................................................................................................................................ 107 Sharing an Album ................................................................................................................................113 Getting Album Information ...................................................................................................................113 Deleting an Album ............................................................................................................................... 114 Viewing and Browsing Photos .............................................................................................................114 Rotating a Photo ..................................................................................................................................115 Cropping a Photo .................................................................................................................................116 Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon .......................................................................................................116 Sharing a Photo ...................................................................................................................................117 Deleting a Photo ..................................................................................................................................117 Watching a Video ................................................................................................................................ 117 Sharing a Video ...................................................................................................................................118 Deleting a Video .................................................................................................................................. 118 Calling a Person by Name ...................................................................................................................121 Redialing a Previous Call .................................................................................................................... 121 Dialing by Number ...............................................................................................................................122 Opening an Application ....................................................................................................................... 122 Configuring USB Tethering ..................................................................................................................123 Configuring Bluetooth Tethering ..........................................................................................................124 Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings ....................................................................................... 125 Configuring the Wi-Fi Hotspot ............................................................................................................. 125 Setting Data Usage Warning ...............................................................................................................127 24 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A List of Procedures Setting Auto-Sync ................................................................................................................................127 Disabling Data When Roaming ........................................................................................................... 127 Limiting Data Connection to a Network ............................................................................................... 128 Editing the Access Point Name ........................................................................................................... 128 Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN) .............................................................................................. 128 Cell Broadcasts ................................................................................................................................... 129 Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network .....................................................................................130 Configuring a Wi-Fi Network ................................................................................................................132 Adding a Wi-Fi Network .......................................................................................................................133 Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network ....................................................................................................... 133 Modifying a Wi-Fi Network ...................................................................................................................135 Removing a Wi-Fi Network ..................................................................................................................135 Enabling Bluetooth .............................................................................................................................. 138 Disabling Bluetooth ..............................................................................................................................138 Changing the Bluetooth Name ............................................................................................................ 138 Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device .............................................................................................139 Installing USB Driver and ADB ............................................................................................................ 141 Cleaning the Interface Connector ........................................................................................................153 Cleaning the Battery Contacts .............................................................................................................153 Backing Up the LEX L10ig ...................................................................................................................156 Backing up Contacts ............................................................................................................................157 Resetting the LEX L10ig ......................................................................................................................159 Performing Factory Data Reset ........................................................................................................... 159 Send Feedback 25 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A About this Guide Chapter 1 About this Guide This guide provides information about using the LEX L10ig Mission Critical Handheld and accessories. NOTICE: Screens and menu options may be changed or customized by your agency to show different information. Contact Us The Solution Support Center (SSC) is the primary Motorola Solutions support contact. Motorola Solution Support Center Call the SSC:
Before any software reload. To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before removing and replacing a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) and Field Replaceable Entity (FRE) to repair the system. For... United States Calls International Calls Phone 800-221-7144 302-444-9800 North America Parts Organization For assistance in ordering replacement parts or identifying a part number, contact the Motorola Parts organization. Your first response when troubleshooting your system is to call the Motorola SSC. For... Phone Orders Fax Orders Phone 800-422-4210 (US and Canada Orders) For help identifying an item or part number, select choice 3 from the menu. 302-444-9842 (International Orders) Includes help for identifying an item or part number and for translation as needed. 800-622-6210 (US and Canada Orders) Comments Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. Provide the following information when reporting a documentation error:
The document title and part number The page number with the error A description of the error Send Feedback 27 MN002859A01-A Chapter 1: About this Guide We welcome your feedback on this and other Motorola manuals. To take a short, confidential survey on Motorola Customer Documentation, go to docsurvey.motorolasolutions.com or scan the following QR code with your mobile device to access the survey. Versions This guide covers various software configurations and references are made to operating system or software versions discussed in the following three subsections. Operating System Version The Operating System for the LEX L10ig is the Android Operating System. To determine the Operating System version, from the Home screen touch Android Version. The last line provides the Android version information. For example: 4.4.4. About phone Software Build Number This topic has information on how to find the software build number of your LEX L10ig. To determine the software build number, from the Home screen touch Build Number. About phone Kernel Version The Kernel version can be found in the Settings application. To determine the kernel version, from the Home screen, touch version. About phone Kernel Chapter Descriptions This guide provides information on the features listed in the chapter descriptions below:
About this Guide on page 27 Chapter 1, presents contacts and general information related to this product. Getting Started on page 33 Chapter 2, explains getting the LEX L10ig up and running for the first time. Using the LEX L10ig on page 59 Chapter 3, is a reference to operating the LEX L10ig. Calling on page 81 Chapter 4, is a reference to making and receiving calls. Radio Services on page 93 Chapter 5, is a reference to connecting the LEX L10ig to a Land Mobile Radio for communicating on LTE and P25 systems. Messaging on page 97 Chapter 6, is a reference to sending text and multimedia messages. Applications on page 101 Chapter 7, explains using basic applications installed on the LEX L10ig such as Camera, People, and File Browser. 28 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 1: About this Guide Wireless on page 123 Chapter 8, explains configuring the LEX L10ig to operate on a personal, local, and wide area wireless network. ADB and USB Driver Setup on page 141 Chapter 9, is a reference to setting up the Android Debug Bridge (ADB) and USB driver for your Windows PC. Accessories on page 147 Chapter 10, is a reference to available accessories and how to use them with the LEX L10ig. Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 151 Chapter 11, is a reference to cleaning and storing the LEX L10ig, and troubleshooting solutions for potential problems. Technical Specifications on page 161 Chapter 12, provides technical specifications for the LEX L10ig. Helpful Background Information Motorola Solutions offers various courses designed to assist in learning about the system. For information, go to http://www.motorolasolutions.com/training to view the current course offerings and technology paths. Icons on a screen Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document:
Italics are used to highlight the following:
Chapters and sections in this and related documents Bold text is used to highlight the following:
Dialog box, window, and screen names Drop-down list and list box names Check box and radio button names Key names on a keypad Button names on a screen Bullets () indicate:
Action items Lists of alternatives Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists. Icon Conventions The documentation set is designed to give the reader more visual clues. The following graphic icons are used throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are described below. WARNING: The word WARNING with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, could result in death or serious injury, or serious product damage. CAUTION: The word CAUTION with the associated safety icon implies information that, if disregarded, may result in minor or moderate injury, or serious product damage. Send Feedback 29 MN002859A01-A Chapter 1: About this Guide NOTICE: NOTICE contains information more important than the surrounding text, such as exceptions or preconditions. They also refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader how to complete an action (when it is not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the reader where something is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a note. Regulatory Information BEFORE USING THIS device, READ the Product Regulatory, Safety & RF Exposure Guide (PN MN001458A01-A) included with this package. Service Information If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center for your region. Contact information is available at: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/support. You can also call 1-800-323-9949 for support and select option 6 for PS LTE infrastructure and devices. When contacting support, have the following information available:
Serial number of the unit (found on manufacturing label) Model number or product name (found on manufacturing label) Software type and version number Figure 1: Manufacturing Label Motorola Solutions responds to calls by e-mail, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements. If your problem cannot be solved by Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support Center, you may need to return your equipment for servicing and will be given specific directions. Motorola Solutions is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not 30 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 1: About this Guide used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty. Remove the CRYPTR card or microSD card and SIM card before shipping. If you purchased your product from a Motorola Solutions business partner, contact that business partner for support. Documentation Set The documentation set for the LEX L10ig provides information for specific user needs. Unless otherwise specified, Motorola Solutions documents listed here are available from Motorola Online at https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. If you are new to Motorola Online, follow the on-screen instructions to sign up for an account. To access Public Safety LTE infrastructure and device manuals, select Resource Center Product Information Manuals Network Infrastructure. The documentation set for the LEX L10ig includes:
LEX L10ig Quick Start Guide PN MN002346A01-B describes how to get the LEX L10ig up and running. LEX L10ig Mission Critical Handheld User Guide (this guide) MN002859A01-A describes how to use the LEX L10ig. LEX L10ig Regulatory and Safety Guide PN MN002351A01-B describes how to safely use the LEX L10ig. LEX L10ig Service Provisioning Guide PN MN002861A01-A provides technical instructions on how to activate, provision, and configure the LEX L10ig. For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com. Send Feedback 31 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A Getting Started Chapter 2 Getting Started Use the information in this chapter to help you get started using the LEX L10ig. Features The LEX L10ig features are shown in the following figure and summarized in the following table. Figure 2: LEX L10ig Features Table 1: LEX L10ig Features Item Charge/Notification LED Display/Screen Send Feedback Function Solid Blue: New notification (New Voice mail, New Text messages, Missed Calls, Android App Notifications, and so on) Off: Battery is not charging. Solid Red: Battery is charging. Blinking Amber: Waiting to charge. Solid Green: Fully Charged. Tap screen displays all information to operate the device. Recent Apps key Press to switch to, stop or manage applications currently running on the background of the device. Table continued 33 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Item External Speakers 3.5 mm Headset Port Volume Up/Down Buttons PTT Button Power Button Front Camera 34 Function Home key Displays the Home screen with a single tap. Back key Displays the previous screen. Closes the keyboard if the on-screen keyboard is open. Use for communications in handset mode. Pro-
vides audio output for video and voice playback in speakerphone mode. Menu key At any screen or application, press to see available options. Connects to headsets (3.5 mm plug). NOTICE: Do not use 2.5 mm to 3.5 mm adapters Increase and decrease audio volume. Push-to-Talk (PTT) button enables Push-to-Talk services over a broadband network and can al-
so be interconnected to Project 25 Land Mobile Radio (LMR) networks. The PTT application of-
fers calls, alerts, group calls, Talk Group calls, and Talk Group monitoring and scanning. For PTT button and application operations, see Push-To-Talk for LEX L10ig manual. IMPORTANT: The PTT is an optional feature that requires installation of software and system connection fol-
lowing the LEX L10ig shipping. To verify if the PTT feature is enabled on the device, contact your technical support. Press and hold to turn on the device. Press to turn the screen on or off. Press and hold to se-
lect one of these options:
Power On/Off Turn On/Off. Airplane mode Disables all wireless con-
nections. Service switch Switches between public and Private carrier modes. Covert mode In covert mode, all sounds, and visual indications are turned off. See Covert Mode on page 46. Vibrate mode Sets to vibrate only. Speaker on Routes the earpiece sound to the speaker. Used to capture live video for video calls. Table continued Send Feedback Item Earpiece External Charging Contacts Battery Cover Removal Slot microUSB Port Rear Camera and Flash MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Function Provides audio in handset mode. Provides power to the device from cradles. Assists in battery cover removal to provide ac-
cess to the battery, SIM, CRYPTR, and mi-
croSD card holders. Provides USB client and host communications. Takes photos and video, and provides flash illu-
mination for the camera. Unpacking Carefully remove all protective material from the LEX L10ig and save the shipping container for later storage and shipping. Verify that the following were received:
LEX L10ig Battery Cover 2280 mAh Lithium-ion battery Charger USB Cable Regulatory Guide Quick Start Guide Inspect the equipment for damage. If any equipment is missing or damaged, contact the Motorola Solutions Support Center immediately. Setting Up the LEX L10ig The initial setup of the LEX L10ig requires that the battery and any cards be installed. NOTICE: The device may be delivered to you with battery, SIM card, microSD card and/or CRYPTR cards already installed, activated, and ready for use. In this case, ignore steps 2 through 6 of the following section if they were already performed. Before using the LEX L10ig for the first time, perform the following:
1 Remove the screen protection film from the LEX L10ig screen. (See Removing the Screen Protective Film on page 36). 2 Install the public and/or Private SIM cards. (See Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards on page 38). 3 Install the microSD or CRYPTR card (optional). (See Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card on page 37). 4 Install the battery. (See Installing the Battery on page 39). 5 Install the battery cover. 6 Charge the LEX L10ig. (See Charging the LEX L10ig on page 40). Send Feedback 35 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Removing the Screen Protective Film The LEX L10ig is provided with a screen protective film that protects the device during shipping. To enable proper operation of the LEX L10ig, the screen protector must be removed before use. Figure 3: Removing the Screen Protective Film Removing the Battery Cover This procedure explains how to remove the battery cover. Procedure:
1 Hold the LEX L10ig firmly as shown. 2 Using the battery cover removal slot, gently lift the battery cover up and away from the LEX L10ig. Figure 4: Removing the Battery Cover 36 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Installing a microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card The LEX L10ig card holder can support either a microSD card or a CRYPTR micro encryption card. The microSD card is a removable flash memory used for storing media on the LEX L10ig. The LEX L10ig can support microSD cards with up to 64GB memory space. The CRYPTR micro encryption card is used for voice encryption in features such as data and phone over Virtual Private Network (VPN) and Push-to-Talk (PTT) communication. The CRYPTR micro provides FIPS 140-2 Level 3 storage for credentials/keys for Data At Rest (DAR) encryption and MVPN. The slot of the card is located under the LEX L10ig battery When and where to use:
NOTICE: The LEX L10ig may be delivered to you with battery, SIM card, and microSD or CRYPTR card already installed, activated, and ready for use. In case a CRYPTR is pre-
installed in the LEX L10ig, you must change the CRYPTR password provided by your technical support. This is not a password to access the device but a password to protect Motorola Solutions secure applications. The CRYPTR password is required whenever the LEX L10ig is restarted. Procedure:
1 Slide the card into the card holder slot with contacts facing down. 2 Push the card into the slot until it is fully seated and locked into place. Figure 5: Installing the microSD or CRYPTR micro Encryption Card Removing the microSD or CRYPTR Card This procedure explains how to remove a microSD or CRYPTR micro encryption card. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for three seconds. 2 Touch Power Off. 3 Touch OK. 4 Lift the battery cover. 5 Push the Card Holder lock down to release the card. 6 Remove the card from the holder. 7 Replace the battery cover. Send Feedback 37 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards Public and private phone services require a Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) card. Prerequisites: The SIM card can contain the following information:
Mobile phone service provider account details. Contact information, which can be moved to the People application on the LEX L10ig. Any additional subscribed services. Information regarding service access and preferences. NOTICE: The LEX L10ig requires activated SIM cards. Obtain activated SIM cards from your organization administrator. CAUTION:
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precaution. For proper ESD precautions to avoid damaging the SIM card. Proper ESD precautions include, but not limited to, working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the user is properly grounded. When and where to use: Use this procedure to install a SIM card:
Procedure:
1 If the battery is in place, remove the battery as described in Removing the Battery on page 39. 2 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder with the contacts facing down. Note the card notch position. 3 Push that the SIM card into the holder until it is fully seated and flat. You should hear a click when the SIM card in fully in place. Figure 6: Installing the Public and Private SIM Cards Removing the Public and Private SIM Cards When and where to use: Use this procedure to remove the public or private SIM cards. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for three seconds. 2 Tap Power Off. 3 Tap OK. 4 Lift the battery cover. 38 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started 5 Slide the battery latch to Unlock position. 6 Lift the battery out of the LEX L10ig. 7 Push the SIM card to release it from the holder. 8 Remove the SIM card. 9 Place the battery back into the LEX L10ig. 10 Snap the battery cover back into place. Installing the Battery When and where to use: Perform this procedure to install a battery. Procedure:
1 Remove the battery from the packaging. 2 Insert the battery into the battery compartment with the battery contacts facing the bottom of the LEX L10ig. Figure 7: Installing the Battery 3 Press the top of battery into place. 4 Place the battery cover into place. 5 Ensure that all battery cover snaps are fully engaged. Removing the Battery When and where to use: Perform this procedure to remove the battery. Procedure:
1 Slide a finger nail (preferably a thumb nail) into the Battery Cover removal slot and gently pull the Battery Cover away from the LEX L10ig 2 Remove the Battery Cover. 3 Slide the Battery Lock up and hold it. 4 With the tip of your finger, lift up the battery from the side closest to the top side of the LEX L10ig. Send Feedback 39 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Charging the LEX L10ig Before using the LEX L10ig for the first time, charge the battery using the provided USB Charger and USB Cable or connect the USB Cable to the USB port of a personal computer. An unused battery fully charges in less than six hours. The LEX L10ig battery can also be charged by one of the optional charging cradles. Figure 8: Charging the LEX L10ig NOTICE: Keep the USB cover closed when USB not in use. NOTICE: For detailed description, installation and operation of the LEX L10ig accessories, refer the quick start guides provided with each accessory. Charging Temperature Charge batteries in temperatures from 0C to 40C (32F to 104F). Note that charging is intelligently controlled by the LEX L10ig. To accomplish this, for small periods of time, the LEX L10ig alternately enables and disables battery charging to keep the battery at acceptable temperatures. The LEX L10ig LED indicates when charging is disabled due to abnormal temperatures by fast blinking amber (once every 2 seconds). Battery Charge Indications The Charge and Notification LED is located at the top, front of the LEX L10ig. Battery charging and power level are also indicated by a battery icon on the status bar. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove the LEX L10ig from any power source (cradle or USB cable connection). 40 Send Feedback Figure 9: Charge and Notification LED MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Table 2: Charge and Notification LED Charging Indications Status Off Indications Battery is not charging. Could indicate that:
Device is not inserted correctly in the cradle Device is not connected to a USB cable Charger or cradle is not powered Slowly blinking red (once every 2 seconds) Solid red Fast blinking red (once every 0.5 second) Slowly blinking green (once every 2 seconds) Solid green Slowly blinking blue (once every 4 seconds) Alternately blinking blue (1 second) and red (3 seconds) Alternately blinking blue (1 second) and green
(3 seconds) Slowly blinking blue and red (every other sec-
ond) Alternately blinking blue (1 second) and fast blinking red (every 0.5 seconds for 3 seconds) Slowly blinking amber (once every 2 seconds) Battery power is extremely low (less than 10%
power left). LEX L10ig is charging. Charging error:
Temperature is too low or too high Charging has gone on too long without com-
pletion (typical charge is four hours) Battery is greater than 90% charged. Device is completely charged. A new notification has been received. Device is charging and a new notification is re-
ceived. Device is completely charged and a new notifi-
cation is received. Battery power is extremely low (less than 10%
power left) and a new notification is received. A new notification is received during a charging error. Device is waiting to charge. When the battery power falls below a predetermined level the icon indicates the status and a battery dialog box appears indicating the status of the battery. The message displays until the user taps Dismiss. To monitor battery usage, from the Home screen, touch Battery. Send Feedback 41 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Battery Management This topic explains how to check the status of your battery and what you can do to make your battery last longer. NOTICE: Before checking the battery charge level, remove the LEX L10ig from any AC power source (cradle or cable). To check the charge status of the main battery, tap Battery status indicates that the battery is discharging and Battery level lists the battery charge (as a percentage of fully charged). About phone Status. Monitor Battery Usage The Battery screen lists which applications consume the most battery power. Also use it to turn off applications that were downloaded if they are consuming too much power. To monitor battery usage, tap Figure 10: Battery Screen Battery. The Battery screen lists the applications using the battery. The discharge graph at the top of the screen shows the rate of the battery discharge since last charged (short periods of time when connected to a charger are shown as thin green lines at the bottom of the chart), and how long it has been running on battery power. Tap an application in the Battery screen to display details about its power consumption. Different applications display different information. Some applications include buttons that open screens with settings to adjust power use. 42 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Low Battery Notification When the battery charge level drops below 20%, the LEX L10ig displays a notice to connect the LEX L10ig to power. The user should charge the battery using one of the charging accessories. Figure 11: Low Battery Notification When the battery charge drops below 10%, the LEX L10ig displays a notice to connect the LEX L10ig to power. The user must charge the battery using one of the charging accessories. When the battery charge drops below 4%, the LEX L10ig turns off. Anytime the user then tries to power on the LEX L10ig, the following screen appears. Figure 12: Battery Depleted Screen The user must charge the LEX L10ig using one of the charging accessories to retain data. Battery Optimization Observe the following battery saving tips:
Leave the LEX L10ig inside a cradle connected to AC power at all times when not in use. Turn off Bluetooth if not needed. Turn off Wi-Fi if not needed. Change screen time-out to as short as possible. Send Feedback 43 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Charge the LEX L10ig when not in use. Set the screen to Suspend (Sleep) after a short period of non-use. Reduce screen brightness. Minimize use of applications that keep the LEX L10ig from suspending, for example, music or video applications. Turning Off the Radio When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn off the LEX L10ig radios. Procedure:
1 Press the Power button until the Quick Settings menu appears. Figure 13: Quick Settings Menu Airplane Mode 2 Tap Airplane mode. Alternately, open the Notification panel and tap Airplane Mode. The airplane icon appears in the Status bar indicating that all the radios are off. 44 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Powering On the LEX L10ig for the First Time Press the Power button to turn on the LEX L10ig. The device boot screen displays as the LEX L10ig boots. Figure 14: LEX L10ig Boot Screen Powering Off the LEX L10ig When and where to use: Use this procedure to power off the LEX L10ig. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button until the Power Button menu appears. Figure 15: Selecting Power Off 2 Tap Power off and then OK. Your phone will shut down is displayed on the screen. Send Feedback 45 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Entering and Exiting the Suspend Mode Suspend mode (also known as sleep mode) is a low-power mode of operation that helps reduce electrical power consumption by shutting down parts of the LEX L10ig that are not in use. The LEX L10ig goes into Suspend mode when the Power button is pressed or after a time out period of inactivity. When and where to use: Use this procedure to enter and exit Suspend mode:
Procedure:
1 To enter Suspend mode, press and release the Power button. The LEX L10ig screen turns off. NOTICE: In Suspend mode, the following items continue to operate:
Power button PTT Button (if set to be used) Notification LEDs Wireless communication. 2 To exit Suspend mode, press and release the Power button. Setting Time Out to Enter Suspend Mode When and where to use: Use this procedure to set the period of inactivity before suspend mode occurs. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap:
2 Select the inactivity duration before Suspend mode becomes active. Display Sleep. 3 Tap
. Covert Mode In the Covert Mode, the LEX L10ig goes dark and quiet. All visible and audible LEX L10ig alerts and notifications are shut down. This feature makes the LEX L10ig effectively unnoticeable even in a silent and dark environment. In Covert Mode, the following sounds, visual indications, and keys of the LEX L10ig are disabled:
Display brightness Touchscreen Keylight LED indications Vibration Speaker audio NOTICE: In Covert Mode, sound is routed to a Bluetooth headset, if connected or sound is routed to a wired earpiece, if connected. Alternatively, sound is routed to the LEX L10ig earpiece. Tone indications 46 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started NOTICE: In Covert Mode, the following features remain active:
- Power button
- PTT button
- Volume button
- Four front panel keys
- Camera button
- Audio or tone indications are available using a wired headset (through headset port) or a Bluetooth headset Turning On Covert Mode When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn on Covert Mode. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The following Power Button menu displays:
Figure 16: Power Button Menu 2 Tap Covert mode. The LEX L10ig screen goes blank. Turning Off Covert Mode When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn off Covert Mode. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button for at least two seconds. The following Power Button menu displays:
Send Feedback 47 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Figure 17: Power Button Menu 2 Tap Covert mode. The Home screen appears. Locking the LEX L10ig The lock screen automatically displays after predefined time out to prevent unauthorized people from using the device. The device does not lock at the same time as it is suspended. The device can also be locked manually by the user to disable unwanted key presses or screen tap or to keep data secured. To manually lock the device, press and release the Power button. When the device is locked and cellular network signal is available, phone calls, notification of new messages, missed calls and upcoming appointments still can be received. The device locks after a specified time. Selecting a Locking Option When and where to use: Security dictates a specific level of locking for the LEX L10ig. Use this procedure to select a locking option. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security. 4 Tap Screen lock. The following options are displayed:
None. Slide User slides the lock to unlock the device. Pattern User must replicate a specified pattern to unlock the device. PIN User must enter a pin to unlock the device. Password User must enter a specified password to unlock the device. 5 Select an option. If None or Slide is selected, the Security screen is re-displayed. If Pattern, PIN, or Password is selected, a pattern, pin or password must be specified. Then, the Security screen is re-
displayed. The LEX L10ig is now set to lock. 48 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Postrequisites: Specify a pattern as described in Specifying a Pattern on page 49 Specify a pin, or password as described in Specifying a PIN or Password on page 49. Then, specify a timeout value as described in Setting the Timeout for Locking the LEX L10ig on page 49. Specifying a Pattern Prerequisites: The Pattern option must be selected for Screen lock. When and where to use: Use this procedure to specify a pattern to unlock your LEX L10ig. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security lock. 4 Select Pattern. 5 Using a finger, draw a pattern to unlock your LEX L10ig 6 Tap Continue. 7 Draw the same pattern again. 8 Tap Confirm. The Security screen is re-displayed. A pattern must be entered to unlock the LEX L10ig. Specifying a PIN or Password Prerequisites: The PIN or Password option has been selected for Screen lock. When and where to use: Use this procedure to specify a PIN or password to unlock your LEX L10ig. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security lock. 4 Select PIN or Password. 5 Enter a pin or password. 6 Tap Continue. 7 Enter the pin or password again. 8 Tap OK. The Security screen is re-displayed. A pin or password must be entered to unlock the LEX L10ig. Setting the Timeout for Locking the LEX L10ig Prerequisites: Screen lock must be set to Pattern, PIN, or Password. Send Feedback 49 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started When and where to use: Use this procedure to set the timeout value to lock the LEX L10ig. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Security. 4 Tap Automatically lock. A list of timeout values is displayed. 5 Select a timeout value from the list. 6 The Security screen is re-displayed. Unlocking the LEX L10ig When the LEX L10ig is not used for a period of time and the user tries to access the device, the Lock screen displays. Depending on which Screen lock option is active, the user does one of the following:
Nothing Slide the slider to the unlock position Enter a pattern, pin, or password. Unlocking the LEX L10ig Using a Pattern When and where to use: Use this procedure to unlock the LEX L10ig with a pattern. Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 Using a finger, draw the specified pattern on the screen. Once the correct pattern is drawn, the device unlocks. Unlocking the LEX L10ig Using a PIN or Password When and where to use: Use this procedure to unlock the LEX L10ig with a PIN or password. Procedure:
1 Press and release the Power button. 2 In the text field, enter your pin or password. 3 Tap Done. The device unlocks and the Home screen is shown. 50 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Calling Emergency from a Locked LEX L10ig You can make an emergency call even when the LEX L10ig is locked and you do not remember the PIN. When and where to use: Use this procedure to make an emergency call when the device is locked and you do not remember the PIN:
Procedure:
1 Tap EMERGENCY CALL at the bottom of the lock screen. The Emergency Dialer screen displays. 2 Enter the emergency number. 3 Tap
. Setting the Date and Time When the LEX L10ig is connected to cellular network, date and time are automatically synchronized. When and where to use: Perform this procedure to manually set the date and time:
Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Date & time. 4 Tap Automatic date & time to disable automatic date and time synchronization. 5 Tap Automatic time zone to disable automatic time zone synchronization. 6 Tap Set date. 7 Slide your finger up and down to select the month, date and year. 8 Tap Done. 9 Tap Set time. 10 Slide your finger up and down to select the hour, minutes and part of the day. 11 Tap Done. 12 Tap Select time zone. 13 Tap to select a time zone from the list. 14 Tap
. Setting the Display The following LEX L10ig display features can be customized:
Brightness Set the brightness of the display. Auto-rotate Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned. Sleep Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the displays backlight. Daydream Set the device to launch a screensaver when the device is docked inside a cradle or charging. Send Feedback 51 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Font size Change the font size for display text. Cast screen Enable the device to project the screen to a TV or other device. Setting Screen Brightness When and where to use: Use this procedure to set the screen brightness. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Brightness. 5 Tap Automatic brightness to set the device to automatically adjust the brightness using the built-in light sensor. Use the slider to set a brightness level. 6 Tap
. Setting Screen Rotation Screen rotation enables the LEX L10ig to automatically determine the orientation of the screen to portrait or landscape. When and where to use: Use this procedure when you want to set your screen to automatically rotate:
Procedure:
1 NOTICE: Some applications may not support screen rotation. Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Check Auto-rotate screen to automatically switch orientation when the LEX L10ig is rotated. NOTICE: The Home screen does not rotate. 5 Tap
. Setting Up Sleep Mode Use this procedure to set up sleep mode (screen time-out). Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Sleep. 52 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started 5 Select one of the sleep values:
15 seconds 30 seconds (default) 1 minutes 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes 6 Tap
. Setting Up Daydream When and where to use: The Daydream application behaves as a screensaver when the LEX L10ig is docked inside a cradle and/or in sleep mode. Use this procedure to set up a screensaver. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Daydream. 5 Select from Clock, Colors, Photo Frame or Photo Table. to configure the item selected in the previous step. 6 Tap 7 Tap WHEN TO DAYDREAM and select when you would like the feature to be active (While docked, while charging or either). 8 Tap START NOW to preview and confirm your selection. 9 Tap
. Setting the Font Size When and where to use: Use this procedure to change the font size. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Font size. 5 Select one of the font size values:
Small Normal (default) Large Huge Send Feedback 53 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started 6 Press
. Enabling Cast Screen When and where to use: Use this procedure to enable the LEX L10ig to project the its screen to a TV or other device. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Cast screen. 5 Tap . 6 Select Enable wireless display. Projecting the LEX L10ig Screen on Another Device Prerequisites: The Cast screen must be enabled. When and where to use: Use this procedure to project the LEX L10ig screen on another device. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Display. 4 Tap Cast screen. 5 Select the device to show your device screen on. Your device should now display on the other device. 6 To stop projecting your device screen, swipe down from the Status bar and tap Disconnect under Cast screen. General Sound Setting Use the Sounds settings to configure media and alarm volumes. On the Home screen, tap Sound. Alternately, open the Notification panel and tap Settings Sound. 54 Send Feedback Figure 18: Sound Screen MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Volumes Use to change the volume of media, ringtones, notifications, and alarms. Call Ringtone and Vibrate
- Phone ringtone Tap to select a ringtone to sound when an incoming call is received.
- Vibrate when ringing Check to make the device vibrate when a call is received. NOTICE: Setting volume can also be done by pressing the Volume button, up and down, during a call, or while playing music or a video. When not on a call, pressing the Volume button all the way down to set the device to vibrate. During an in-coming call, pressing the Volume button up and down changes the ringtone volume. Figure 19: Volume Button System
- Default notification sound Tap to select a sound to play for all system notifications.
- Dial pad tap tones Check to play a sound when a device key is touched.
- Touch sounds Check to play a sound when making screen selections. Send Feedback 55 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started
- Screen lock sounds Check to play a sound when locking and unlocking the screen.
- Vibrate on tap Check to have the device vibrate when touching soft keys and on certain screen interactions.
- Emergency tone Select and check Alert to play a tone or Vibrate when an emergency notification is received. Select Off to disable emergency notification. Public and Private Carrier Modes The LEX L10ig operates on both public and private carriers. Private Mode LTE B14 Public Mode LTE B4 and B13 CDMA EVDO Rev. A (Band 0, Band 1) 3G, 1X The user can manually switch modes to operate on the Private Mode LTE network or the Public Carrier Mode. The LEX 10i Mission Critical LTE Handheld operates in:
4G LTE Bands: 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 20, 26, 28 3G/UMTS Bands: 1, 2, 4, 5, 8 Quad Band GSM: 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 1900 MHz 802.11 a/b/g/n Wi-Fi and Miracast Switching Modes Using the Power Button When the LEX L10ig is equipped with Private and Public SIM cards, the Power button can be used to switch modes. Prerequisites: The LEX L10ig is equipped with Private and Public enabled SIM cards. When and where to use: Use this procedure to switch modes using the power button. NOTICE: You may need to switch between private and public network modes when you want to use capabilities provided by one network that are not provided by the other. For example, if the phone is in private mode, switch to public mode before you can dial numbers that are not included in the private network. Procedure:
1 Press and hold the Power button until a menu appears. 56 Send Feedback Figure 20: Service Switch MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started The current carrier mode is indicated under the Service switch option. 2 Tap Service switch. A confirmation popup is displayed. Figure 21: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup 3 Tap Switch. Switching Modes Using the Settings App When the LEX L10ig is equipped with Private and Public SIM cards, the Settings application can be used to switch modes. Prerequisites: The LEX L10ig is equipped with Private and Public enabled SIM cards. When and where to use: Use this procedure to switch modes using the setting applications. NOTICE: You may need to switch between private and public network modes when you want to use capabilities provided by one network that are not provided by the other. For example, if the phone is in private mode, switch to public mode before you can dial numbers that are not included in the private network. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Tap Select network. 6 Select Public or Private. A confirmation popup is displayed. Send Feedback 57 MN002859A01-A Chapter 2: Getting Started Figure 22: Switch Networks Confirmation Popup 7 Tap Switch. LEX L10ig Emergency Button The LEX L10ig includes an Emergency Button which aids responders during emergencies. This feature helps reduce response times in an emergency situation. The device must be pre-configured based on the responders specific requirements before it is given to a user. Once the device is configured to use the Emergency Button, users can access the actions by swiping the Home screen icon up to access the Home screen overlay. The Emergency Button supports the following actions:
Initiate a phone call The Emergency Button can be pre-configured to initiate an E911 call or to initiate a call to a customized phone number. Send an SMS notification (with/without GPS) The Emergency Button can be pre-configured to send an SMS notification to customized numbers. Location coordinates (if available) of LTE handset and information about paired (if paired) Land Mobile Radio (LMR) is also sent as part of the text message. Initiate a phone call and send an SMS notification (with/without GPS) The Emergency Button can be pre-configured to perform both of the above actions. NOTICE: You are required to have a voice and text plan to initiate calls and send SMS notifications. 58 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Using the LEX L10ig Chapter 3 Using the LEX L10ig This chapter explains the indicators, buttons, status icons, and controls on the LEX L10ig. This chapter also provides basic instructions for using the device. Using the Touchscreen The multi-tap sensitive screen is used to operate the LEX L10ig. Table 3: Using the Touchscreen Action Tap Tap and Hold Drag Swipe Double-tap Pinch Result Tap to:
select items on the screen type letters and symbols using the on-screen keyboard press on-screen buttons Tap and hold:
an item on the Home screen to move it to a new location or to the trash an item in Apps to create a shortcut on the Home screen an empty area on the Home screen until the menu appears Tap and hold an item for a moment and then move finger on the screen until reaching the new position. Move finger up and down or left and right on the screen to:
unlock the screen view additional Home screens view additional application icons in the Launcher window view more information on an applications screen Tap twice on a web page, map, or other screen to zoom in and out. In some applications, zoom in and out by plac-
ing two fingers on the screen and pinching them together (to zoom out) or spreading them apart
(to zoom in). Send Feedback 59 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Using the On-Screen Keyboard The on-screen keyboard is used to enter text in a text field. To configure the keyboard settings, tap and hold select Android Keyboard Settings. Figure 23: Android Keyboard Settings
(comma key) > slide your finger up to and then A description of the settings can be found in Android Keyboard Settings on page 61. Editing Text Edit entered text and use menu commands to cut, copy, and paste text within or across applications. Some applications do not support editing some or all of the text they display; others may offer their own way to select text. Entering Numbers, Symbols and Special Characters To enter numbers and symbols:
Without switching to the Numbers or Symbols keyboard, tap and hold one of the top-row keys until a menu appears then select a number. Keys with alternate characters display an ellipsis ( ... ) below the character. Tap the Shift key to enter one capital letter. Tap and hold the Shift key until it changes state (Shift key is underlined) to enter two or more capital letters. Tap Shift key again to return to the lowercase keyboard. Tap to switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard. key on the numbers and symbols keyboard to view additional symbols. Tap the To enter special characters, tap and hold a number or symbol key to open a menu of additional symbols. 60 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig A larger version of the key displays briefly over the keyboard. Keys with alternate characters display an ellipsis ( ... ) below the character. Android Keyboard Settings The Android Keyboard Settings may be personalized to meet your preferences. Table 4: Android Keyboard Settings Setting GENERAL Input Languages Auto-capitalization Vibrate on keypress Sound on keypress Popup on keypress Voice input key TEXT CORRECTION Personal Dictionary Add-on dictionaries Block offensive words Auto-correction Show correction suggestions OTHER OPTIONS Next word suggestions Advanced settings Description Selects the language used in the keyboard. Automatically capitalize the first letter after a pe-
riod. Vibrates the device when a key is pressed. Makes a sound on the device when a key is pressed. Pops up a duplicate of the key pressed. Allows you to speak the name of the key to in-
put a key. Uses your personal dictionary when correcting words. Allows you to add additional dictionaries to cor-
rect words. Blocks offensive words from being suggested to correct words. Sets the level of auto-correction to: Off, Mod-
est, Aggressive, or Very aggressive. Displays a list of corrections so that you can se-
lect make a selection. Anticipates the next word that you want to type based on the last word typed. The Advanced settings should only be set by experts. Send Feedback 61 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Motorola Solutions Home Experience (MHx) The Motorola Solutions Home Experience (MHx) is the engine that drives the user interface of the LEX L10ig. Specifically, MHx provides a unique experience for customizing the LEX L10ig Home screen. LEX L10ig Home Screen The Home screen displays after the LEX L10ig turns on and unlocks. Figure 24: Default Home Screen The Home screen is completely customizable depending on the specifications for your agency. Each organization may have a different Home screen. The Radio Manager (RM) Tool, described in the LEX L10ig Service Provisioning Guide, can be used to stage the Home screen on your devices. NOTICE: When CRYPTR Card is used, the device requires setting a password after initial boot and entering this password whenever the device restarts. This is not a password to access the device but a password to protect Motorola Solutions secure applications. After suspend mode or screen time-out, the screen displays with the lock slider. Slide direction towards the outside of the screen to unlock the screen. in any NOTICE: If you have changed the Screen lock option, depending on the selected option, you will have to enter a pattern, pin, or password to unlock the LEX L10ig. The Home screen consists of the following items:
Core Applications Widget Provides shortcuts such as:
- Phone Dialer
- Contacts
- Application Launcher
- Camera
- Search Feature 62 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig
- Other shortcuts determined by your agency Calendar Widget email Widget Messaging Widget Search Widget My Apps Widget Other Widgets determined by your agency Home Screen Overlay Provides quick access to core functions. The Home screen provides four screens for placement of widgets and shortcuts. Swipe the screen left or right to view the additional screens. Home Screen Overlay The Home screen overlay provides quick access to core functions (Emergency Button). Swipe the Home screen up from the icon to access the Home screen overlay. Customizing the Home Screen The Home screen contains panels that can be accessed by swiping the page to the left or right. Panels provide more space for adding widgets to the Home screen and can be customized by the user. This section describes how to:
Add Widgets Move Widgets Remove Widgets Configure Home screen settings Adding Widgets Widgets are applications that run on your Home screen. When and where to use: Use this procedure to add one or more widgets to your Home screen. Procedure:
1 Swipe the Home screen left or right to locate the panel that you want to add a widget to. 2 Touch and hold a gray area of the panel until you see the following icons near the bottom of the screen:
3 Tap the Widgets icon to reveal the widgets. Send Feedback 63 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Figure 25: Widgets Screen NOTICE: To identify Motorola Solutions Widgets, their names are preceded by MHx. 4 The Widgets screen contains multiple panels. Swipe the Widgets screen left or right to locate the widget that you want to add. 5 Touch and hold the widget; then, slide the widget down the screen and place it in the current panel. If there is not enough room in the panel or you want to place the widget in a new panel, slide the widget to the right of the screen until a blank panel appears. Then, place the widget in the new panel. 64 Send Feedback Figure 26: Example of a Widget Added to New Panel MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig NOTICE: Some widgets are re-sizable as soon as you place it in a panel. Press and hold the widget. If the re-size tool displays (four dots, one on each side of the widget), you can re-size the widget by dragging the dots on the re-size tool. Adding Shortcuts to the My Apps Widget The My Apps widget is a special MHx widget where you can add shortcuts for quick access. Prerequisites: Before adding shortcuts, the My Apps widget must be added to the Home screen. When and where to use: An empty My Apps needs shortcuts to be functional. Use this procedure to add shortcuts to the My Apps widget. Procedure:
1 Add My Apps widget as described inAdding Widgets on page 63. An empty My Apps widget displays. Send Feedback 65 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Figure 27: Empty My Apps Widget 2 Tap the My Apps widget to add shortcuts to it. A screen with a list of shortcuts is displayed. 66 Send Feedback Figure 28: List of Shortcuts for My Apps Widgets MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig 3 Select each shortcut that you want to add to the My Apps widget. You may add up to five shortcuts. 4 Tap Done. Shortcuts are added to the My Apps widget. Send Feedback 67 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Figure 29: My Apps Widget with Shortcuts Added Changing My Status When and where to use: Perform this procedure to set the status of the LEX L10ig user to either Available or Busy. No matter what the status is set to, calls are still received. This status is shown to other users. NOTICE: The My Status widget must be added before it is visible in the Home screen. The My Status widget is used in conjunction with the UNS System from Motorola Solutions or when you have WAVE 7000. One of these systems must be active before My Status will work properly. Procedure:
1 Tap the My Status dropdown menu. Figure 30: My Status Widget The My Status options menu is displayed. Figure 31: Status Selection 68 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig 2 Tap one of the status states. Status is immediately set to the selected state. Moving Widgets When and where to use: Use this procedure to move (relocate) widgets on the Home screen. Procedure:
1 Navigate to the Home screen panel where the widget is located. 2 Touch and hold the widget; then, slide the widget to a new location. If you want to move the widget to another panel, slide the widget left or right to that panel; then slide the widget to a location in the panel. Removing Widgets When and where to use: Use this procedure to remove or clear space on your Home screen. Procedure:
1 Slide the Home screen panel until you locate the panel that holds the widget that you want to remove. 2 Touch and hold the widget while sliding it down to the bottom of the panel. X Remove appears near the bottom of the screen. 3 Slide the widget to X Remove until the widget turns red and your finger is directly above X Remove; then, release the widget. The widget is removed from the panel. NOTICE: The widget is only removed from the panel. It is not deleted from the LEX L10ig. Send Feedback 69 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel This topic shows you an example of a customized Home screen panel. Figure 32: Example of a Customized Home Screen Panel The above figure shows a customized Home screen panel with the following widgets:
My Status Two Direct dial widgets Calendar My Apps Status Bar The Status bar displays the time, notification icons (left side) and status icons (right side). Figure 33: Status Bar If there are more notifications than can fit in the Status bar, it is indicated that more notifications exist. Open the Notifications panel to view all notifications and status. 70 Send Feedback Notification Icons Notification icons alert you when a notification has been received. MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Table 5: Notification Icons Icon Send Feedback Description Indicates that more notifications are available for viewing. Indicates that data is syncing. Indicates an incoming email. Converged Services notification. This icon has four parts: location services (top left), radio services (top right), priority manager (bottom left), and presence service (bottom right). Converged Services error notification. The tri-
angle with the exclamation point inside indi-
cates an error. If an error is observed, the user can swipe down from the icon to reveal the er-
ror. An example is:
Indicates location reporting service is enabled. Indicates the device is searching location data. Indicates an error or a warning that requires user action in the location application. Indicates an error or a warning that requires user action in the presence application. CRYPTR feature error. Indicates an upcoming event. Indicates an open Wi-Fi network is available. Radio Services application is on. Indicates a song is playing. Indicates a problem with sign-in or sync has oc-
curred. Indicates the device is uploading data. Table continued 71 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Icon Description Indicates the microSD card is almost full. Indicates the device is downloading data when animated and download is complete when stat-
ic. Indicates the device is connected via USB ca-
ble. Indicates the device is connected to or discon-
nected from virtual private network (VPN). Preparing SD card. Indicates no SIM is installed. Indicates the USB debugging is enabled on the LEX L10ig. Indicates the device has received a text mes-
sage. Indicates a missed call. Indicates tethering is active for Bluetooth or USB. Also used to indicate a Wi-Fi hotspot is active. Screenshot captured. Indicates that Wi-Fi hotspot is active. My Status indicates device is available. My Status indicates device is busy. LEX L10ig Status Icons Status icons give you status information on actions occurring on your LEX L10ig. Table 6: Status Icons Icon 72 Description Indicates that GPS is in use. Indicates the device is searching location data. Indicates the Alarm is active. Table continued Send Feedback Icon MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Description Indicates all sounds except media and alarms are silenced and vibrate mode is active. Indicates the ringer is silenced. Microphone is muted during a call. Indicates the battery is fully charged. Indicates the battery is partially drained. Indicates the battery charge is low. Indicates the battery charge is very low. Indicates the battery charge is low. Indicates the battery is charging. Indicates the Airplane Mode is active. All ra-
dios are turned off. Indicates Bluetooth is on. Set to operate on Private network. Connected to a Wi-Fi network. No Wi-Fi signal. Mobile network signal strength. No mobile network signal. Connected to a 4G network. Connected to a 3G network. Roaming from a network. No SIM card installed. Managing Notifications Notification icons report the arrival of new messages, calendar events, alarms, and ongoing events. When a notification occurs, an icon appears in the Status bar with a brief description. See Notification Icons on page 71 for a list of possible notification icons and their description. Open the Notifications panel to view a list of all the notifications. Send Feedback 73 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig To open the Notification panel drag the Status bar down from the top of the screen. Figure 34: Notification Panel To respond to a notification, open the Notifications panel and then tap a notification. The Notifications panel closes and the subsequent activity is dependent on the notification. To clear all notifications, open the Notifications panel and tap removed. Ongoing notifications remain in the list. All event-based notifications are NOTICE: Some notifications cannot be cleared and will remain to inform you of running applications To close the Notifications panel, drag the bottom of the Notifications panel to the top of the screen or tap
. Working with Status LEX L10ig users work with status in two ways: setting their own status (Available or Busy) and viewing the status of their contacts. The status displayed for Contacts shows the following:
The presence status currently detected by a call system or network (offline or online status) The availability status currently selected by the contact (Available or Busy) My Status The LEX L10ig user sets the value of My Status to Available or Busy. This status is shown in the Contacts and Session Log screens of other LEX L10ig users. The Available status:
Is the default sign-on state Indicates the LEX L10ig user is willing to send and receive calls 74 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig The Busy status indicates that the LEX L10ig user is busy but the LEX L10ig is still able to send and receive calls. Status of Contacts The status of LEX L10ig contacts is shown in all of the Contacts screens, and People list. The status of a contact can be:
Offline Available Busy If the contact is not connected to and registered with a system server, the status shown is Offline. If the contact is connected to and registered with the system server, the My Status value (Available or Busy) of the contact is shown. When the Contacts are synchronized with the People list, the Contacts are added to the regular device contacts. Quick Settings The Quick Settings panel provides easy access to some frequently used settings. You can use one of two methods:
With two fingers, drag the Status Bar panel down to display the Quick Settings panel. Drag the Status Bar down from the top of the screen. The Quick Settings icon displays in the top right corner. Tap to display the Quick Settings panel. Figure 35: Quick Settings Panel Display the owners contact image. Tap to open the owners contact information. Brightness Opens the Brightness setting dialog box to set the screen brightness. Send Feedback 75 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Settings Opens the Settings screen. Wi-Fi Displays the current Wi-Fi connection. Tap to open the Wi-Fi settings screen. Service Displays the current cellular service used; public or Private. Battery Status Displays the current battery charge level. Tap to open the Battery screen. Airplane Mode Displays the Airplane mode status. Tap to toggle Airplane mode on and off. Turn on Airplane mode to turn off all the radios. Bluetooth Displays the current state of the Bluetooth radio. Tap to open the Bluetooth settings screen. Location Displays the current state. To close the Quick Settings panel, drag the bottom of the Quick Settings panel to the top of the screen or tap
. Applications The Apps screen displays icons for all installed applications. Table 7: Applications Icon 76 Description AOSP Browser Use to access the Internet or agency intranet. Calculator Provides the basic and scientific arithmetic functions. Calendar Use to manage events and ap-
pointments. Allows synchronization with Google account calendar. Camera / Video Recorder Take photos or record videos. For more information, see Cam-
era on page 103. Clock / Alarms Use to set an alarm, stop-
watch, or timer. Dialer Use to make phone calls. See Calling on page 81 for more information. Downloads lists all downloads files. Email Use to send and receive email. File Browser Use to view and manage files on the LEX L10ig. Gallery Use to view photos stored on the mi-
croSD card. For more information, see Gallery on page 111 for more information. Messaging - Send SMS and MMS messages. See Messaging on page 97 for more informa-
tion. Table continued Send Feedback Icon MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Description Motorola Device Management Enables staging and management of the device for initial use by initiating the deployment of settings, firmware, and software from a server. For more information, see the LEX 10i Service Provision-
ing Guide. Motorola TechDocs Use to view device on-
device documentation. MVPN Enables the Motorola Solutions Mo-
bile VPN (MVPN). Movie Studio Use to combine existing vid-
eos. Music Access music stored on the device. My Status Use to view the current availabili-
ty of the user and device to other agency users and system. People Use to manage contact information. Push-To-Talk Enables Push-to-Talk serv-
ices over a broadband network and intercon-
nected to Project 25 Land Mobile Radio (LMR) networks to enable PTT interoperability be-
tween broadband and P25 radio users (availa-
ble only if PTT application is installed and acti-
vated on the LEX 10i). Radio Services Use to pair Operations Criti-
cal Wireless Push-to-Talk (PTT) Pod. Radio Management Link Client Enables connecting the device to a remote host comput-
er for staging, firmware installation, application installation, and application removal by techni-
cal support. See the Radio Management Online Help for more information on the RM Tool. Search Searches the device for an App or feature, Also searches the Web using Google Search. Settings Use to configure the device. Software Licensing Licensing for software installed on the device. Sound Recorder Use to record audio. Voice Dialer Use to place calls by speaking. Send Feedback 77 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Folders Use Folders to organize similar applications together. Tap the folder to open and display items in the folder. Creating a Folder When and where to use: Use a procedure to create a folder on the Home screen. NOTICE: There must be a minimum of two app icons to create a folder. Procedure:
1 Go to the desired Home screen. 2 Tap and hold on one application icon. 3 Drag the icon and stack on top of another icon. 4 Lift and release. Naming Folders When and where to use: Use this procedure to name folders. You can give folders a name after they are created. Procedure:
1 Tap the folder. Figure 36: Opened Unnamed Folder 2 Tap the title area and enter a folder name using the keyboard. 3 Tap Done. 4 Tap anywhere on the Home screen to close the folder. The folder name appears under the folder. Figure 37: Named Folder Removing a Folder When and where to use: When a folder is no longer needed, you can remove it. Use this procedure to remove a folder. Procedure:
1 Tap and hold the folder until it enlarges and the device vibrates. 78 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig 2 Drag the folder to X Remove until the folder turns red; then release. The folder is removed from the screen. Accessing Files from a Computer When and where to use: Use this procedure to allow access to files from your computer using MTP
(media device) or using PTP (camera software). Procedure:
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable. If one of the following messages is displayed in the notification area (top of screen): Connected as a media device or Connected as a camera, you already have access to the files on your device. 2 Swipe down from the Status Bar. Figure 38: Notifications Screen 3 Tap the notification that has a Touch for other USB options subtitle (in this case Connected as a media device). Send Feedback 79 MN002859A01-A Chapter 3: Using the LEX L10ig Figure 39: MTP / PTP Selection Screen 4 Select Media device (MTP) to access media files from a Windows computer or Camera (PTP) to access photos / files on a computer that does not support MTP. 5 Tap to return to the previous screen. 80 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Calling Chapter 4 Calling Make a phone call from the Phone application, the People application, or other applications or widgets that display contact information. Push-To-Talk (PTT) Calling The handheld must be provisioned for PTT services on a Motorola Solutions PTT server. To make PTT calls and how to receive PTT calls on the LEX L10ig, see Push-To-Talk for LEX L10ig manual. Emergency Calling The service provider programs one or more emergency phone numbers that you can call under any circumstances, even when the phone is locked, a SIM card is not inserted, or the phone is not activated. However, the SIM card must be installed in the LEX L10ig to enable preset emergency numbers stored on it. Emergency numbers vary by country. The device must be switched to public mode to use the emergency numbers for your country on the public SIM. The LEX L10ig pre-programmed emergency numbers may not work in all locations, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network, environmental, or interference issues. For additional information, contact your organizations technical support. IMPORTANT: The numbers you can call depend on whether the device is in private mode or public mode. For example, if the device is in private mode, you must switch to public mode before you can call numbers that are not included in the private network. To switch modes, see Switching Modes Using the Power Button on page 56 and Switching Modes Using the Settings App on page 57. NOTICE: If your device is licensed for these options, see LEX L10ig Service Provisioning Guide to set up other emergency alert methods. Audio Modes The device offers three audio modes for use during phone calls:
Handset Mode: Switches audio to the receiver at the top front of the device, so the user can use the device as a handset and is the default mode. Speaker Mode: Use the device as if on speaker phone. Headset Mode: Connect a Bluetooth or wired headset to automatically switch audio to the headset. Using a Bluetooth Headset Use a Bluetooth headset for audio communication when using an audio-enabled application. See Pairing LEX L10ig with Bluetooth Accessory on page 93 for information on connecting a Bluetooth headset to the device. Set the volume appropriately before putting on the headset. When a Bluetooth headset is connected, the speakerphone is muted. Using a Wired Headset Use a wired headset (with 3.5 mm plug) for audio communication when using an audio-enabled application. Set the volume appropriately before putting on the headset. When a wired headset is connected, the speakerphone is muted. Send Feedback 81 MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Lift the headset cover and insert the headset plug. To end a call using the wired headset, press and hold the headset button until the call ends. Figure 40: Insert Wired Headset Plug NOTICE: The headset cover must be properly seated after removing the headset plug. Adjusting Audio Volume Use the Volume buttons to adjust the volume of the ringer when not in a call and the audio volume when in a call. NOTICE: Adjust the conversation phone volume during a call. Adjusting the volume while not in a call affects the ring and notification sound levels. Making a Call Using the Dialer When and where to use: Use this procedure to make a call using the dialer tab to dial phone numbers. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 82 Send Feedback Figure 41: Dialer Screen MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling 2 Tap the 3 Tap the keys to enter the phone number. tab above the dialer. 4 Tap below the dialer to initiate the call. Send Feedback 83 MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Figure 42: Call in Progress If... You want to display the dialer. You want to turn on the speakerphone. You want to mute the call. Then... Tap Tap Tap
. You want to add another person to the call. Tap
. 5 Tap to end the call. Making a Call Using People List Contacts When and where to use: Use this procedure to make a call using people list contacts to initiate a call. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the 3 From the people list contacts, tap a phone contact or a PTT contact for making a One-to-One tab. Private or Alert Call (see Push-To-Talk User Guide For LEX L10ig). 84 Send Feedback Figure 43: People List Contact MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling 4 Tap the phone number next to the contact to initiate the call. 5 Tap to end the call. Making a Call Using Call History When and where to use: Use this procedure to make a call using call history. Call History is a list of all the calls placed, received, or missed. It provides a convenient way to redial a number, return a call, or add a number to Contacts. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the tab. Send Feedback 85 MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Figure 44: Call History Tab 3 Tap 4 Tap next to the contact to initiate the call. to end the call. Example:
Arrow icons beside a call indicate the type of call. Multiple arrows indicate multiple calls:
Missed incoming call Received incoming call Outgoing call Making a Conference Call When and where to use: Conference calling is available if you have two or more people you wish to have a conversation with at the same time. Use this procedure to create a conference phone session with multiple people. NOTICE: Conference calling may not be supported by your service provider. Check with your technical support for conference calling availability. The total number of conference call participants may be limited by your service provider. For the maximum number of participants in a conference call, contact technical support. Procedure:
1 On the Home screen, tap 2 Tap the 3 Tap the keys to enter the phone number. tab above the dialer. 86 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling 4 Tap below the dialer to initiate the call. 5 When the call connects, tap
. The first call is placed on hold. 6 Tap the keys to enter the second phone number. 7 Tap 8 When the call connects, the first call is placed on hold and the second call is active. below the dialer to initiate the call. Figure 45: Two Calls The screen quickly changes to:
Send Feedback 87 MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Figure 46: Two Calls Connected 9 Tap to create a conference call with three people. Figure 47: Merged Calls 10 Tap to add another call. The conference is placed on hold. 88 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling 11 Tap the keys to enter the second phone number. 12 Tap 13 Tap 14 Tap below the dialer to initiate the call. to add the third call to the conference. to rotate between the individual calls. Calls are rotated starting with the first call. This allows you to speak privately to one party. Tap to rotate to the next party. When the rotation is complete, you are placed back into conference mode and all calls are active. Answering Calls with a Bluetooth Headset When you receive a phone call, the Incoming Call screen opens, displaying the caller ID and any additional information about the caller that is in the People application. NOTICE: To connect a Bluetooth headset to the LEX L10ig, see Pairing LEX L10ig with Bluetooth Accessory on page 93. When a call arrives, tap the Call button on the Bluetooth headset to answer the call. To silence the ringer before answering the call, press the volume down button on the side of LEX L10ig. To end the call press the Call button on the Bluetooth headset. All incoming calls are recorded in the Phone application call Logs tab. If you miss a call, you will receive a notification. Call Settings Use the Call Settings to modify options related to the phone call feature. NOTICE: Not all options are available for all configurations. Ringtone & Vibrate
- Phone Ringtone Tap to select a ringtone to sound when an incoming call is received.
- Vibrate When Ringing Check to make the device vibrate when a call is received. Other Call Settings
- Ringtone Settings When using a Bluetooth headset, select the path that the ring is heard. Options: Bluetooth or Speaker and Bluetooth (default). NOTICE: Bluetooth headset connection is required to set this option.
- Voicemail Tap to configure voicemail settings
+ Service Set the service provider or other provider for voicemail service.
+ Setup Tap to update the phone number used to access voicemail.
+ Sound Tap to select a sound when a voicemail is received.
+ Vibrate Tap to vibrate when a voicemail is received.
- Dial pad touch tones Check to play a sound when a phone key is touched.
- Quick Responses - Tap to edit quick responses to use instead of answering a call. Send Feedback 89 MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling
- Fixed Dialing Numbers Use Fixed Dialing to restrict the phone to dial only the phone number(s) or area code(s) specified in a Fixed Dialing list.
- TTY mode Tap to set the TTY setting. Use an optional teletypewriter (TTY) device with the LEX L10ig to send and receive calls. Plug the TTY device into the LEX L10ig headset jack and set the device to operate in one of the TTY modes. NOTICE: Use a TSB-121 compliant cable (provided by the TTY manufacturer) to connect the TTY device to the LEX L10ig. Set the device volume to a middle level setting for proper operation. If you experience a high number of incorrect characters, adjust the volume as needed to minimize the error rate. For optimal performance, the LEX L10ig should be at least 30 cm (12 inches) from the TTY device. Placing the device too close to the TTY device may cause high error rates.
+ TTY Off (default) TTY is off.
+ TTY Full Transmit and receive TTY characters.
+ TTY HCO Transmit TTY characters but receive by listening to earpiece.
+ TTY VCO Receive TTY characters but transmit by speaking into microphone.
- DTMF tones Set the length of the DTMF tones. Available options are: Normal or Long.
- CDMA Call Settings:
+ Voice privacy Enable enhanced privacy mode. Requesting an Emergency Alert This emergency alert procedure is used to indicate a critical situation. When and where to use: Use this procedure to trigger an emergency alert on the LEX L10ig. Procedure:
1 Swipe up from the icon. 2 Tap Activate Emergency. A popup displays giving you 2 seconds to cancel the emergency alert. The emergency number programmed in the LEX L10ig device is dialed. See LEX L10ig Service Provisioning Guide or configuration details. 90 Send Feedback Figure 48: Emergency Alert Activation Popup MN002859A01-A Chapter 4: Calling Send Feedback 91 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A Radio Services Chapter 5 Radio Services Radio Services for LEX 10i The Radio Services is a free application available on the device and enables a LEX L10ig to connect with a Motorola Operations Critical Wireless (OCW) Push-to-talk Pod (NNTN8127) and Bluetooth-
enabled device (accessory) through a wireless Bluetooth connection. Bluetooth-equipped devices can communicate without wires, using frequency-hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) radio frequency (RF) to transmit and receive data in the 2.4 GHz Industry Scientific and Medical (ISM) band (802.15.1). Bluetooth wireless technology is specifically designed for shortrange (10 meters (32.8 feet) communication and low power consumption. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth enabled device. Pairing LEX L10ig with Bluetooth Accessory Prerequisites: Confirm Bluetooth is enabled on the LEX L10ig device and Bluetooth-enabled device
(accessory). To enable/disable Bluetooth on the LEX L10ig, see Enabling Bluetooth on page 138 or Disabling Bluetooth on page 138. Once pairing is established, the range of connection is no more than 10 meters (32.8 feet) line-of-sight. This is an unobstructed path between the location of the LEX L10ig and the location of the Radio (or other paired accessory). When and where to use: Use this procedure to pair a LEX L10ig with a Bluetooth-enabled device
(accessory) through a wireless Bluetooth connection. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 In the Secure Pairing window, tap Pair. Send Feedback 93 MN002859A01-A Chapter 5: Radio Services Figure 49: Bluetooth Pairing Screen 4 From the Bluetooth screen, in the AVAILABLE DEVICES section, tap an unconnected Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory). Figure 50: Bluetooth Device Screen 5 In the PAIRED DEVICES section, the Bluetooth-enabled device is connected. 94 Send Feedback Figure 51: Bluetooth Paired Devices Screen MN002859A01-A Chapter 5: Radio Services NOTICE: Your Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) user manual. Unpairing LEX L10ig from Bluetooth Accessory Prerequisites: The LEX L10ig is unpaired with Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory). When and where to use: Use this procedure to unpair the LEX L10ig from a Bluetooth-enabled device
(accessory). Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap 3 From the Settings screen, tap Bluetooth. 4 From the Bluetooth screen, tap next to the device name. Send Feedback 95 MN002859A01-A Chapter 5: Radio Services Figure 52: Bluetooth Paired Devices 5 Tap Unpair. Figure 53: Unpair Complete 96 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Messaging Chapter 6 Messaging Use Messaging to send and receive SMS and MMS messages. From Home or All Apps screen, tap
. Sending a Text Message When and where to use: Use this procedure to send text messages. Procedure:
1 In the main Messaging screen, tap The New Message screen displays. Figure 54: New Message Screen
. 2 In the To field, enter a name or a mobile phone number. 3 In the Type message field, enter the text message. Messages are limited to 160 characters. When the limit is approached, a counter displays, above the Send control, showing how many characters are left. If the limit is reached and the user keeps typing, a new message is created, which is joined with its predecessors when received. If the user presses the Back button while composing a message, it is saved as a draft in the Messaging screen. Tap the conversation to resume composing it. Send Feedback 97 MN002859A01-A Chapter 6: Messaging 4 Tap to send the message. Sending a Multimedia Message When and where to use: Use this procedure to send multimedia messages. NOTICE: Multimedia messaging is only supported when the LEX L10ig is in Public network mode. Procedure:
1 In the main Messaging screen, tap
. The New Multimedia Message screen displays. Figure 55: New Multimedia Message Screen 2 In the To field, enter a name or a mobile phone number. 3 Tap to attach the media file of your choice:
Pictures Select a picture to attach. Capture picture Camera opens to take a picture and attach it. Videos Select a video to attach. Capture video Camcorder opens to record a video and attach it to the message. Audio Choose a sound file to attach. Record audio Sound Recorder opens to record a spoken message and attach it to the message. Slideshow Opens a screen to assemble text, photos, videos, and recordings into a slideshow of up to 10 slides to attach to the message. 98 Send Feedback 4 Tap to send the message. MN002859A01-A Chapter 6: Messaging Send Feedback 99 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A Applications Chapter 7 Applications This chapter describes the applications installed on the LEX L10ig. Normally, you access the applications through the Home screen overlay by clicking the the Home screen up from the icon to reveal the icon. icon. Swipe Using File Browser Use the File Browser application to view and manage files on the device. To open File Browser, tap Figure 56: File Browser Screen
. The address bar indicates the current folder path. Tap the current folder path to manually enter a path and folder name. Tap Tap Tap to select multiple files/folder. to view the internal storage root folder. to view the microSD card root folder. to view the previous folder or to exit the application. Information View detailed information about the file or folder. Tap Tap and hold an item to perform an operation on that item. Select one of the options from the File Operations menu:
Move Move the file or folder to a new location. Copy Copy the select file. Delete Delete the selected file. Rename Rename the select file. Open as Open the selected file as a specific file type. Send Feedback 101 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Share Share the file with other devices. Tap to open additional functionality:
Tap the key New Folder to create a new folder in the current folder. Tap the key Search to search for a file or folder. Tap the key Sort to sort the list by name, by type, by size or by date. Tap the key Refresh to re-display the contents of the current folder. Tap the key List View to change the folder view from tile to list format Tap the key Change Size to change the size of the icons: Large, Normal or Small. Tap the key About File Browser to view the application version information. Managing People Contacts Use the People application to manage contacts. From a Home or Apps screen, tap screen: Search, Groups, All contacts, and Favorites. Tap the tabs to change how to view the contacts. Swipe up or down to scroll through the lists. The People application, displays four tabs at the top of the Adding People When and where to use: Use this procedure to add contacts. Procedure:
1 In the People application, tap 2 If there are more than one account with contacts, tap the one to use. 3 Type the contacts name and other information. Tap a field to start typing, and swipe down to
. view all categories. 4 Adding more than one entry for a category requires an additional step. For example:
To add a work address after typing a personal address, tap Add new for that field. To open a menu with preset labels, such as Home or Work for an email address, tap the label to the right of the item of contact information. To create your own label, tap Custom in the menu. 5 Tap Done. Editing People When and where to use: Use this procedure to edit contact information. Procedure:
1 In the People application, tap 2 Tap a name to edit. tab. 3 Tap . 4 Tap Edit. 102 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 5 Edit the contact information. 6 Tap Done. Deleting People When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete contacts. Procedure:
1 In the People application, tap 2 Tap a name to delete. tab. 3 Tap . 4 Tap Delete. 5 Tap OK to confirm. Camera This section provides information for taking photos and recording videos using the integrated digital cameras. NOTICE: If a microSD card is installed, the LEX L10ig saves photos and videos on the microSD card. If a microSD card is not installed, the LEX L10ig saves photos and videos on the internal storage. Send Feedback 103 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Figure 57: Camera Photo Screen Table 8: Camera Icons and Actions Call Out 1 Icon Camera Options 2 3 Shutter Photo Settings Action Tap to select Camera, Video, or Panorama mode. Tap to take a photo, a panor-
amic photo, or to record a vid-
eo. Tap to select camera settings. Taking Photos When and where to use: Use this procedure to take photos. NOTICE: For camera settings, see Camera Settings on page 108. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. The Camera screen is displayed. 104 Send Feedback Figure 58: Camera Screen MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 2 If necessary, tap to open the Camera Option bar and select Camera icon. Figure 59: Camera Option Bar for settings. 3 Tap 4 Frame the subject on screen. 5 To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. The zoom controls appear on the screen. Send Feedback 105 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Figure 60: Camera Zoom 6 Tap
. The camera brings the image into focus. When the image is in focus, the focus indicators (top and bottom of screen) turn green and the camera takes a photo. Taking a Panoramic Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to create a single wide image by panning slowly across a scene. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the Camera Options bar and tap
. Figure 61: Panoramic Mode 3 Frame one side of the scene to capture. 106 Send Feedback Figure 62: Panoramic Frame MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 4 Tap and slowly start panning across the area to capture. A small white square appears inside the button the shot is in progress. If panning too quickly, the message Too fast displays. 5 Tap to end the shot. The panorama is displayed and a progress indicator displays while it saves the image. Recording Videos When and where to use: Use this procedure to record videos. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap the Camera Options bar and tap
. Figure 63: Video Mode 3 To zoom in or out, press two fingers on the display and pinch or expand fingers. Send Feedback 107 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications NOTICE: Video zoom works the same as camera zoom. 4 Point the camera and frame the scene. 5 Tap to start recording. The device starts recording the video. The video time remaining appears in the top left of the screen. 6 Tap to end recording. Camera Settings When you are in Photo mode, photo settings are displayed on the screen. to display the photo settings options. Tap Figure 64: Camera Settings The available photo settings are (from left icon to right icon):
Turn High Dynamic Range (HDR) on or off. Three screens of More Options. Settings for each option depend on the selected option. Click these icons to display more options. Some options require selecting a setting from a menu. Set these options accordingly. NOTICE: These options are similar to the camera options seen on most cameras. Set accordingly.
- First More Options Screen. 108 Send Feedback Figure 65: First More Options Screen MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications
- Second More Options Screen. Figure 66: Second More Options Screen
- Third More Options Screen. Send Feedback 109 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Figure 67: Third More Options Screen Switch from front to rear camera or from rear to front camera. Video Settings When in Video mode, video settings are displayed on screen. Tap options. Figure 68: Video Settings to display the video settings 110 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications The available video settings are (from left icon to right icon):
Two screens of More Options. Settings for each option depend on the selected option. You can select an item from a menu or you select an option by clicking it. NOTICE: These options are similar to the video options seen on most cameras. Set the video options accordingly.
- First More Options Screen. Figure 69: First More Options Video Screen
- Second More Options Screen. Figure 70: Second More Options Video Screen Switch from front to rear video or from rear to front video. Gallery The Gallery is used to manage your photos and videos. NOTICE: The device supports the following image formats: JPEG, GIF, PNG, and BMP. Use the Gallery to:
View photos Play videos Send Feedback 111 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Perform basic editing of photos Set photos as wallpaper Set photos as a contact photo Share photos and videos To open the Gallery application, tap The Gallery presents all photos and videos stored on the microSD card and internal memory. Figure 71: Gallery Albums
. Tap an album to open it and view its contents. The photos and videos in the album are displayed in chronological order. Tap a photo or video in an album to view it. Tap icon (top left corner) to return to the main Gallery screen. Tap to return to the main Gallery screen. Working with Albums Albums are groups of images and videos in folders. Tap an album to open it. The photos and videos are listed in a chronologically ordered grid. The name of the album displays at the top of the screen. 112 Send Feedback Figure 72: Photos/Videos Inside an Album MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Swipe left or right to scroll images across the screen. Sharing an Album When and where to use: Use this procedure to share an album in your Gallery. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap and hold an album until it highlights. 4 Tap other albums as required. 5 Tap
. Share applications are displayed. 6 Select the application that you want to use. 7 Follow the instructions within the selected application. Getting Album Information When and where to use: Use this procedure to view information about an album. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. Send Feedback 113 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 3 Tap and hold an album until it highlights. 4 Tap . 5 Tap Details. Deleting an Album When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete an album that you no longer need. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap and hold an album until it highlights. 4 Tap . 5 Tap Delete. 6 Tap OK to delete the album. Working with Photos Use Gallery to view photos on the microSD card and edit and share photos. Viewing and Browsing Photos When and where to use: Use this procedure to view or browse photos that you have taken. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a photo. 114 Send Feedback Figure 73: Photo Example MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 5 Swipe left or right to view the next or previous photo in the album. 6 Turn the LEX L10ig to view the photo in upright (portrait) or sideways (landscape) orientation. The photo is displayed (but not saved) in the new orientation. 7 Tap the photo to view the controls. 8 Double-tap the screen to zoom in or pinch two fingers together or spread them apart to zoom in or out. 9 Drag the photo to view parts that are not in view. Rotating a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to rotate a photo. Procedure:
1 Tap a photo to view the controls. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap
. 4 Tap
. The photo rotates 90 clockwise. Each tap rotates the photo another 90. The photo is automatically saved with the new orientation. Send Feedback 115 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Cropping a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to crop a photo. Procedure:
1 In the Gallery, tap a photo to view the controls. 2 Tap 3 Tap 4 Tap
.
). The cropping grid displays. Figure 74: Cropping Grid 5 Adjust the endpoints to select the portion of the photo to crop. 6 Tap CROP to save a copy of the cropped photo. The original version is retained. Setting a Photo as a Contact Icon When and where to use: Use this procedure to set a photo as a contact icon. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 116 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 4 Tap the photo to open it. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Set picture as. 7 Select a contact. 8 Crop the photo accordingly as described in Cropping a Photo on page 116. 9 Tap SAVE. Sharing a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to share a photo. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a photo to open it. 5 Tap 6 Tap the application to use for sharing the selected photo (for example Bluetooth). Deleting a Photo When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete a photo. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a photo to open it. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Delete. 7 Tap OK to delete the photo. Working with Videos Use the Gallery to view videos on the microSD card and share videos. Watching a Video When and where to use: Use this procedure to watch a video. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. Send Feedback 117 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a video. 5 Tap
. The video begins to play. 6 Tap the screen to view the playback controls. Figure 75: Video Playback Controls 7 Tap the Pause control. 8 Tap to return to the previous screen or to return to the Home screen. Sharing a Video When and where to use: Use this procedure to share a video. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a video to open it. 5 Tap
. The Share menu appears. 6 Tap the application to use to share the selected video. The selected application opens with the video attached to a new message. Deleting a Video When and where to use: Use this procedure to delete a video. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 118 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications
. 2 Tap 3 Tap an album to open it. 4 Tap a video to open it. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Delete. 7 Tap OK. Using Sound Recorder Use Sound Recorder to record audio messages. Recordings are saved on the microSD card (if installed) or the Internal Storage and available in the Music application playlist titled My Recordings. The recording process is done in four stages. 1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap to start a recording. Figure 76: Start Recording 4 Record your message. Send Feedback 119 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Figure 77: Record Your Message 5 Tap 6 Tap Done to save the recording. to stop recording. Figure 78: Finish Recording 120 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications Voice Dialer Voice Dialer is a speech dialog system that provides natural human interface for users to communicate seamlessly with the device. Users can make phone calls, look up contact information, launch programs or check calendars. 1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. The following window displays. Figure 79: Voice Dialer Window 3 Say one of the following commands:
Call Dial Redial Open Calling a Person by Name When and where to use: Use this procedure to call a person by name. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say the name of the person that you want to call (for example, John Doe). 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap Call John Doe. The call is initiated. Redialing a Previous Call When and where to use: Use this procedure to redial a previous call. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. Send Feedback 121 MN002859A01-A Chapter 7: Applications or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say Redial. 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap Redial. The call is initiated. Dialing by Number When and where to use: Use this procedure to dial a number using the phone number. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say Dial<[phone number]>. 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap the number that displays. The call is initiated. Opening an Application When and where to use: Use this procedure to open an application. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. or press the call button on a Bluetooth headset. 2 Tap 3 Say Open<[application name]>. 4 In the Voice Dialer dialog box, tap the application name. The application opens. 122 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Wireless Chapter 8 Wireless This section provides information on the wireless features of the LEX L10ig. Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Bluetooth Wireless Wide Area Networks Use Wireless Wide Area Networks (WWANs) to access data over a cellular network. This section provides information on:
Setting the preferred network Public / Private Sharing a data connection Enabling / Disabling data roaming Monitoring data usage Limiting connections to 2G, 3G, 4G networks Editing Access Point Names (APNs) Adding Virtual Private Network VPN Cellular broadcasts Sharing the Mobile Data Connection The Tethering & portable hotspot settings allow you to share your data connection. You can share the LEX L10ig mobile data connection with a single computer via USB tethering or Bluetooth tethering. You can also share the data connection with up to eight devices at once, by turning it into a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. While the LEX L10ig is sharing its data connection, an icon appears at the top of the screen and a corresponding message appears in the notification list. Configuring USB Tethering Use this procedure to share a data connection with a host computer. NOTICE: USB tethering is not supported on computers running Mac OS. If your computer is running Windows 7 or a recent version of Linux (such as Ubuntu), follow these instructions without any special preparation. If running a version of Windows that precedes Windows 7, or some other operating system, you may need to prepare the computer to establish a network connection via USB. NOTICE: After connecting the LEX L10ig to a computer using USB tethering, the computer disconnects from the network connection, for a short time, and does not have access to the Internet (the LEX L10ig becomes the primary network adapter). Procedure:
1 Connect the LEX L10ig to a host computer with the USB cable. Send Feedback 123 MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Figure 80: USB Cable Connection to Host Computer A USB icon device appears briefly at the top of the screen. appears at the top of the screen, and the notification Connected as a media 2 Tap
. 3 Tap 4 Tap More ... 5 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 6 Check USB tethering. The host computer is now sharing the LEX L10ig data connection. Postrequisites: To stop sharing the data connection, uncheck USB tethering or disconnect the USB cable. NOTICE: The USB cover needs to be fully seated after use. Configuring Bluetooth Tethering Prerequisites: Configure the host computer to obtain its network connection using Bluetooth. For more information, see the host computers documentation. When and where to use: Use this procedure to tether Bluetooth to share the data connection with a host computer. Procedure:
1 Pair the LEX L10ig with the host computer. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap 4 Tap More ... 5 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 124 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 6 Check Bluetooth tethering. The host computer is now sharing the LEX L10ig data connection. Postrequisites: To stop sharing the data connection, uncheck Bluetooth tethering . Configuring Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot Settings Prerequisites: Configure the Wi-Fi Hotspot settings. When and where to use: Use this procedure to turn your LEX L10ig into a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 5 Select Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. After a moment, the LEX L10ig starts broadcasting its Wi-Fi network name (SSID), so you can connect to it with up to eight computers or other devices. Postrequisites: To stop sharing the data connection, uncheck Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Configuring the Wi-Fi Hotspot When and where to use: Use this procedure is used to configure a Wi-Fi hotspot. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Tethering & portable hotspot. 5 Tap Set up Wi-Fi hotspot. The Set up Wi-Fi hotspot screen displays. Send Feedback 125 MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Figure 81: Set up Wi-Fi Hotspot Dialog Box 6 In the Network SSID text field, edit the network name. 7 Tap the Security option and select a security method from the drop-down list. Open WPA2 PSK. 8 In the Password text field, enter a password. NOTICE: If Open is selected in the Security option, a password is not required. 9 Tap Save. Data Usage Data usage refers to the amount of data uploaded or downloaded by the LEX L10ig during a given period. Depending on the wireless plan, you may be charged additional fees when your data usage exceeds your plan's limit. To monitor your data usage, go to Data usage. CAUTION: The usage displayed on the data usage settings screen is measured by your device. Your carrier's data usage accounting may differ. Usage in excess of your carrier plan's data limits can result in steep overage charges. The feature described here can help you track your usage, but is not guaranteed to prevent additional charges. Data usage settings allow you to:
Set the data usage level at which you' will receive a warning. Set a data usage limit. View or restrict data usage by app. 126 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Identify mobile hotspots and restrict background downloads that may result in extra charges. By default, when you open the data usage settings screen you see the settings for mobile data: that is, the data network or networks provided by your carrier. Just below the on-off switch, note the data usage cycle. Tap it to choose a different cycle. This date range is the period of time for which the graph displays data usage. The vertical white lines on the graph show a period of time within the data usage cycle. This range determines the usage amount displayed just below the graph. Drag lines to change the period. Setting Data Usage Warning When and where to use: Use this procedure to set data usage warning. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Data usage. 4 Check Set mobile data limit. 5 Drag the red line up/down to the level where you want to limit. 6 Drag the orange line up/down to the level where you want to receive a warning. When your data usage reaches this level, you' will receive a notification. Setting Auto-Sync You can also conserve data usage by syncing your apps manually, only when you need the data, rather than relying on auto-sync. When and where to use: Use this procedure to set Auto-Sync. Procedure:
To turn auto-sync off or on, tap Auto-sync data. Disabling Data When Roaming When and where to use: Use this procedure to prevent the LEX L10ig from transmitting data over other carriers mobile networks when leaving an area that is covered by the carriers networks. This is useful for controlling expenses if the service plan does not include data roaming. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Un-check Data roaming. 6 Tap
. Send Feedback 127 MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Limiting Data Connection to a Network You can limit the device Private or Public services or extend the battery life by limiting the data connections to Global networks, LTE networks, or CDMA networks. NOTICE: This feature is only available on some networks. Check with service provider. When and where to use: Use this procedure to limit data connection to a network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Tap Network Mode. 6 Select Global mode, LTE only, or CDMA only . 7 Tap
. Editing the Access Point Name When and where to use: When network information needs to change, the user can edit the APN information. NOTICE: Many service provider Access Point Name (APN) data are pre-configured in the LEX L10ig. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More ... 4 Tap Mobile networks. 5 Tap Access Point Names. 6 Tap . 7 When finished, tap . 8 Tap Save. 9 Tap the radio button next to the new APN name to start using it. 10 Tap
. Adding a Virtual Private Network (VPN) A virtual private network (VPN) extends a private network across a public network. VPN enables the LEX L10ig to communicate data across a public network while benefiting from the functionality and security of the private network. When connected by VPN, the LEX L10ig establishes a virtual point-to-
point connection through a dedicated virtual tunneling protocols or data encryption. TheLEX L10ig enables connection to Basic VPN to communicate through any VPN and to Motorola Solutions Mobile 128 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless VPN (MVPN) to communicate through Motorola Solutions mobile VPN. This section describes adding a basic VPN. Motorola Mobile VPN is added and configured by your technical support and requires license certification for use. When and where to use: Use this procedure to add a virtual private network to the LEX L10ig (not including the Motorola Mobile VPN). Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap VPN. 5 Tap Basic VPN . 6 Tap + to add VPN profile. 7 Enter and check:
Name Type Server Address If required, check PPP encryption (MPPE). If required, check Show advanced options to enter:
DNS servers DNS search domains Forwarding routs 8 Tap Save. Connection to VPN is indicated by is displayed. 9 Check My Keychain and tap Allow. 10 Tap
. on the status bar and the Choose Certification screen Cell Broadcasts Cell Broadcasts allows emergency alert messages to be broadcast simultaneously from a service provider to multiple users in within a designated geographical area. Broadcasts are often used for weather updates, regional events, traffic conditions and other services. When and where to use: Use this procedure to enable emergency alert messages by cell broadcasts on the LEX L10ig. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap More... 4 Tap Cell broadcasts. Send Feedback 129 MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 5 Check the emergency alert types you want to receive. 6 Tap
. Wireless Local Area Networks Wireless local area networks (WLANs) allow the LEX L10ig to communicate wirelessly inside a building. Before using the LEX L10ig on a WLAN, the facility must be set up with the required hardware to run the WLAN (sometimes known as infrastructure). The infrastructure and the LEX L10ig must both be properly configured to enable this communication. See the documentation provided with the infrastructure (access points (APs), access ports, switches, Radius servers) for instructions on how to set up the infrastructure. Once the infrastructure is set up to enforce the chosen WLAN security scheme, use the Wireless &
networks settings to configure the LEX L10ig to match the security scheme. The LEX L10ig supports the following WLAN security options:
Open Wireless Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)/WPA2 Personal (PSK) Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
- Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) with Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 (MSCHAPv2) and Generic Token Card (GTC) authentication.
- EAP-Transport Layer Security (TLS)
- EAP-TTLS - with Password Authentication Protocol (PAP), MSCHAP and MSCHAPv2 authentication The Status bar displays icons that indicate Wi-Fi network availability and Wi-Fi status. NOTICE: Turn off Wi-Fi when not using it, to extend the life of the battery. Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to scan for and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 130 Send Feedback Figure 82: Settings Screen MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 3 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the ON position. 4 Tap Wi-Fi. The LEX L10ig searches for WLANs in the area and lists them. Figure 83: Wi-Fi Screen 5 Scroll through the list and select the desired WLAN network. Send Feedback 131 MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 6 For open networks, tap profile once or press and hold and then select Connect to network or for secure networks enter the required password or other credentials then tap Connect. See technical support for more information. The LEX L10ig obtains a network address and other required information from the network using the dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) protocol. 7 In the Wi-Fi setting field, Connected displays indicating that the LEX L10ig is connected to the WLAN. Configuring a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to configure a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the switch to the ON position. The LEX L10ig searches for WLANs in the area and lists them on the screen. 5 Scroll through the list and select the desired WLAN network. 6 Tap the desired network. If the network security is Open, the LEX L10ig automatically connects to the network. For all other network security a dialog box appears. Figure 84: WLAN Network Security Dialog Boxes NOTICE: By default, the network Proxy is set to None and the IP settings is set to DHCP. 7 If the network security is WEP or WPA/WPA2 PSK, enter the required password and then tap Connect. 8 If the network security is 802.1x EAP, enter the information below and then tap Connect:
132 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Tap the EAP method drop-down list and select PEAP, TLS, or TTLS. Tap the Phase 2 authentication drop-down list and select an authentication method. If required, tap CA certificate and select a Certification Authority (CA) certificate. Note:
Certificates are installed using the Security settings. If required, tap User certificate and select a user certificate. Note: User certificates are installed using the Location & security settings. If required, in the Identity text box, enter the username credentials. If desired, in the Anonymous identity text box, enter an anonymous identity username. If required, in the Password text box, enter the password. 9 Tap
. Adding a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: You can add a Wi-Fi Network that is currently out of range or indiscoverable. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the On position. 5 Tap +. 6 Enter network SSID and select Security. 7 Tap Save. The LEX L10ig connects to the wireless network. 8 Tap
. Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to manually add a Wi-Fi network if the network does not broadcast its name (SSID) or to add a Wi-Fi network when out of range. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the ON position. 5 Tap + in the bottom right corner of the screen. By default, the network Proxy is set to None and the IP settings is set to DHCP. 6 In the Network SSID text box, enter the name of the Wi-Fi network. 7 In the Security drop-down list, select the type of security. Options included are:
Send Feedback 133 MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless None WEP WPA/WPA2 PSK 802.1x EAP 8 If the network security is None, tap Save. 9 If the network security is WEP or WPA/WPA2 PSK, enter the required password and then tap Save. 10 If the network security is 802.1x EAP enter the information below and then tap Save:
Tap EAP method drop-down list and select PEAP, TLS, or TTLS. Tap Phase 2 authentication drop-down list and select an authentication method. Tap CA certificate and select a Certification Authority (CA) certificate. NOTICE: Certificates are installed using the Security settings. Tap User certificate and select a user certificate. NOTICE: User certificates are installed using the Security settings. Tap Identity to enter the username credentials. Tap Anonymous to enter an anonymous identity username. Tap Password to enter password. 11 Tap
. Advanced Wi-Fi Settings Use the Advanced settings to configure additional Wi-Fi settings. NOTICE: Advanced Wi-Fi settings are for the device not for a specific wireless network. From the Wi-Fi screen, tap Advanced to view the advanced settings. Network notification When enabled, notifies the user when an open network is available. Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep Opens a menu to set whether and when the Wi-Fi radio turns off.
- Always The radio stays on when the device enters suspend mode.
- Only when plugged in The radio stays on while the device is connected to external power.
- Never (increases data usage) The radio turns off when the device enters suspend mode
(default). Wi-Fi optimization Minimize the battery usage when Wi-Fi is on. Avoid poor Connection Connects to the internet only if connection is good. MAC address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the device when connecting to Wi-Fi networks. IP address Displays the IP address of the device when connecting to Wi-Fi networks. 134 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless WLAN Configuration Use the WLAN Configuration settings to configure additional WLAN settings. From the Wi-Fi screen, tap Advanced to view the settings. The following two settings are used to configure WLAN:
Wi-Fi frequency band
- Auto (2.4GHz and 5GHz) Use both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (default).
- 5GHz Only Use only the 5 GHz band.
- 2.4GHz Only Use only the 2.4 GHz band. Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep
- Always Wi-Fi is always enabled even in sleep mold.
- Only when plugged in Wi-Fi is enabled only when the device is plugged in. If the device is not plugged in, the device will not enter the sleep mold.
- Never (increases data usage) Wi-Fi is never disabled. Modifying a Wi-Fi Network The user can change settings and passwords for a network in the Wi-Fi list. When and where to use: Use this procedure to modify a Wi-Fi network. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 Slide the Wi-Fi switch to the ON position. 5 Tap and hold on a network name and then tap Modify network. 6 Modify the network settings and then tap Save. 7 Tap
. Removing a Wi-Fi Network When and where to use: Use this procedure to remove a Wi-Fi network from your list of Wi-Fi networks. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Wi-Fi. 4 In the Wi-Fi networks list, tap and hold the name of the network. 5 In the menu, tap Forget network. 6 Tap
. Send Feedback 135 MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Bluetooth Device The LEX L10ig supports Motorola Operations Critical Wireless (OCW) Push-to-talk Pod (NNTN8127) and Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) through a wireless Bluetooth connection. Adaptive Frequency Hopping Adaptive Frequency Hopping (AFH) is a method of avoiding fixed frequency interferers, and can be used with Bluetooth voice. All devices in the piconet (Bluetooth network) must be AFH-capable in order for AFH to work. There is no AFH when connecting and discovering devices. Avoid making Bluetooth connections and discoveries during critical 802.11b communications. AFH for Bluetooth consists of four main sections:
Channel Classification - A method of detecting an interference on a channel-by-channel basis, or pre-defined channel mask. Link Management - Coordinates and distributes the AFH information to the rest of the Bluetooth network. Hop Sequence Modification - Avoids interference by selectively reducing the number of hopping channels. Channel Maintenance - A method for periodically re-evaluating the channels. The Bluetooth radio in this device operates as a Class 2 device power class. The maximum output power is 2.5 mW and the expected range is 10 meters (32.8 ft.). A definition of ranges based on power class is difficult to obtain due to power and device differences, and whether one measures open space or closed office space. NOTICE: It is not recommended to perform Bluetooth wireless technology inquiry when high rate 802.11b operation is required. Bluetooth Security The current Bluetooth specification defines security at the link level. Application-level security is not specified. This allows application developers to define security mechanisms tailored to their specific need. Link-level security occurs between devices, not users, while application-level security can be implemented on a per-user basis. The Bluetooth specification defines security algorithms and procedures required to authenticate devices, and if needed, encrypt the data flowing on the link between the devices. Device authentication is a mandatory feature of Bluetooth while link encryption is optional. Pairing of Bluetooth devices is accomplished by creating an initialization key used to authenticate the devices and create a link key for them. Entering a common personal identification number (PIN) in the devices being paired generates the initialization key. The PIN is never sent over the air. By default, the Bluetooth stack responds with no key when a key is requested (it is up to user to respond to the key request event). Authentication of Bluetooth devices is based-upon a challenge-response transaction. Bluetooth allows for a PIN or passkey used to create other 128-bit keys used for security and encryption. The encryption key is derived from the link key used to authenticate the pairing devices. Also worthy of note is the limited range and fast frequency hopping of the Bluetooth radios that makes long distance eavesdropping difficult. Recommendations are:
Perform pairing in a secure environment Keep PIN codes private and do not store the PIN codes in the device Implement application-level security 136 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Bluetooth Profiles The LEX L10ig supports the following Bluetooth services:
Generic Access Profile (GAP) Use for device discovery and authentication. Service Discovery Protocol (SDAP) Handles the search for known and specific services and general services. Serial Port Profile (SPP) Sets up a virtual serial port and connects two Bluetooth enabled devices. For example, connecting the LEX L10ig to a printer. Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Allows Bluetooth keyboards, pointing devices, gaming devices and remote monitoring devices to connect to the LEX L10ig. Object Push Profile (OPP) Allows the LEX L10ig to push and pull objects to and from a push server. Dial-up Networking (DUN) Allows the LEX L10ig to access the Internet and other dial-up services using a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone. Hands-Free Profile (HFP) Allows a hands-free device, such as a Bluetooth headset, to place and receive calls on the LEX L10ig. Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Allows the LEX L10ig to stream stereo-quality audio to a wireless headset or wireless stereo speakers. Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Allows the LEX L10ig to control televisions, hi-fi equipment, etc. General Object Exchange Profile (GOEP) Provides a basis for other data profiles. Based on OBEX and sometimes referred to as such. Handsfree Profile (HFP) Allow car hands-free kits to communicate with mobile phones in the car. Personal Area Network (PAN) Allow the use of Bluetooth Network Encapsulation Protocol on Layer 3 protocols for transport over a Bluetooth link. General Audio/Video Distribution Profile (GAVDP) Provides the basis for A2DP, and VDP. Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP) Allows exchange of Phone Book Objects between a car kit and a mobile phone to allow the car kit to display the name of the incoming caller; allow the car kit to download the phone book so the user can initiate a call from the car display. Message Access Profile (MAP) allows exchange of messages between devices. Handset Profile (HSP) Provides support for the popular Bluetooth headsets to be used with mobile phones with ability to ring, answer a call, hang up and adjust the volume. File Transfer Profile (FTP) Provides the capability to browse, manipulate and transfer files and folders in a file system of another system. Proximity profile (PXP) Enables proximity monitoring between two devices. Heart Rate Profile (HRP) Enables transmission and reception of medical device data. Health Thermometer profile (HTP) Enables transmission and reception of medical device data. Bluetooth Power States The Bluetooth radio is off by default. The following modes are available:
Suspend When the LEX L10ig goes into suspend mode, the Bluetooth radio stays on. Airplane Mode When the LEX L10ig is placed in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio turns off. When Airplane Mode is disabled, the Bluetooth radio returns to the prior state. When in Airplane Mode, the Bluetooth radio can be turned back on if desired. Send Feedback 137 MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless Bluetooth Radio Power for Android Turn off the Bluetooth radio to save power or if entering an area with radio restrictions (e.g., an airplane). When the radio is off, other Bluetooth devices cannot see or connect to the device. Turn on the Bluetooth radio to exchange information with other Bluetooth devices (within range). Communicate only with Bluetooth radios in close proximity. NOTICE: To achieve the best battery life, turn off radios when not in use. Enabling Bluetooth When and where to use: Use this procedure to enable Bluetooth. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Slide the Bluetooth switch to the ON position. also appears in the Status bar. 4 Tap
. Disabling Bluetooth Use this procedure to disable Bluetooth. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Slide the Bluetooth switch to the OFF position. 4 Tap
. Changing the Bluetooth Name By default, the LEX L10ig has a generic Bluetooth name that is visible to other devices when connected. When and where to use: Use this procedure to change the Bluetooth name. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. Bluetooth. 3 Tap 4 If Bluetooth is not on, slide the switch to the ON position. 5 Tap . 6 Tap Rename Phone. 7 Enter a name and tap Rename. 138 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 8: Wireless 8 Tap
. Selecting Profiles on a Bluetooth Device Some Bluetooth devices have multiple profiles for different connections. When and where to use: Use this procedure to select a profile on the Bluetooth device that connects to the LEX L10ig. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap
. 3 Tap Bluetooth. 4 In the AVAILABLE DEVICES list, tap 5 Under PROFILES, select a profile to use. next to the device name. 6 Tap
. Send Feedback 139 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A ADB and USB Driver Setup Chapter 9 ADB and USB Driver Setup This chapter describes how to set up the Android Debug Bridge (ADB) and USB driver for your Windows PC. The ADB and USB driver are required to perform Fastboot OS updates and to capture debug logs using ADB. They are also used to push files onto a device and for APK installation. Required Software and Hardware In order to install the ADB and USB driver, certain software and hardware requirements must be met. Hardware (one of the following)
- Windows PC running Window 8
- Windows PC running Window 7 32/64 bits
- Windows PC running Windows XP SP3 with Micro-B USB Cable Software
- LEX_L10ig.zip (contains ADB and USB drivers)
- Android SDK (adb utility) installation procedure available at the following link: https://
developer.android.com/sdk/installing/index.html?pkg=tools Installing USB Driver and ADB Prerequisites: Ensure all old USB drivers are removed before beginning this procedure. When and where to use: Use this procedure to install the USB driver and ADB. Procedure:
1 Insert the provided LEX L10ig ADB USB Driver CD into a CD or DVD drive. 2 Click the Start button and select Computer. Figure 85: Access Computer Send Feedback 141 MN002859A01-A Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup 3 Open the CD drive and copy LEX_L10ig.zip to your desktop. Figure 86: Access CD 4 Extract the LEX_L10ig.zip file copied on your desktop to C:\Program Files (x86) or any other location in your OS installation drive where you prefer to keep the driver, and then select OK. Figure 87: Select Destination 5 Enable USB debugging in your device by:
a On the LEX L10ig, navigate to Settings About Phone and click the build number seven times to enable developer options. 142 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup b Tap to return to Settings; then, tap Developer options and click the checkbox for USB Debugging. c Click OK when prompted to allow USB debugging. 6 Configure the driver in the Device Manager. a On your computer, click the Start button and search for Device Manager and open it. Figure 88: Access Device Manager b Find Android under Other devices right-click and select Update Driver Software. Figure 89: Select Update Drive Software c Select Browse my computer for driver software. Send Feedback 143 MN002859A01-A Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup Figure 90: Select Browse my computer for driver software d Click Browse and select the folder where the driver was extracted (that is, C:\Program Files
(x86)\Lex L10ig_ADB_USB_Driver or the custom path chosen by you at the time of extracting the LEX_L10ig.zip file. e Click OK and then click Next. Figure 91: Select Installation Folder 144 Send Feedback f If prompted, select Install this driver software anyway. Figure 92: Select Install this driver software anyway MN002859A01-A Chapter 9: ADB and USB Driver Setup g Click Close to complete the installation. Figure 93: Close the Installation The driver is now installed. 7 Set up the ADB USB profile on your PC as follow-up with these steps:
a After driver installation, make sure there is a .android folder in your user profile directory. b If you have installed and run ADB for the device before, run adb kill- server before you can use the ADB. c To see if ADB installs successfully, run adb devices from the command line. Send Feedback 145 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A Accessories Chapter 10 Accessories This chapter provides information for using the accessories associated with the LEX L10ig. Accessories This section lists the LEX L10ig accessories along with specifications. LEX L10ig General Accessories:
Replaceable Standard Battery Li Ion 2340 mAh 3.7V Replaceable High-capacity Battery Pack Li Ion 4680 mAh 3.7V Handheld Standard Battery Door Handheld Extended Battery Door LEX L10ig Auto Charge (Vehicle Power Adapter) Power Supply Carry Accessory Glove LEX L10ig Rubber Sleeve Desktop Cradle Vehicle Cradle USB Cable Holster USB Cable A USB cable is necessary to connect your LEX L10ig to a charger. The USB cable:
Connects the LEX L10ig to a USB charger to charge the LEX L10ig. Provides USB communication with a host computer. When the LEX L10ig is connected to a host computer, the LEX L10ig appears as a removable disk on the host computer. Figure 94: USB Cable Send Feedback 147 MN002859A01-A Chapter 10: Accessories Desktop Cradle A desktop cradle provides an alternative method to charge your LEX L10ig. The desktop cradle:
Provides power for charging and operating the LEX L10ig Enables connecting a mouse to the LEX L10ig Figure 95: Desktop Cradle Charging the LEX L10ig To charge the LEX L10ig, insert the LEX L10ig units by placing the bottom of the LEX L10ig, at a slight forward angle, into the cradle. The LED of the LEX L10ig, shows the status of the battery charging. See Battery Charge LED Status for charging status indications. The 2280 mAh battery charges in approximately four hours. Charge the LEX L10ig units in temperatures from 0C to +45C (32F to 113F) ). Note that charging is intelligently controlled by the LEX L10ig. To accomplish this, for small periods of time, the LEX L10ig alternately enables and disables battery charging to keep the battery at acceptable temperatures. The LEX L10ig indicates when charging is disabled due to abnormal temperatures via its notification LED. Vehicle Cradle Install the vehicle mount on the surface of the vehicle that is reasonably flat and free of dirt and oil. Clean the mounting surface with a glass cleaner and a clean cotton cloth. Install the vehicle mount on the windshield or other flat car surface. CAUTION: Some states prohibit the mounting of any electronic device in any location on the vehicle dashboard. Be sure to check with local laws acceptable mounting areas before installing the auto mounting kit. Figure 96: Vehicle Cradle 148 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 10: Accessories Holster Use the holster to securely carry the LEX L10ig when working. The holster is threaded through a belt and stores the LEX L10ig when not in use or when using a headset. Figure 97: Holster Insert the LEX L10ig into the holster with the screen facing in or out. Send Feedback 149 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A Maintenance and Troubleshooting Chapter 11 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing the LEX L10ig. It also provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during LEX L10ig operation. Maintaining the LEX L10ig For trouble-free service, observe the following tips when using the LEX L10ig:
Do not scratch or use a pen or a pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the screen. The touch-sensitive screen is made of polycarbonate. Do not to drop or subject the device to strong impact. Protect from extreme temperatures. Do not leave device on the dashboard of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from heat sources. Do not store in any location that is dusty, damp, or wet. Use a soft lens cloth to clean the device. If the surface of the screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol. Periodically replace the rechargeable battery to ensure maximum battery life and product performance. Battery life depends on individual usage patterns. Battery Safety Guidelines Adhere to the following guidelines for battery safety:
The area where the units are charged should be clear of debris and combustible materials or chemicals. Follow battery usage, storage, and charging guidelines found in this guide. To charge the battery, the battery and charger temperatures must be between +32 F and +113 F Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other hazard.
(0 C and +45 C) Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Use of an incompatible battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If you have any questions about the compatibility of a battery or a charger, contact Motorola Solution support. If charging through a USB port, the device shall only be connected to products that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the USB-IF compliance program. To enable authentication of an approved battery, as required by IEEE1725 clause 10.2.1, all batteries will carry a Motorola hologram. Do not fit any battery without checking it has the Motorola authentication hologram. Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture, or shred. Severe impact from dropping any battery-operated device on a hard surface could cause the battery to overheat. Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids, or expose to fire, explosion, or other hazard. Do not leave or store the equipment in or near areas that might get very hot, such as in a parked vehicle or near a radiator or other heat source. Do not place battery into a microwave oven or dryer. Send Feedback 151 MN002859A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Battery usage by children should be supervised. Follow local regulations to properly dispose of used rechargeable batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in fire. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area with large amounts of water and seek medical advice. If you suspect damage to your equipment or battery, contact Motorola Solutions support to arrange for inspection. Cleaning Guidelines This section includes cleaning guidelines for the LEX L10ig. WARNING: Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, unplug the device and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines. Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, unplug the device and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines. CAUTION:
Always wear eye protection. Read the warning labels on compressed air and alcohol products before use. If you have to use any other solution for medical reasons, contact Motorola Solutions for more information. Approved Cleanser Active Ingredients 100% of the active ingredients in any cleaner must consist of one or a combination of the following:
isopropyl alcohol, or mild dish soap. Cleaning Instructions Do not apply liquids directly to the device. Dampen a soft cloth or use pre-moistened wipes. Do not wrap the device in the cloth or wipe, but gently wipe the unit Harmful Ingredients Many vinyl gloves contain phthalate additives, which are often not recommended for medical use and are known to be harmful to the housing of the device. The device should not be handled while wearing vinyl gloves containing phthalates, or before hands are washed to remove contaminant residue after gloves are removed. If products containing the harmful ingredients are used before handling the device, such as hand sanitizers containing ethanolamine, hands must be completely dry before handling the device to prevent damage to the plastics. Cleaning Materials Required Alcohol wipes Lens tissue Cotton-tipped applicators Can of compressed air with a tube Isopropyl alcohol 152 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Cleaning Frequency The cleaning frequency is up to your discretion due to the varied environments in which the mobile devices are used. They may be cleaned as frequently as required, but it is advisable to clean the camera window periodically when used in dirty environments to ensure optimum performance. Cleaning the LEX L10ig This section includes instructions on how the LEX L10ig should be cleaned. Housing Using the alcohol wipes, wipe the housing including buttons. Display The display can be wiped down with the alcohol wipes, but care should be taken not to allow any pooling of liquid around the edges of the display. Immediately dry the display with a soft, non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking. Camera Window Wipe the camera window periodically with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as eyeglasses. Cleaning the Interface Connector When and where to use: Use this procedure To clean the contacts of the interface connector on LEX L10ig. Procedure:
1 Power off the LEX L10ig. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator along the contacts of the interface connector. Slowly move the applicator back-and-forth from one side of the connector to the other. 4 If grease and other dirt can be found on other areas of the cradle, remove using a lint-free cloth and alcohol. 5 Allow few minutes (depending on ambient temperature and humidity) for the alcohol to air dry before powering on the LEX L10ig. Cleaning the Battery Contacts When and where to use: Perform this procedure to clean the battery connectors. Procedure:
1 Remove the main battery from LEX L10ig. 2 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol. 3 Gently, rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the contacts. Do not leave any cotton residue on the contacts. 4 Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the contacts area. Send Feedback 153 MN002859A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 5 Use a dry cotton-tipped applicator and repeat steps 4 and 5 at least three times. CAUTION: Do not point nozzle at yourself and others. Ensure that the nozzle or tube is away from your face. 6 Spray compressed air on the connector area by pointing the tube/nozzle about inch away from the surface. 7 Inspect the area for any grease or dirt, repeat if required. Troubleshooting This section lists common problems and solutions to fix the problems. Table 9: Troubleshooting the LEX L10ig Problem After pressing the Power button, does not turn on. Cause Battery is completely discharged. Battery not installed properly. Power button not held down long enough. Device not responding. Battery charge level is very low. Solution Re-charge or replace the battery. Install the battery properly. See Installing the Battery. Press the Power button until the Motorola Solutions splash screen is displayed. Reset the device. Re-charge or replace the battery. Battery is de-
pleted but is charging. The device is at an ex-
tremely low-
power state. Battery failed. Device was removed from power while battery Press and hold the Power button to turn on. Charge the device for a few minutes. The LED changes to flashing green then press the Power button to turn on the LEX L10ig. If LED continuously blinks red, check power connections. Disconnect and reconnect connections. Replace battery. If the device still does not operate, per-
form a hardware reset. Insert device in cradle or attach Charge Cable. The 2280 mAh battery fully charges in approximately four hours. Table continued Send Feedback After pressing the Power button, the device does not turn on but a charge battery icon Appears. After connecting the device to a Ca-
ble, a battery charging icon Ap-
pears. When charging, the LED slowly blinks red. Battery did not charge. 154 Cause was charg-
ing. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Device re-
moved from USB cable or disconnected from host computer during com-
munication. Incorrect ca-
ble configura-
tion. Wi-Fi radio is not on. You moved out of range of an access point. Bluetooth ra-
dio is not on. You moved out of range of another Bluetooth de-
vice. You are in an area of poor cellular serv-
ice. VPN is not set up cor-
rectly. SIM card not installed properly. Data plan not activated. Volume set-
ting is low or turned off. Device is in-
active. Problem During data com-
munication with a host computer, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. During data com-
munication over Wi-
Fi, no data trans-
mitted, or transmit-
ted data was in-
complete. During data com-
munication over Bluetooth, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. During data com-
munication over Public / Private, no data transmitted, or transmitted data was incomplete. No sound. Device turns off. Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Solution Battery does not charge if ambient temperature is below 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Reattach the communication cable and re-transmit. See technical support. Turn on the Wi-Fi radio. Move closer to an access point. Turn on the Bluetooth radio. Move without 10 m (32.8 ft.) of the other device. Move into an area that has better service. See technical support for VPN setup information. Remove and re-install the SIM cards. Contact your service provider and ensure that your data plan is enabled. Adjust the volume. The display turns off after a period of inactivity. Set this pe-
riod to 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 5, 10, or 30 minutes. Table continued 155 MN002859A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Problem A message ap-
pears stating not enough storage memory. Device cannot find any Bluetooth devi-
ces nearby. Cause Battery is de-
pleted. Extreme bat-
tery tempera-
ture. Too many applications installed on the device. Too far from other Blue-
tooth devi-
ces. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) near-
by are not turned on. The Blue-
tooth de-
vice(s) are not in discov-
erable mode. Solution Recharge or replace the battery. Move device to an area where the ambient temperature is between 0 C (32 F) or above 45 C (113 F). Remove user-installed applications on the device to recov-
er memory. Select Select the unused programs and tap Uninstall. Move closer to the other Bluetooth device(s), within a range of 10 meters (32.8 feet). Apps Downloaded. Turn on the Bluetooth device(s) to find. Set the Bluetooth device(s) to discoverable mode. If need-
ed, refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device (accesso-
ry) user manual.. Backing Up the LEX L10ig Backing up the LEX L10ig must be done manually. Prerequisites: A USB cable to connect the LEX L10ig to a computer. When and where to use: Use this procedure anytime a backup of the LEX L10ig is necessary. Procedure:
1 Connect the LEX L10ig to a computer using the supplied USB cable. The first time you connect to a computer the following message is displayed:
Installing Device Driver Software After the driver software is installed, the following message is displayed:
Your device is ready to use 2 Click the Start button and then select Computer. 3 Select the LEX L10ig Portable Device. 4 Select Internal storage. 5 Navigate to the files that you want to back up. 6 Copy the files/folders to a secure location on your computer. 156 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Backing up Contacts To back up contacts, the contacts must be exported to a VCF file which must be copied to a secure location. Prerequisites: Contacts must exist in the contact list. When and where to use: Use this procedure to periodically back up your contacts. Procedure:
1 From the Home screen, tap
. 2 Tap . Figure 98: Contacts Menu 3 Select Import/export. Send Feedback 157 MN002859A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Figure 99: Import/Export Contacts Popup 4 Select Export to storage. Figure 100: Export Confirmation Popup 158 Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 11: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 5 Tap OK to export the contacts. The VCF file is saved to the location indicated. 6 Follow the procedure under Backing Up the LEX L10ig on page 156 to complete the contacts backup. Resetting the LEX L10ig Use this procedure to reset the LEX L10ig. When and where to use: If the LEX L10ig does not operate properly, perform the following procedure. Procedure:
1 Power off and on the LEX L10ig and verify if the problem is gone. The LEX L10ig restarts. If the problem remains, perform Step 2. CAUTION: To avoid erasing important data from your LEX L10ig, do not press any of the LEX L10ig buttons during power up. 2 Remove the battery, reinsert it, and verify if the problem is gone. The LEX L10ig restarts. If the problem remains, perform factory data reset. Performing Factory Data Reset A factory data reset is a software restore of the LEX L10ig to its original manufacturer settings. Before resetting the LEX L10ig, back up your data. Factory data reset erases all your personal data from the LEX L10ig memory and microSD card including: configuration, contents, accounts, installed applications, user settings, music, photos, videos, installed licenses, pre-loaded application updates, DM bootstrapping data, integrated and pre-loaded application configuration, post-loaded applications and user passwords. After reset is performed, re-enter your backed up information. When and where to use: Use this procedure to perform factory data reset:
CAUTION: Factory data reset is performed only by technical support as a last resort when the LEX L10ig fails to operate. Before performing factory data reset, remove the SIM and microSD cards from the LEX L10ig. Performing factory data reset with a microSD or SIM cards installed may cause data corruption or loss. NOTICE: Factory data reset configures the LEX L10ig to public communication only. To return to combined Public and Private configuration, see your technical support. The last updated firmware and the initial version of pre-loaded applications are preserved through a reset to factory defaults. Procedure:
1 Tap
. 2 Tap 3 Tap Backup & reset. 4 Tap Factory data reset. The LEX L10ig powers off, powers on, then the system recovery screen appears. Send Feedback 159 This page intentionally left blank. MN002859A01-A Technical Specifications Chapter 12 Technical Specifications The following table summarizes the LEX L10ig operating, environment, and technical hardware specifications. Table 10: Technical Specifications Item Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) Specification 5.62 x 2.85 x 0.547 in 143 x 72.6 x 15 mm Weight Durability Display Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Hardware Processor Display Memory Camera Sensors Send Feedback 195 g (6.88 Oz) including standard battery Continues to run after multiple drops to concrete from a height of 48 inches (121 cm) Drop tested using MIL-STD-810G Method 516.6, Procedure IV IP67 (1 meter water immersion for 30 minutes) 4.7 720p HD (720 x 1280) Capacitive touch screen 14F to 131F (-10C to +55C)
-22F to 149F (-30C to +65C) 2.3 GHz Quad Core Processor Qualcomm MSM8974AA 4.7 720p HD (720X1280) Capacitive, touch screen 2 GB RAM 16 GB eMMC Expandable to 64GB with microSD card Rear 8MP Camera Auto Focus High-Output LED Flash Digital Zoom Front 2MP Camera Proximity Sensor Ambient Light Sensor Accelerometer Sensor Table continued 161 MN002859A01-A Chapter 12: Technical Specifications Item Ports Battery Software Operating System User Interface Messaging Web 4G/LTE Release Band Class Output Power Bandwidth 3G Standards Bands 2G Standards Frequencies Wi-Fi Operating Band Standards Personal Area Networks Bluetooth GPS 162 Specification Barometer Sensor E-Compass USB 2.0 High-Speed 3.5 mm Audio Jack (stereo) Accessory/Charging Port Standard - 2340 mAH, Li Ion High Capacity - 4680 mAh, Li Ion Android KitKat 4.4.4 Public Safety Experience (PSX) Software SMS/MMS Email (Corporate Sync, POP3, IMAP, Push Email) Standard AOSP Browser 3GPP Release 9 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 20, 26, 28 23 dBm +/- 2 dB (UE power class 3) Up to 20 MHz Broadband data throughput depends on network conditions HSPA +/-UMTS 1,2,4,5,8 GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 1900 MHz 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz 802.11 a/b/g/n Bluetooth 4.0 Low Energy (LE) + Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) Mission Critical Wireless Bluetooth Max throughput 2.1 Mbps A2DP Stereo Profile Table continued Send Feedback MN002859A01-A Chapter 12: Technical Specifications Item Location Services Specification Standalone GPS Assisted GPS (aGPS) Device Management Remote Management and Configuration Video and Imaging Supported Formats Supports OMA-DM (Open Mobile Alliance Device Management) H.263, H.264, MPEG-4 SP, VP8, JPEG (.jpg), GIF (.gif), PNG (.png), BMP (.bmp), WebP (.webp) Formats supported for playback, streaming and recording Supported File Types Video Recording Quality 3GPP (.3gp), MPEG-4 (.mp4), WebM (.webm), (.mkv) 1080p HD up to 30 frames per second (fps) NOTICE: Video and images are time stamped for evidence documentation. Audio Supported Formats Supported File Types Output MP3, WAVE, AAC, AMR-NB, AMR-WB, FLAC, MIDI, Vorbis MP3 (.mp3), WAVE (.wav), 3GPP (.3gp), MPEG-4 (.mp4, m4a), ATDS raw AAC (.aac), MPEG-TS (.ts) FLAC (.flac), MIDI (.mid, .xmf, .mxmf), RTTTL/RTX (.rtttl, rtx), OTA (.ota), iMelody (imy), Ogg (.ogg), Matroska
(.mkv) Dual 1 Watt Front-Facing Speakers, 106 dB Sound Pressure Level (SPL) 3.5 mm audio jack (stereo) Bluetooth (A2DP stereo) Triple Noise and Echo Cancelling Microphones Input Quick Access Leather Holster Dimensions (H x W x D) 5.7 x 3.5 x 2.0 in
(145 x 90 x 50 mm) Specifications subject to change. Table 11: General Accessories Item Physical Dimensions (H x W x D) Send Feedback Desktop Cradle Impact-Rated Vehicle Cradle 6.0 x 5.0 x 3.5 in (152 x 128 x 89 mm) 6.1 x 3.0 x 2.2 in (155 x 76 x 56 mm) Table continued 163 MN002859A01-A Chapter 12: Technical Specifications Item Weight Environmental Specification Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Durability Salt Fog Vibration Drop Shock (Functional) Shock (Crash Hazard) ESD Solar Radiation Liquid Resistance Safety Regulatory Electrical Safety EMI/RFI ANSI C63.4 2009 Flammability Electrical Power Supply Power Input DC Output Power On Optional Accessories Vehicle Ram Mount Kit Specifications subject to change. Desktop Cradle 12.8 Oz (363 g) Impact-Rated Vehicle Cradle 4.8 Oz (135 g) 32F to 113F (0C to +45C)
-40 F to 158F (-40C to 70C) 95% at 113F (45C) for 8 hours (non-condensing)
-4F to 131F (-20C to +55C)
-40 F to 185F (-40C to
+85C) 95% at 131F (55C) for 8 hours (non-condensing) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes US: UL60950 FCC part 15, Subpart B, Class B28a FCC part 15, Subpart B, Class B28b ANSI/UL-94 and ASTM Stand-
ards External power supply input 100- 240VAC output 5.0VDC 1.2A 5.0 VDC, 1.2A 5.0VDC With device insertion Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes, MIL-STD-810G, 75G im-
pact Yes Yes Yes US: UL60950 ANSI/UL-94 and ASTM Stand-
ards 12V-24V, 5.0VDC, 1.2A 5.0 VDC, 1.2A 5.0VDC With device insertion 164 Send Feedback
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual Statments | Users Manual | 205.52 KiB |
LEX L10i/LEX L10ig MISSION CRITICAL HANDHELD FCC REGULATORY Motorola Solutions reserves the right to make changes to any product to improve reliability, function, or design. Motorola Solutions does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein. No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any patent right or patent, covering or relating to any combination, system, apparatus, machine, material, method, or process in which Motorola Solutions products might be used. An implied license exists only for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Motorola Solutions products. Warranty For the complete Motorola hardware product warranty statement, go to:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com/warranty. Service Information If you have a problem using the equipment, contact your facilitys Technical or Systems Support. If there is a problem with the equipment, they will contact the Motorola Solutions Global Customer Support at: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/support. For the latest version of this guide go to: http://supportcentral.motorolasolutiuons.com. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1301 E. Algonquin Rd. Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. http://www.motorolasolutions.com MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Regulatory Information This device is approved under Motorola Solutions, Inc. This guide applies to Model Number LEX L10i/LEX L10ig. All Motorola Solutions devices are designed to be compliant with rules and regulations in locations they are sold and will be labeled as required. Local language translations are available at the following website:
http://supportcentral.motorolasolutions.com. Any changes or modifications to Motorola Solutions equipment, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION Only use Motorola approved accessories, battery packs and battery chargers. Do NOT attempt to charge damp/wet handheld device or batteries. All components must be dry before connecting to an external power source. Declared maximum operating temperature: 14F to 131F (-10C to +55C). Bluetooth Wireless Technology This is an approved Bluetooth product. For more information or to view End Product Listing, please visit https://www.bluetooth.org/tpg/
listings.cfm. Wireless Device Country Approvals Regulatory markings, subject to certification, are applied to the device signifying that the radio(s) is/are approved for use in the US. Operation of the device without regulatory approval is illegal. Ad-Hoc Operation (5GHz Band) Ad-Hoc operation is restricted in this device. Frequency of Operation FCC 5GHz Only The UNII (Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure) band 2c
(5600-5650 MHz ) is not supported in this device. 2.4 GHz Only The available channels for 802.11 b/g operation in the US are Channels 1 to 11. The range of channels is limited by firmware. Health and Safety Recommendations Ergonomic Recommendations CAUTION In order to avoid or minimize the potential risk of ergonomic injury follow the recommendations below. Consult with your local Health & Safety Manager to ensure that you are adhering to your company's safety programs to prevent employee injury. Reduce or eliminate repetitive motion Maintain a natural position Reduce or eliminate excessive force Keep objects that are used frequently within easy reach Perform tasks at correct heights Reduce or eliminate vibration Reduce or eliminate direct pressure Provide adjustable workstations Provide adequate clearance Provide a suitable working environment Improve work procedures Vehicle Installation RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles (including safety systems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. An air bag inflates with great force. DO NOT place objects, including either installed or portable wireless equipment, in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.Position your device within easy reach. Be able to access your device without removing your eyes from the road.Note:
Connection to an alert device that will cause a vehicle horn to sound or lights to flash, on receipt of a call on public roads, is not permitted. IMPORTANT: Before installing or using, check state and local laws regarding windshield mounting and use of equipment. For safe installation:
Do not put your phone in a location that obstructs the drivers vision or interferes with the operation of the Vehicle. Do not cover an airbag. Safety on the Road Do not take notes or use the device while driving. Jotting down a "to do" list or flipping through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibility, driving safely. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility - Give full attention to driving. Check the laws and regulations on the use of wireless devices in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. When using a wireless device behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the following tips:
1. Get to know your wireless device and any features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call without taking your attention off the road. 2. When available, use a hands free device. 3. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy traffic can be hazardous. 4. Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. 5. Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations that have the potential to divert your attention from the road. 6. Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial the Emergency services, (9-1-1) or other local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident or medical emergencies. Remember, it is a free call on your wireless phone! The call can be made regardless of any security codes and depending on a network, with or without a SIM card inserted. 7. Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call the Emergency Services, (9-1-1) or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you. 8. Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-
emergency wireless number. The wireless industry reminds you to use your device / phone safely when driving. Warnings for Use of Wireless Devices Please observe all warning notices with regard to the usage of wireless devices. Potentially Hazardous Atmospheres - Vehicles Use You are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio devices in fuel depots, chemical plants etc. and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles (such as grain, dust, or metal powders) and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Safety in Aircraft Switch off your wireless device whenever you are instructed to do so by airport or airline staff. If your device offers a 'flight mode' or similar feature, consult airline staff as to its use in flight. Safety in Hospitals Wireless devices transmit radio frequency energy and may affect medical electrical equipment. Wireless devices should be switched off wherever you are requested to do so in hospitals, clinics or healthcare facilities. These requests are designed to prevent possible interference with sensitive medical equipment. Medical Devices Pacemakers, Defibrillators or other Implanted Medical Devices Persons with pacemakers, Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators
(ICDs) or other active implantable medical devices (AIMD) should:
Consult with their physicians regarding the potential risk of interference from radio frequency transmitters, such as portable
(poorly shielded medical devices may be more susceptible to interference). Turn Handheld off immediately if they have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Do not carry LEX L10i/LEX L10ig in a chest pocket or near the implantation site, and carry or use the radio on the opposite side of their body from the implantable device to minimize the potential for interference Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Acoustic Safety Exposure to loud noises from any source for extended periods of time may temporarily or permanently affect your hearing. The louder the volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing damage from loud noise is sometimes undetectable at first and can have a cumulative effect. To protect your hearing:
Use the lowest volume necessary to do your job. Turn up the volume only if you are in noisy surroundings. Turn down the volume before adding headset or earpiece. Limit the amount of time you use headsets or earpieces at high volume. When using the radio without a headset or earpiece, do not place the radio's speaker directly against your ear. RF Exposure Guidelines Safety Information Reducing RF Exposure - Use Properly Only operate the device in accordance with the instructions supplied. MN002919A01-A April 2016 1 2 3 Compliance with RF Exposure Standards Your device is designed and tested to comply with a number of national standards and guidelines (listed below) for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This device complies with the IEEE (FCC) limits for general population/uncontrolled environments. Your Motorola device complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:
United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR et seq. & FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 Phones (placed to ear or used with headset) Use only Motorola tested and approved belt-clips, holsters, and similar accessories to ensure FCC Compliance. The use of third-
party belt-clips, holsters, and similar accessories may not comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, and should be avoided. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for these model phones with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF emission guidelines. SAR information on these model phones is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/fccid. Co-located Statement To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement, the antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter/antenna except those already approved in this filing. Handheld Devices This device was tested for typical body-worn operation. Use only Motorola tested and approved belt-clips, holsters, and similar wearable accessories. The device can be operated inside a holster worn attached to a human body. If the device is used without a holster, maintain a 0.59 inch separation between the device and a human body. Power Supply Use ONLY a Motorola approved power supply with electrical ratings:
Output 5.0Vdc, min 1.2A, with a maximum ambient temperature of at least 122F (50C). Use of alternative power supply will invalidate any approvals given to this unit and may be dangerous. Batteries Battery Information Only use Motorola approved batteries. Motorola rechargeable battery packs are designed and constructed to the highest standards within the industry. However, there are limitations to how long a battery can operate or be stored before needing replacement. Many factors affect the actual life cycle of a battery pack, such as heat, cold, harsh environmental conditions and severe drops. When batteries are stored over six (6) months, some irreversible deterioration in overall battery quality may occur. Store batteries at half of full charge in a dry, cool place, removed from the equipment to prevent loss of capacity, rusting of metallic parts and electrolyte leakage. When storing batteries for one year or longer, the charge level should be verified at least once a year and charged to half of full charge. Replace the battery when a significant loss of run time is detected. Standard warranty period for all Motorola batteries is 30 days, regardless if the battery was purchased separately or included as part of the handheld device or bar code scanner. For more information on Motorola batteries, please visit: http:/
mysymbolcare.symbol.com/battery/batbasics1.html. Battery Safety Guidelines The area in which the units are charged should be clear of debris and combustible materials or chemicals. Particular care should be taken where the device is charged in a non commercial environment. Follow battery usage, storage, and charging guidelines found in Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion, or other the user's guide. hazard. To charge the handheld device battery, the battery and charger temperatures must be between +32F and +104F (0C and
+40C). Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Use of an incompatible battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If you have any questions about the compatibility of a battery or a charger, contact Motorola support. For devices that utilize a USB port as a charging source, the device shall only be connected to products that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the USB-IF compliance program. Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture, or shred. Severe impact from dropping any battery-operated device on a hard surface could cause the battery to overheat. Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic or conductive objects to contact the battery terminals. Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids, or expose to fire, explosion, or other hazard. Do not leave or store the equipment in or near areas that might get very hot, such as in a parked vehicle or near a radiator or other heat source. Do not place battery into a microwave oven or dryer. Battery usage by children should be supervised. Please follow local regulations to promptly dispose of used re-
chargeable batteries. Do not dispose of batteries in fire. Seek medical advice immediately if a battery has been swallowed. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area with large amounts of water and seek medical advice. If you suspect damage to your equipment or battery, contact Motorola support to arrange for inspection. Use with Hearing Aids When some wireless devices are used near some hearing devices
(hearing aids and cochlear implants), users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise, and wireless devices also vary in the amount of interference they generate. In the event of interference you may want to consult your hearing aid supplier to discuss solutions. The wireless telephone industry has developed ratings for some of their mobile phones, to assist hearing device users in finding phones that may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all phones have been rated. Motorola devices that are rated have the rating included on the Declaration of Conformity (DoC) at http://
www.motorolasolutions.com/doc. The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to use a rated phone successfully. Trying out the phone with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs. Radio Frequency Interference Requirements- FCC Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help Radio Transmitters (Part 15) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The use of 5 GHz WLAN's, for use in the US, have the following restrictions:
Notched Band 5.60 - 5.65 GHz Software Support Motorola Solutions wants to ensure that customers have the latest entitled software at the time of device purchase in order to keep the device operating at peak performance levels. To confirm that your Motorola device has the latest entitled software available at the time of purchase, visit http://www.motorolasolutions.com. Check for the latest software from Support > Products, or search for the device and select Support > Software Downloads. If your device does not have the latest entitled software as of your device purchase date, e-mail Motorola at entitlementservices@motorolasolutions.com and ensure you include the following essential device information:
Model number Serial number Proof of purchase Title of the software download you are requesting. If it is determined by Motorola that your device is entitled to the latest version of software, as of the date you purchased your device, you will receive an e-mail containing a link directing you to a Motorola Web site to download the appropriate software. 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure 6 of 6 | RF Exposure Info | 1.54 MiB |
FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 TESTING CERT # 2518.01 DECLARATION OF COMPLIANCE SAR ASSESSMENT Part 6 of 6 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Test Laboratory 8000 West Sunrise Blvd Fort Lauderdale, FL. 33322 Date of Report:
Report Revision:
04/15/2016 B Responsible Engineer:
Report Author:
Date/s Tested:
Manufacturer:
DUT Description:
Test TX mode(s):
Max. Power output:
Nominal Power:
Tx Frequency Bands:
Signaling type:
Model(s) Tested:
Model(s) Certified:
Serial Number(s):
Classification:
FCC ID:
Stephen C. Whalen (Principal Staff Engineer/Manager) Stephen C. Whalen (Principal Staff Engineer/Manager) Mac Elliott (Principle Staff Engineer) Jessica Zada (EME Engineer) LTE - 08/14/2015-08/26/2015, 09/16/2015 - 09/21/2015; GSM 07/09/2015-
07/15/2015 & 07/20/2015-07/22/2015; WCDMA 07/16/2015, 07/17/2015, 07/20/2015-07/22/2015 & 08/26/2015-08/28/2015; WLAN 07/29/2015-08/06/2015, 09/17/2015-09/21/2015, 10/20/2015 & 11/07/2015-11/09/2015 Motorola Solutions Inc. Mission Critical Handheld Portable GSM/GPRS, WCDMA, WLAN, LTE & BT Refer to Part 1 Table 3 Refer to Part 1, Table 3 GSM: B2, B3, B5 & B8; WCDMA: B1, B2, B4, B5 & B8; WLAN: 2.4GHz / 5GHz;
LTE; B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B20, B26 & B28 & BT TDMA, CDMA, LTE, DSSS, OFDM & FHSS LEX L10i LEX L10i 171PRQ0394, 171PRJ0703 & 171PRL0854 General Population/Uncontrolled AZ489FT7078; GSM (B2 & B5), WCDMA (B2, B4 & B5), LTE (B4, B5, B7, B26) WLAN & BT - This report contains results that are immaterial for FCC equipment approval, which are clearly identified. The test results clearly demonstrate compliance with FCC General Population/Uncontrolled RF Exposure limits of 1.6 W/kg averaged over 1 gram per the requirements of 47 CFR 2.1093(d). The 10 grams result is not applicable to FCC filing. The test results clearly demonstrate compliance with ICNIRP (1998) Guidelines for limiting exposure in time-varying electric, magnetic, and electromagnetic fields (up to 300 GHz), Health Physics 74, 494-522 RF Exposure limits of 2.0 W/kg averaged over 10grams of contiguous tissue. Based on the information and the testing results provided herein, the undersigned certifies that when used as stated in the operating instructions supplied, said product complies with the national and international reference standards and guidelines listed in section 4.0 of this report. This report shall not be reproduced without written approval from an officially designated representative of the Motorola Solutions Inc EME Laboratory. I attest to the accuracy of the data and assume full responsibility for the completeness of these measurements. This reporting format is consistent with the suggested guidelines of the TIA TSB-150 December 2004. The results and statements contained in this report pertain only to the device(s) evaluated. Deanna Zakharia EMS EME Lab Senior Resource Manager, Laboratory Director Approval Date: 4/18/2016 Certification Date: 11/30/2015 Certification No.: L1151175P Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 1 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Appendix H WLAN 2.4GHz and 5GHz This appendix includes the following SAR Measurement System Validation, System Verification, Tissue results and DUT Test Methodology / DUT Test Data / System Performance Scans / DUT Scans for model LEX10I. H.1 SAR Measurement System Validation and Verification Probe and dipole calibration certificates are included in appendices B & C respectively. H.1.1 System Validation The SAR measurement system was validated according to procedures in KDB 865664. The validation status summary Table is below. Dates Probe Calibration Point Probe SN 0723/2015 09/29/2015 08/05/2015 09/29/2015 05/13/2015 05/13/2015 05/14/2015 05/14/2015 05/14/2015 05/14/2015 05/12/2015 05/14/2015 05/15/2015 05/15/2015 05/15/2015 05/26/2015 05/26/2015 05/18/2015 05/18/2015 05/18/2015 05/18/2015 05/19/2015 05/19/2015 05/19/2015 05/19/2015 05/19/2015 05/19/2015 Body Head Body Head Body Head Body Head Body Head Body Head Body Head Body Head Body Head Body Head Body Head Body Head 2450 5200 5300 5500 5600 5800 2450 5200 5300 5500 5600 5800 3612 3612 Table H.1 Measured Tissue Parameters r CW 2.01 2.02 1.82 1.84 5.54 4.71 5.50 4.63 5.76 4.83 5.85 5.92 4.81 6.09 5.02 1.91 1.71 5.16 4.27 5.29 4.37 5.64 4.66 5.78 4.77 6.07 4.98 802.11 52.5 52.1 39.4 38.3 47.8 34.8 49.0 35.9 48.6 35.6 43.8 48.4 35.2 47.7 35.0 52.7 36.4 48.3 34.8 48.2 34.7 48.1 34.9 47.9 34.8 47.6 34.5 Sensitivity Validation Linearity Isotropy Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 2 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.1.2 System Verification System verification checks were conducted each day during the SAR assessment. The results are normalized to 1W. Appendix H.7 includes DASY plots for each day during the SAR assessment. The Table below summarizes the daily system check results used for the SAR assessment. Table H.2 System Check System Check Test Results when normalized to 1W Probe Serial #
Tissue Type Dipole Kit / Serial # Ref SAR @ 1W
(W/kg) FCC Body IEEE/IEC Head SPEAG D2450V2 /
703 51.30 +/- 10%
52.20 +/- 10%
FCC Body 73.30 +/- 10%
SPEAG D5GHz
(5200) V2 / 1022 IEEE/IEC Head 78.80 +/- 10%
3612 FCC Body 79.10 +/- 10%
SPEAG D5GHz
(5500) V2 / 1022 IEEE/IEC Head 82.80 +/- 10%
FCC Body SPEAG D5GHz
(5800) V2 / 1022 75.70 +/- 10%
IEEE/IEC Head 79.20 +/- 10%
Results Measured
(W/kg) 5.12 5.23 5.74 3.66 3.66 3.99 3.88 4.24 4.31 3.99 4.08 4.24 4.13 4.30 4.18 4.06 3.80 4.22 3.60 3.53 3.63 3.75 3.99 4.11 3.69
(W/kg) 51.20 52.30 57.40 73.20 73.20 79.80 77.60 84.80 86.20 79.80 81.60 84.80 82.60 86.00 83.60 81.20 76.00 84.40 72.00 70.60 72.60 75.00 79.80 82.20 73.80 Tested Date 09/17/2015 09/18/2015 09/17/2015 07/29/2015 07/30/2015 10/20/2015 11/07/2015 08/03/2015 09/21/2015 11/08/2015 11/09/2015 07/30/2015 07/31/2015 10/20/2015 11/07/2015 08/04/2015 11/08/2015 11/09/2015 07/31/2015 08/03/2015 10/20/2015 11/07/2015 08/04/2015 08/05/2015 11/08/2015 H.1.3 Equivalent Tissue Test Results Simulated tissue prepared for SAR measurements are measured daily and within 24 hours of SAR testing to verify that the tissue is within +/- 5% of target parameters for each tested channel. This measurement is done using the applicable equipment indicated in section 9.0. The table below summarizes the measured tissue parameters used for the SAR assessment. Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 3 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Table H.3 Frequency
(MHz) Tissue Type Conductivity Target (S/m) Dielectric Constant Target Conductivity Meas. (S/m) 2437 2450 5200 5280 5500 5560 FCC Body IEEE/IEC Head FCC Body IEEE/IEC Head 1.94
(1.84-2.03) 1.79
(1.70-1.88) 1.95
(1.85-2.05) 1.80
(1.71-1.89) 52.7
(47.4-58.0) 39.2
(35.3-43.1) 52.7
(47.4-58.0) 39.2
(35.3-43.1) FCC Body 5.30
(4.77-5.83) 49.0
(44.1-53.9) IEEE/IEC Head 4.66
(4.19-5.13) 36.0
(32.4-39.6) FCC Body 5.39
(4.85-5.93) 48.9
(44.0-53.8) IEEE/IEC Head 4.74
(4.27-5.21) 35.9
(32.3-39.5) FCC Body 5.65
(5.08-6.21) 48.6
(43.7-53.5) IEEE/IEC Head 4.97
(4.47-5.46) 35.7
(32.1-39.2) FCC Body 5.72
(5.15-6.29) 48.5
(43.7-53.4) IEEE/IEC Head 5.03
(4.53-5.53) 35.6
(32.0-39.1) 1.99 1.98 1.82 2.00 2.00 1.84 5.14 5.17 5.61 5.46 4.50 4.57 4.38 4.54 5.24 5.28 5.74 5.56 4.57 4.65 4.45 4.63 5.56 5.73 6.01 5.80 4.68 4.62 4.59 4.85 5.64 5.82 6.13 5.90 4.79 4.69 4.67 4.93 Dielectric Constant Meas. 51.8 51.4 Tested Date 09/17/2015 09/18/2015 40.8 51.8 51.3 40.8 47.6 48.3 49.1 46.5 36.1 35.3 33.6 35.1 47.4 48.1 49.0 46.4 35.9 35.1 33.5 35.0 47.8 47.6 48.4 46.0 35.3 35.0 33.2 34.6 47.7 47.5 48.2 45.9 35.2 34.9 33.1 34.5 09/17/2015 09/17/2015 09/18/2015 09/17/2015 07/29/2015 07/30/2015 10/20/2015 11/07/2015 08/03/2015 09/21/2015 11/08/2015 11/09/2015 07/29/2015 07/30/2015 10/20/2015 11/07/2015 08/03/2015 09/21/2015 11/08/2015 11/09/2015 07/30/2015 07/31/2015 10/20/2015 11/07/2015 08/04/2015 08/06/2015 11/08/2015 11/09/2015 07/30/2015 07/31/2015 10/20/2015 11/07/2015 08/04/2015 08/06/2015 11/08/2015 11/09/2015 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 4 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Table H.3 Cont. Frequency
(MHz) Tissue Type Conductivity Target (S/m) Dielectric Constant Target Conductivity Meas. (S/m) 5800 5825 FCC Body 6.00
(5.40-6.60) 48.2
(43.4-53.0) IEEE/IEC Head 5.27
(4.74-5.80) 35.3
(31.8-38.8) FCC Body 6.03
(5.43-6.63) 48.4
(43.5-53.2) IEEE/IEC Head 5.30
(4.77-5.83) 35.3
(31.7-38.8) 6.16 6.08 6.49 6.21 5.06 5.21 4.89 6.20 6.11 6.55 6.25 5.08 5.24 4.93 Dielectric Constant Meas. 47.1 47.2 47.3 45.5 34.9 35.3 32.6 47.0 47.2 47.3 45.4 34.8 35.3 32.6 Tested Date 07/31/2015 08/03/2015 10/20/2015 11/07/2015 08/04/2015 08/05/2015 11/08/2015 07/31/2015 08/03/2015 10/20/2015 11/07/2015 08/04/2015 08/05/2015 11/08/2015 H.2 DUT Test Methodology H.2.1 Measurements The DUT was configured using WLAN 802.11 per KDB 941225. H.2.2 DUT Configuration(s) The DUT is a portable device operational as described in section 6.0. This appendix is specific to WLAN 2.4GHz and 5GHz testing at the body, hotspot, and head using the offered accessories. The device is placed in the test positions as described below. Appendix D illustrates the DUT and offered accessories. Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 5 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.2.3 DUT Positioning Procedures The positioning of the device for each body location is described below and illustrated in Appendix D. Body The DUT was positioned in normal use configuration against the phantom with the offered body worn accessory. Hot Spot The DUT was positioned with its front, back, and edges of the device with transmitting antennas within 2.5cm from the edge separated 1.0 cm from the phantom. The DUT was also tested along the edge containing the WLAN /
BT antenna if the transmitting antenna was not within 2.5cm from that edge. Head The DUT was placed against the right and left heads of the SAM phantom in the cheek touch and tilt positions. H.3 Assessments at WLAN (802.11b/g/n) H.3.1 Output Power Data These power measurements were used to determine the necessary modes for SAR testing according to KDB 248227. Table H.4 Specified maximum conducted power (dBm) 802.11 Ch. BW (MHz) 2.4GHz b 20 13.5 g 20 13.5 n 20 13.5 Table H.5 Measured conducted power 802.11 b g n Ch. 1 6 11 1 6 11 1 6 11 Freq.
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 2412 2437 2462 2412 2437 2462 dBm 12.9 13.5 12.7 12.8 13.4 12.7 11.7 12.9 11.8 mW 19.5 22.4 18.6 19.1 21.9 18.6 14.8 19.5 15.1 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 6 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.3.2 Assessments at the Body Table below presents the data of the body assessment. SAR plot(s) are included in section H.8 for the bolded data. Table H.6 Assessments at the Body (802.11b) Cable Accessory Freq
(MHz) Assessment at body Initial Power
(mW) SAR Drift
(dB) Meas. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Meas. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) None None 2437 2437 22.4 22.4
-0.86 0.074 0.041 0.09 0.048 0.028 0.09 0.05 0.05 0.03 Assessment at the body extended battery None 2437 22.4 1.91 0.005 0.003 0.01 0.00 Antenna Pos. Battery Test position Carry Case Body Body Body HKLN4618A HKLN4618A back front HKLN4618A back Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended H.3.3 Assessment for hot spot mode Table below presents the data of the hot spot assessment. SAR plot(s) are included in section H.8 for the bolded data. Table H.7 Antenna Pos. Battery Test position Carry Case PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended Body Body Body Body Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Back of DUT @
Front of DUT @
1cm 1cm Right side of DUT @ 1cm Right side of DUT @ 1cm Assessments at the Body (802.11b) Cable Accessory Freq
(MHz) Assessment at body Initial Power
(mW) SAR Drift
(dB) Meas. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Meas. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) None None None 2437 2437 2437 22.4 22.4 22.4 0.03 0.39 0.11 0.057 0.030 0.046 0.023 0.111 0.053 0.06 0.05 0.11 0.03 0.02 0.05 Assessment at the body extended battery None 2437 22.4
-0.41 0.094 0.044 0.10 0.05 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 7 of 44 Run Number ErC-Ab-
150917-08 ErC-Ab-
150917-09 ErC-Ab-
150917-10 Run Number ErC-Ab-
150918-02 ErC-Ab-
150918-03 ErC-Ab-
150918-04 ErC-Ab-
150918-05 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.3.4 Assessments at the Head Table below presents the data of the head assessment. SAR plot(s) are included in section H.8 for the bolded data. Table H.8 Assessments at the Head (802.11b) Meas. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) Antenna Pos. Battery Test position Carry Case Cable Accessory Freq
(MHz) Initial Power
(mW) SAR Drift
(dB) Meas. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended Assessment at right ear REAR REAR LEAR LEAR Touch Tilt Touch Tilt None None 2437 2437 22.4 22.4 0.15 0.75 0.111 0.053 0.020 0.010 Assessment at left ear None None 2437 2437 22.4 22.4
-0.21 0.193 0.091
-0.01 0.037 0.019 0.11 0.02 0.20 0.04 0.05 0.01 0.10 0.02 Assessment at the head extended battery LEAR Touch None 2437 22.4
-0.70 0.196 0.093 0.23 0.11 Run Number ErC-Rear-
150917-02 ErC-Rear-
150917-03 ErC-Lear-
150917-04 ErC-Lear-
150917-05 ErC-Lear-
150917-06 H.4 Assessments at WLAN (802.11a/n) H.4.1 Output Power Data These power measurements were used to determine the necessary modes for SAR testing according to KDB 248227. Specified maximum conducted power (dBm) Table H.9 802.11 Ch. BW (MHz) U-NII-1
(5.15-5.25GHz) U-NII-2A
(5.25-5.35GHz) U-NII-2C
(5.47-5.725GHz)
(5.47-5.65GHz) U-NII-3
(5.725-5.85GHz)
(5.65-5.85GHz) 5.8GHz Same as U-NII-3 a 20 15.5 15.5 n 40 14.5 14.5 20 14.5 14.5 15.5 14.5 14.5 15.5 15.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 8 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Table H.10 Measured conducted power Band 802.11 Ch. BW U-NII-1
(5.15-5.25GHz) U-NII-2A
(5.25-5.35GHz) U-NII-2C
(5.47-5.725GHz)
(5.47-5.65GHz) U-NII-3
(5.725-5.85GHz)
(5.65-5.85GHz) 5.8GHz Same as U-NII-3 a n a n a n a n a n 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Ch. 36 40 44 48 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 52 56 60 64 100 112 116 128 100 112 116 128 132 149 165 132 149 165 132 149 165 132 149 165 Freq.
(MHz) 5180 5200 5220 5240 5180 5200 5220 5240 5260 5280 5300 5320 5260 5280 5300 5320 5500 5560 5580 5640 5500 5560 5580 5640 5660 5745 5825 5660 5745 5825 5660 5745 5825 5660 5745 5825 dBm 14.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 14.1 14.5 14.5 13.0 15.1 15.5 14.1 14.8 13.5 12.8 13.0 13.7 13.5 15.5 14.6 14.8 14.3 14.0 13.1 12.9 13.8 13.8 14.0 12.5 12.7 12.5 13.8 13.8 14.0 12.5 12.7 12.5 mW 25.1 31.6 31.6 31.6 25.7 28.2 28.2 20.0 32.4 35.5 25.7 30.2 22.4 19.1 20.0 23.4 22.4 35.5 28.8 30.2 26.9 25.1 20.4 19.5 24.0 24.0 25.1 17.8 18.6 17.8 24.0 24.0 25.1 17.8 18.6 17.8 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 9 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.4.2 Assessments at the Body Table below presents the data of the body assessment. SAR plot(s) are included in section H.8 for the bolded data. Table H.11 Antenna Pos. Battery Test position Carry Case Assessments at the Body (802.11a) Cable Freq
(MHz) Accessory Assessment at body - U-NII-2A Initial Power
(mW) SAR Drift
(dB) Meas. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Meas. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) None None 5280 5280 35.5 35.5
-0.49 0.015 0.006
-0.51 0.005 0.002 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.00 Assessment at the body extended battery None 5280 35.5 1.61 0.011 0.004 0.01 0.00 Assessment at body - U-NII-2C None None 5560 5560 35.5 35.5
-0.63 0.016 0.006
-0.49 0.005 0.001 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.00 Assessment at the body extended battery None 5560 35.5 0.26 0.001 0.000 0.00 0.00 Assessment at body - U-NII-3 None None 5825 5825 25.1 25.1 0.34 0.98 0.018 0.007 0.007 0.002 0.03 0.01 0.01 0.00 Assessment at the body extended battery None 5825 25.1 0.38 0.011 0.004 0.02 0.01 HKLN4618A HKLN4618A back front HKLN4618A back HKLN4618A HKLN4618A back front HKLN4618A back HKLN4618A HKLN4618A back front HKLN4618A back Run Number ErC-Ab-
150729-02 ErC-Ab-
150729-03 ErC-Ab-
150730-03 ErC-Ab-
150730-08 ErC-Ab-
150730-09 ErC-Ab-
150730-10 ErC-AB-
150731-07 ErC-AB-
150731-08 ErC-AB-
150731-09 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended Ant 3 Body Body Body Body Body Body Body Body Body Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 10 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.4.3 Assessment for hot spot mode Table below presents the data of the hot spot assessment. SAR plot(s) are included in section H.8 for the bolded data. Table H.12 Antenna Pos. Battery Test position Carry Case Assessments at the Body (802.11a) Cable Freq
(MHz) Accessory Assessment at body - U-NII-2A Initial Power
(mW) SAR Drift
(dB) Meas. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Meas. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) None None None 5280 5280 5280 35.5 35.5 32.6 0.01 0.080 0.029
-0.48 0.033 0.011 0.02 0.470 0.169 0.08 0.04 0.53 0.03 0.01 0.19 Assessment at the body extended battery None 5280 32.6
-0.01 0.363 0.121 0.41 0.14 Assessment at body - U-NII-2C None None None 5560 5560 5560 35.5 35.5 32.0
-0.05 0.130 0.048
-0.12 0.053 0.019
-0.10 0.369 0.121 0.14 0.06 0.44 0.05 0.02 0.14 Assessment at the body extended battery None 5560 32.0 0.07 0.497 0.169 0.57 0.19 Assessment at body - U-NII-3 None None None 5825 5825 5825 25.1 25.1 25.6
-0.02 0.145 0.055 0.47 0.027 0.010
-0.33 0.335 0.116 0.21 0.04 0.52 0.08 0.01 0.18 Assessment at the body extended battery None 5825 25.6
-0.05 0.304 0.100 0.44 0.15 Back of DUT @
Front of DUT @
1cm 1cm Right side of DUT @ 1cm Right side of DUT @ 1cm Back of DUT @
Front of DUT @
1cm 1cm Right side of DUT @ 1cm Right side of DUT @ 1cm Back of DUT @
Front of DUT @
1cm 1cm Right side of DUT @ 1cm Right side of DUT @ 1cm Run Number ErC-Ab-
150730-04 ErC-Ab-
150730-05 ErC-Ab-
151107-05 ErC-Ab-
151020-03 ErC-AB-
150731-03 ErC-AB-
150731-04 ErC-AB-
151020-04 ErC-AB-
151107-06 ErC-AB-
150731-10 ErC-AB-
150731-11 ErC-Ab-
151107-08 ErC-Ab-
151020-06 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended Ant 3 Body Body Body Body Body Body Body Body Body Body Body Body Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 11 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.4.4 Assessments at the Head Table below presents the data of the head assessment. SAR plot(s) are included in section H.8 for the bolded data. Table H.13 Assessments at the Head (802.11a) Antenna Pos. Battery Test position Carry Case Cable Freq
(MHz) Accessory Assessment at right ear - U-NII-2A Initial Power
(mW) SAR Drift
(dB) Meas. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) Meas. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) Max Calc. 1g-SAR
(mW/g) PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4475B Extended PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard REAR REAR LEAR LEAR Touch Tilt Touch Tilt None 5280 32.6 0.20 0.285 0.085 None Assessment at left ear - U-NII-2A 5280 35.5
-1.09 0.018 0.004 None None 5280 5280 32.6 35.5 0.05 0.06 0.276 0.079 0.027 0.007 Assessment at the head extended battery 0.32 0.02 0.31 0.03 REAR Touch None 5280 32.6 0.90 0.305 0.090 0.35 0.10 REAR REAR LEAR LEAR Touch Tilt Touch Tilt PMNN4475B Extended REAR Touch PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard PMNN4472B Standard REAR REAR LEAR LEAR Touch Tilt Touch Tilt Assessment at right ear - U-NII-2C None 5560 32.0 0.10 0.293 0.083 None Assessment at left ear - U-NII-2C 5560 35.5
-1.36 0.009 0.003 None None 5560 5560 32.0 35.5 0.07 0.274 0.081
-0.24 0.029 0.011 Assessment at the head extended battery 0.34 0.01 0.32 0.03 0.10 0.00 0.09 0.01 None Assessment at right ear - U-NII-3 5560 32.0 None 5825 25.6 None Assessment at left ear - U-NII-3 5825 25.1 None None 5825 5825 25.6 25.1
-0.05 0.308 0.094 0.36 0.11 0.32 0.15 0.10 0.39 0.282 0.080 0.013 0.005 0.232 0.080 0.037 0.011 0.41 0.02 0.33 0.05 0.12 0.01 0.12 0.02 PMNN4475B Extended Assessment at the head extended battery REAR Touch None 5825 25.6 1.42 0.215 0.064 0.31 0.09 Max Calc. 10g-
SAR
(mW/g) 0.10 0.01 0.09 0.01 Run Number ErC-Rear-
151108-04 ErC-Rear-
150803-06 ErC-Lear-
151108-07 ErC-Lear-
150803-08 ErC-Rear-
151109-04 ErC-Rear-
151108-05 ErC-Rear-
150804-04 ErC-Lear-
151108-08 ErC-Lear-
150806-04 ErC-Rear-
151109-05 ErC-Rear-
151108-06 ErC-Rear-
150804-10 ErC-Lear-
151108-09 ErC-Lear-
150804-12 ErC-Rear-
151108-10 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Ant 3 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 12 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.5 Results Summary Based on the test guidelines from section 4.0 and satisfying frequencies within FCC bands and Industry Canada Frequency bands, the highest Operational Maximum Calculated 1-
gram and 10-gram average SAR values found for this filing:
Designator DTS Frequency band
(MHz) 2.4GHz 5GHz Table H.14 Max Calc at Body
(W/kg) Max Calc at Hot Spot
(W/kg) Max Calc at Head
(W/kg) 1g-SAR 10g-SAR 1g-SAR 10g-SAR 1g-SAR 10g-SAR 0.09 0.03 0.05 0.01 0.11 0.57 0.05 0.19 0.23 0.41 0.11 0.12 The test results clearly demonstrate compliance with FCC General Population/Uncontrolled RF Exposure limits of 1.6 W/kg averaged over 1 gram per the requirements of 47 CFR 2.1093(d). The 10 grams result is not applicable to FCC filing. H.6 Variability Assessment Per the guidelines in KDB 865664 SAR variability assessment is not required because SAR results are below 0.8W/kg (General population). Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 13 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.7 System Verification Data Page 14 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 15 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 16 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 17 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 18 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 19 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 20 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 21 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 22 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 23 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 24 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 25 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 26 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 27 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 28 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 29 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 30 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 31 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 32 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 33 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 34 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 35 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 36 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 37 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Page 38 of 44 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 H.8 DUT Data Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 39 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 40 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 41 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 42 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 43 of 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Rev. 13.16 Page 44 of 44
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 354.11 KiB |
PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE TEST CONFIGURATION Conducted Emission Test WLAN 1 Conducted Emission Test 125kHz 2 Radiated Emission Test WLAN Above 1GHz 3 Radiated Emission Test WLAN Below 1GHz 4 Radiated Emission Test 125kHz 5 DFS Set UUT as Client without radar detection mode (Radar injected into Master) Radar UUT Master 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Setup Photos PCE | Test Setup Photos | 387.48 KiB |
FCC ID: AZ489FT7078
:
03360-RF-00016, 03360-RF-00096, 03360-RF-00017, 03360-RF-00018, 03360- RF-00097, 03360-RF-00098, 03360-RF-00099, 03360-RF-00100, 03360-RF-00019, 03360-RF-00020, 03360-RF-00021, 03360-RF-00022 FCC Test Setup Photo BT/BT LE/WLAN 2.4GHz/GSM/UMTS/LTE Report ID FCC ID Tested Model Test Date Issued Date Applicant Address Testing Lab
:
Lab Address :
Motorola Solution Malaysia Sdn Bhd Innoplex Plot 2A, Medan Bayan lepas, Mukim 12, S.W.D. 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia Nov 19, 2015 ~ Jan 22, 2016 29 Jan, 2016 LEX L10i AZ489FT7078
:
:
:
:
:
:
Motorola Penang Adv. Comm. Laboratory Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2, Bayan Lepas Technoplex Industrial Park, Mukim 12 S.W.D, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia. 772092 FCC Registration:
1 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Table of Contents 1. Pictures of Test Arrangements for BT/BT LE/WLAN 2.4GHz/GSM/UMTS/LTE ....................................... 3 Power Line Conducted Emission ............................................................................................................. 3 1.1. Power Line Conducted Emission - Photo Front View ............................................................................. 3 1.1.1. 1.1.2. Power Line Conducted Emission -Photo Side View ................................................................................ 4 2. Radiated Emission for BT/BT LE/WLAN 2.4GHz/GSM/UMTS/LTE .......................................................... 5 2.1.1. Radiated Emission - Photo Front View .................................................................................................... 5 2.1.2. Radiated Emission - Photo Rear View ..................................................................................................... 6 3. RF Conducted Emission .................................................................................................................................. 7 3.1.1. RF Conducted Emission ( GSM/UMTS/LTE ) ........................................................................................ 7 3.1.2. RF Conducted Emission (BT/BT LE/WLAN 2.4GHz) ........................................................................... 8 2 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 1. Pictures of Test Arrangements for BT/BT LE/WLAN 2.4GHz/GSM/UMTS/LTE 1.1. Power Line Conducted Emission 1.1.1. Power Line Conducted Emission - Photo Front View 3 1.1.2. Power Line Conducted Emission -Photo Side View FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 4 2. Radiated Emission for BT/BT LE/WLAN 2.4GHz/GSM/UMTS/LTE FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 2.1.1. Radiated Emission - Photo Front View 5 2.1.2. Radiated Emission - Photo Rear View FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 6 3. RF Conducted Emission FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 3.1.1. RF Conducted Emission ( GSM/UMTS/LTE ) 7 3.1.2. RF Conducted Emission (BT/BT LE/WLAN 2.4GHz) FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report WLAN 2.4G | Test Report | 2.73 MiB |
FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 FCC Test Report 2.4GHz WLAN Report ID:
03360-RF-00017 FCC ID
:
Tested Model
:
Test Date Issued Date Applicant Address
:
:
:
:
AZ489FT7078 LEX L10i Nov 19, 2015 ~ Jan 22, 2016 29 Jan, 2016 Motorola Solution Malaysia Sdn Bhd Innoplex Plot 2A, Medan Bayan lepas, Mukim 12, S.W.D. 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia Testing Lab
:
Motorola Penang Adv. Comm. Laboratory Lab Address :
Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2, Bayan Lepas Technoplex Industrial Park, Mukim 12 S.W.D, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia. FCC Registration:
772092 Prepare By: __________________________, Date: ___29 Jan, 2016______ Chan Choon Keet / Engineer / +6048503678 / choonkeet.chan@motorolasolutions.com Approved By: _________________________, Date: ___29 Jan, 2016______ Alex Goh / Senior Staff Engineer /+6042527292 / aikhong.goh@motorolasolutions.com 1 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Table of Contents 1. WIFI 2.4GHz Test ................................................................................................................................................ 4 1.0. Summary of Test Result ............................................................................................................................. 4 1.1. Measurement Uncertainty ......................................................................................................................... 4 1.2. Equipment List ........................................................................................................................................... 5 1.3. General Information .................................................................................................................................. 6 1.4. 1.5. Channel number and frequency info ......................................................................................................... 7 Test Mode Applicability and Test Channel Detail ...................................................................................... 7 2. Test Types and Results ..................................................................................................................................... 10 2.1. 6dB Channel Bandwidth ........................................................................................................................... 10 2.1.1. Test Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 10 2.1.2. Limits: ............................................................................................................................................... 10 2.1.3. Test Result ........................................................................................................................................ 10 2.2. Conducted RF Output Power ................................................................................................................... 20 2.2.1. Test Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 20 2.2.2. Limits: ............................................................................................................................................... 20 2.2.3. Test Result ........................................................................................................................................ 20 2.3. Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density .................................................................................................. 23 2.3.1. Test Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 23 2.3.2. Limits: ............................................................................................................................................... 23 2.3.3. Test Result ........................................................................................................................................ 23 2.4. Conducted Spurious Emission .................................................................................................................. 33 2.4.1. Test Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 33 2.4.2. Limits: ............................................................................................................................................... 33 2.4.3. Test Result ........................................................................................................................................ 33 2.5. Band edge Conducted Spurious Emission ................................................................................................ 48 2.5.1. Test Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 48 2.5.2. Limits: ............................................................................................................................................... 48 2.5.3. Test Results ...................................................................................................................................... 48 2.6. Radiated Emission within Restricted Bands ............................................................................................. 61 2 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.6.1. Test Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 61 2.6.2. Test Limits: ....................................................................................................................................... 62 2.6.3. Test Data: ......................................................................................................................................... 63 2.7. AC Powerline Conducted Emission .......................................................................................................... 72 2.7.1. Test Procedure ................................................................................................................................. 72 2.7.2. Test Limits: ....................................................................................................................................... 73 2.7.3. Test Data: ......................................................................................................................................... 74 3 1. WIFI 2.4GHz Test FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 1.0. Summary of Test Result Test Item FCC Clause 6dB Channel Bandwidth 15.247 (a)(2) Conducted RF Output Power (Peak) 15.247 (b)(3) 15.247 (e) Maximum Power Spectral Density Conducted Spurious Emissions 15.247 (b) Band edge Conducted Spurious 15.247 (d) Emission Radiated Emission within Restricted Bands AC Powerline Conducted Emission Antenna requirement 15.207 15.203 15.247 (d) 15.205, 15.209, Result Remark Pass Meet the requirement of limit Pass Meet the requirement of limit Pass Meet the requirement of limit Pass Meet the requirement of limit Pass Meet the requirement of limit Pass Meet the requirement of limit Pass Meet the requirement of limit Pass Internal antenna is not accessible to the end-user 1.1. Measurement Uncertainty Measurement Radiated Emissions up to 1 GHz Radiated Emissions above 1 GHz Frequency 30MHz ~ 200MHz 200MHz ~ 1000MHz 1GHz ~ 18GHz 18GHz ~ 25GHz Expended Uncertainty (k=1.96)
() 5.01 5.01 5.01 5.01 4 1.2. Equipment List FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 DESCRIPTION MODEL SERIAL NUMBER CALIBRATION CALIBRATION DUE DATE DATE 3117A00162 838495/014 MY45301089 92002651 566 361 2964 3121A02341 100336 100131 050806-1 NA NA 827769/009 101103 J2308 2863 12249289 25516 2642A02318 3107A04020 101268 81251757 100225 81251366 101039 BBHA9170143 6652A FSEK30 E4445A SH-641 SAS-571 PAM-0118P CBL6112B 6031A ESIB26 SMP04 SC104V FM2011 TLT2 ESIB26 FSV40 S800-HX CBL6112B TM320 CBL6112D 6033A 11947A ENV216V NNBM 8125 ESCI NNBM 8125 ENV216V BBHA9170 POWER SUPPLY SPECTRUM ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER CHAMBER DRG HORN FREQ. PREAMPLIFIER BILOG ANTENNA POWER SUPPLY EMI TEST RECEIVER MICROWAVE SIGNAL GENERATOR SYSTEM CONTROLLER TURNTABLE FLUSH MOUNT 2M ANTENNA POSITIONING TOWER TEST RECEIVER SIGNAL ANALYZER 5m Semi-anechoic Chamber BILOG ANTENNA DATA LOGGER BILOG ANTENNA SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY TRANSIENT LIMITER V-NETWORK 2-LINE LINE IMPEDANCE STAB.NETWORK EMI TEST RECEIVER LINE IMPEDANCE STAB.NETWORK V-NETWORK 2-LINE BROAD-BAND HORN ANTENNA 6-Mar-15 21-Oct-14 6-Sep-14 15-Mar-15 2-Aug-15 NA 23-Apr-14 12-Jun-14 17-Jun-15 25-Jun-15 NA NA NA 16-Jun-15 25-Jun-15 29-Apr-15 24-Jul-15 12-Apr-15 23-Apr-15 14-Apr-14 NA 18-Jun-15 23-Jun-14 19-Jun-15 24-Jun-14 18-Jun-15 24-Nov-15 6-Mar-16 21-Oct-16 6-Sep-16 15-Mar-16 2-Aug-16 NA 23-Apr-16 12-Jun-16 17-Jun-16 25-Jun-16 NA NA NA 16-Jun-16 25-Jun-16 29-Apr-16 24-Jul-16 12-Apr-16 23-Apr-16 14-Apr-16 NA 18-Jun-16 23-Jun-16 19-Jun-16 24-Jun-16 18-Jun-16 24-Nov-16 5 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 1.3. General Information General Description of EUT Product Brand Test Model Power Supply Rating Mode of operation Modulation Type Smart phone Motorola Solutions LEX L10i 3.7Vdc (Battery), 5Vdc (Adapter) Wireless LAN CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK for DSSS 64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, BPSK for OFDM Modulation Technology DSSS, OFDM Transfer Rate 802.11b: 11.0/5.5/2.0/1.0Mbps 802.11g: 54.0/48.0/36.0/24.0/18.0/12.0/9.0/6.0Mbps 802.11n: up to 72.2Mbps 2412~2462Mhz 11 20.630mW Inverted-L Monopole with 1.0dBi gain Coaxial connector with switch LEXL10-INT-D17 Rev A Operating Frequency Number of Channel Output Power Antenna Type Antenna Connector SW Version HW Version Note:
1. The EUT contains following accessory devices and data cable. Item Model or P/N Rechargeable Lithium ion battery MOTOROLA PMNN4472A Rechargeable Lithium ion battery MOTOROLA PMNN4475A Brand ITE Power Supply USB cable
(CABLE: LEX USB SYNC AND CHARGE) Holster MOTOROLA HKTN4009A N/A N/A CB000262A01 HKLN4618A
-
-
Specification 3.7Vdc, 2340mAh, 8.7Wh 3.7Vdc, 4560mAh, 16.9Wh I/P: 100-240Vac, 50-60Hz, 0.2A O/P: 5Vdc, 1.2A General Description of Applied Standards The EUT is a RF Product. According to the specifications of the manufacturer, it must comply with the requirements of the following standards:
FCC Part15, Subpart C (15.247) 558074 D01 DTS Meas Guidance v03r05 ANSI C63.10-2009 All test items have been performed and recorded as per the above standards. 6 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 1.4. Channel number and frequency info 11 Channels are provided for 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n (HT20) Channel Frequency Channel Frequency 1 2 3 4 5 6 2412 2417 2422 2427 2432 2437 7 8 9 10 11 2442 2447 2452 2457 2462 1.5. Test Mode Applicability and Test Channel Detail EUT Applicable to Description Configure PLC RE1G RE<1G Mode Where:
RE1G: Radiated Emission above 1GHz & Bandedge Measurement RE<1G: Radiated Emission below 1GHz PLC:Power Line Conducted Emission APCM:Antenna Port Conducted Measurement APCM
-
Note: The EUT had been pre-tested on the positioned of each 3 axis. The worst case was found when positioned on Z-plane Radiated Emission Test (Above 1GHz) Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. EUT Configure MODE 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n
(HT20) Available Channel 1 to 11 1 to 11 1 to 11 Tested Channel 1,6,11 1,6,11 1,6,11 Modulation Technology DSSS OFDM OFDM Modulation Type DBPSK BPSK BPSK Date Rate
(Mbps) 1 6 6.5 7 Mode
-
-
-
FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Radiated Emission Test (Below 1GHz) Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. EUT Configure Available Channel 1 to 11 1 to 11 1 to 11 Tested Channel 1,6,11 1,6,11 1,6,11 Modulation Technology DSSS OFDM OFDM Modulation Type DBPSK BPSK BPSK Data Rate
(Mbps) 1 6 6.5 Mode
-
-
-
MODE 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n
(HT20) Power Line Conducted Emission Test Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. EUT Configure Available Channel 1 to 11 Tested Channel AUTO Modulation Technology DSSS, OFDM Modulation Type AUTO Date Rate
(Mbps) AUTO MODE 802.11bgn mixed Mode Application Mode Antenna Port Conducted Measurement:
This item includes all test value of each mode, but only includes spectrum plot of worst value of each mode. Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. EUT Configure MODE 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n
(HT20) Available Channel 1 to 11 1 to 11 1 to 11 Tested Channel 1,6,11 1,6,11 1,6,11 Modulation Technology DSSS OFDM OFDM Modulation Type DQPSK BPSK BPSK Data Rate
(Mbps) 11 6 7.2 8 Mode
-
-
-
Test Condition:
FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Applicable To Environmental Conditions Input Power RE1G RE<1G PLC APCM 25C, 50% RH 25C, 50% RH 22.4C, 68.6% RH 25C, 50% RH 3.7V DC 3.7V DC 120V AC,240V AC 3.7V DC Tested By Nazrin/Qawiman Nazrin/Qawiman Madi/Rudy Jino Lim Duty Cycle of Test Signal 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n (HT20): Duty cycle of test signal is 100%. 9 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2. Test Types and Results 2.1. 6dB Channel Bandwidth 2.1.1. Test Procedure DUT Spectrum Analyzer a) Check and ensure the spectrum analyzer well calibrate. b) Turn on the DUT and set DUT to transmit maximum power. c) Connect DUTs antenna terminal to spectrum analyzer with a low loss cable. d) Setting of Spectrum analyzer :
a. RBW = 100 kHz b. VBW = 300 kHz c. Detector mode = Peak d. Trace = Max hold e. Sweep = auto e) Measure the freq different of two frequencies that were attenuated 6dB from peak of the emission &
record the frequency difference as the emission bandwidth. Limits:
2.1.2. Normal Condition (25 C) 500 kHz 2.1.3. Test Result 802.11 b Standard Modulation Type DSSS DSSS DSSS 802.11b 802.11b 802.11b Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) Test Frequency DQPSK DQPSK DQPSK 11 11 11
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 Results Bandwidth Status
(MHz) 8.845 8.460 8.103 Pass Pass Pass 10 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 6dB Bandwidth. 802.11b Frequency 2412 MHz 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 6dB Bandwidth. 802.11b Frequency 2437 MHz 12 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 6dB Bandwidth. 802.11b Frequency 2462 MHz 802.11 g Standard Modulation 802.11g 802.11g 802.11g Type OFDM OFDM OFDM Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) BPSK BPSK BPSK 6 6 6 Test Frequency Bandwidth Status Results
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462
(MHz) 16.367 15.942 15.739 Pass Pass Pass 13 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 6dB Bandwidth. 802.11g Frequency 2412 MHz 14 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 6dB Bandwidth. 802.11g Frequency 2437 MHz 15 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 6dB Bandwidth. 802.11g Frequency 2462 MHz 802.11n (HT20) Test Conditions Standard Modulation 802.11n 802.11n 802.11n Type OFDM OFDM OFDM Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) BPSK BPSK BPSK 7.2 7.2 7.2 Test Frequency Results Tx (MHz) Bandwidth Status 2412 2437 2462
(MHz) 17.569 17.423 16.865 Pass Pass Pass 16 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 6dB Bandwidth. 802.11n_20 Frequency 2412 MHz 17 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 6dB Bandwidth. 802.11n_20 Frequency 2437 MHz 18 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 6dB Bandwidth. 802.11n_20 Frequency 2462 MHz 19 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.2. Conducted RF Output Power 2.2.1. Test Procedure DUT Spectrum Analyzer a) Check and ensure the spectrum analyzer well calibrate. b) Turn on the DUT and set DUT to transmit maximum power. c) Connect DUTs antenna terminal to spectrum analyzer with a low loss cable. d) Setting of Spectrum analyzer :
a. Set the RBW = 1 MHz. b. Set the VBW [3 RBW]. c. Set the span [1.5 DTS bandwidth]. d. Detector = peak. e. Sweep time = auto couple. f. Trace mode = max hold. g. Allow trace to fully stabilize. e) Use the instruments band/channel power measurement function with the band limits set equal to the DTS bandwidth edges (for some instruments, this may require a manual override to select the peak detector). If the instrument does not have a band power function, then sum the spectrum levels (in linear power units) at intervals equal to the RBW extending across the DTS channel bandwidth. Limits:
2.2.2. Normal Condition (25 C) 1 Watt(30 dBm) 2.2.3. Test Result For Peak Power:
802.11b Standard Modulation Type DSSS DSSS DSSS 802.11b 802.11b 802.11b Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) Results Test Output Power Status Frequency
(dBm) DQPSK DQPSK DQPSK 11 11 11
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 18.740 19.254 18.285 Pass Pass Pass 20 802.11g Standard Modulation Type OFDM OFDM OFDM 802.11g 802.11g 802.11g 802.11n (HT20) FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) Results Test Output Power Status Frequency
(dBm) BPSK BPSK BPSK 6 6 6
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 19.438 19.732 19.354 Pass Pass Pass Standard Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) Results Test Output Power Status Frequency
(dBm) BPSK BPSK BPSK 7.2 7.2 7.2
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 19.418 19.597 19.540 Pass Pass Pass 802.11n 802.11n 802.11n OFDM OFDM OFDM For Average Power:
802.11b Standard Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) DSSS DSSS DSSS QPSK QPSK QPSK 11 11 11 Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) OFDM OFDM OFDM BPSK BPSK BPSK 6 6 6 802.11b 802.11b 802.11b 802.11g Standard 802.11g 802.11g 802.11g Test Frequency
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 Test Frequency
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 Results Output Power
(dBm) 12.547 13.145 12.694 Results Output Power
(dBm) 11.784 11.873 11.699 Status Pass Pass Pass Status Pass Pass Pass 21 802.11n (HT20) FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Standard 802.11n 802.11n 802.11n Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) OFDM OFDM OFDM BPSK BPSK BPSK 7.2 7.2 7.2 Test Frequency
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 Results Output Power
(dBm) 11.794 12.065 11.855 Status Pass Pass Pass 22 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.3. Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density 2.3.1. Test Procedure DUT Spectrum Analyzer a) Check and ensure the spectrum analyzer well calibrate. b) Turn on the DUT and set DUT to transmit maximum power. c) Connect DUTs antenna terminal to spectrum analyzer with a low loss cable. d) Setting of Spectrum analyzer :
a. Set analyzer center frequency to DTS channel center frequency. b. Set the span to 1.5 times the DTS bandwidth. c. Set the RBW to 3 kHz RBW 100 kHz. d. Set the VBW [3 RBW]. e. Detector = peak. f. Sweep time = auto couple. g. Trace mode = max hold. h. Allow trace to fully stabilize. i. Use the peak marker function to determine the maximum amplitude level within the j. RBW. If measured value exceeds requirement, then reduce RBW (but no less than 3 kHz) and repeat. e) Convert final result from (dBm/100kHz) (dBm/3kHz). f) Example of calculation :
Assume manual measured result is -6.2 dBm where DUT have duty cycle of 60%
= -6.2 dBm - (conversion factor)
= -6.2 dBm - (10*log(100/3))
= -6.2 dBm - (15.228 dB)
= -21.428dBm Limits:
2.3.2. Normal Condition (25 C) 8 dBm/3kHz 2.3.3. Test Result 23 802.11b FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Standard Modulation Type DSSS DSSS DSSS 802.11b 802.11b 802.11b Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) Test Power Power Status Frequency
(dBm/100kHz)
(dBm/3kHz) Results DQPSK DQPSK DQPSK 11 11 11
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 4.83 4.94 4.72
-10.40
-10.29
-10.51 Pass Pass Pass Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density. 802.11b Frequency 2412 MHz 24 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density. 802.11b Frequency 2437 MHz 25 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density. 802.11b Frequency 2462 MHz 802.11g Standard Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology 802.11g OFDM 802.11g OFDM 802.11g OFDM BPSK BPSK BPSK Results Data Rate
(mbps) 6 6 6 Test Frequency
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 Power Power
(dBm/100kHz)
(dBm/3kHz) Status 1.230 1.880 2.130
-13.998
-13.348
-13.098 Pass Pass Pass 26 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density. 802.11g Frequency 2412 MHz 27 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density. 802.11g Frequency 2437 MHz 28 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density. 802.11g Frequency 2462 MHz 802.11n (HT20) Standard Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) Test Power Results Power Status Frequency
(dBm/100kHz)
(dBm/3kHz) 802.11n OFDM 802.11n OFDM 802.11n OFDM BPSK BPSK BPSK
(MHz) 7.2 7.2 7.2 2412 2437 2462 0.430 1.420 1.950
-14.798
-13.808
-13.278 Pass Pass Pass 29 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density. 802.11n_20 Frequency 2412 MHz 30 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density. 802.11n_20 Frequency 2437 MHz 31 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Maximum Peak Power Spectral Density. 802.11n_20 Frequency 2462 MHz 32 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.4. Conducted Spurious Emission 2.4.1. Test Procedure DUT Spectrum Analyzer a) Check and ensure the spectrum analyzer well calibrate. b) Turn on the DUT and set DUT to transmit maximum power. c) Connect DUTs antenna terminal to spectrum analyzer with a low loss cable. d) Setting of Spectrum analyzer :
a. RBW = 100 kHz b. VBW = 300 kHz c. Detector mode = Peak d. Trace = Max Hold e. Sweep = auto e) Use the peak marker function to measure highest emission and scan up to 10th harmonic. 2.4.2. Limits:
Normal Condition (25 C) Shall be at least 20 dB below peak (max) power. 2.4.3. Test Result 802.11b Standard Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) 802.11b DSSS DQPSK 802.11b DSSS DQPSK 802.11b DSSS DQPSK 11 11 11 Test Frequency
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 Spurs
(MHz) Results Level
(dBm) Status 3356.713 14188.377 6603.206 3356.713 6993.988 14188.377 3356.713 14188.377 6993.988
-48.92
-49.71
-50.45
-48.69
-49.42
-49.47
-47.85
-49.53
-49.63 Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass 33 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2412 MHz Reference Level Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 1 GHz -> 5 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2412 Emission Level, 10 GHz -> 15 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 30 MHz -> 1 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 5 GHz -> 10 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 15 GHz -> 20 GHz 34 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 20 GHz -> 25 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2437 MHz Reference Level Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 1 GHz -> 5 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 30 MHz -> 1 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 5 GHz -> 10 GHz 35 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2437 Emission Level, 10 GHz -> 15 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 20 GHz -> 25 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2462 MHz Reference Level Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 15 GHz -> 20 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 30 MHz -> 1 GHz 36 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 1 GHz -> 5 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2462 Emission Level, 10 GHz -> 15 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 20 GHz -> 25 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 5 GHz -> 10 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11b, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 15 GHz -> 20 GHz 37 802.11g FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Standard Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) 802.11g OFDM BPSK 802.11g OFDM BPSK 802.11g OFDM BPSK 6 6 6 Test Frequency
(MHz) 2412 2437 2462 Spurs
(MHz) Results Level
(dBm) Status 3356.713 14188.377 12685.371 3356.713 6613.226 6733.467 3356.713 6713.427 14188.377
-43.27
-48.76
-49.69
-43.55
-49.30
-49.72
-41.92
-49.96
-50.26 Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2412 MHz Reference Level Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 30 MHz -> 1 GHz 38 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 5 GHz -> 10 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 15 GHz -> 20 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 1 GHz -> 5 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2412 Emission Level, 10 GHz -> 15 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 20 GHz -> 25 GHz 39 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2437 MHz Reference Level Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 1 GHz -> 5 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2437 Emission Level, 10 GHz -> 15 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 30 MHz -> 1 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 5 GHz -> 10 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 15 GHz -> 20 GHz 40 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 20 GHz -> 25 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2462 MHz Reference Level Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 1 GHz -> 5 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 30 MHz -> 1 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 5 GHz -> 10 GHz 41 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 15 GHz -> 20 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2462 Emission Level, 10 GHz -> 15 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11g, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 20 GHz -> 25 GHz 42 802.11n (HT20) FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Standard Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) Test Frequency
(MHz) 802.11n OFDM BPSK 7.2 2412 802.11n OFDM BPSK 7.2 2437 802.11n OFDM BPSK 7.2 2462 Spurs
(MHz) Results Level
(dBm) Status 3356.713 14188.377 6683.367 3356.713 14188.377 6993.988 3356.713 14188.377 6723.447
-44.27
-49.57
-49.85
-43.23
-49.06
-49.56
-43.32
-49.81
-50.26 Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Pass Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2412 MHz Reference Level Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 30 MHz -> 1 GHz 43 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 5 GHz -> 10 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 15 GHz -> 20 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 1 GHz -> 5 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2412 Emission Level, 10 GHz -> 15 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2412 MHz Emission Level, 20 GHz -> 25 GHz 44 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2437 MHz Reference Level Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 1 GHz -> 5 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2437 Emission Level, 10 GHz -> 15 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 30 MHz -> 1 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 5 GHz -> 10 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 15 GHz -> 20 GHz 45 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2437 MHz Emission Level, 20 GHz -> 25 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2462 MHz Reference Level Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 1 GHz -> 5 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 30 MHz -> 1 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 5 GHz -> 10 GHz 46 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 15 GHz -> 20 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2462 Emission Level, 10 GHz -> 15 GHz Conducted Emissions. 802.11n_20, Frequency 2462 MHz Emission Level, 20 GHz -> 25 GHz 47 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.5. Band edge Conducted Spurious Emission 2.5.1. Test Procedure DUT Spectrum Analyzer a) Check and ensure the spectrum analyzer well calibrate. b) Turn on the DUT and set DUT to transmit maximum power. c) Connect DUTs antenna terminal to spectrum analyzer with a low loss cable. d) Setting of Spectrum analyzer :
a. RBW = 100 kHz b. VBW = 300 kHz c. Detector mode = Peak d. Trace = Max Hold e. Sweep = auto e) Use the peak marker function to measure highest emission. 2.5.2. Limits:
Normal Condition (25 C) Shall be at least 20 dB below peak (max) power. 2.5.3. Test Results 802.11b Standard Modulation Type Test Conditions Modulation Technology Data Rate
(mbps) 802.11b 802.11b DSSS DSSS QPSK QPSK 11 11 Results Test Frequencies
(MHz) Level
(dBm) Status 2399.999 2481.000
-37.46
-50.78 Pass Pass Frequency
(MHz) 2412 2462 48 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11b Frequency 2412 MHz Reference Level 49 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11b Frequency 2412 MHz Band Edge 50 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11b Frequency 2462 MHz Reference Level 51 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11b Frequency 2462 MHz Band Edge 802.11g Test Conditions Standard Modulation 802.11g 802.11g Type OFDM OFDM Modulation Technology BPSK BPSK Data Rate
(mbps) 6 6 Test Frequency Tx (MHz) 2412 2462 Results Frequencies
(MHz) 2399.948 2481.000 Level
(dBm)
-33.29
-43.33 Status Pass Pass 52 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11g Frequency 2412 MHz Reference Level 53 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11g Frequency 2412 MHz Band Edge 54 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11g Frequency 2462 MHz Reference Level 55 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11g Frequency 2462 MHz Band Edge 802.11n (HT20) Test Conditions Standard Modulation 802.11n 802.11n Type OFDM OFDM Modulation Technology BPSK BPSK Test Frequency Tx (MHz) Data Rate
(mbps) 7.2 7.2 2412 2462 Results Frequencies
(MHz) 2399.975 2481.000 Level
(dBm)
-32.48
-42.69 Status Pass Pass 56 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11n_20 Frequency 2412 MHz Reference Level 57 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11n_20 Frequency 2412 MHz Band Edge 58 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11n_20 Frequency 2462 MHz Reference Level 59 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Band Edge (100 kHz). 802.11n_20 Frequency 2462 MHz Band Edge 60 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.6. Radiated Emission within Restricted Bands 2.6.1. Test Procedure a. The EUT is placed on the top of a rotating table 0.8m above the ground at a 3m semi-
anechoic chamber. The table is rotated 360 degrees to determine the position of the highest radiation. b. The EUT is set 3m away from the interference-receiving antenna, which is mounted on the top of a variable-height antenna tower. c. The antenna is Bilog/Horn antenna depend on which frequency range uses, and its height is varied from one meter to four meters above the ground to determine the maximum value of the field strength. Both horizontal and vertical polarizations of the antenna are set to make the measurement. d. For each suspected emission, the EUT is arranged to its worst case and then the antenna is tuned to heights from 1m to 4m and the rotatable table is turned from 0 degrees to 360 degrees to find the maximum reading. e. The test-receiver system is set to Peak Detect Function and Specified Bandwidth with Maximum Hold Mode. f. If the emission level of the EUT in peak mode is fall within the range of 10dB from the limit specified, the emissions would be re-tested one by one using peak, quasi-peak or average method as specified and then reported in a data sheet. Otherwise, the testing could be stopped and the peak values of the EUT would be reported. NOTE: a. The resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth of test receiver/spectrum analyzer is 120 kHz for Quasi-peak detection at frequency below 1GHz. b. The resolution bandwidth of test receiver/spectrum analyzer is 1 MHz and video bandwidth is 3 MHz for Peak detection at frequency above 1 GHz. c. All modes of operation were investigated and the worst-case emissions are reported. 61 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.6.2. Test Limits:
Radiated emissions which fall in the restricted bands must comply with the radiated emission limits specified as below table. Other emissions shall be at least 20dB below the highest level of the desired power. NOTE: a. The lower limit shall apply at the transition frequencies. b. Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m). c. For frequencies above 1000 MHz, the field strength limits are based on average detector, however, the peak field strength of any emission shall not exceed the maximum permitted average limits, specified above by more than 20dB under any condition of modulation. 62 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.6.3. Test Data:
Motorola Solutions. Model#: LEX L10i Battery: PMNN4472A Test: SAC Transmitter Radiated Emission S/N: 171PRQ1569 Accessory: 3360-HKTN4009A-3, 3360-CB000262A01-3 EMC SR ID#: 03360-EMC-00080 Test Channel: Low Test Frequency: 2412.000 MHz (Wifi) Test Standard: FCC Part 15C/ IC RSS 247 Plane: Y-Plane (802.11b, 1Mbps) CHANNEL FREQUENCY RANGE
(802.11b, 1Mbps) 30 MHz - 25 GHz DETECTORE FUNCTION Peak (PEAK) Average (AVG) Freq (MHz) Cable 1
(dB) Cable 2
(dB) Preamp 1 (dB) Transducer
(dB) 1799.80 1799.80 3363.10 3363.10 5.35 5.35 6.47 6.44 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 43.80 43.80 44.28 44.29 23.87 23.86 28.06 28.06
(QP) Limit
(dBV/m)
(AVG) Limit
(dBV/m) 74.00 74.00 74.00 74.00 54.00 54.00 54.00 54.00
(AVG) Trace
(dBV) 34.61 34.57 37.26 34.55
(PEAK) Trace
(dBV) 47.55 46.89 54.60 47.28
(AVG) EMI
(dBV/m) 20.02 19.99 27.51 24.76
(PEAK) EMI
(dBV/
m) 32.96 32.31 44.85 37.49 Pol H V H V
(PEAK) Margin QPL (dB)
(AVG) Margin AVL (dB)
-41.04
-41.69
-29.15
-36.51
-33.98
-34.01
-26.49
-29.24 Pass Result Marginal Result Fail Result REMARKS:
if use. 1. Emission level (dBuV/m) = Raw Value (dBuV) + Correction Factor (dB/m). 2. Correction Factor (dB/m) = Antenna Factor (dB/m) + Cable Factor (dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Marginal value = Emission level Limit value. 5. ** Indicates the spurious emission could not be detected due to noise limitations or ambient. 6. Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 6.0 dB. The data presented here was taken using the method as found in the ANSI-C63.10-2009 document. Motorola Penang EMC Lab - Test Performed by: Nazrin/Qawiman FCC Registration: 772092 Industry Canada: 109AK January 26, 2016 63 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Motorola Solutions. Model#: LEX L10i Battery: PMNN4472A Test: SAC Transmitter Radiated Emission S/N: 171PRQ1569 Accessory: 3360-HKTN4009A-3, 3360-CB000262A01-3 EMC SR ID#: 03360-EMC-00080 Test Channel: Mid Test Frequency: 2437.000 MHz (Wifi) Test Standard: FCC Part 15C/ IC RSS 247 Plane: Y-Plane (802.11b, 1Mbps) CHANNEL FREQUENCY RANGE
(802.11b, 1Mbps) 30 MHz - 25 GHz DETECTORE FUNCTION Peak (PEAK) Average (AVG) Freq (MHz) Cable 1
(dB) Cable 2
(dB) Preamp 1
(dB) Transducer
(dB)
(QP) Limit
(dBV/m)
(AVG) Limit
(dBV/m) 3366.30 3366.30 6.50 6.50 0.00 0.00 44.28 44.28 28.06 28.06 74.00 74.00 54.00 54.00
(AVG) Trace
(dBV) 39.14 36.06
(PEAK) Trace
(dBV) 57.45 51.99
(AVG) EMI
(dBV/m) 29.42 26.34
(PEAK) EMI
(dBV/m) 47.74 42.27 Pol H V
(PEAK) Margin QPL (dB)
-26.26
-31.73
(AVG) Margin AVL
(dB)
-24.58
-27.66 Pass Result Marginal Result Fail Result REMARKS:
if use. 1. Emission level (dBuV/m) = Raw Value (dBuV) + Correction Factor (dB/m). 2. Correction Factor (dB/m) = Antenna Factor (dB/m) + Cable Factor (dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Marginal value = Emission level Limit value. 5. ** Indicates the spurious emission could not be detected due to noise limitations or ambient. 6. Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 6.0 dB. The data presented here was taken using the method as found in the ANSI-C63.10-2009 document. Motorola Penang EMC Lab - Test Performed by: Nazrin/Qawiman FCC Registration: 772092 Industry Canada: 109AK January 26, 2016 64 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Motorola Solutions. Model#: LEX L10i Battery: PMNN4472A Test: SAC Transmitter Radiated Emission S/N: 171PRQ1569 Accessory: 3360-HKTN4009A-3, 3360-CB000262A01-3 EMC SR ID#: 03360-EMC-00080 Test Channel: High Test Frequency: 2462.000 MHz (Wifi) Test Standard: FCC Part 15C/ IC RSS 247 Plane: Y-Plane (802.11b, 1Mbps) CHANNEL FREQUENCY RANGE
(802.11b, 1Mbps) 30 MHz - 25 GHz DETECTORE FUNCTION Peak (PEAK) Average (AVG) Freq (MHz) Cable 1
(dB) Cable 2
(dB) Preamp 1
(dB) Transduc er (dB)
(QP) Limit
(dBV/m)
(AVG) Limit
(dBV/m) 3361.10 3361.10 6.45 6.44 0.00 0.00 44.26 44.30 28.05 28.05 74.00 74.00 54.00 54.00
(AVG) Trace
(dBV) 36.60 33.98
(PEAK) Trace
(dBV) 51.50 47.28
(AVG) EMI
(dBV/m) 26.85 24.18
(PEAK) EMI
(dBV/m) 41.74 37.47 Pol H V
(PEAK) Margin QPL (dB)
-32.26
-36.53
(AVG) Margin AVL
(dB)
-27.15
-29.82 Pass Result Marginal Result Fail Result REMARKS:
if use. 1. Emission level (dBuV/m) = Raw Value (dBuV) + Correction Factor (dB/m). 2. Correction Factor (dB/m) = Antenna Factor (dB/m) + Cable Factor (dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Marginal value = Emission level Limit value. 5. ** Indicates the spurious emission could not be detected due to noise limitations or ambient. 6. Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 6.0 dB. The data presented here was taken using the method as found in the ANSI-C63.10-2009 document. Motorola Penang EMC Lab - Test Performed by: Nazrin/Qawiman FCC Registration: 772092 Industry Canada: 109AK January 26, 2016 65 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Motorola Solutions. Model#: LEX L10i Battery: PMNN4472A Test: SAC Transmitter Radiated Emission S/N: 171PRQ1569 Accessory: 3360-HKTN4009A-3, 3360-CB000262A01-3 EMC SR ID#: 03360-EMC-00080 Test Channel: Low Test Frequency: 2412.000 MHz (Wifi) Test Standard: FCC Part 15C/ IC RSS 247 Plane: Y-Plane (802.11g, 6Mbps) CHANNEL FREQUENCY RANGE
(802.11g, 6Mbps) 30 MHz - 25 GHz DETECTORE FUNCTION Peak (PEAK) Average (AVG) Freq (MHz) Cable 1
(dB) Cable 2
(dB) Preamp 1 (dB) Transducer
(dB)
(QP) Limit
(dBV/m)
(AVG) Limit
(dBV/m) 3365.10 3365.10 6.45 6.44 0.00 0.00 44.29 44.29 28.06 28.06 74.00 74.00 54.00 54.00
(AVG) Trace
(dBV) 39.32 35.04
(PEAK) Trace
(dBV) 55.83 49.30
(AVG) EMI
(dBV/m) 29.54 25.25
(PEAK) EMI
(dBV/m) 46.05 39.51 Pol H V
(PEAK) Margin QPL
(dB)
-27.95
-34.49
(AVG) Margin AVL (dB)
-24.46
-28.75 Pass Result Marginal Result Fail Result REMARKS:
if use. 1. Emission level (dBuV/m) = Raw Value (dBuV) + Correction Factor (dB/m). 2. Correction Factor (dB/m) = Antenna Factor (dB/m) + Cable Factor (dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Marginal value = Emission level Limit value. 5. ** Indicates the spurious emission could not be detected due to noise limitations or ambient. 6. Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 6.0 dB. The data presented here was taken using the method as found in the ANSI-C63.10-2009 document. Motorola Penang EMC Lab - Test Performed by: Nazrin/Qawiman FCC Registration: 772092 Industry Canada: 109AK January 26, 2016 66 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Motorola Solutions. Model#: LEX L10i Battery: PMNN4472A Test: SAC Transmitter Radiated Emission S/N: 171PRQ1569 Accessory: 3360-HKTN4009A-3, 3360-CB000262A01-3 EMC SR ID#: 03360-EMC-00080 Test Channel: Mid Test Frequency: 2437.000 MHz (Wifi) Test Standard: FCC Part 15C/ IC RSS 247 Plane: Y-Plane (802.11g, 6Mbps) CHANNEL FREQUENCY RANGE
(802.11g, 6Mbps) 30 MHz - 25 GHz DETECTORE FUNCTION Peak (PEAK) Average (AVG) Freq (MHz) Cable 1
(dB) Cable 2
(dB) Preamp 1 (dB) Transduce r (dB) 3366.30 3366.30 6.44 6.44 0.00 0.00 44.28 44.27 28.06 28.06
(QP) Limit
(dBV/
m) 74.00 74.00
(AVG) Limit
(dBV/m)
(AVG) Trace
(dBV)
(PEAK) Trace
(dBV)
(AVG) EMI
(dBV/m)
(PEAK) EMI
(dBV/m) 54.00 54.00 39.09 56.58 36.47 52.72 29.31 26.70 46.80 42.96 Pol H V
(PEAK) Margin QPL (dB)
-27.20
-31.04
(AVG) Margin AVL (dB)
-24.69
-27.30 Pass Result Marginal Result Fail Result REMARKS:
if use. 1. Emission level (dBuV/m) = Raw Value (dBuV) + Correction Factor (dB/m). 2. Correction Factor (dB/m) = Antenna Factor (dB/m) + Cable Factor (dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Marginal value = Emission level Limit value. 5. ** Indicates the spurious emission could not be detected due to noise limitations or ambient. 6. Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 6.0 dB. The data presented here was taken using the method as found in the ANSI-C63.10-2009 document. Motorola Penang EMC Lab - Test Performed by: Nazrin/Qawiman FCC Registration: 772092 Industry Canada: 109AK January 26, 2016 67 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Motorola Solutions. Model#: LEX L10i Battery: PMNN4472A Test: SAC Transmitter Radiated Emission S/N: 171PRQ1569 Accessory: 3360-HKTN4009A-3, 3360-CB000262A01-3 EMC SR ID#: 03360-EMC-00080 Test Channel: High Test Frequency: 2462.000 MHz (Wifi) Test Standard: FCC Part 15C/ IC RSS 247 Plane: Y-Plane (802.11g, 6Mbps) CHANNEL FREQUENCY RANGE
(802.11g, 6Mbps) 30 MHz - 25 GHz DETECTORE FUNCTION Peak (PEAK) Average (AVG) Freq (MHz) Cable 1
(dB) Cable 2
(dB) Preamp 1
(dB) Transducer
(dB) 3362.40 3362.40 6.45 6.44 0.00 0.00 44.26 44.30 28.06 28.06
(QP) Limit
(dBV/m) 74.00 74.00
(AVG) Limit
(dBV/m) 54.00 54.00
(AVG)
(PEAK) Trace Trace
(dBV)
(dBV) 39.25 56.95 36.34 52.11
(AVG) EMI
(dBV/m) 29.49 26.58
(PEAK) EMI
(dBV/m) 47.19 42.35 Pol H V
(PEAK) Margin QPL (dB)
-26.81
-31.65
(AVG) Margin AVL (dB)
-24.51
-27.42 Pass Result Marginal Result Fail Result REMARKS:
if use. 1. Emission level (dBuV/m) = Raw Value (dBuV) + Correction Factor (dB/m). 2. Correction Factor (dB/m) = Antenna Factor (dB/m) + Cable Factor (dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Marginal value = Emission level Limit value. 5. ** Indicates the spurious emission could not be detected due to noise limitations or ambient. 6. Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 6.0 dB. The data presented here was taken using the method as found in the ANSI-C63.10-2009 document. Motorola Penang EMC Lab - Test Performed by: Nazrin/Qawiman FCC Registration: 772092 Industry Canada: 109AK January 26, 2016 68 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Motorola Solutions. Model#: LEX L10i Battery: PMNN4472A Test: SAC Transmitter Radiated Emission S/N: 171PRQ1569 Accessory: 3360-HKTN4009A-3, 3360-CB000262A01-3 EMC SR ID#: 03360-EMC-00080 Test Channel: Low Test Frequency: 2412.000 MHz (Wifi) Test Standard: FCC Part 15C/ IC RSS 247 Plane: Y-Plane (802.11n, 6.5Mbps) CHANNEL FREQUENCY RANGE
(802.11n, 6.5Mbps) 30 MHz - 25 GHz DETECTORE FUNCTION Peak (PEAK) Average (AVG) Freq (MHz) Cable 1
(dB) Cable 2
(dB) Preamp 1
(dB) Transducer
(dB) 3366.90 3366.90 6.53 6.52 0.00 0.00 44.27 44.27 28.06 28.06
(QP) Limit
(dBV/m) 74.00 74.00
(AVG) Limit
(dBV/m) 54.00 54.00
(PEAK)
(AVG) Trace Trace
(dBV)
(dBV) 35.84 49.79 34.42 47.42
(AVG) EMI
(dBV/m) 26.16 24.73
(PEAK) EMI
(dBV/m) 40.11 37.73 Pol H V
(PEAK) Margin QPL (dB)
-33.89
-36.27
(AVG) Margin AVL (dB)
-27.84
-29.27 Pass Result Marginal Result Fail Result REMARKS:
if use. 1. Emission level (dBuV/m) = Raw Value (dBuV) + Correction Factor (dB/m). 2. Correction Factor (dB/m) = Antenna Factor (dB/m) + Cable Factor (dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Marginal value = Emission level Limit value. 5. ** Indicates the spurious emission could not be detected due to noise limitations or ambient. 6. Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 6.0 dB. The data presented here was taken using the method as found in the ANSI-C63.10-2009 document. Motorola Penang EMC Lab - Test Performed by: Nazrin/Qawiman FCC Registration: 772092 Industry Canada: 109AK January 26, 2016 69 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Motorola Solutions. Model#: LEX L10i Battery: PMNN4472A Test: SAC Transmitter Radiated Emission S/N: 171PRQ1569 Accessory: 3360-HKTN4009A-3, 3360-CB000262A01-3 EMC SR ID#: 03360-EMC-00080 Test Channel: Mid Test Frequency: 2437.000 MHz (Wifi) Test Standard: FCC Part 15C/ IC RSS 247 Plane: Y-Plane (802.11n, 6.5Mbps) CHANNEL FREQUENCY RANGE
(802.11n, 6.5Mbps) 30 MHz - 25 GHz DETECTORE FUNCTION Peak (PEAK) Average (AVG) Freq (MHz) Cable 1
(dB) Cable 2
(dB) Preamp 1
(dB) Transducer
(dB) 3364.40 3364.40 6.44 6.44 0.00 0.00 44.29 44.28 28.06 28.06
(QP) Limit
(dBV/m) 74.00 74.00
(AVG) Limit
(dBV/m) 54.00 54.00
(AVG)
(PEAK) Trace Trace
(dBV)
(dBV) 38.95 54.98 35.44 49.30
(AVG) EMI
(dBV/m) 29.16 25.66
(PEAK) EMI
(dBV/m) 45.19 39.52 Pol H V
(PEAK) Margin QPL (dB)
-28.81
-34.48
(AVG) Margin AVL (dB)
-24.84
-28.34 Pass Result Marginal Result Fail Result REMARKS:
if use. 1. Emission level (dBuV/m) = Raw Value (dBuV) + Correction Factor (dB/m). 2. Correction Factor (dB/m) = Antenna Factor (dB/m) + Cable Factor (dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Marginal value = Emission level Limit value. 5. ** Indicates the spurious emission could not be detected due to noise limitations or ambient. 6. Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 6.0 dB. The data presented here was taken using the method as found in the ANSI-C63.10-2009 document. Motorola Penang EMC Lab - Test Performed by: Nazrin/Qawiman FCC Registration: 772092 Industry Canada: 109AK January 26, 2016 70 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Motorola Solutions. Model#: LEX L10i Battery: PMNN4472A Test: SAC Transmitter Radiated Emission S/N: 171PRQ1569 Accessory: 3360-HKTN4009A-3, 3360-CB000262A01-3 EMC SR ID#: 03360-EMC-00080 Test Channel: High Test Frequency: 2462.000 MHz (Wifi) Test Standard: FCC Part 15C/ IC RSS 247 Plane: Y-Plane (802.11n, 6.5Mbps) CHANNEL FREQUENCY RANGE
(802.11n, 6.5Mbps) 30 MHz - 25 GHz DETECTORE FUNCTION Peak (PEAK) Average (AVG) Freq (MHz) Cable 1
(dB) Cable 2
(dB) Preamp 1
(dB) Transducer
(dB) 3363.10 3363.10 6.45 6.44 0.00 0.00 44.25 44.25 28.06 28.06
(QP) Limit
(dBV/m) 74.00 74.00
(AVG) Limit
(dBV/m) 54.00 54.00
(PEAK)
(AVG) Trace Trace
(dBV)
(dBV) 39.56 56.95 35.53 50.64
(AVG) EMI
(dBV/m) 29.81 25.79
(PEAK) EMI
(dBV/m) 47.20 40.89 Pol H V
(PEAK) Margin QPL (dB)
-26.80
-33.11
(AVG) Margin AVL (dB)
-24.19
-28.21 Pass Result Marginal Result Fail Result REMARKS:
if use. 1. Emission level (dBuV/m) = Raw Value (dBuV) + Correction Factor (dB/m). 2. Correction Factor (dB/m) = Antenna Factor (dB/m) + Cable Factor (dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Marginal value = Emission level Limit value. 5. ** Indicates the spurious emission could not be detected due to noise limitations or ambient. 6. Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 6.0 dB. The data presented here was taken using the method as found in the ANSI-C63.10-2009 document. Motorola Penang EMC Lab - Test Performed by: Nazrin/Qawiman FCC Registration: 772092 Industry Canada: 109AK January 26, 2016 71 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.7. AC Powerline Conducted Emission 2.7.1. Test Procedure Figure 1: AC Power Line Conducted Emission Test Setup Diagram (Table Top Equipment) a. The EUT set up is shown as Figure 1 above and the details legend for the figure 1 as below:
1. 2. Interconnecting cables that hang closer than 40 cm to the ground plane shall be folded back and forth in the center forming a bundle 30 to 40 cm long. I/O cables that are not connected to a peripheral shall be bundled in the center and not more than 40cm. The end of the cable may be terminated, if required, using the correct terminating impedance. The overall length shall not exceed 1 m. 3. EUT connected to one LISN. Unused LISN measuring port connectors shall be terminated in 50
. LISN can be placed on top of, or immediately beneath, reference ground plane. 3.1) all other equipment powered from additional LISN(s). 3.2) multiple outlet strip can be used for multiple power cords of non-EUT equipment. 3.3) LISN is setup at least 80 cm from nearest part of EUT chassis. 4. Cables of hand-operated devices, such as keyboards, mice, etc., shall be placed as for normal 5. 6. 7. use. Non-EUT components of EUT system being tested. Rear of EUT, including peripherals, shall all be aligned and flush with rear of tabletop. (for table top equipments only). Rear of tabletop shall be 40 cm removed from a vertical conducting plane that is bonded to the ground plane. (For table top equipments only). 8. EUT and cables shall be insulated from the horizontal ground reference plane by up to 15cm.
(for floor standing equipments only). 72 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Figure 2: AC Power Line Conducted Emission Test System General Equipment Block Diagram. The measurements were performed at power terminals with the LISN port L1/L or LISN port L2/N, connected to a spectrum analyzer or EMI receiver in the frequency range referred to Table 1 or Table 2. Unused coaxial connector of the LISN is terminated with 50 Ohm. Quasi-peak and average detectors were used throughout the testing. 2.7.2. Test Limits:
For AC Power Line Conducted Test Limit can be Class A or B depends on product classification. Table 1: Limits for Conducted Disturbance at the Mains Ports of Class A ITE. Table 2: Limits for Conducted Disturbance at the Mains Ports of Class B ITE. 73 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 2.7.3. Test Data:
Conducted Emission Radio Model
: LEX L10i Serial No. Battery No.
: 171PRQ1027
: PMNN4472A Accy Serial No.
: HKTN4009A, HKTN4007A, CB000262A01, 1054-89409N Ambient Temperature:
: 22.4 C Humidity:
Tester:
: 68.6 %
: Madi/Rudy Date of test:
: 17 January 2016 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN 2 Line LISN 150 kHz - 30 MHz 0 dBV - 80 dBV EMI Auto Test Template: Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Hardware Setup:
Measurement Type:
Frequency Range:
Graphics Level Range:
Preview Measurements:
Scan Test Template:
Data Reduction:
Limit Line #1:
Limit Line #2:
Peak Search:
Subrange Maxima:
Acceptance Offset:
Maximum Number of Results:
EN 55022 Voltage on Mains QP Class B EN 55022 Voltage on Mains AV Class B 6 dB , Maximum Results: 20 10 Subranges , Maxima per Subrange: 1
-20 dB 20 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN pre Maximization Measurements:
Template for Single Meas.:
Final Measurements:
Template for Single Meas.:
Subrange Receiver:
150 kHz - 30 MHz Voltage with 2-Line-LISN max Voltage with 2-Line-LISN fin Step Size 4.5 kHz
[ESCI 3]
Detectors QPK; AVG IF BW 9 kHz Meas. Time 1 s Preamp 0 dB 74 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Peak Scan Average Scan FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains QP FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains AV Test Data 1) Ambient Noise 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 V B d n i l e v e L 0 150k 300 400 500 800 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6 8 10M 20M 30M Frequency in Hz 75 Voltage Supply: 240VAC 1) Charger Alone FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Peak Scan Average Scan FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains QP FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains AV 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 V B d n i l e v e L 0 150k 300 400 500 800 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6 8 10M 20M 30M Frequency in Hz 76 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Peak Scan Average Scan FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains QP FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains AV 2) EUT Off 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 V B d n i l e v e L 0 150k 300 400 500 800 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6 8 10M 20M 30M Frequency in Hz QuasiPeak Measurement Frequency
(MHz) QuasiPeak
(dBV) 0.154000 0.266000 0.306000 0.342000 0.386000 0.422000 0.686000 1.242000 1.486000 2.322000 3.126000 4.466000 41.9 37.6 38.1 43.3 37.5 40.9 37.9 36.6 39.4 29.2 30.0 27.7 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On N L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 N L1 L1 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.0 9.8 9.8 9.7 9.6 9.5 23.9 23.7 22.0 15.8 20.6 16.5 18.1 19.4 16.6 26.8 26.0 28.3 65.8 61.2 60.1 59.2 58.1 57.4 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 77 Average Measurement Frequency
(MHz) Average
(dBV) 0.230000 0.266000 0.310000 0.346000 0.386000 0.426000 0.466000 0.506000 0.654000 0.698000 0.734000 0.774000 0.926000 1.002000 1.042000 1.198000 1.274000 2.286000 3.326000 28.4 29.9 25.2 32.0 30.8 30.2 31.8 33.0 26.1 23.8 26.0 28.0 32.5 30.5 30.8 32.9 33.2 25.5 24.3 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 N L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 N N L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.2 10.2 10.1 10.0 10.0 10.0 9.9 9.9 9.9 9.8 9.8 9.7 9.6 24.1 21.4 24.7 17.0 17.4 17.2 14.8 13.0 19.9 22.2 20.0 18.0 13.5 15.5 15.2 13.1 12.8 20.5 21.7 52.4 51.2 50.0 49.1 48.1 47.3 46.6 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0
* Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 3.43 dB 78 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Peak Scan Average Scan FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains QP FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains AV 3) EUT Standby 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 V B d n i l e v e L 0 150k 300 400 500 800 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6 8 10M 20M 30M Frequency in Hz QuasiPeak Measurement Frequency
(MHz) QuasiPeak
(dBV) 0.174000 0.254000 0.302000 0.338000 0.386000 0.418000 0.478000 1.154000 1.518000 3.138000 3.966000 39.8 37.6 38.3 41.5 37.3 39.3 32.8 39.3 41.0 28.5 31.1 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 N N L1 L1 N L1 L1 N L1 10.1 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.2 9.8 9.8 9.6 9.6 25.0 24.0 21.9 17.7 20.8 18.1 23.5 16.7 15.0 27.5 24.9 64.8 61.6 60.2 59.3 58.1 57.5 56.4 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 79 Average Measurement Frequency
(MHz) Average
(dBV) 0.266000 0.302000 0.342000 0.382000 0.422000 0.458000 0.498000 0.534000 0.958000 1.230000 1.270000 1.598000 1.726000 1.806000 2.138000 3.726000 31.2 32.2 34.9 33.4 31.9 33.0 34.3 34.2 34.9 34.3 33.3 31.8 29.6 29.6 26.8 25.3 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 N L1 L1 L1 L1 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.2 10.2 10.2 9.9 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.7 9.7 9.6 20.0 18.0 14.3 14.9 15.5 13.8 11.8 11.8 11.1 11.7 12.7 14.2 16.4 16.4 19.2 20.7 51.2 50.2 49.2 48.2 47.4 46.7 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0
* Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 3.43 dB 80 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Peak Scan Average Scan FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains QP FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains AV 4) Link Idle 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 V B d n i l e v e L 0 150k 300 400 500 800 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6 8 10M 20M 30M Frequency in Hz QuasiPeak Measurement Frequency
(MHz) QuasiPeak
(dBV) 0.158000 0.222000 0.270000 0.318000 0.346000 0.386000 0.430000 0.470000 1.198000 1.550000 3.114000 4.358000 41.8 36.4 37.3 30.6 42.5 38.9 37.9 37.9 38.9 40.4 30.9 29.9 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 L1 L1 N L1 L1 L1 L1 N L1 L1 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.2 9.8 9.8 9.6 9.5 23.8 26.3 23.8 29.2 16.5 19.2 19.4 18.6 17.1 15.6 25.1 26.1 65.6 62.7 61.1 59.8 59.1 58.1 57.3 56.5 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 81 Average Measurement Frequency
(MHz) Average
(dBV) 0.230000 0.270000 0.310000 0.350000 0.386000 0.426000 0.466000 0.506000 0.618000 0.654000 0.694000 0.734000 0.774000 0.894000 1.234000 1.274000 2.250000 3.374000 30.6 28.6 27.1 28.7 33.2 31.9 31.7 32.0 26.6 28.3 27.5 28.1 29.4 32.4 33.0 31.6 26.8 22.4 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.2 10.2 10.1 10.1 10.0 10.0 10.0 9.9 9.8 9.8 9.7 9.6 21.9 22.5 22.9 20.2 15.0 15.4 14.9 14.0 19.4 17.7 18.5 17.9 16.6 13.6 13.0 14.4 19.2 23.6 52.4 51.1 50.0 49.0 48.1 47.3 46.6 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0
* Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 3.43 dB 82 Voltage Supply: 120VAC 1) Charger Alone FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Peak Scan Average Scan FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains QP FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains AV 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 V B d n i l e v e L 0 150k 300 400 500 800 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6 8 10M 20M 30M Frequency in Hz 83 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Peak Scan Average Scan FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains QP FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains AV 2) EUT Off 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 V B d n i l e v e L 0 150k 300 400 500 800 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6 8 10M 20M 30M Frequency in Hz QuasiPeak Measurement Frequency
(MHz) QuasiPeak
(dBV) 0.158000 0.166000 0.210000 0.258000 0.294000 0.342000 0.378000 0.426000 0.510000 1.074000 1.574000 3.138000 3.678000 38.9 45.4 41.9 41.5 41.8 42.8 39.9 39.4 35.5 38.4 40.4 30.7 29.1 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 N L1 L1 N L1 L1 N L1 L1 L1 L1 10.0 10.0 9.9 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.2 9.9 9.8 9.6 9.6 26.7 19.7 21.3 20.0 18.6 16.3 18.4 17.9 20.5 17.6 15.6 25.3 26.9 65.6 65.2 63.2 61.5 60.4 59.2 58.3 57.3 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 84 Average Measurement Frequency
(MHz) Average
(dBV) 0.258000 0.302000 0.342000 0.378000 0.426000 0.462000 0.502000 0.722000 1.222000 1.470000 2.190000 32.0 29.6 33.3 33.2 27.9 30.9 30.7 30.2 30.9 30.3 23.4 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.2 10.2 10.0 9.8 9.8 9.7 19.5 20.6 15.9 15.2 19.4 15.7 15.3 15.8 15.1 15.7 22.6 51.5 50.2 49.2 48.3 47.3 46.7 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0
* Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 3.43 dB 85 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Peak Scan Average Scan FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains QP FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains AV 3) EUT Standby 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 V B d n i l e v e L 0 150k 300 400 500 800 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6 8 10M 20M 30M Frequency in Hz QuasiPeak Measurement Frequency
(MHz) QuasiPeak
(dBV) 0.250000 0.290000 0.346000 0.418000 0.674000 0.786000 1.554000 3.034000 40.6 41.8 40.0 40.0 38.2 39.0 43.0 31.9 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.0 10.0 9.8 9.6 21.1 18.8 19.0 17.5 17.8 17.0 13.0 24.1 61.8 60.5 59.1 57.5 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 86 Average Measurement Frequency
(MHz) Average
(dBV) 0.250000 0.270000 0.306000 0.346000 0.386000 0.422000 0.466000 0.622000 0.646000 0.686000 0.730000 1.030000 1.298000 33.1 25.7 26.7 28.5 27.4 29.2 27.6 30.3 28.5 28.5 29.7 31.7 31.1 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.2 10.1 10.1 10.0 10.0 9.9 9.8 18.7 25.4 23.4 20.5 20.8 18.2 19.0 15.7 17.5 17.5 16.3 14.3 14.9 51.8 51.1 50.1 49.1 48.1 47.4 46.6 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0
* Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 3.43 dB 87 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Voltage with 2-Line-LISN Peak Scan Average Scan FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains QP FCC Part 15 Class B Voltage on Mains AV 4) Link Idle 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 V B d n i l e v e L 0 150k 300 400 500 800 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6 8 10M 20M 30M Frequency in Hz QuasiPeak Measurement Frequency
(MHz) QuasiPeak
(dBV) 0.166000 0.290000 0.342000 0.418000 0.674000 0.910000 1.566000 2.970000 3.918000 45.0 42.9 43.7 39.9 40.2 39.3 40.6 30.1 31.4 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 N L1 L1 L1 L1 N L1 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.0 9.9 9.8 9.6 9.6 20.1 17.7 15.4 17.6 15.8 16.7 15.4 25.9 24.6 65.2 60.5 59.2 57.5 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 56.0 88 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: 03360-RF-00017 Average Measurement Frequency
(MHz) Average
(dBV) 0.250000 0.290000 0.334000 0.374000 0.414000 0.454000 0.498000 0.538000 0.702000 1.238000 1.406000 33.2 30.0 34.5 32.8 32.0 31.9 31.9 30.5 29.1 32.3 32.0 Meas. Time
(ms) 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 1000.0 Bandwidth
(kHz) Filter Line Corr.
(dB) Margin
(dB) Limit
(dBV) Comment 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On 9.000 On L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 10.0 10.0 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.2 10.2 10.1 10.0 9.8 9.8 18.5 20.5 14.8 15.6 15.5 14.9 14.2 15.5 16.9 13.7 14.0 51.8 50.5 49.4 48.4 47.6 46.8 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0
* Expanded Uncertainty (U) = +/- 3.43 dB 89
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Setup Photos SAR | Test Setup Photos | 205.85 KiB |
FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 TESTING CERT # 2518.01 Exhibit 7B: SAR Test Report Photographs Motorola Solutions Inc EME Test Laboratory 8000 West Sunrise Blvd Fort Lauderdale, FL. 33322 Deanna Zakharia EMS EME Lab Senior Resource Manager, Laboratory Director Approval Date: 4/18/2016 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 1 of 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Report Revision History Comments Initial release Update antenna gain for BT/WLAN 2.4GHz Date Revision 02/03/2016 04/15/2016 A B Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 2 of 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 1.0 SAR Test Position per body location 1.1 Body-worn DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B and body worn holster HKLN4618A against the phantom. Same position used for front and back of DUT facing phantom. Bottom end Top end DUT Separation Distances Bottom end
~14 Top end
~43
(mm) Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 3 of 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 2.0 SAR tested Hot spot mode positions at the body 2.1 Front side positioned 10mm from phantom DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B positioned 10mm from phantom. 2.2 Back side positioned 10mm from phantom DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B positioned 10mm from phantom. Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 4 of 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 2.3 Left side positioned 10mm from phantom DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B positioned 10mm from phantom. 2.4 Right side positioned 10mm from phantom DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B positioned 10mm from phantom. Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 5 of 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 2.5 Bottom side positioned 10mm from phantom DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B positioned 10mm from phantom. Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 6 of 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 3.0 SAR tested positions at the head 3.1 Left ear touch DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B positioned at left ear touch. 3.2 Left ear tilt DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B positioned at left ear tilt. Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 7 of 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 Right ear touch DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B positioned at right ear touch. Right ear tilt DUT with offered battery PMNN4472B positioned at right ear tilt. 3.3 3.4 Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 8 of 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 4.0 Antenna Locations and Accessory Photos The purpose of these photos is to illustrate the tested accessories. Refer to Part 1 of 6, section 7.0 for additional details on the offered accessories. 4.1 Antenna Locations:
Antenna Ant 1 -
PL1000248 Ant 2 -
PL1000248 Ant 3 -
MC0121016 Description LTE/UMTS/GSM Tx/Rx Inverted-L Monopole Antenna 1710-2690 MHz wave, 28.7mm, 0.8 to -0.6 dBi LTE/UMTS/GSM Tx/Rx Inverted-L Monopole Antenna 703-960 MHz wave, 57.8mm,-0.4 to -2.2 dBi WiFi/BT Tx/Rx Inverted-L Monopole Antenna 2400-2484 MHz wave, 27.0mm, 1.0 dBi 5150-5850 MHz 1/2 wave, 27.0mm, 0.5 dBi Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 9 of 11 FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 4.2 Body worn accessory Front View Back View HKLN4618A HKLN4618A Holster Holster Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 10 of 11 DUT Side View HKLN4618A Holster FCC ID: AZ489FT7078 Report ID: P3360-EME-00027 4.3 Battery accessories:
PMNN4472B PMNN4475B Motorola Solutions Inc. EME Form-SAR-Rpt-Ex7B-Rev. 13.14 Page 11 of 11
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2016-10-25 | 2510 ~ 2560 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2016-05-26 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Original Equipment |
3 | 2510 ~ 2560 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||
4 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | ||
5 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||
6 | 0.125 ~ 0.125 | DCD - Part 15 Low Power Transmitter Below 1705 kHz | ||
7 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Effective |
2016-10-25
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
2016-05-26
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Motorola Solutions, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0003778479
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Physical Address |
8000 West Sunrise Blvd
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Ft Lauderdale, FL
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Grantee Code |
AZ4
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Equipment Product Code |
89FT7078
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Name |
D******** Z******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Title |
Regulatory Compliance Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Telephone Number |
95472********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Fax Number |
--********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
d******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Equipment Class | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | DCD - Part 15 Low Power Transmitter Below 1705 kHz | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Smart phone | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Grant Comments | Power listed is ERP for part 22, part 90, and part 27 below 1 GHz; EIRP for part 24, and part 27 above 1GHz. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific body-worn accessories, such as belt-clips and holsters, tested for this filing, or belt-clips and holsters that have no metallic components in the assembly and cause the device to operate with the minimum separation distance of 1.0 cm, as described in this filing. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values for head, body-worn accessory, product specific (wireless router), and simultaneous transmission conditions are 1.00W/kg, 0.82W/kg, 1.02W/kg, and 1.59W/kg respectively. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations. This device supports: LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for LTE Bands 2 and 4; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10 MHz bandwidth modes for LTE Bands 5 and 26 (part 90); LTE of 5, 10, 15 and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for LTE Band 7; and LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for LTE Band 26 (part 22). | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Output power listed is conducted. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific body-worn accessories, such as belt-clips and holsters, tested for this filing, or belt-clips and holsters that have no metallic components in the assembly and cause the device to operate with the minimum separation distance of 1.0-cm, as described in this filing. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR for head, body-worn accessory, product specific, and simultaneous transmission conditions are 0.41 W/kg, <0.10 W/kg, 0.57 W/kg, and 1.59 W/kg, respectively. This device supports 20 and 40 MHz bandwidth modes. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Power listed is ERP for part 22, part 90, and part 27 below 1 GHz; EIRP for part 24, and part 27 above 1GHz. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific body-worn accessories, such as belt-clips and holsters, tested for this filing, or belt-clips and holsters that have no metallic components in the assembly and cause the device to operate with the minimum separation distance of 1.0 cm, as described in this filing. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values for head, body-worn accessory, product specific (wireless router), and simultaneous transmission conditions are 1.00W/kg, 0.82W/kg, 1.02W/kg, and 1.59W/kg respectively. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations. This device supports: LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, 15 and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for LTE Band 4; LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10 MHz bandwidth modes for LTE Bands 5 and 26 (part 90); LTE of 5, 10, 15 and 20 MHz bandwidth modes for LTE Band 7; and LTE of 1.4, 3, 5, 10, and 15 MHz bandwidth modes for LTE Band 26 (part 22). | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Power listed is conducted. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Output power listed is conducted. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific body-worn accessories, such as belt-clips and holsters, tested for this filing, or belt-clips and holsters that have no metallic components in the assembly and cause the device to operate with the minimum separation distance of 1.0-cm, as described in this filing. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR for head, body-worn accessory, product specific, and simultaneous transmission conditions are 0.23 W/kg, <0.10 W/kg, 0.11 W/kg, and 1.59 W/kg, respectively. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Firm Name |
Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Name |
S**** H******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
K******** L******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Telephone Number |
60485******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Fax Number |
604-6********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
+886-********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
c******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
k******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22 | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.936 | 0.033 ppm | 244KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 22 | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.828 | 0.041 ppm | 245KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 22 | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.236 | 0.02 ppm | 4M18F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 22 | 829 | 844 | 0.055 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 22 | 829 | 844 | 0.045 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 22 | 829 | 844 | 0.0548 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 7 | 22 | 831.5 | 841.5 | 0.0546 | 0.01 ppm | 13M4G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 8 | 22 | 829 | 844 | 0.0451 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 9 | 22 | 831.5 | 841.5 | 0.0297 | 0.01 ppm | 13M4W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.0552 | 0.01 ppm | 1M07G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 11 | 9 | 819 | 819 | 0.0174 | 0.01 ppm | 8M90G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 12 | 9 | 816.5 | 821.5 | 0.0414 | 0.01 ppm | 4M46W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 13 | 9 | 819 | 819 | 0.0404 | 0.01 ppm | 8M90W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 14 | 24E | 1857.5 | 1902.5 | 0.158 | 0.01 ppm | 13M4G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 15 | 24E | 1860 | 1900 | 0.158 | 0.01 ppm | 17M9G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 16 | 24E | 1860 | 1900 | 0.134 | 0.01 ppm | 17M9W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 17 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.989 | 0.04 ppm | 243KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 18 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.042 | 0.04 ppm | 246KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 19 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.295 | 0.01 ppm | 4M18F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.431 | 0.02 ppm | 4M19F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 21 | 27 | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.091 | 0.01 ppm | 2M68G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 22 | 27 | 1720 | 1745 | 0.082 | 0.01 ppm | 17M8G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 23 | 27 | 1715 | 1750 | 0.075 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 24 | 27 | 1720 | 1745 | 0.0498 | 0.01 ppm | 17M8W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 25 | 27 | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.151 | 0.01 ppm | 13M4G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 26 | 27 | 2510 | 2560 | 0.115 | 0.01 ppm | 17M8G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 27 | 27 | 2505 | 2565 | 0.071 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 28 | 27 | 2510 | 2560 | 0.052 | 0.01 ppm | 17M8W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC | 5180 | 5240 | 0.0297 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC | 5260 | 5320 | 0.028 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 15E | 38 CC | 5500 | 5700 | 0.0353 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 15E | 38 CC | 5745 | 5825 | 0.0352 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.936 | 0.033 ppm | 244KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.828 | 0.041 ppm | 245KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.236 | 0.02 ppm | 4M18F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 22H | 829 | 844 | 0.055 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 5 | 22H | 829 | 844 | 0.045 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 6 | 22H | 829 | 844 | 0.0548 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 7 | 22H | 831.5 | 841.5 | 0.0546 | 0.01 ppm | 13M4G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 8 | 22H | 829 | 844 | 0.0451 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 9 | 22H | 831.5 | 841.5 | 0.0297 | 0.01 ppm | 13M4W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 9 | 814.7 | 823.3 | 0.0552 | 0.01 ppm | 1M07G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 11 | 9 | 819 | 819 | 0.0174 | 0.01 ppm | 8M90G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 12 | 9 | 816.5 | 821.5 | 0.0414 | 0.01 ppm | 4M46W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 13 | 9 | 819 | 819 | 0.0404 | 0.01 ppm | 8M90W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 14 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.989 | 0.04 ppm | 243KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 15 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.042 | 0.04 ppm | 246KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 16 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.295 | 0.01 ppm | 4M18F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 17 | 27 | 1712.4 | 1752.6 | 0.431 | 0.02 ppm | 4M19F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 18 | 27 | 1711.5 | 1753.5 | 0.091 | 0.01 ppm | 2M68G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 19 | 27 | 1720 | 1745 | 0.082 | 0.01 ppm | 17M8G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 27 | 1715 | 1750 | 0.075 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 21 | 27 | 1720 | 1745 | 0.0498 | 0.01 ppm | 17M8W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 22 | 27 | 2507.5 | 2562.5 | 0.151 | 0.01 ppm | 13M4G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 23 | 27 | 2510 | 2560 | 0.115 | 0.01 ppm | 17M8G7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 24 | 27 | 2505 | 2565 | 0.071 | 0.01 ppm | 8M91W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 25 | 27 | 2510 | 2560 | 0.052 | 0.01 ppm | 17M8W7D | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0063000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15B | CC | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | CC | 0.12500000 | 0.12500000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402 | 2480 | 0.00132 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
7 | 2 | 15C | CC | 2412 | 2462 | 0.094 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC